Samsung | DVD-HR775 | راهنمای محصول | Samsung DVD-HR775 User manual

Samsung DVD-HR775 User manual
‫راﻫﻨﻤﺎي ﻛﺎرﺑﺮ‬
‫‪bOM r& «— U Xd‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺑﺖ ﺧﺮﻳﺪ اﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮل ‪ Samsung‬از ﺷﻤـﺎ ﻣﺘﺸﻜﺮﱘ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي درﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺗﻲ ﺟﺎﻣﻊ ﺗﺮ‪,‬‬
‫ﻟﻄﻔًﺎ ﻣﺤﺼﻮل ﺧﻮد را در ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻲ اﻳﻨﺘـﺮﻧﺘﻲ زﻳﺮ ﺛﺒﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫‪www.samsung.com/global/register‬‬
‫ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر‬
‫«‪—UD‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺑﺮق ﮔﺮﻓﺘﮕﻲ‪ ,‬ﭘـﻮﺷﺶ )ﻳﺎ ﭘﺸﺖ آﻧﺮا( ﺑﺮ ﻧﺪارﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻴﭻ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳـﻂ ﻛﺎرﺑﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ در داﺧﻞ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه وﺟﻮد ﻧﺪارد‪.‬‬
‫اﻣﻮر ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ را ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﻨﻞ ﻣﺠﺮب ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺗﻲ ﻣـﺤﻮل ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫«‪◊UO‬‬
‫‪bOMJ
“U wd „u dD‬‬
‫اﻳــﻦ ﻋـﻼﻣــﺖ ﻧــﺸـﺎن دﻫــﻨــﺪه وﺟـﻮد «وﻟــﺘــﺎژ‬
‫ﺧــﻄــﺮﻧــﺎك» در داﺧــﻞ ﻣ ــﺤــﺼــﻮل اﺳــﺖ ﻛــﻪ‬
‫ﺧـﻄﺮ ﺑـﺮق ﮔـﺮﻓﺘـﮕـﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺟـﺮاﺣـﺖ ﺷﺨـﺼﻲ‬
‫را ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫«‪ ∫ ◊UO‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺑﺮق ﮔﺮﻓﺘﮕﻲ‪ ,‬از ﺑﺮداﺷﱳ‬
‫درﭘﻮش )ﻳﺎ ﭘﺸﺖ( دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺧﻮدداري ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻴﭻ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ‬
‫اي در داﺧﻞ دﺳـﺘﮕﺎه وﺟـﻮد ﻧﺪارد ﻛـﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻛـﺎرﺑﺮان‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑـﻞ ﺗﻌﻤـﻴﺮ ﺑـﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺟﻬـﺖ ﺗﻌﻤـﻴﺮات ﺑﻪ ﭘـﺮﺳﻨـﻞ واﺟﺪ‬
‫ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌـﻪ ﳕﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫اﻳـ ـ ــﻦ ﻋـ ـ ــﻼﻣـ ـ ــﺖ‪ ,‬ﻧـ ـ ــﺸـ ـ ــﺎن دﻫـ ـ ــﻨـ ـ ــﺪه وﺟـ ـ ــﻮد‬
‫دﺳﺘـﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫـﺎي ﻣﻬﻢ ﻫﻤـﺮاه ﻣﺤﺼﻮل‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫اﻳﻦ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه را در ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻬﺎي ﻣﺤﺪود ﺷـﺪه ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻗﻔﺴﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺨﺎﻧﻪ و ﻳﺎ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ آن ﻗﺮار ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫«‪ :—UD‬ﺑﺮاي ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي از آﺳﻴﺒـﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﳑﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ آﺗﺶ ﺳﻮزي ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮق ﮔﺮﻓﺘﮕﻲ ﺷﻮد‪ ,‬دﺳﺘﮕـﺎه را در‬
‫ﻣﻌﺮض ﺑﺎران ﻳﺎ رﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﻗﺮار ﻧﺪﻫﻴـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫«‪ :◊UO‬دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ‪ DVD‬و ‪ HDD‬از اﺷﻌﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻧﺎﻣﺮﻳﻲ ﻟﻴﺰري اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﱳ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ در ﻣﻌﺮض آﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣـﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧـﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺧـﻄﺮات ﺟـﺪي ﻧﺎﺷـﻲ از اﺷﻌـﻪ ﻣـﻨﺠـﺮ ﺷﻮد‪ .‬ﻟـﻄﻔًـﺎ دﻗﺖ ﻛـﻨﻴـﺪ ﺗـﺎ از دﺳﺘـﮕﺎه ﺿـﺒﻂ ﻛـﻨﻨـﺪه ﺑﻪ ﻃـﻮر ﺻـﺤﻴـﺢ و‬
‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻠﻬﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨـﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫«‪◊UO‬‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮل از ﻟﻴﺰر اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت ﻳﺎ اﺟﺮاي روﺷﻬﺎ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﺎت اراﺋﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺪه در اﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻣﺘﻔﺎوت ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﳑﻜـﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻄﺮات ﺟﺪي ﻧﺎﺷﻲ از اﺷﻌﻪ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻫﺎ را ﺑﺎز ﻧﻜﺮده و ﺳﻌﻲ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ ﺧـﻮدﺗﺎن دﺳﺘﮕﺎه را ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫اﻣﻮر ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ را ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﻨﻞ ﻣﺠﺮب ﻣﺤﻮل ﻓـﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫
‪rN tJ‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮق اﺻﻠﻲ اﻳﻦ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه داراي ﻳﻚ دوﺷـﺎﺧﻪ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ رﻳﺰي ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻴﻮز ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫رده ﺑﻨﺪي اﻳﻦ ﻓﻴﻮز در ﻃﺮف ﭘﲔ دار دوﺷﺎﺧﻪ درج ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‪ .‬در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻓﻴﻮز ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ,‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از ﻓﻴﻮزي ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺷﺪه ﺑﺮ اﺳﺎس ‪ BS1362‬ﺑﺎ ﻫﻤﺎن رده ﺑﻨـﺪي اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺮﮔﺰ از ﻳﻚ ﻓﻴﻮز ﺑﺪون ﭘﻮﺷﺶ در ﺻﻮرﺗﻴـﻜﻪ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ آن ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺮداﺷﱳ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫اﮔﺮ ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻓﻴﻮز ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ,‬ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻤﺎن رﻧﮓ ﻃﺮف ﭘﲔ دار دوﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻫﺎي ﺗﻌﻮﻳﻀﻲ را ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫از ﻓﺮوﺷﻨﺪه ﺧﻮد ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫اﮔﺮ دوﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺑﺮق در ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻧﻴـﺴﺖ و ﻳﺎ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮق ﺑﺎﻧﺪازه ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺑﺮق ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪,‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ از ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﻢ راﺑﻂ ﻣﻮرد ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ از ﳊﺎظ اﳝﻨﻲ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺴﺐ راﻫﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮوﺷﻨﺪه ﺧﻮد ﻣﺸﻮرت ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ اﻳـﻦ وﺟﻮد‪ ,‬اﮔـﺮ ﭼﺎره اي ﺑﻐـﻴﺮ از ﺑﺮﻳـﺪن دوﺷﺎﺧـﻪ وﺟﻮد ﻧﺪارد‪ ,‬ﻓـﻴﻮز را ﺑـﻴﺮون آورده و ﺳﭙـﺲ دوﺷﺎﺧـﻪ را ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮز اﻣـﻨﻲ دور‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺪازﻳﺪ‪ .‬دو ﺷﺎﺧﻪ را ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺑـﺮق وﺻﻞ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪ ,‬ﭼﻮن ﺧﻄﺮ ﺷﻮك ﺑﺮﻗﻲ از ﺳﻴﻢ ﳋﺖ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ اﻧﻌﻄـﺎف وﺟﻮد دارد‪.‬‬
‫دﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺑﺎ اﻳﻦ دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ راﻫﻨﻤﺎي ﻛﺎرﺑﺮ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ ﲢﺖ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﺣﻘﻮق ﻣﺎﻟﻜﻴﺖ ﻣﻌﻨﻮي اﻓﺮاد و ﺷﺮﻛﺘﻬﺎي‬
‫ﺛﺎﻟﺚ ﻗﺮار دارد‪ .‬اﻋﺘﺒﺎر اﻳﻦ ﻣﺠﻮز ﺑﻪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻫﺎي ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ‪-‬ﲡﺎري ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﺼﺮف ﻛﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎن ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت داراي‬
‫ﻣﺠﻮز ﻣﺤﺪود ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻴﭻ اﺟﺎزه اي ﺑﺮاي اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﲡـﺎري داده ﻧﺸﺪه اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﻣـﺠﻮز ﻫـﻴﭻ ﭼـﻴﺰ دﻳـﮕﺮي را ﺑـﺠﺰ اﻳـﻦ دﺳﺘـﮕﺎه ﲢـﺖ ﭘﻮﺷـﺶ ﻗﺮار ﻧﺪاده و اﻋـﺘﺒـﺎر آن ﺑﻪ ﻣـﺤﺼـﻮﻻﺗﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﲢﺖ ﭘـﻮﺷﺶ ﻣـﺠﻮز‬
‫ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ و ﻳﺎ رواﻟﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ‬
‫‪ 11172-3 ISO/IEC‬ﻳﺎ ‪ 13818-3 ISO/IEC‬ﺳﺎزﮔﺎري داﺷﺘﻪ و ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺑﺎ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﻓﺮوﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ اﻣﺎ ﲢﺖ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻣﺠﻮز ﻗﺮار ﻧﺪارﻧﺪ‪,‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺴﻂ و ﺗﻮﺳﻌﻪ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﻣﺠﻮز ﻓﻘﻂ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از اﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮل را ﺑﺮاي رﻣﺰ ﻛﺮدن و‪/‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎز ﻛﺮدن رﻣﺰ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎي ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺳﺎزﮔﺎر ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ‪ISO/IEC‬‬
‫‪ 11172-3‬ﻳﺎ ‪ 13818-3 ISO/IEC‬ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ اﻳﻦ ﻣﺠﻮز ﻫﻴﭻ ﺣﻘﻲ ﺑﺮاي اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدﻫﺎي ﻧﺎﺳﺎزﮔﺎر ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪاردﻫﺎي ‪ 11172-3 ISO/IEC‬ﻳﺎ ‪ISO/IEC‬‬
‫‪ 13818-3‬در اﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮل داده ﻧﺸﺪه اﺳـﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۲‬ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر‬
‫‪WOË√ UNOM‬‬
‫‪wM1« rN ÍUNKLF«—uœ‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ از اﻳﻨﻜﻪ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه را ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ‪ ,‬اﻳﻦ دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻠﻬﺎي ﻛﺎرﻛﺮد را ﺑﺪﻗﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬از دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻠﻬﺎي‬
‫اﳝﻨـﻲ ﻛﻪ در زﻳـﺮ ﻓﻬـﺮﺳﺖ ﺷـﺪه اﺳﺖ ﭘـﻴﺮوي ﻛـﻨﻴـﺪ‪ .‬اﻳﻦ دﺳـﺘﻮراﻟـﻌﻤﻠـﻬﺎي ﻛـﺎرﻛﺮد را ﺑـﺮاي اﺳﺘـﻔﺎده ﻫـﺎي آﺗﻲ در ﺟـﺎﻳﻲ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫دﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﺑﻪ آﻧﻬﺎ آﺳﺎن ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻧﮕﻬـﺪاري ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪(۲‬‬
‫‪(۳‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻪ اﺧﻄﺎرﻫﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪—U t ŸËd‬‬
‫‪(۱‬‬
‫اﻳﻦ دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻠﻬﺎ را ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻳـﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫اﻳﻦ دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻠﻬﺎ را در ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻛـﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪(۴‬‬
‫از ﲤﺎﻣﻲ دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﭘﻴﺮوي ﻛﻨـﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪(۵‬‬
‫اﻳﻦ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه را در ﻣﺠﺎورت آب ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﻧـﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪(۶‬‬
‫دﺳﺘﮕﺎه را ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎ دﺳﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﺧﺸﻚ ﲤﻴـﺰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪(۷‬‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮي ﻫﻴﭻ ﻳﻚ از روزﻧﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه را ﻧﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ ,‬و دﺳﺘﮕﺎه را ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻠﻬﺎي ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪(۸‬‬
‫دﺳﺘـﮕﺎه را در ﻧﺰدﻳـﻜﻲ ﻣﻨـﺎﺑﻊ ﮔﺮﻣـﺎزا ﻣﺎﻧﻨـﺪ رادﻳﺎﺗﻮرﻫـﺎ‪ ,‬درﻳﭽـﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻫﻮاي ﮔـﺮم‪ ,‬اﺟﺎﻗﻬـﺎ‪ ,‬ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻳـﺮ ﲡﻬﻴـﺰات )ﻣﺎﻧﻨـﺪ‬
‫آﻣﭙﻠﻴﻔﺎﻳﺮﻫﺎ( ﻛﻪ ﮔﺮﻣﺎ اﻳﺠﺎد ﻣـﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ ,‬ﻗﺮار ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪(۹‬‬
‫ﻧﻜﺎت اﳝﻨﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﻗﻄﺒﻲ ﺳﺎزي دو ﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﻳﺎ دوﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﻫﺎي ارت دار را ﻧﺎدﻳﺪه ﻧﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ .‬دوﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻗﻄﺒﻲ ﺷﺪه‬
‫داراي دو ﺗﻴﻐـﻪ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ از دﻳﮕـﺮي ﭘﻬﻦ ﺗﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺑـﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻚ دوﺷﺎﺧﻪ ارت دار داراي دو ﺗـﻴﻐﻪ و ﻳﻚ ﺷـﺎﺧﻪ ﺳﻮم‪,‬‬
‫ﻣﺨـﺼﻮص ارت ﻳﺎ اﺗـﺼﺎل ﺑـﻪ زﻣﲔ اﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺗـﻴﻐﻪ ﭘـﻬﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺷـﺎﺧﻪ ﺳـﻮم ﺑﺮاي اﳝﻨـﻲ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗـﻌﺒﻴـﻪ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‪ .‬اﮔـﺮ دوﺷﺎﺧـﻪ‬
‫اراﺋﻪ ﺷﺪه در ﭘﺮﻳﺰﻫﺎي ﺷﻤﺎ ﻓﺮو ﳕﻲ رود‪ ,‬ﻟﻄﻔًﺎ ﺑﺮاي ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﻗﺪﳝﻲ و ﻣﻨﺴﻮخ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺮﻗﻜﺎر ﲤﺎس ﺣﺎﺻﻞ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (۱۰‬ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮق را ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﻛﺮده و ﻧﮕﺬارﻳﺪ ﻛﺴﻲ روي آن راه ﺑﺮود و ﻳﺎ ﺑﺨﺼﻮص در ﺑﺨﺶ دوﺷﺎﺧﻪ‪ ,‬ﭘﺮﻳﺰ‪ ,‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ‬
‫اي ﻛﻪ از دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺧﺎرج ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪ ,‬آﺳﻴـﺐ دﻳﺪه و ﻳﺎ زﺧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪ (۱۱‬ﻓﻘﻂ از ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎت‪/‬ﻟﻮازم ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗـﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﺷﺪه اﻧﺪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (۱۲‬ﻓﻘﻂ از ﻣﻴﺰ ﻣﺘﺤﺮك‪ ,‬ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‪ ,‬ﺳﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‪ ,‬ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪ ,‬ﻳﺎ ﻣﻴﺰﻫﺎﻳﻲ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﺷﺪه‪ ,‬ﻳﺎ ﻫﻤﺮاه‬
‫ﺑﺎ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﻓﺮوﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫اﮔﺮ از ﻳﻚ ﻣﻴﺰ ﻣﺘﺤﺮك اﺳـﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ,‬ﺑﺮاي ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي از آﺳﻴﺒﻬﺎي ﻧـﺎﺷﻲ از اﻓﺘﺎدن‪ ,‬اﺣﺘﻴﺎط و ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ در‬
‫زﻣﺎن ﺣﺮﻛﺖ دادن ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه‪/‬ﻣﻴـﺰ ﻣﺘﺤﺮك ﺑﻪ ﺧﺮج دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (۱۳‬در ﺣﲔ ﻃﻮﻓﺎﻧﻬـﺎي رﻋﺪ و ﺑﺮق و ﻳﺎ در ﻣﻮاردي ﻛﻪ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه را ﺑـﺮاي ﻣﺪﺗﻬﺎي ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﳕﻲ ﻛـﻨﻴﺪ‪ ,‬آﻧﺮا از ﺑﺮق‬
‫ﺑﻜﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (۱۴‬ﲤﺎﻣﻲ اﻣﻮر ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ را ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﻨﻞ ﻣﺠﺮب ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺗﻲ ﻣﺤﻮل ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬اﻣﻮر ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻻزم ﺧﻮاﻫﻨﺪ ﺑﻮد ﻛﻪ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺗـﺮﺗﻴﺒﻲ آﺳـﻴﺐ دﻳﺪه ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‪ ,‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ آﺳﻴـﺐ دﻳﺪﮔﻲ ﺳﻴـﻢ ﺑﺮق ﻳﺎ دوﺷﺎﺧـﻪ‪ ,‬رﻳﺨﺘﻪ ﺷـﺪن ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎت روي دﺳﺘـﮕﺎه ﻳﺎ‬
‫اﻓﺘﺎدن اﺷﻴﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﻪ داﺧﻞ آن‪ ,‬ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﱳ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه در ﻣﻌﺮض ﺑﺎران ﻳﺎ رﻃﻮﺑﺖ‪ ,‬ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﻏﻴﺮﻋﺎدي دﺳﺘﮕﺎه‪ ,‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ زﻣﲔ‬
‫اﻓﺘﺎدن آن‪.‬‬
‫«‪ÁU~œ U —U 5 —œ “ô ÍU ◊UO‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ از اﻳﻨﻜﻪ اﺟﺰا دﻳﮕﺮي ﺑﻪ اﻳﻦ دﺳﺘﮕـﺎه ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه وﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ,‬ﻟﻄﻔًﺎ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻤﻪ آﻧﻬﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﺑـﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ دﻳﺴﻜﻲ در ﺣﺎل ﭘﺨﺶ اﺳﺖ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه را ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ ,‬ﭼﻮن ﳑﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ دﻳﺴﻚ ﺧﺮاش ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻪ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻨﺪ‪ ,‬و ﺑﺨﺸﻬﺎي داﺧﻠﻲ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺿﺒـﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه آﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﮔﻠﺪاﻧﻲ ﭘﺮ از آب ﻳﺎ ﻫﻴﭻ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺷـﻲ ﻓﻠﺰي ﻛﻮﭼﻜﻲ روي دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻗﺮار ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮاﻇﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ و دﺳﺖ ﺧﻮد را در ﺳﻴﻨﻲ دﻳـﺴﻚ ﻗﺮار ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻴﭻ ﭼﻴﺰي ﺑﺠﺰ دﻳﺴﻚ در ﺳﻴﻨﻲ دﻳـﺴﻚ ﻗﺮار ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺪاﺧـﻼت ﺑﻴﺮوﻧـﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ رﻋـﺪ و ﺑﺮق و اﻟﻜـﺘﺮﻳﺴـﻴﺘﻪ ﺳـﺎﻛﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺗـﻮاﻧﺪ ﺑﺮ ﻋﻤـﻠﻜﺮد ﻋـﺎدي اﻳﻦ دﺳﺘـﮕﺎه ﺿﺒـﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺗـﺎﺛﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺑﮕﺬارد‪ .‬اﮔﺮ ﭼـﻨﲔ وﺿﻌﻴﺘﻲ ﭘـﻴﺶ آﻣﺪ‪ ,‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨـﻨﺪه را ﺧﺎﻣﻮش و دوﺑﺎره ﺑﺎ دﻛـﻤﻪ ‪ STANDBY/ON‬روﺷﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ,‬ﻳـﺎاﻳﻨﻜﻪ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮق ﻣﺘﻨﺎوب دﺳﺘﮕﺎه را از ﭘﺮﻳـﺰ ﺑﺮق ﻣﺘﻨﺎوب ﻛﺸﻴﺪه و دوﺑﺎره وﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﻋﺎدي ﺧﻮاﻫـﺪ داﺷﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭘﺲ از اﺳﺘﻔـﺎده‪ ,‬دﻳﺴﻚ را از دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺧﺎرج ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ و آﻧﺮا ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫وﻗﺘﻲ ﳕﻲ ﺧﻮاﻫﻴـﺪ از دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺑﺮاي ﻣـﺪﺗﻬﺎي ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴـﺪ‪ ,‬ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮق ﻣﺘﻨﺎوب آﻧﺮا از ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺑـﺮق‬
‫ﻣﺘﻨﺎوب ﺑﻜﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ﲤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮدن دﻳﺴﻚ‪ ,‬آﻧﺮا در ﺧﻄﻲ ﻣﺴﺘـﻘﻴﻢ از داﺧﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻴﺮون دﻳﺴﻚ دﺳﺘﻤﺎل ﺑﻜﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ در ﻣﻌﺮض ﭘﺎﺷﺶ ﻳﺎ ﻗﻄﺮات ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎت ﻗﺮار داده ﺷﺪه ﻳﺎ اﺷﻴﺎﺋﻲ ﭘﺮ از ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎت ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﮔﻠﺪان روي آن ﻗﺮار‬
‫داده ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺮﻳـﺰ اﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﺮق ﺑـﻌﻨﻮان ﻳﻚ وﺳـﻴﻠﻪ ﻗـﻄﻊ و وﺻﻞ ﻛﺮدن ﻣـﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻗـﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘـﻪ و ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﻫﺮ زﻣـﺎن ﻗﺎﺑﻞ اﺳﺘـﻔﺎده‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎرﺳﻲ ‪۳ -‬‬
‫ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر‬
‫
~‪ÁU~œ t
b “« Í—«bN‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮر ﺗﺎﻣﲔ اﳝﻨﻲ‪ ,‬ﺣﺘﻤًﺎ ﻣـﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮق ﻣﺘﻨﺎوب را از ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺑﺮق ﻣﺘﻨﺎوب ﻛﺸﻴﺪه اﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮاي ﲤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮدن از ﺑﻨﺰن‪ ,‬ﺗﻴﻨﺮ‪ ,‬ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻳـﺮ ﺣﻼﻟﻬﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺪﻧﻪ را ﺑﺎ دﺳﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻧﺮم ﲤﻴﺰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪©X? p?œ u?«—œ® HDD‬‬
‫دﻳﺴﻚ ﺳﺨﺖ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ذﺧﻴﺮه ﺳﺎزي ﺑﺴﻴﺎر ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ دارد‪ ,‬و اﻣﻜﺎن اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از زﻣﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ و دﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﻪ‬
‫داده ﻫﺎي ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه را ﻓﺮاﻫـﻢ ﻣﻲ آورد‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺒﺘﻪ‪ ,‬دﻳﺴﻚ ﺳﺨﺖ ﺑﻪ آﺳﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺮ اﺛﺮ ﺷﻮك‪ ,‬ارﺗﻌﺎش ﻳﺎ ﮔﺮد و ﻏﺒﺎر آﺳﻴﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺑﻴﻨﺪ و ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ آﻧﺮا از آﻫﻦ رﺑﺎﻫﺎ دور‬
‫ﻧﮕﺎه داﺷﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮر ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي از ﺣـﺬف و از ﺑﲔ رﻓﱳ داده ﻫﺎي ﻣﻬﻢ‪ ,‬اﻗﺪاﻣﺎت اﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ زﻳﺮ را اﺟﺮا ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ‪ DVD‬و ‪ HDD‬را در ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ در ﻣﻌﺮض ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮات و ﻧﻮﺳﺎﻧﺎت ﺷﺪﻳﺪ دﻣﺎﻳﻲ اﺳﺖ‪ ,‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﻧﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• از وارد آﻣﺪن ﺷﻮﻛﻬﺎي ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺿـﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ‪ DVD‬و‪ HDD‬ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ‪ DVD‬و ‪ HDD‬را در ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ در ﻣﻌﺮض ارﺗﻌﺎﺷﺎت ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﺑﻮده ﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻧﺎﭘﺎﻳﺪاري دارﻧﺪ‪,‬‬
‫ﻗﺮار ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ‪ DVD‬و ‪ HDD‬را در ﺑﺎﻻي ﻣـﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﮔﺮﻣﺎ ﻗﺮار ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه روﺷﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻛﺎﺑـﻞ ﺑﺮق ﻣﺘﻨﺎوب را ﻧﻜﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻌﻲ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ دﻳﺴﻚ ﺳﺨﺖ را ﺗﻌـﻮﻳﺾ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬اﻳﻦ ﻛﺎر ﳑﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺑﺮوز ﺧﻄﺎي ﻛﺎري ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫اﮔـﺮ دﻳﺴـﻚ ﺳﺨـﺖ آﺳﻴـﺐ ﺑﺒـﻴﻨـﺪ‪ ,‬اﻣﻜـﺎن ﺑﺎزﻳـﺎﺑﻲ داده ﻫـﺎي از ﺑﲔ رﻓـﺘﻪ را ﻧـﺨﻮاﻫـﻴﺪ داﺷـﺖ‪ .‬دﻳﺴـﻚ ﺳﺨـﺖ ﺗـﻨﻬـﺎ ﻓﻀـﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﺮاي ذﺧﻴﺮه ﺳﺎزي اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫?‪p??œ U —U‬‬
‫• از دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻋﺎدي و ﻣﺮﺳﻮم اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬اﮔﺮ از دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎي ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺳﻮم )دﻳﺴﻜﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺧﺎص( اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﻮد‪ ,‬ﳑﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ اﻳﻦ دﺳﺘـﮕﺎه ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ‪ DVD‬و ‪ HDD‬آﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪pœ 7dÖ Xœ —œ‬‬
‫• از دﺳﺖ زدن ﺑﻪ ﺳﻄﺤﻲ از دﻳﺴﻚ ﻛـﻪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ روي آن اﳒﺎم ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪ ,‬ﺧﻮدداري ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ë DVD±RW ¨DVD-RAM‬‬
‫‪DVD±R‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎ دﻳﺴﻚ ﭘﺎك ﻛﻨﻬﺎي ﻣﺨﺼﻮص ‪ DVD-RAM/PD‬ﲤﻴﺰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ )در ﺻﻮرت اﻣﻜﺎن از ‪ LF-K200DCA1‬اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫از دﻳـﺴـﻚ ﭘـﺎك ﻛـﻨـﻬـﺎي ﻋـﺎدي )ﻣﺨـﺼـﻮص ﺳـﻲ دي( ﻳـﺎ دﺳـﺘـﻤـﺎل ﺑـﺮاي ﲤـﻴـﺰ ﻛـﺮدن دﻳـﺴـﻜـﻬﺎي ‪DVD-RAM/-RW/-R‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪wu Íœ w ¨DVD-Video‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎ دﺳﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻧﺮم ﻏﺒﺎر ﻳﺎ آﻟﻮدﮔـﻲ ﻫﺎي ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﺑﺮ روي دﻳﺴﻚ را ﲤﻴﺰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫«‪UN?Jœ U —U Í«d “ô ÍU ◊UO‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫در ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﺎپ دار ﺑﺎ ﻣﺪاد ﻳﺎ ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر ﭼﻴﺰي ﻧﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﺪ‪ .‬از اﺳﭙﺮﻳﻬﺎي ﲤﻴﺰ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺎ آﻧﺘﻲ اﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻚ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﻤﻨًﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺒﺎﻳـﺪ از ﻫﻴﭽﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﺎده ﺷﻴﻤﻴﺎﻳﻲ ﻓﺮار‪ ,‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﻨﺰن ﻳﺎ ﺗﻴﻨﺮ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨـﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫روي دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﻳﺎ اﺗﻴﻜﺖ ﻧﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪) .‬از دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮار ﭼﺴﺐ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﺷﺪه ﻳﺎ روي آﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻘﺎﻳﺎي ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺒﻬﺎي ﻛﻨﺪه‬
‫ﺷﺪه وﺟﻮد دارد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪(.‬‬
‫ز ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﻬﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻬﺎي ﺿﺪ ﺧﺮاش اﺳﺘـﻔﺎده ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫از دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮﻫـﺎي ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد در ﺑﺎزار ﭼﺎپ ﺷﺪه اﻧﺪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎي ﺗﺎب ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺗـﺮك ﺧﻮرده در داﺧﻞ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺧﻮد ﻗﺮار ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫
~‪UNJœ Í—«bN‬‬
‫ﻣﺮاﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎ آﺳﻴﺒﻲ ﻧﺒﻴﻨﻨﺪ ﭼﻮن داده ﻫﺎي ﻣﻮﺟﻮد در اﻳﻦ دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﺪت از ﻣﺤﻴﻂ اﻃﺮاف ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• آﻧﻬﺎ را در زﻳﺮ ﻧﻮر ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺧﻮرﺷـﻴﺪ ﻗﺮار ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎ را در ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ ﺧﻨﻚ و داراي ﺗﻬـﻮﻳﻪ ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎ را ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻋﻤﻮدي ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﻛـﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎ را در ﻟﻔﺎﻓﻬﺎي ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﻛﻨـﻨﺪه ﲤﻴﺰ ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﳕﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• اﮔﺮ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ DVD‬و ‪ HDD‬ﺧﻮد را ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻧﺎﮔﻬﺎﻧﻲ از ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ ﺳﺮد ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ ﮔﺮم ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ,‬ﳑﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﭘﺪﻳﺪه‬
‫ﻣﻴﻌﺎن ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺷﻮد ﺗﺎ ﱎ و رﻃﻮﺑﺖ در اﺟﺰا و ﻟﻨﺰ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺷﺪه و در ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ دﻳﺴﻚ از ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﺎدي‬
‫ﺧﺎرج ﺷﻮد‪ .‬اﮔـﺮ ﭼﻨﲔ وﺿﻌـﻴﺘﻲ ﭘﻴـﺶ آﻣﺪ‪ ,‬دﻳﺴﻚ را از دﺳﺘـﮕﺎه ﺧﺎرج ﺳﺎﺧـﺘﻪ و ﻗﺒﻞ از ﭘـﺨﺶ ﻣﺠﺪد ﻳـﻚ ﺗﺎ دو ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫ﺻﺒﺮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﻃـﻮل اﻳﻦ ﻣﺪت روﺷﻦ ﲟﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣـﺮاﻗﺐ ﺑـﺎﺷﻴـﺪ ﻛﻪ دﻳـﺴـﻜﻬـﺎ آﺳﻴـﺒـﻲ ﻧﺒـﻴﻨـﻨﺪ ﭼـﻮن داده ﻫـﺎي ﻣﻮﺟـﻮد در اﻳﻦ دﻳـﺴـﻜﻬـﺎ ﺑﺸـﺪت از ﻣﺤـﻴـﻂ اﻃﺮاف ﺗـﺎﺛﻴـﺮ ﻣـﻲ‬
‫ﭘﺬﻳﺮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۴‬ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر‬
‫‪pœ UBA‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از اﻳﻦ دﺳﺘـﮕﺎه ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎي دﻳﺠﻴـﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ را از روي دﻳﺴﻚ ﻫﺎي ‪ DVD-RAM/±RW/±R‬ﻳﺎ ‪HDD‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻳﺎ روي آﻧﻬﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ اﺳـﺘﻔـﺎده از اﻳﻦ دﺳـﺘﮕﺎه ﻫـﻤﭽـﻨﲔ ﻣـﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴـﺪ ﺗﺼـﺎوﻳﺮ دﻳـﺠﻴﺘـﺎﻟﻲ را روي دﻳـﺴﻜـﻬﺎي ‪ DVD-RAM/±RW‬ﻳﺎ ‪ HDD‬وﻳـﺮاﻳﺶ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫
‪pœ Ÿu‬‬
‫❖ ‪wu Íœ w‬‬
‫• ﻳﻚ ﺳﻲ دي ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺻﺪاي ‪ ۴۴٫۱‬ﻛﻴﻠـﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ ‪ PCM‬روي آن ﺿﺒﻂ ﮔﺮدﻳﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
‫• اﻳﻦ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎي ‪ CD-R‬و‪ CD-RW‬ﺑـﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ‪ CD-DA‬را ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• اﻳﻦ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﳑﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ دﻻﻳﻞ ﺷﺮاﻳـﻂ ﺿﺒﻂ دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎ ﻗﺎدر ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺮﺧﻲ دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎي ‪ CD-R‬ﻳﺎ ‪ CD-RW‬ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫❖ ‪CD-RW/-R‬‬
‫• از دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎي ‪ CD-R/-RW‬ﺑﺎ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ‪ ۷۰۰‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑـﺎﻳﺖ )‪ ۸۰‬دﻗـﻴــﻘـﻪ اي( اﺳـﺘـﻔــﺎده ﻛـﻨـﻴــﺪ‪ .‬در ﺻـﻮرت اﻣـﻜــﺎن‪ ,‬از دﻳـﺴـﻜـﻬــﺎي ‪۸۰۰‬‬
‫ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺘﻲ )‪ ۹۰‬دﻗﻴﻘﻪ اي( ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ اﺳـﺘﻔﺎده ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪ ,‬ﭼﻮن ﳑﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه اﻳﻦ دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎ را ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﻜﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• اﮔﺮ در ﺣـﲔ ﺿﺒـﻂ اﻧﺘﻬـﺎي دﻳﺴﻜـﻬﺎي ‪ CD-R/-RW‬ﺑـﺴﺘﻪ ﻧـﺸﺪه ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‪ ,‬ﳑﻜـﻦ اﺳﺖ در اﺑﺘـﺪاي زﻣﺎن ﭘـﺨﺶ ﺑﺎ ﺗـﺎﺧﻴﺮ ﻣـﻮاﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺪه‪ ,‬و ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎي ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪه ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧـﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺧﻲ از دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎي ‪ CD-R/-RW‬ﳑﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ اﻳﻦ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪ ,‬اﻳﻦ اﻣﺮ ﺑﻪ ﲡﻬﻴﺰاﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﺿﺒﻂ آﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﺑﺮده‬
‫ﺷﺪه اﺳـﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﮕـﻲ دارد‪ .‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﭘـﺨﺶ ﺑﻮدن ﻣـﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت و ﻓـﺎﻳﻠﻬـﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ از ﺳـﻲ دي ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮوي ‪ CD-R/-RW‬ﺑﺮاي ﻣـﺼﺮف ﺷﺨـﺼﻲ‬
‫ﺧﻮدﺗﺎن ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ,‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳـﺎت و دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ دارد‪.‬‬
‫❖ ‪DVD±R ÍUNJœ j{ Ë gÄ‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﻚ ‪ DVD±R‬در ﺣـﺎﻟﺖ ‪) Video‬وﻳﺪﻳﻮ( ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎن رﺳﻴﺪ‪ ,‬ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ‪ DVD-Video‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ روي ﻓﻀﺎي ﻣﻮﺟﻮد دﻳﺴﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺮده و اﻋﻤﺎل وﻳﺮاﻳﺸﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ اﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮدن ﻋﻨﻮان ﺑﻪ دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎ و ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫ﻫﺎ و ﭘﺎك ﻛﺮدن ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ از ﻧـﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﺎﺧﱳ را اﳒﺎم دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫وﻗﺘﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ اي از ﻳﻚ ‪ DVD±R‬ﭘﺎك ﻣﻲ ﺷـﻮد‪ ,‬ﻓﻀﺎي ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ آن در اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﺷﻤﺎ ﻗﺮار ﻧﺨﻮاﻫﺪ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ‪.‬‬
‫زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ روي ﻳﻚ ﺑﺨﺶ از ‪ DVD±R‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪ‪ ,‬آن ﻓـﻀﺎ دﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺮاي ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻧﺨﻮاﻫﺪ ﺑﻮد‪ ,‬ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت ﺿـﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺷﺪه ﭼﻪ ﭘﺎك ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻧﺸﻮﻧﺪ ﺗﺎﺛـﻴﺮي در اﻳﻦ اﻣﺮ ﻧﺨﻮاﻫﺪ ﮔﺬاﺷﺖ‪.‬‬
‫دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺑﻌﺪ از ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺷﺪن ﺿﺒـﻂ ﺑﻪ ‪ ۳۰‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ زﻣﺎن اﺣﺘﻴﺎج دارد ﺗﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺘﻲ را ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳـﺎن ﺑﺒﺮد‪.‬‬
‫اﻳﻦ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ‪ DVD±R‬را ﺑﺮاي ﻫﺮ ﺑﺎر ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﻬـﻴﻨﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ ﺳﺎزي زﻣﺎﻧﻲ اﳒﺎم ﻣﻲ ﺷـﻮد ﻛﻪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ را ﺑﻌﺪ از ﻗﺮار دادن دﻳﺴﻚ ﻳﺎ روﺷﻦ ﻛﺮدن دﺳﺘﮕﺎه آﻏﺎز ﻛﻨـﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺮدن روي ﻳﻚ دﻳﺴﻚ در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻋﻤـﻞ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ ﺳﺎزي ﺑﻪ ﻛﺮات اﳒﺎم ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﳑﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﭘﺨﺶ در ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﻣﻮارد ﺑﻪ دﻟﻴﻞ ﺷـﺮاﻳﻂ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻏﻴﺮﳑﻜﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫اﻳﻦ دﺳـﺘﮕـﺎه ﻗﺎدر اﺳـﺖ دﻳﺴـﻜﻬﺎي ‪ DVD±R‬ﺿـﺒﻂ و ﻧـﻬﺎﺋـﻲ ﺷﺪه ﺑـﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛـﻨﻨـﺪه ﻫﺎي وﻳـﺪﻳﻮﻳـﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ‪ Samsung‬را‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬اﻳﻦ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺷﺎﻳﺪ ﻧـﺘﻮاﻧﺪ ﺑﺮﺧﻲ از دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎي ‪ DVD±R‬را ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ دﻳﺴﻚ و ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ,‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻨـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫❖ ‪DVD-RW ÍUNJœ j{ Ë gÄ‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ و ﭘﺨﺶ دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎي ‪ DVD-RW‬در ﻫـﺮ دو ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) Video‬وﻳﺪﻳﻮ( و ‪ VR‬اﻣﻜﺎن ﭘﺬﻳﺮ اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ دﻳﺴﻚ ‪ DVD-RW‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪه در ﻫﺮ دو ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪)Video‬وﻳﺪﻳﻮ( و ‪ VR‬ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺷﺪ‪ ,‬ﳕﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ دﻳﮕﺮي روي‬
‫آن اﳒﺎم دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳـﻚ ‪ DVD-RW‬در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) Video‬وﻳﺪﻳﻮ( ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎن رﺳﻴﺪ‪ ,‬ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ‪ DVD-Video‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺧﻮاﻫـﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫در ﻫﺮ دو ﺣﺎﻟـﺖ‪ ,‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان ﻋﻤﻞ ﭘـﺨﺶ را ﻗﺒﻞ و ﻳﺎ ﺑﻌـﺪ از ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﺎزي اﳒـﺎم داد‪ ,‬اﻣﺎ اﳒﺎم ﺿﺒﻂ اﺿـﺎﻓﻲ‪ ,‬ﭘﺎك ﻛﺮدن و‬
‫وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ ﭘﺲ از ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﺎزي ﳑﻜﻦ ﻧﺨـﻮاﻫﺪ ﺑﻮد‪.‬‬
‫اﮔﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮاﻫﻴﺪ دﻳﺴﻚ را در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ VR‬و ﺳﭙﺲ در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) Video‬وﻳﺪﻳﻮ( ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ,‬ﺣﺘﻤًﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ‪) Format‬ﻓﺮﻣﺖ( را اﺟﺮا ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬در اﺟﺮاي ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ‪) Format‬ﻓﺮﻣﺖ( دﻗﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﭼﻮن ﳑﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ داده ﻫﺎي ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪه‬
‫از ﺑﲔ ﺑﺮوﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ دﻳﺴﻚ ﺧﺎم ‪ DVD-RW‬در اوﻟﲔ ﺑﺎري ﻛﻪ ﺑـﺮاي اﺳﺘﻔﺎده آﻣﺎده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ VR‬ﻗﺮار ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮد‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎرﺳﻲ ‪۵ -‬‬
‫‪—U t ŸËd‬‬
‫❖ ‪DVD-Video‬‬
‫• ﻳـﻚ دﻳـﺴـﻚ دﻳـﺠـﻴــﺘـﺎل ﭼـﻨـﺪ ﻛـﺎرﺑـﺮدي )‪ (DVD‬ﻣـﻲ ﺗـﻮاﻧـﺪ ﺷـﺎﻣــﻞ ﺣـﺪاﻛـﺜـﺮ ‪ ۱۳۵‬دﻗـﻴـﻘـﻪ ﺗـﺼـﻮﻳـﺮ‪ ۸ ,‬زﺑــﺎن ﺻـﻮﺗـﻲ و ‪ ۳۲‬زﺑـﺎن‬
‫زﻳﺮﻧﻮﻳﺲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬اﻳﻦ دﻳﺴﻜـﻬﺎ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺸﺮده ﺳﺎزي ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ MPEG-2‬و ﺻـﺪاي ‪ Dolby Digital Surround‬ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪,‬‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺑـﻪ ﺷﻤـﺎ اﻣﻜـﺎن ﻟﺬت ﺑـﺮدن از ﺗﺼـﺎوﻳﺮي ﻋـﺎﻟﻲ و ﺷـﻔﺎف ﺑـﺎ ﻛﻴـﻔﻴـﺖ ﺳﻴـﻨﻤـﺎﻳﻲ در آﺳـﺎﻳﺶ و راﺣـﺖ ﻣﻨـﺰل ﺧﻮد را ﻣـﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺨﺸﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• در ﻫﻨﮕﺎم رﻓﱳ از ﻻﻳﻪ اول ﺑﻪ دوم دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎي دوﻻﻳﻪ ‪ DVD‬وﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ‪ ,‬ﳑﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ و ﺻﺪا ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﳊﻈﻪ اي دﺳﺘﺨﻮش‬
‫اﻋﻮﺟﺎج ﮔﺮدد‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮوز اﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺧﻄﺎي ﻛـﺎري دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﻚ ‪ DVD-RW/±R‬در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) Video‬وﻳﺪﻳﻮ(‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎن رﺳﻴﺪ‪ ,‬ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ‪ DVD-Video‬ﺗﺒـﺪﻳﻞ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر‬
‫❖ ‪DVD+RW ÍUNJœ j{ Ë gÄ‬‬
‫• در دﻳـﺴـﻜـﻬﺎي ‪ DVD+RW‬ﻫـﻴـﭻ ﺗـﻔـﺎوﺗـﻲ ﻣﻴـﺎن ﻓـﺮﻣـﺖ ‪) DVD-Video‬ﺣـﺎﻟـﺖ ‪ (V‬ﻳﺎ ﻓـﺮﻣـﺖ ﺿـﺒـﻂ ‪) DVD-Video‬ﺣـﺎﻟﺖ ‪ (VR‬وﺟـﻮد‬
‫ﻧﺪارد‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ً‬
‫ﻻ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﺎزي ﺑﺮاي اﺳـﺘﻔﺎده از دﻳﺴﻚ ﻫﺎي ‪ DVD+RW‬ﺿﺮوري ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫❖ ‪DVD-RAM ÍUNJœ j{ Ë gÄ‬‬
‫• ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ روي ﺣـﺎﻟﺖ ‪ VR‬ﻗﺮار داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬در ﻏﻴﺮ اﻳﻨﺼﻮرت‪ ,‬اﻳﻦ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﻗﺎدر ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻮارد‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪه ﻧﺨﻮاﻫﺪ ﺑﻮد‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻪ دﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻞ و ﻣﺸﻜﻼت ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎزﮔﺎري‪ ,‬ﳕﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ‪ DVD-RAM‬را در اﻛﺜﺮ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﻫﺎي ‪ DVD‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻘﻂ ‪ DVD-RAM‬ﻫﺎي اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ‪ ۲٫۰‬ﺑﺎ اﻳـﻦ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• دﻳـﺴـﻚ ﻫﺎي ‪ DVD-RAM‬ﺿـﺒـﻂ ﺷـﺪه ﺑـﺎ اﻳـﻦ دﺳﺘـﮕـﺎه ﺷـﺎﻳـﺪ در ﺳـﺎﻳﺮ ﭘـﺨـﺶ ﻛـﻨـﻨﺪه ﻫـﺎي ‪ DVD‬ﻛـﺎر ﻧـﻜـﻨـﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑـﺮاي آﮔـﺎﻫـﻲ از‬
‫ﺳﺎزﮔﺎر ﺑﻮدن ﺑﺎ اﻳﻦ دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎي ‪ ,DVD-RAM‬ﺑﻪ راﻫـﻨﻤﺎي ﻛﺎرﺑﺮي ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻫﺎ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮاي دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎي ‪ DVD-RAM‬از ﻧﻮع ﻛﺎرﺗﺮﻳـﺠﻲ‪ ,‬ﻛﺎرﺗﺮﻳﺞ را ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻪ و ﻓﻘﻂ از ﺧﻮد دﻳﺴﻚ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪pœ Êœd wá‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻛﭙﻲ ﻛﺮدن ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت‬
‫‪DVD ← HDD‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮان وﻳﺪﻳﻮي ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪه‬
‫‪HDD ← DVD‬‬
‫ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﳕﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﳕﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻋﻨﺎوﻳﻨﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎر ﻛﭙﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻛﺮدن‬
‫ﻛﺮدن از آﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺠﺎز اﺳﺖ‬
‫)ﻋﻨﻮان را ﭘﺲ از ﻛﭙﻲ از‬
‫ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﳕﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮان ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺷﺪه در ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ ﻛﭙـﻲ‬
‫روي ‪ HDD‬ﭘﺎك ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ(‬
‫زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ "ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﺠﺎز ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎر ﻛﭙﻲ" روي ﻳﻚ دﻳﺴﻚ ‪ DVD‬ﻛﭙﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪ ,‬اﻣﻜﺎن ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺠﺪد آن ﻋﻨﻮان روي ‪HDD‬‬
‫وﺟﻮد ﻧﺨﻮاﻫﺪ داﺷﺖ‪.‬‬
‫اﻣﺎ "ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ اي ﺑﺎ وﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎر ﻛﭙﻲ" روي ‪ HDD‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‪ ,‬اﻳﻦ ﻋﻨﻮان را ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان ﺑﺮ ‪) DVD-RW‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ (VR‬ﻳﺎ ‪DVD-‬‬
‫‪ RAM‬ﻛﭙﻲ ﳕﻮد‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻛﭙﻲ ﻛﺮدن ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت‪.‬‬
‫‪ DVD ← HDD‬ﻳﺎ ‪USB‬‬
‫‪ HDD ← DVD‬ﻳﺎ ‪USB‬‬
‫‪ HDD ← USB‬ﻳﺎ ‪DVD‬‬
‫‪MP3‬‬
‫ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت‬
‫‪) JPEG‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬
‫ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫‪DivX‬‬
‫ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫‪CD-DA‬‬
‫ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﳕﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﳕﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫• دﻳﺴﻚ )‪) DVD±R ,CD-R/CD-DA/CD-RW/DVD-RAM‬ﻧﻬﺎﺋـﻲ ﺳﺎزي(‪) DVD+RW/DVD-RW/‬ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﺎزي( ← ‪ HDD‬ﻳﺎ ‪USB‬‬
‫• ‪ DVD-RW(V) ,DVD-R ← HDD‬ﻳﺎ ‪USB‬‬
‫• ‪ HDD ← USB‬ﻳﺎ ‪DVD-RW(V) ,DVD-R‬‬
‫• اﮔﺮ ﺑﺮوي ‪ USB‬ﻛﭙﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ PTP USB ,‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﻧﺨﻮاﻫـﺪ ﺑﻮد‪.‬‬
‫• اﮔﺮ دﻳﺴﻚ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ‪ Disc Manager‬ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ,‬ﺑﻌﻨﻮان ﻳﻚ دﻳﺴﻚ داراي ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ UDF‬ﺑﺎ ‪ PC‬ﺳﺎزﮔﺎري ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ‬
‫داﺷﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۶‬ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر‬
‫‪Êb wá d«d —œ XEU‬‬
‫• ﺑﺴﻴﺎري از دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎي ‪ DVD‬ﺑﮕﻮﻧﻪ اي رﻣﺰ ﺷﺪه اﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ در ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ ﻛﭙﻲ ﺷﺪن ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﮔﺮدﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﲔ دﻟﻴﻞ‪ ,‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ‪ DVD‬و ‪ HDD‬ﺧﻮد را ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴـﻤًﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن وﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ,‬و ﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه وﻳﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪XEU‬‬
‫اﻳﻦ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ‪ DVD‬و ‪ HDD‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ اﺟﺎزه ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ از ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎي ﺧﻮد‪ ,‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ و روش ﺷﺮح داده ﺷﺪه‬
‫زﻳﺮ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‪-‬ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺷﺪه‪ :‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤـﻪ ‪" ۹۰‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﺮدن)ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﻛﺮدن( ﻳﻚ ﻋﻨﻮان" ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫• دﻳﺴﻚ‪-‬ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺷﺪه‪ :‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪" ۱۱۴‬ﻣﺤـﺎﻓﻈﺖ از دﻳﺴﻚ" ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫* دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎي ‪ DVD-RAM/±RW/±R‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ‪ DVD-VIDEO‬ﺳﺎزﮔـﺎر ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ اﻳﻦ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺑـﺮاي ﻛـﺴـﺐ اﻃـﻼﻋﺎت ﺑـﻴـﺸـﺘـﺮ در ﺧـﺼـﻮص ﺳـﺎزﮔﺎر ﺑـﻮدن ﺿـﺒـﻂ ‪ ,DVD‬ﺑـﺎ ﺳـﺎزﻧـﺪه ‪ DVD-RAM/±RW/±R‬ﺧـﻮد ﻣـﺸﻮرت‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫* اﺳﺘـﻔﺎده از دﻳﺴﻜـﻬﺎي ‪ DVD-RAM/±RW/±R‬ﻛﻴﻔـﻴﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﲔ ﳑـﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑـﻪ ﺑﺮوز ﻣﺸﻜـﻼت ﻏﻴﺮﻣﻨـﺘﻈﺮه زﻳﺮ ﺷـﺎﻣﻞ‪ ,‬و ﻧﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪود ﺑﻪ‪ ,‬ﻋﺪم ﻣﻮﻓﻘﻴﺖ در ﺿﺒـﻂ‪ ,‬از ﺑﲔ رﻓﱳ داده ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ اﻗﻼم وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ ﺷﺪه ﻳﺎ آﺳﻴﺐ دﻳﺪن ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﮔـﺮدد‪.‬‬
‫‪UNJœ Xd‬‬
‫❖‬
‫«‪MP3 ÍUNJœ “« ÁœUH‬‬
‫• ‪ USB , HDD,DVD-RAM/±RW/±R ,CD-R/-RW‬ﺑﺎ ﻓـﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎي ‪ MP3‬ﺿـﺒﻂ ﺷﺪه ﺑـﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ‪ ISO9660 , UDF‬ﻳﺎ ‪ JOLIET‬ﻗـﺎﺑﻞ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣـﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎي ‪ MP3‬ﺑﺎ ﭘﺴﻮﻧـﺪ "‪ "mp3.‬ﻳﺎ "‪ "MP3.‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺻﺪاي ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎي ‪ MP3‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ‪) VBR‬ﻧﺮخ ﺑﻴﺖ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ( از ‪ ۳۲‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﻴﺖ در ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺗﺎ ‪ ۳۲۰‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﻴﺖ در ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ذﺧﻴﺮه ﺷﺪه اﻧﺪ‪,‬‬
‫ﳑﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻗﻄﻌﻲ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﺤﺪوده ﻧﺮخ ﺑﻴﺖ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﭘﺨﺶ از ‪ ۵۶‬ﻛﻴـﻠﻮ ﺑﻴﺖ در ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺗﺎ ‪ ۳۲۰‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﻴﺖ در ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺮ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﺗﺎ ‪ ۵۰۰‬ﻣﻮرد ﺷـﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ و زﻳﺮ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ در ﺧﻮد داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫❖‬
‫«‪JPEG ÍUNJœ “« ÁœUH‬‬
‫• ‪ USB ,HDD ,DVD-RAM/±RW/±R ,CD-R/-RW‬ﻫﺎي ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪه در ﻓﺮﻣﺘﻬﺎي‪ ISO9660 , UDF‬ﻳﺎ ‪ JOLIET‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎي ‪ JPEG‬ﺑﺎ ﭘﺴﻮﻧـﺪ "‪ "jpg.‬ﻳﺎ "‪ "JPG.‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﳕﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺮ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﺗﺎ ‪ ۵۰۰‬ﻣﻮرد ﺷـﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ و زﻳﺮ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ در ﺧﻮد داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ MOTION JPEG‬و ‪ JPEG‬ﭘﻴﺶ روﻧﺪه ﺗﻮﺳﻂ اﻳﻦ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﭘـﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﳕﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫❖ «‪“« ÁœUH‬‬
‫‪DivX ÍUNJœ‬‬
‫• دﻳﺴـﻚ‪USB ,HDD ,DVD-RAM/±RW/±R ,CD-R/-RW :‬‬
‫• ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎي وﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﭘـﺴﻮﻧﺪﻫﺎي زﻳﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.DivX ,.AVI ,.divx ,.avi : .‬‬
‫• ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ‪ DivX‬وﻳـﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ )‪) DivX 5.x ,DivX 4.x ,DivX 3.11 : (Codec‬ﺑﺪون ‪ QPEL‬و‪(GMC‬‬
‫• ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ‪ DivX‬ﺻﻮﺗـﻲ )‪DTS , AC3 ,LPCM ,Windows Media Audio ,MPEG1 Audio Layer 2 ,MP3 : (Codec‬‬
‫• ﻓﺮﻣﺘﻬﺎي ﭘﺸﺘـﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﺷﺪه ﻓﺎﻳﻞ زﻳﺮﻧﻮﻳﺲ‪.ass ,txt ,psb ,sub ,srt ,smi :‬‬
‫• ﻫﺮ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﺗﺎ ‪ ۵۰۰‬ﻣﻮرد ﺷـﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ و زﻳﺮ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ در ﺧﻮد داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎرﺳﻲ ‪۷ -‬‬
‫‪—U t ŸËd‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﻔﻴـﺪﻳﻮ ﻳﺆدي اﻟﻰ اﻟﺼﻮرة اﳌﺸﻮﻫﺔ ﻣﻦ أﻗﺮاص دي ﻓﻲ دي اﶈﻤﻮة ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪.‬‬
‫• وﺻﻞ ﻛﺮدن دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺑﻪ وﻳﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﺗﺎ دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎي ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺷﺪه در ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ ﻛﭙﻲ ﺷﺪن‪ ,‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮي ﻣﻐﺸﻮش ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﳕﺎﻳﺶ در آورﻧﺪ‪ .‬اﻳﻦ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه از ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮژي ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ در ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ ﻛﭙﻲ ﺷﺪن اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﲢﺖ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﺣﻖ‬
‫ﺛﺒﺖ اﺧـﺘﺮاﻋﺎت ‪ U.S.‬و ﺳﺎﻳـﺮ ﺣﻘﻮق ﻣﺎﻟﻜـﻴﺖ ﻣﻌﻨـﻮي ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑـﻪ ‪ Macrovision Corporation‬و ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺻﺎﺣـﺒﺎن ﺣﻘﻮق ﻗـﺮار‬
‫دارد‪ .‬اﺳﺘـﻔﺎده از ﺗـﻜﻨـﻮﻟﻮژي ﻣـﺤﺎﻓـﻈﺖ در ﺑـﺮاﺑﺮ ﻛـﭙﻲ ﺷـﺪن ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ ﺗﻮﺳـﻂ ‪ Macrovision Corporation‬ﺗﺎﻳـﻴﺪ ﺷـﻮد‪ ,‬و ﺑﺮاي‬
‫ﻣـﺼﺎرف ﺧـﺎﻧﮕـﻲ و ﺳﺎﻳـﺮ ﻣﺼـﺎرف ﳕﺎﻳـﺸـﻲ ﻣﺤـﺪود ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﻣﮕـﺮ اﻳﻨـﻜﻪ ﺑـﻪ ﻧﺤـﻮ دﻳـﮕﺮي ﺗـﻮﺳﻂ ‪Macrovision Corporation‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﮔﺮدﻳﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﻣـﻌﻜﻮس و ﺑﺎز ﻛﺮدن اﺟﺰا و ﻗﻄﻌﺎت دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﳑﻨﻮع اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر‬
‫ز اﻳﻦ دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ!‬
‫• دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎي ‪ CD-ROM ,CD-I ,CD-G ,LD‬و ‪ DVD-ROM‬ﻧﺒﺎﻳـﺪ ﺑﺮاي اﻳﻦ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﺑﺮده ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫]ﺗﺬﻛﺮ[‬
‫دﻳـﺴﻜـﻬﺎي ﻧـﻮع زﻳﺮ ﻗـﺎﺑﻞ ﭘـﺨـﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺑـﺎﺷﻨـﺪ‪ .CD/CD-R/-RW/MP3/JPEG/DVD-Video/DVD-RAM/±RW/±R :‬اﮔﺮ دﻳـﺴﻚ ‪DVD-‬‬
‫‪ RW/±R‬ﺷﻤﺎ در ﺣﺎﻟـﺖ ‪) Video‬وﻳﺪﻳﻮ( ﺑﺎ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه دﻳـﮕﺮي ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ,‬ﺗـﻨﻬﺎ در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان آﻧـﺮا ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﺮد ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺧـﻲ از دﻳﺴﻜﻬـﺎي ﲡﺎري و ‪ DVD‬ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛـﻪ در ﺧﺎرج از ﻣﻨﻄـﻘﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺧـﺮﻳﺪاري ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷـﻨﺪ ﺷﺎﻳﺪ ﺑـﺎ اﻳﻦ دﺳﺘﮕـﺎه ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﻧﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ اﻳﻨﮕﻮﻧﻪ دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎ ﻣﺒﺎدرت ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ,‬ﭘﻴﺎم ﻫﺎي "‪) "No Disc‬دﻳﺴﻜﻲ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﻧﻴﺴﺖ( ﻳﺎ "‪Please‬‬
‫‪) "check the regional code of the disc.‬ﻟﻄﻔًﺎ ﻛﺪﻣﻨﻄـﻘﻪ اي را ﭼﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ( ﳕﺎﻳﺶ داده ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• اﮔﺮ دﻳﺴﻚ ‪ DVD-RAM/±RW/±R‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ اي ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﺎز ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ‪ DVD Video‬ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ ,‬اﺣﺘﻤﺎل ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﺸﺪن آن‬
‫وﺟﻮد ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫❖ ﺳﺎزﮔﺎري دﻳﺴﻚ‬
‫• ﻫﻤﻪ اﻧﻮاع دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ اﻳﻦ دﺳﺘـﮕﺎه ﺳﺎزﮔﺎري ﻧﺪارﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫❖ ﲡﻬﻴﺰات ﺳﺎزﮔﺎر ﺑﺎ ‪ USB‬در درﮔﺎه ﻣﻴﺰﺑﺎن‬
‫• درﮔﺎه ﻣﻴﺰﺑﺎن ‪ USB‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ درﮔﺎه ﻫﺎي ﻣﺸـﺎﺑﻪ روي ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮﻫﺎي روﻣﻴﺰي ﻳﺎ ﻟﭗ ﺗﺎپ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫✻ اﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮل ﺑﺎ ﲡﻬﻴﺰات ذﺧﻴﺮه ﺳﺎزي اﻧﺒﻮه )ﲡﻬﻴﺰات ذﺧﻴﺮه ﺳﺎزي ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻨﻲ( و ﲡﻬﻴﺰات ‪) PTP‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ دورﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎي‬
‫ﻋﻜﺎﺳﻲ دﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎل( ﺳﺎزﮔﺎري دارد‪.‬‬
‫• درﮔﺎه ﻣﻴﺰﺑﺎن ‪ USB‬از اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ارﺗﺒﺎﻃﻲ ‪ USB 2.0‬ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﺮده و ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺎ ﲡﻬﻴﺰات رده ﭘﺎﻳﲔ ﺗﺮ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ‪USB1.1‬‬
‫)‪ (USB1.0‬ﺳﺎزﮔﺎري دارد‪.‬‬
‫• ﲡﻬﻴﺰات ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﺷﺪه در درﮔﺎه ﻣﻴـﺰﺑﺎن‬
‫✻ ﲡﻬﻴﺰات ذﺧﻴﺮه ﺳﺎزي اﻧﺒﻮه‬
‫ دورﺑﲔ ﻋﻜﺎﺳﻲ دﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎل‬‫ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ‪MP3‬‬‫‪Memory stick -‬‬
‫ ﻛﺎرت ﺧﻮان )ﻛﺎرت ﺧﻮان ﻳﻚ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺷـﻜﺎﻓﻪ(‬‫ دراﻳﻮ دﻳﺴﻚ ﺳـﺨﺖ ﺑﻴﺮوﻧﻲ ‪ :‬ﻓﻘﻂ از‪ HDD‬ﻫﺎي ﻓـﺮﻣﺖ ﺷﺪه ‪ FAT32‬ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧـﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬‫ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﲡﻬﻴﺰات ذﺧﻴﺮه ﺳﺎزي ﺑﺮداﺷﺘـﻨﻲ‪.‬‬‫✻ ﲡﻬﻴﺰات ‪) PTP‬ﭘﺮوﺗﻜﻞ ﺗﺒـﺎدل ﻋﻜﺲ ‪(Picture Transfer Protocol -‬‬
‫ دورﺑﲔ ﻋﻜﺎﺳﻲ دﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎل )در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ PTP‬از ﻣـﻴﺎن ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎي اﺗﺼﺎل ‪(USB‬‬‫• اﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮل ﻓﻘﻂ از ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ FAT 16/32‬ﭘـﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• اﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮل ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﺗﺎ ‪ ۴‬ﭘﺎرﺗـﻴﺸﻦ را ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻮﺟﻪ )اﺣﺘﻴﺎط(‬
‫✻ اﮔﺮ از ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻧﺎزل اﺳﺘـﻔﺎده ﻛﺮده ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ ,‬اﻣﻜﺎن دارد وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ‪ USB‬ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻧﺸﻮد‪.‬‬
‫✻ ﺳﺎزﮔﺎري ﺑﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻫﺎي ‪ MP3‬ﺗﺎ ﺣـﺪي ﻣﺤﺪود ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ اﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮل ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠـﻬﺎي ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ‪ MP3‬را ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬‫ اﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮل ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬـﺎي ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻛﺪﮔﺬاري ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎ ‪) DRM‬ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ دﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎل ﺣﻘﻮق ‪ (Digital Right management -‬را‬‫ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﳕﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫✻ اﺗﺼﺎل ﻫﺎب ‪ USB‬ﻳﺎ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎت ﻫﺎب ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒـﺎﻧﻲ ﳕﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫✻ ﲡﻬﻴﺰات ‪ USB‬ﺑﺴﻴﺎر ﻣﺘﻨﻮع و ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻧﻲ وﺟﻮد دارﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺧﻲ از ﲡﻬﻴﺰات ‪ USB‬ذﻛﺮ ﺷﺪه ﻓﻮق ﺷﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ اﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮل‬
‫ﺳﺎزﮔﺎري ﻧﺪاﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺒﺎرت دﻳﮕﺮ‪ ,‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻣﻴﺰﺑﺎن ‪ USB‬اﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮل ﺗﻀﻤﲔ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺳﺎزﮔﺎري ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﲡﻬﻴﺰات‬
‫‪ USB‬ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫✻ اﻳـﻦ ﻣـﺤـﺼـﻮل ﻗــﺎدر ﺑـﻪ ﭘـﺸـﺘـﻴـﺒـﺎﻧـﻲ از ﲡـﻬــﻴـﺰات ‪ USB‬ﺳـﺮﻋـﺖ ﺑـﺎﻻ و ﭘـﺮﺳـﺮﻋـﺖ اﺳـﺖ‪) .‬از ﲡــﻬـﻴـﺰات ﺳـﺮﻋـﺖ ﭘـﺎﻳـﲔ‬
‫ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﳕﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ(‬
‫‪ - ۸‬ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر‬
‫• ‪) TPL‬ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎت ﻫﺪف ‪(Target Peripheral List -‬‬
‫از آﳒﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﻪ اﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮل از ﻧﻮع ‪ Windows XP‬ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﻴﺰﺑﺎن ‪ USB‬ادﻏﺎم ﺷﺪه ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ,‬ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﲡﻬﻴﺰات ‪ USB‬ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﺷﺪه ﻣﺤﺪود ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﺎرﻛﺮد ﻣﻴﺰﺑﺎن ‪ USB‬و ﺳﺎزﮔﺎري اﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮل ﺑﺎ ﲡﻬﻴﺰات زﻳﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‬
‫ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‪) .‬اﻟـﺒﺘﻪ اﻧﺘﻈﺎر ﻣـﻲ رود ﻣﺤﺼﻮل ﺑﺘﻮاﻧـﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ از اﻳﻦ دﺳـﺘﮕﺎه ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺴـﻴﺎري دﻳﮕﺮ از ﲡﻬـﻴﺰات ‪ USB‬ﻧﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺑﺨﻮﺑﻲ ﻛﺎر ﻛﻨﺪ(‬
‫✻ ‪)DSC‬دورﺑﲔ ﻋﻜﺴﺒﺮداري دﻳـﺠﻴﺘﺎل ‪(Digital Still Camera -‬‬
‫ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه‬
‫‪Sony‬‬
‫‪Olympus‬‬
‫‪Nikon‬‬
‫‪Panasonic‬‬
‫‪Canon‬‬
‫‪Fuji‬‬
‫‪VP-MS11, S800, Pro815, V20, V10, D60, UCA5‬‬
‫‪—U t ŸËd‬‬
‫‪Samsung‬‬
‫ﻣﺎرك‬
‫‪DSC-W50, DSC-R1, DSC-P200, DSC-P150‬‬
‫‪C-70 zoom, SP-700, FE5500, C-470Z‬‬
‫‪Coolpix 7900, Coolpix-p3, Coolpix S2‬‬
‫‪DMC-FX01, DMC-LX1S, DMC-FZ5‬‬
‫‪IXUS 60, IXUS 600, PowerShot A700, IXUS 700, A620, S80‬‬
‫‪Finepix-F700‬‬
‫✻ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه‬
‫‪i-river‬‬
‫‪Samsung‬‬
‫ﻣﺎرك‬
‫‪N11, T30, T10, Mplayer‬‬
‫‪YP-T8, YP-U2, YP-T9, YP-P2‬‬
‫✻ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻻت‬
‫ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه‬
‫ﻣﺎرك‬
‫‪PMP‬‬
‫‪COWON‬‬
‫‪A2‬‬
‫دﻳﺴﻚ ﺳﺨﺖ ﺑﻴﺮوﻧﻲ‬
‫‪DATAgram‬‬
‫‪DHC-350‬‬
‫ﻛﺎرت ﺧﻮان‬
‫‪Unicon‬‬
‫‪UC-601R‬‬
‫■‬
‫از ﻣﻴﺎن ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻫﺎي ‪ MP3‬ﻓﻮق‪ ,‬آﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﻪ از ﻛﻼس ذﺧﻴﺮه ﺳﺎزي اﻧﺒﻮه اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﳕﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎرﺳﻲ ‪۹ -‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻨﺪرﺟﺎت‬
—UD«
WOË√ UNOM
wuL ÍUNOÖóË
ULM«— tÇdœ Êb
«u “« q
HDD Ë DVD ÁbM?M j{ “« ÁœUH« “d
ÁU~œ ÍbM t Êœd “U
nu«
—Ëœ Á«— “« ‰d?M ÁU~œ U wzUM¬
≤
≥
±≤
±≥
±¥
±∂
±∏
≤±
HDD Ë DVD ÁbMM j{ Êœd qË
Video wËd q?U Êœd qË Í«d Íd~œ ‘Ë—
Audio wËd qU Êœd qË Í«d Íd~œ ‘Ë—
Êu?euK t HDMI/DVI ‰UB«
DV ¨AV 2 IN ¨AV 1 IN ÍœË—Ë wÖœU gO Êœd qË
USB «eON& t Êœd qË
≤≤
≤≥
≤µ
≤∑
≤π
≥±
tH ÍË— ÍuM —œ Xd
‰UB« “« bF —Uœu rOEM
XU rOEM
‰U
U rOEM
ÊU“ ÍU tMeÖ rOEM
rO ÍU tMeÖ rOEM
«b ÍU tMeÖ rOEM
wubË ÍU tMeÖ rOEM
sb«Ë qH rOEM
j{ ÍU tMeÖ rOEM
≥≤
≥≤
≥¥
≥¥
≥∂
≥∂
≥∏
≥π
¥≤
¥≥
©DVD-Video Í«d jI® tIDM b
g?Ä qU ÍUNJœ Ÿ«u
« ÊUA
gÄ qU ÍUNJœ
pœ p gÄ
©Ê«uM® Title ÍuM Ë ©p?œ® Disk ÍuM “« ÁœUH«
g?Ä t ◊ud ÍU tLœ “« ÁœUH«
INFO tLœ “« ÁœUH«
WLd« WG —UO«
wu ÍUNU
U Ë «b »U
«
5—Ëœ tË«“ Êœ«œ dOOG
gÄ —«dJ
wULMÖ—e
U—«cÖ Xö “« ÁœUH«
U t
UA
“« ÁœUH«
MP3/ wu Íœ w p gÄ
fJ p ÁbUA
DIVX gÄ
¥µ
¥µ
¥µ
¥∑
¥∏
¥∏
µ∞
µ∞
µ±
µ±
µ±
µ≤
µ≥
µ¥
µµ
∂∞
∂≤
۲
—U t ŸËd
۲۲
œ«bù«Ë qOu«
۳۲
rO Í“UUÄd Ë rOEM
۴۵
gÄ
‫ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻨﺪرﺟﺎت‬- ۱۰
۶۴
j{
U—bM XdN
j{ qU ÍUNJœ«
j{ ÍUNd
©j{® Recording XU
j{ qU dO$ dËUB
Í—u j{
wu?bË 5—Ëœ p ÍË— “« Êœd wá
(OTR) tL?œ ÊœdA —U p U Êœd j{
ÊUeL gÄ Ë j{
Áb
“ ‰UM~O? p Ê«uMF w
U“ XHO XOKU
w
U“ Íe— tU
d U j{
U Áb j{ XdN t Ëd
∂¥
∂µ
∂∂
∂∑
∂∏
∂π
∑∞
∑±
∑≤
∑≥
∑µ
©sËUM XdN® ÁœU g«dË
©sËUM XdN?® Í“U Vd XOKU “« ÁœUH«
Navigation ÍuM
«u »U
«
©gÄ XdN® tdAOÄ g«dË
fJ?FU U DVD d HDD “« Êœd wá
DivX U JPEG ¨MP3 Êœd wá
DivXØduB?ØwIOu qU ÂU
Êœ«œ dOOG
pœ Xdb
∑∑
∏±
∏≤
∏≥
∏≥
∏∏
∏π
π±
π≤
wU VO
π∂
ld ÍULM«—
UBA
π∏
g«dË
۱۱ - ‫ﻓﺎرﺳﻲ‬
۷۷
g«dË
۹۶
۹۸
‫ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر‬
‫‪wuL ÍUNOÖóË‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از اﻳﻦ دﺳﺘـﮕﺎه ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎي دﻳﺠﻴـﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ را از روي دﻳﺴﻚ ﻫﺎي ‪ DVD-RAM/±RW/±R‬ﻳﺎ ‪HDD‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻳﺎ روي آﻧﻬﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از اﻳﻦ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﻫﻤﭽﻨﲔ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺼﺎوﻳﺮ دﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﻲ را روي دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎي ‪DVD-‬‬
‫‪ RAM/±RW‬ﻳﺎ‪ HDD‬وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫{‪j‬‬
‫‪HDD‬‬
‫• ‪DVD-HR773‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪودًا ‪ ۲۶۴‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ )در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ ۸)EP‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ(( روي ‪ ۱۶۰‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ دﻳﺴﻚ ﺳﺨﺖ )‪ (HDD‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪DVD-HR775‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪودًا ‪ ۴۲۱‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ )در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ ۸)EP‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ(( روي ‪ ۲۵۰‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ دﻳﺴﻚ ﺳﺨﺖ )‪ (HDD‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪DVD-HR777‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪودًا ‪ ۵۳۴‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ )در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ ۸)EP‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ(( روي ‪ ۳۲۰‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ دﻳﺴﻚ ﺳﺨﺖ )‪ (HDD‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ وﺟﻮد ‪ DVD‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ و ‪ HDD‬ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺑـﺎﻻ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎن روي اﻳﻦ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻗﺎدر ﺧﻮاﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﻮد از‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ اﻧﻌﻄﺎف ﻓﺮاواﻧﻲ ﺑـﺮاي ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﻣﻮارد ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪه روي ‪ HDD‬و دﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ داﺷﱳ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﻪ آﻧﻬﺎ در ﻫﺮ زﻣـﺎن‬
‫دﳋﻮاه ﺑﻬﺮه ﻣﻨﺪ ﺷﺪه‪ ,‬و ﻳﺎ آﻧﻬﺎ را ﺑـﺮاي ﺗﻬﻴﻪ آرﺷﻴﻮ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ روي دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﻫﺎي ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ‪ DVD‬دﻳﮕﺮ روي دﻳـﺴﻜﻬﺎي‬
‫‪ DVD‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪DVD Ë HDD 5 Êœd wá‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از اﻳﻦ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﻗﺎدر ﺧﻮاﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﻮد ﻣﻮارد ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪه ﺧﻮد را از روي ‪ HDD‬روي ‪ DVD‬ﻫﺎي ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﭙﻲ ﳕﻮده‪,‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ از روي ‪ DVD‬ﺑﺮ ‪ HDD‬ﻛﭙﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﭙﻲ ﻓﻘـﻂ در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻨﻮان اﺻﻠﻲ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ اﳒﺎم اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫{‪ÊUeL gÄ Ë j‬‬
‫ﻼ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ از ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺿﺒﻂ و ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺮاي ‪ DVD‬و دﻳﺴﻚ ﺳـﺨﺖ داﺧﻠﻲ )‪ (HDD‬ﻛﺎﻣ ً‬
‫ﺑﻌﻨﻮان ﻣﺜﺎل ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ را ﻛﻪ در ﺣﺎل ﭘﺨﺶ اﺳﺖ روي ﻳﻚ ‪ DVD‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ و ﻳﺎ روي ‪HDD‬‬
‫ﻼ روي ﻫﻤﺎن ‪ DVD‬ﻳﺎ ‪ HDD‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺮده اﻳﺪ‪ ,‬ﲤﺎﺷﺎ ﳕﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺮده‪ ,‬و در ﻫﻤﺎن زﻣﺎن ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣـﻪ اي را ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒ ً‬
‫‪w
U“ Íe— tU
d U j{ Í«d XOHO —Uœu rOEM‬‬
‫اﮔﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ FR‬را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ,‬ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ وﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر و ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮي ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﲤﺎﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ وﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ‬
‫در زﻣﺎن ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ رﻳﺰي ﺷﺪه در ﻓﻀﺎي ﺧﺎﻟـﻲ دﻳﺴﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﻮد‪) .‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ۷۳‬ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ(‬
‫‪wubË 5—Ëœ ÍË— “« U Áœ«œ Êœd wá‬‬
‫‪DV ÍœË—Ë wÖœU gO “« ÁœUH?« U ‰UO%œ‬‬
‫ﺑـﺎ اﺳـﺘـﻔـﺎده از ﻓـﻴـﺶ ﻣـﺎدﮔـﻲ ورودي ‪ IEEE 1394-4) DV‬ﭘـﲔ‪ ۴/‬ﭘـﲔ( از روي وﺳـﺎﻳـﻞ و ﲡـﻬـﻴـﺰات وﻳـﺪﻳـﻮﻳـﻲ ‪ DV‬روي ‪ HDD‬و‬
‫دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎي ‪ DVD-RAM/±RW/±R‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺑﻪ ﺻـﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ۷۹‬ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ(‬
‫«‪ôU XOHO U Áb
Ë— gOÄ sJ‬‬
‫اﺳﻜـﻦ ﻛﺮدن ﭘـﻴﺶ روﻧـﺪه ﺗﺼﺎوﻳـﺮي وﻳﺪﻳـﻮﻳﻲ ﺑـﺎ ﻗﺪرت ﺗﻔـﻜﻴـﻚ ﺑﺎﻻ و ﺑـﺪون ﻟﺮزش اراﺋﻪ ﻣـﻲ ﳕﺎﻳـﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺪار ﺟـﺪا ﻛﻨﻨـﺪه ‪۱۰‬‬
‫ﺑـﻴـﺘﻲ ‪ ۵۴‬ﻣـﮕـﺎﻫـﺮﺗـﺰي ‪ DAC‬و ‪ Y/C 2D‬ﺑـﺎﻻﺗﺮﻳـﻦ ﻛـﻴـﻔـﻴـﺖ ﭘﺨـﺶ و ﺿـﺒـﻂ را ﺑـﻪ ﺷـﻤﺎ اراﺋـﻪ ﻣـﻲ ﳕـﺎﻳـﺪ‪) .‬ﺑـﻪ ﺻﻔـﺤـﺎت ‪ ۴۰‬ﺗـﺎ ‪۴۲‬‬
‫ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ(‬
‫‪tbOU‬‬
‫‪DivX‬‬
‫‪ DivX Certified ,DivX‬و آرﻣـﻬــﺎي ﻣـﺮﺑـﻮﻃـﻪ ﺟــﺰو ﻋـﻼﺋـﻢ ﺛــﺒـﺖ ﺷـﺪه ﲡــﺎري ﺷـﺮﻛـﺖ ‪ DivXNetworks, Inc‬ﺑـﻮده و‬
‫ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ اﻣﺘﻴﺎز ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﻮرد ﻗﺮار ﮔـﺮﻓﺘﻪ اﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﺤﺼﻮل رﺳﻤﻲ ﻣﻮرد ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ ®‪DivX‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻓﻴﻠﻤﻬﺎي ®‪) DivX‬ﺑﻌﻼوه ®‪ ( ۶ DivX‬و ﭘﺨﺶ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎي رﺳﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫اي ®‪DivX‬‬
‫‪©ôU XOHO U Í« t
U—bMÇ j«—® HDMI‬‬
‫‪ HDMI‬ﺑﺎ ﺑﻜﺎرﮔﻴﺮي ﻳﻚ ﻣﺴـﻴﺮ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎل ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪/‬ﺻﺪاي دﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎل ﺧﺎﻟﺺ از دﺳـﺘﮕﺎه ﺿﺒﻂ دي وي دي‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن‪ ,‬ﻣﻴﺰان ﭘﺎرازﻳﺖ را در ﺗـﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ‪ HDD‬و ‪ DVD‬از ‪ 1080i ,720P ,576P‬و ‪ 1080P‬ﭘﺸـﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) WHO'Ë‬‬
‫‪ Anynet+‬ﻗـﺎﺑـﻠـﻴــﺘـﻲ اﺳـﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﺑـﻪ ﺷـﻤــﺎ اﻣـﻜـﺎن ﻣـﻲ دﻫـﺪ در ﺻـﻮرت وﺻـﻞ ﻛــﺮدن ﺿـﺒـﻂ ﻛـﻨـﻨـﺪه ﺑــﻪ ﺗـﻠـﻮﻳـﺰﻳـﻮن‬
‫‪Samsung‬ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‪ , HDMI‬ﺑﺎ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل از راه دور ﻣـﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن‪ , SAMSUNG‬دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬
‫‪HDD‬و ‪ DVD‬ﺧــﻮد را ﻛــﻨـﺘــﺮل ﻛــﻨــﻴـﺪ‪) .‬اﻳــﻦ ﻗــﺎﺑــﻠــﻴـﺖ ﺗــﻨــﻬــﺎ در ﺗـﻠــﻮﻳــﺰﻳــﻮن ﻫــﺎي ‪ SAMSUNG‬ﻛـﻪ از‪Anynet+‬‬
‫ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ وﺟﻮد دارد‪(.‬‬
‫‪EZ record XU‬‬
‫ﻟﻄﻔًﺎ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻛﺴﺐ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺗﻜﻤﻴﻠـﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ۴۴‬دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ راﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪U Áœ«œ ‰œU Í«d USB j«Ë‬‬
‫ﺷـﻤﺎ ﻣـﻲ ﺗـﻮاﻧﻴـﺪ ﺑـﺎ اﺳﺘـﻔـﺎده از واﺳﻂ ‪ USB‬ﻓـﺎﻳـﻠﻬـﺎي ‪ MP3 ,JPEG‬و ‪ DivX‬را از ﭘـﺨﺶ ﻛـﻨـﻨﺪه ‪ ,MP3‬ﺣـﺎﻓـﻈﻪ ‪ USB‬ﻳـﺎ دورﺑـﲔ‬
‫دﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎل ﺑﺮوي ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ‪ HDD‬و ‪ DVD‬ﻛﭙﻲ ﻛـﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤـﭽﻨـﲔ ﻣﻲ ﺗـﻮاﻧﻴـﺪ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘـﻔﺎده از واﺳـﻂ ‪ USB‬ﻓﺎﻳـﻠﻬﺎي ‪ MP3 ,JPEG‬و ‪ DivX‬را از ﺿـﺒﻂ ﻛـﻨﻨـﺪه ‪ HDD‬و ‪ DVD‬ﺑﺮوي ﭘـﺨﺶ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ‪ ,MP3‬ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ‪ USB‬ﻳﺎ دورﺑﲔ دﻳﺠﻴﺘـﺎل ﻛﭙﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۱۲‬ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر‬
‫‪ULM«— tÇdœ Êb
«u “« q‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻤًﺎ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ اﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎت زﻳﺮ را ﻗﺒـﻞ از ﺧﻮاﻧﺪن دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ راﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﻣﺮور ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪b bM«u Áœd —UJ ULM«— tÇdœ s« —œ t wUœU/‬‬
‫‪HDD‬‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺘـﻬﺎي ﻣﻮﺟﻮد در ‪ HDD‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺑـﻮط ﺑﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴـﺘﻲ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ در دﻳﺴـﻚ ﻫﺎي ‪ DVD‬ﻳﺎ دﻳﺴﻚ ﻫﺎي)‪DVD±R/-RW(V‬‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺷﺪه اﻧﺪ‪ ,‬وﺟﻮد دارد‪.‬‬
‫‪RAM‬‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺘﻬـﺎي ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﺑﺮاي ‪ DVD-RAM‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪-RW‬‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺘﻬـﺎي ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﺑﺮاي ‪ DVD-RW‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪-R‬‬
‫‪+RW‬‬
‫‪+R‬‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺘﻬﺎي ﻣـﻮﺟﻮد ﺑﺮاي ‪ DVD-R‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴـﺘﻲ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ در دﻳﺴﻚ ﻫﺎي ‪ DVD+RW‬وﺟﻮد دارد‪.‬‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴـﺘﻲ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ در دﻳﺴﻚ ﻫﺎي ‪ DVD+R‬وﺟﻮد دارد‪.‬‬
‫‪CD-DA‬‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺘـﻬﺎي ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﺑﺮاي ﺳﻲ دي ﻫﺎي داده )‪ CD-R‬ﻳﺎ ‪ (CD-RW‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪JPEG‬‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺑﺮاي دﻳﺴـﻜﻬﺎي ‪ CD-R/-RW‬ﻳﺎ ‪ DVD±R/±RW/-RAM‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪MP3‬‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺑﺮاي دﻳﺴـﻜﻬﺎي ‪ CD-R/-RW‬ﻳﺎ ‪ DVD±R/±RW/-RAM‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪DivX‬‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺑﺮاي دﻳﺴﻜـﻬﺎي ‪ CD-R/-RW‬ﻳﺎ ‪ DVD±R/±RW/-RAM‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫اﺣﺘﻴﺎط‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮاردي ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴـﺘﻲ ﻋﻤﻞ ﳕﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ و ﻳﺎ اﻣﻜﺎن ﻟﻐﻮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت و‬
‫ﺟﻮد دارد‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ‬
‫اﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻧﻜﺎت ﻳﺎ دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤـﻠﻬﺎﻳﻲ اﺳﺖ در آن ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﻛﻤﻚ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر‬
‫ﻛﺮد ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻃﺮح ﺷﺪه اﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎر ﻓﺸﺮدن‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫‪USB‬‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ اﺳﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻳﻚ دﻛﻤﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ اﺟﺮا ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺘـﻲ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ در ‪ USB‬وﺟﻮد دارد‪.‬‬
‫‪ULM«— tÇdœ s« “« ÁœUH« “d Á—U—œ‬‬
‫‪ (۱‬ﺣﺘﻤًﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ از اﻳﻨﻜﻪ از دﺳﺘﮕـﺎه اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ,‬دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻠﻬﺎي اﳝﻨﻲ را ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻛﺮده و ﺧﻮد را ﺑـﺎ آﻧﻬﺎ آﺷﻨﺎ ﺳﺎزﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﺎت ‪ ۲‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ۹‬ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴـﺪ(‬
‫‪ (۲‬اﮔﺮ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﻲ ﭘﻴﺶ آﻣﺪ‪ ,‬ﺑﺨﺶ ﻋﻴـﺐ ﻳﺎﺑﻲ را ﭼﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﺎت ‪ ۹۶‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ۹۷‬ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻳـﻴﺪ(‬
‫‪X«— wá‬‬
‫‪©2008 Samsung Electronics Co.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺣﻘﻮق ﻣﺤﻔﻮظ اﺳﺖ‪ ,‬ﻫﻴﭻ ﺑﺨﺶ از اﻳﻦ دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ راﻫﻨﻤﺎ و ﻳﺎ ﲤﺎم آن ﺑﺪون ﻛﺴﺐ اﺟﺎزه ﻛﺘﺒﻲ ‪.Samsung Electronics Co‬‬
‫از ﻗﺒﻞ‪ ,‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎزآﻓﺮﻳﻨﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻛﭙـﻲ ﻛﺮدن ﳕﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎرﺳﻲ ‪۱۳ -‬‬
‫‪—U t ŸËd‬‬
‫ﳕﺎد‬
‫اﺻﻄﻼح‬
‫ﻣﻌﻨﻲ‬
‫ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر‬
‫‪HDD Ë DVD ÁbMM j{ “« ÁœUH« “d‬‬
‫‪bOM »U
« «— HDD U pœ Ÿu
∫ ± ÂUÖ‬‬
‫اﻳﻦ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﻗﺎدر ﺑﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ روي دﻳﺴﻜﻬـﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮع زﻳﺮ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫اﮔﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮاﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﻄﻮر ﻣﻜﺮر روي دﻳﺴـﻜﻲ واﺣﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﻳﺎ دﻳﺴﻚ را ﭘﺲ از ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ,‬وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ ﳕﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ ,‬دﻳﺴﻜﻬـﺎي‬
‫داراي ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎزﻧﻮﻳﺴﻲ ‪ DVD±RW‬را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛـﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫اﮔﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮاﻫﻴﺪ ﻣﻮارد ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪه را ﺑﺪون ﻫﻴـﭽﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮي ذﺧﻴﺮه ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ,‬ﻳﻚ ‪ DVD±R‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎزﻧﻮﻳﺴﻲ‬
‫)‪ (Non-rewritable‬ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧـﻴﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎي ﺧﻮد را ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤًﺎ روي ‪ HDD‬داﺧﻠﻲ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ذﺧﻴﺮه ﻛـﺮده و ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎي ذﺧﻴﺮه ﺷﺪه را وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ ﻛﻨﻴـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪j{ UOKL “U$¬ Í«d pœ Êœd Xd ∫ ≤ ÂUÖ‬‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‪ ,‬ﺑﺮﺧﻼف دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﻫﺎي وﻳﺪﻳﻮ‪ ,‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﺾ ﻗﺮار داده ﺷﺪن دﻳﺴﻚ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻧﺸﺪه ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ‬
‫ﻛﺮدن آن ﻣﻲ ﭘﺮدازد‪ .‬اﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺑﺮاي آﻣﺎده ﺳـﺎﺧﱳ دﻳﺴﻚ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮر ﺿﺒﻂ ﺿﺮوري اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫«‪p “« ÁœUH‬‬
‫‪HDD‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻛﺮدن ﺿﺮوري ﻧﺪارد‪.‬‬
‫«‪ÍUNJœ “« ÁœUH‬‬
‫‪DVD-RAM‬‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﻧـﻮع دﻳﺴﻚ را ﻣﻲ ﺗـﻮان در ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺿﺒـﻂ ‪) DVD-Video‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ (VR‬ﻓﺮﻣـﺖ ﳕﻮد‪ .‬ﺑﺮ اﺳﺎس ﻧـﻴﺎز ﺧﻮد ﻓـﻴﻠﻢ ﺿﺒـﻂ ﺷﺪه را‬
‫وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ ﻛﺮده و ﻳﻚ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﻪ ﺗـﺮﺗﻴﺒﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮﺗﺎن اﺳﺖ‪ ,‬اﻳﺠﺎد ﳕﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫«‪DVD-RW ’d «b‬‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﻧﻮع دﻳﺴﻚ را ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان در ﻓـﺮﻣﺖ ‪) DVD-Video‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ (V‬ﻳﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪) DVD-Video‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ (VR‬ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﳕـﻮد در ﻣﻮرد‬
‫دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎي اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻧﺸﺪه‪ ,‬ﭘـﻴﺎم درﺧﻮاﺳﺘﻲ ﻣﺒﻨﻲ ﺑﺮ آﻣﺎده ﺳﺎزي دﻳﺴﻚ ﻳﺎ ﻋﺪم اﳒﺎم آن ﳕﺎﻳﺶ داده ﺧﻮاﻫـﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬اﮔﺮ‬
‫"‪ "DVD-VR‬ﻳﺎ "‪ "DVD-V‬را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴـﺪ‪ ,‬ﻛﺎر آﻣﺎده ﺳﺎزي آﻏﺎز ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷـﻤـﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗـﻮاﻧـﻴـﺪ دﻳـﺴـﻜﻬـﺎي ﺣـﺎﻟـﺖ ﻓـﻴﻠـﻢ را روي ﭘـﺨـﺶ ﻛـﻨـﻨﺪه ﻫـﺎي ‪ DVD‬ﻣـﺨـﺘـﻠﻔـﻲ ﭘـﺨـﺶ ﻛـﻨـﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑـﺎ دﻳـﺴـﻜـﻬﺎي ‪ VR‬اﻣـﻜـﺎﻧـﺎت‬
‫وﻳﺮاﻳﺸﻲ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮي در اﺧﺘﻴﺎر دارﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫«‪p “« ÁœUH‬‬
‫‪DVD-R‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻛﺮدن ‪ DVD-R‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﺿﺮوري اﺳﺖ و ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪) Video‬وﻳﺪﻳﻮ( ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪ .‬ﺷﻤـﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ اﻳﻦ ﻧﻮع‬
‫دﻳﺴﻚ را ﺗﻨﻬﺎ وﻗﺘﻲ در دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﻫـﺎي ‪ DVD‬ﻣﺨﺘﻠŸ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﺎزي روي آن اﳒﺎم ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫«‪ÍUNJœ “« ÁœUH‬‬
‫‪DVD+RW‬‬
‫• در ﻣﻮرد دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎي اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻧﺸﺪه ‪ , DVD+RW‬ﭘﻴﺎم درﺧﻮاﺳﺘﻲ ﻣﺒﻨﻲ ﺑﺮ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻛﺮدن دﻳﺴﻚ ﻳﺎ ﻋﺪم اﳒﺎم آن ﳕﺎﻳﺶ داده‬
‫ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬اﮔﺮ "‪ "DVD+RW‬را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ,‬ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻛﺮدن آﻏﺎز ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫«‪ÍUNJœ “« ÁœUH‬‬
‫‪DVD+R‬‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﻧﻮع دﻳﺴﻚ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر ﻓﺮﻣـﺖ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۱۴‬ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر‬
‫‪j{ ∫ ≥ ÂUÖ‬‬
‫دو روش ﻣﺨﺘﻠŸ ﺑﺮاي ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺮدن وﺟﻮد دارد‪ ,‬ﺿﺒـﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ و ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ رﻳﺰي زﻣﺎﻧﻲ )ﺑﺎ ﺗﺎﳝﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ رﻳﺰي زﻣﺎﻧﻲ )ﺑـﺎ ﺗﺎﳝﺮ( ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻃﺒﻘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪي ﺷﺪه دارد‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ‪) XP :‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ(‪) SP ,‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد(‪) LP,‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ(‪ ,‬و ‪) EP‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﲤﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺪه( ﺑﺮ‬
‫اﺳﺎس ﺣـﺎﻟﺖ ﺿﺒـﻂ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕـﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺿـﺒﻂ روي ﺣﺎﻟـﺖ ‪ FR‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴـﻢ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‪ ,‬ﺑﻬﺘـﺮﻳﻦ ﻛﻴـﻔﻴﺖ ﳑـﻜﻨﻪ ﺗـﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑـﺮ اﺳﺎس زﻣﺎن‬
‫ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪه روي دﻳﺴﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ ‪ DVD‬از ﺑﺨﺸﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎم ﻋﻨﻮان‪ ,‬و زﻳﺮﺑـﺨﺸﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎم ﻓﺼﻞ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪Áb j{ pœ p g«dË ∫ µ ÂUÖ‬‬
‫وﻳـﺮاﻳﺶ ﻛـﺮدن دﻳﺴـﻜـﻬﺎ از ﻧـﻮارﻫﺎي ﺳـﻨـﺘﻲ وﻳـﺪﻳﻮﻳـﻲ ﺳـﺎده ﺗﺮ اﺳـﺖ‪ .‬اﻳﻦ ﺿـﺒـﻂ ﻛﻨـﻨﺪه از ﻗـﺎﺑﻠـﻴـﺘﻬـﺎي ﻣﺨـﺘـﻠŸ وﻳـﺮاﻳﺸـﻲ‬
‫ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ,‬ﻛﻪ ﻓﻘـﻂ ﺑﺮاي ‪ DVD‬ﻫﺎ و ‪ HDD‬ﻫﺎ اﻣﻜﺎن ﭘﺬﻳﺮ اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻣﻨﻮي ﺳﺎده و آﺳﺎن وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ‪ ,‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺘﻬﺎي ﻣﺨﺘﻠŸ وﻳﺮاﻳﺸﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺣﺬف‪ ,‬ﻛﭙﻲ‪ ,‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺎم‪ ,‬ﻗﻔﻞ‪ ,‬و ﻏﻴﺮه‬
‫را در ﻳﻚ ﻋﻨﻮان ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪه اﻋﻤﺎل ﻛﻨـﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫«‪©HDD ¨VR XU —œ DVD-RAM/-RW®gÄ XdN p œU%‬‬
‫ﺷـﻤﺎ ﻣـﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧـﻴـﺪ ﺑﺎ اﻳـﻦ دﺳـﺘﮕـﺎه ﺿﺒـﻂ ﻛـﻨﻨـﺪه‪ ,‬ﻓﻬـﺮﺳـﺖ ﭘﺨـﺸﻲ ﺟـﺪﻳـﺪ روي دﻳﺴـﻜـﻲ واﺣﺪ اﻳـﺠﺎد ﻛـﺮده و آﻧـﺮا ﺑﺪون اﻋـﻤﺎل‬
‫ﻫﻴﭽﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮي در ﻣﻮارد ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷـﺪه اﺻﻠﻲ‪ ,‬وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪∫ ∂ ÂUÖ‬‬
‫
‪DVD ÍU ÁU~œ d?U —œ gÄ Ë Í“U wzUN‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ﭘﺨﺶ ‪ DVD‬ﺧﻮد در ﺳﺎﻳﺮ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﻫﺎي ‪ ,DVD‬ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﺎزي آن ﺿﺮوري ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺑﻮد‪ .‬اﺑﺘﺪا‪ ,‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ و ﺿﺒﻂ را‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎن ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻳﺴﻚ را ﻧﻬﺎﺋـﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪bOM? w ÁœUH« VR XU? —œ DVD-RW pœ “« t wU?~M‬‬
‫دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎي ‪ DVD‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪه در ﺣﺎﻟـﺖ ‪ VR‬ﻓﻘﻂ در ‪ ,HDD & DVD RECORDER‬و ﻧﻪ در ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻫﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪bOM w? ÁœUH« ©ubË® Video X?U —œ DVD-RW pœ “« t wU?~M‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺑﺘﻮان دﻳﺴﻚ را در دﺳﺘﮕـﺎه ﻫﺎي دﻳﮕﺮي ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ از اﻳﻦ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﺮد‪ ,‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ آﻧﺮا ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺳـﺎﺧﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ از اﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﻧﻬﺎﺋـﻲ ﺳﺎزي اﳒﺎم ﺷﺪ‪ ,‬دﻳﮕﺮ ﳕﻲ ﺗﻮان ﻫﻴﭽﮕﻮﻧﻪ وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ ﻳﺎ ﺿﺒﻄﻲ روي دﻳﺴﻚ اﳒـﺎم داد‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺮدن ﻣﺠﺪد روي اﻳﻦ دﻳـﺴﻚ اﻣﻜﺎن ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ دﻳﺴﻚ را ﻏﻴﺮ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪b?OM? w ÁœUH?« DVD±R p?œ p “« t? wU~?M‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺑﺘﻮان دﻳﺴﻚ را در دﺳﺘﮕـﺎه دﻳﮕﺮي ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ از اﻳﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﺮد‪ ,‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ دﻳﺴﻚ را ﻧﻬـﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ از اﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﻧﻬﺎﺋـﻲ ﺳﺎزي اﳒﺎم ﺷﺪ‪ ,‬دﻳﮕﺮ ﳕﻲ ﺗﻮان ﻫﻴﭽﮕﻮﻧﻪ وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ ﻳﺎ ﺿﺒﻄﻲ روي دﻳﺴﻚ اﳒـﺎم داد‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗـﻮاﻧﻴﺪ دﻳـﺴﻚ را ﺑﻪ ﻃـﻮر ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر ﺑﺎ اﺳـﺘﻔﺎده از ﻗـﺎﺑﻠﻴـﺖ ‪ EZ Record‬ﻧﻬﺎﺋـﻲ ﺳﺎزﻳﺪ‪) .‬ﺑـﻪ ﺻﻔﺤـﻪ ‪ ۴۴‬ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ(‬
‫ﻓﺎرﺳﻲ ‪۱۵ -‬‬
‫‪—U t ŸËd‬‬
‫‪gÄ ∫ ¥ ÂUÖ‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﻋﻨﻮان دﳋﻮاه ﺧﻮد را ﺑﺮاي ﭘﺨﺶ در ﻣﻨﻮي ﺑﻪ ﳕﺎﻳﺶ درآﻣﺪه اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﺮده و ﺳﭙﺲ ﻓﻮرًا ﭘﺨﺶ آﻧﺮا ﺷﺮوع‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر‬
‫‪ÁU~œ ÍbM t Êœd “U‬‬
‫‪w
U “«u‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ وﺟﻮة اﳌﻠﺤﻘﺎت اﳌﺘﻮّﻓﺮة اﻟـﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪USB‬‬
‫‪PAUSE‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ RF‬ﺑﺮاي ﺗﻞ وﻳﺰﻳﻮن‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪Video/Audio‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫‪REPEAT‬‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل از راه دور‬
‫دﻟﻴﻞ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ راﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﺑﺮاي دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬
‫از راه دور )ﺳﺎﻳﺰ ‪(AAA‬‬
‫¬‪—Ëœ Á«— “« ‰dM ÁU~œ Êœd ÁœU‬‬
‫‪—Ëœ Á«— “« ‰dM ÁU?~œ —œ ÍdU Êœ«œ —«d‬‬
‫• ﻗﺎب ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي در ﭘﺸﺖ دﺳﺘـﮕﺎه ﻛﻨﺘﺮل از راه دور ﺑﺎز ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• دو ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ‪ AAA‬ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻗﻄﺒﻬﺎي ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻳﻬـﺎ )‪ +‬و ‪ (-‬درﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺎب ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي را در ﺟﺎﻳﺶ ﻗﺮار دﻫـﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫«‪∫bM w/ —U w?—b —Ëœ Á«— “« ‰dM ÁU~œ dÖ‬‬
‫• ﺟﻬﺖ ﻗﻄﺐ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻳﻬﺎ _ ‪ +‬را ﭼﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ )ﺳـﻠﻮل‪-‬ﺧﺸﻚ(‬
‫• ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ آﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻳﻬﺎ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﺷـﺪه اﻧﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﭼﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﻧﻌﻲ ﺟﻠﻮي ﺳـﻨﺴﻮر ﻛﻨﺘﺮل از راه دور را ﺳﺪ ﻧﻜﺮده ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ آﻳﺎ ﻫﻴﭻ ﭼﺮاغ ﻓﻠـﻮرﺳﻨﺘﻲ در اﻃﺮاف وﺟﻮد دارد ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ÆbOb
—«d w~
U ÍU t?U“ —œ «— UN
¬ Æb“«b
UO —Ëœ wK wDO X“ «—dI Ë 5?
«u U oUD «— ÍUNdU‬‬
‫‪ÆbOM ‰U
œ «— d“ ÍUNKLF«—u?œ ¨dO U œ—«œ Í—UÖ“U —Ëœ Á«— “« ‰dM s« U UL ÊueuK U?¬ bOMO tJM« Í«d‬‬
‫‪.۱‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن ﺧﻮد را روﺷﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.۲‬‬
‫دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﻛﻨﺘﺮل از راه دور را ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺗﻠـﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.۳‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ TV STANDBY/ON‬را ﻓـﺸﺎر داده و ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻳـﺪ و ﻛﺪ دو رﻗﻤﻲ ﻣﺘـﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻣـﺎرك ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن ﺧـﻮد را‪ ,‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر دادن‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻋﺪدي ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ وارد ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۱۶‬ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر‬
‫‪Áb
u ‰dM ÍUN
ueuK b‬‬
‫اﻟﺰر‬
‫‪—U t ŸËd‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺰر‬
‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ‪ :‬اﮔﺮ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎ دﺳﺘـﮕﺎه ﻛﻨﺘﺮل از راه دور ﺳﺎزﮔﺎر ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ,‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎل دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺎر ﺑـﺎ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل از راه دور ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ رﻳﺰي ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫اﮔﺮ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﻛﺪ ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺎرك ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن ﺷﻤﺎ آورده ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ,‬آﻧﻬﺎ را ﻳﻜﻲ ﻳﻜﻲ اﻣﺘﺤﺎن ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻛﺪي را ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎر ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫اﮔﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﻛﻨﺘﺮل از راه دور را ﺗـﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ,‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﺪ ﻣﺎرك را دوﺑﺎره ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ÆbOM ‰dM «— œu ÊueuK TV tLœ Êœ«œ —U?A “« fÄ d“ ÍU tLœ Êœ«œ —UA U bO
«u w ʬ “« fÄ UL‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد‬
‫‪TV STANDBY/ON‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي روﺷﻦ و ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻛﺮدن ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳـﻮن ﻛﺎرﺑﺮد دارد‪.‬‬
‫‪INPUT SEL.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻳﻚ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺑﻴﺮوﻧﻲ اﺳـﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ وﻟﻮم ﻳﺎ ﻣﻴﺰان ﺻـﺪاي ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﺑﺮده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫)‪VOL( + / -‬‬
‫‪) PROG‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫(‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﺎﻧﺎل دﳋﻮاه ﺑﻪ ﻛـﺎر ﺑﺮده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪TV MUTE‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ﺻﺎﻣﺖ ﻛﺮدن و ﻳﺎ روﺷﻦ ﻛﺮدن ﺻـﺪاي ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن ﻛﺎرﺑﺮد دارد‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺪدي‬
‫ﺑﺮاي وارد ﻛﺮدن ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺷﻤﺎره ﻫـﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﺑﺮده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﻋـﻤـﻠـﻜﺮدﻫـﺎي ﻓـﻬـﺮﺳـﺖ ﺷـﺪه در ﺑـﺎﻻ ﻟﺰوﻣـﺎ در ﲤـﺎم ﺗـﻠـﻮﻳـﺰﻳﻮن ﻫـﺎ ﻋـﻤـﻞ ﳕـﻲ ﻛـﻨـﻨﺪ‪ .‬اﮔـﺮ ﺑـﺎ ﻣـﺸـﻜـﻠـﻲ ﻣﻮاﺟـﻪ ﺷـﺪﻳـﺪ‪,‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن را ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨـﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎرﺳﻲ ‪۱۷ -‬‬
‫ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر‬
nu«
WOU_« WuK«
ÆbM w t Ë “U «— pœ wMO
OPEN/CLOSE tLœ
Æbœ w gU/ «— ÁdO$ Ë ÊU“ØqBØÊ«uM ¨gÄ XOF{Ë
d~AU/
Æœ“U w nu UÎu «— gÄ U Ë Áœd gÄ «— pœ
Ɯ˗ w wK „«dØqBØÊ«uM t U t— ÍbF „«dØqBØÊ«uM t
©wKF XU®
©nu XU® ÆÁb rOEM gOÄ w
ueuK ÍUNU
U »U
«
PLAY/PAUSE
t L œ
SEARCH/SKIP ÍU tLœ
ÆbM w “U$¬ «— j{ UOKL
STOP
t L œ
Æ œ “U w n u « — p œ g Ä
REC
t L œ
ÆbM w »U
« «— HDD/DVD XU
HDD/DVD
t L œ
Æ œ u w “ U p œ Ê œ «œ — «d Í «d p œ w MO ¨Ê«u —U ¨Memory Stick ¨MP3 ÁbMM gÄ ¨‰UO%œ Í—«œdJ 5—Ëœ
ÆbOM qË «— wM«œd Í“U ÁdO– «eON& dU U Ë w
ËdO
USB HOST
w —«d ÁœUH« œ—u DV wÖœU gO p U w
ËdO wUO%œ «eON& Êœd qË Í«d
©wubË 5—Ëœ p bM
U® ÆœdOÖ
DV-INPUT
HDD
Æœ—«œ œd—U w
ËdO «eON& Êœd qË Í«d
ÆbM w ‘uU U sË— «— ÁbMM j{
AV 2 INPUT
STANDBY/ON
t L œ
‫ ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر‬- ۱۸
VI q
UÄ
s
—U t ŸËd
‫ﻓﻦ در ﻛﻠﻴﻪ زﻣﺎﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ دﺳﺘﮕـﺎه روﺷﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ وﻗﺘﻲ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه را ﻧـﺼﺐ ﻣﻲ‬.‫دوران ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﻛﺮد‬
‫ ﺳﺎﻧـﺘﻲ ﻣﺘﺮي در‬۱۰ ‫ از وﺟﻮد ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ‬,‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
.‫ﲤﺎﻣﻲ ﻃﺮﻓﲔ ﻓﻦ اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
Æœu w qË 7
¬ RF qU t
‫ورودي از راﺑﻂ آﻧﱳ‬
‫ﻫﻮاﺋﻲ‬
ÆbM w qË ÊueuK 7
¬ ÍœË—Ë t «— RF qU
Ê u e u K j « — t w Ë d Æœu w qË w
ËdO «eON& wËd t Audio qU “« ÁœUH« U
AV 1 AUDIO IN
Æœu w qË w
ËdO «eON& wËd t Video qU p “« ÁœUH« U
AV 1 VIDEO IN
Æœu w qË HDMI ÍœË—Ë Í«—«œ ÍU ÁU~œ t
HDMI
Ãd COMPONENT VIDEO
Æœu w qË ÁU~œ t wOd wubË ÍœË—Ë “« ÁœUH« U
©wubË XOHO sdN®OUT
Æœu w qË w
ËdO «eON& Í«b ÍœË—Ë t Audio ÍUNKU “« ÁœUH« U
AV AUDIO OUT
Æœu w qË w
ËdO «eON& ÍœË—Ë t Video qU p “« ÁœUH« U
AV VIDEO OUT
© w u b Ë » u X O HO ®
w qË X« ‰UO«u ‰UO%œ Í«b ÍœË—Ë wÖœU gO Í«—«œ t ÍdUHOKᬠt
Æœ u Æœu w qË X« Í—u
‰UO%œ Í«b ÍœË—Ë wÖœU gO Í«—«œ t ÍdUHOKᬠt
۱۹ - ‫ﻓﺎرﺳﻲ‬
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(OPTICAL)
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(COAXIAL)
‫ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر‬
uK q
UÄ d~AU/
Æœu w sË— b
u »U
« tØ“U U gÄ t ◊ud ÍU tLœ ÁUÖd
¨gÄ t ◊ud
tؓU d~
UA
ÆbM w sË— «— XOF{Ë œU/
pœ d~
UA
ÆœœdÖ w sË— ¨bU Áb »U
« DVD XU ÁUÖd
ÆœœdÖ w sË— ¨bU Áb »U
« HDD XU ÁUÖd
ÆœœdÖ w sË— ¨bU Áb »U
« USB XU ÁUÖd
DVD
ÁbUA d~
UA
HDD ÁbUA d~
UA
USB
ÁbUA d~
UA
ÆœœdÖ w sË— bU Áb Áœ«œ —«d DVD±RW/±R pœ p dÖ«
pœ t
U— d~
UA
Æ œ u w s Ë — w U “ j { X U Ê œ «œ Ê U A Í «d d1U d~
UA
ÆœœdÖ w sË— bU Áb qË HDMI dÖ«
HDMI
d~
UA
ÆœœdÖ w sË— j{ XU —œ
j{ d~
UA
ÆwKF XOF{ËØXUØgÄ ÊU“ d~
UA
XOF{Ë d~
UA
‫ ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر‬- ۲۰
‫¬‪—Ëœ Á«— “« ‰dM ÁU~œ U wzUM‬‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل از راه دور ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ‪ HDD‬و ‪ DVD‬ﺷـﻤﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن ﻫﺎي ‪ Samsung‬و ﻣﺎرك ﻫﺎي ﺳﺎزﮔﺎر ﻛﺎر ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۱‬ﻗﺎب ﭘﺸﺖ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﻛﻨﺘﺮل از راه دور‬
‫را ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻜﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۲‬دو ﻋﺪد ﺑﺎﺗﺮي اﻧﺪازه ‪ AAA‬وارد ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ اﻧﺘﻬﺎي "‪ "+‬و "‪ "-‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮي‬
‫ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻃﺮح داﺧﻞ ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﻫﻤﺨﻮاﻧﻲ داﺷﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪SELECT‬‬
‫‪DVD, HDD, USB‬‬
‫‪tL œ‬‬
‫‪ .۳‬ﻗﺎب را درﺟﺎي ﺧﻮد ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪OPEN/CLOSE‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺎز و ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻛﺮدن ﺳﻴﻨﻲ دﻳﺴﻚ‪.‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‪TV STANDBY/ON‬‬
‫ﻟﻄﻔًﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن را روﺷﻦ‪/‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻛﻨﻴـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑــﺎ ﻓــﺮض ﻛ ــﺎرﺑــﺮد ﻋــﺎدي ﺗــﻠ ــﻮﻳــﺰﻳــﻮن‪ ,‬اﻳــﻦ‬
‫ﺑـﺎﺗــﺮي ﻫـﺎ ﺑــﺮاي ﺣـﺪود ﻳـﻚ ﺳــﺎل دوام ﻣـﻲ‬
‫آورﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‪TV‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺎر ﻛﺮدن ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن اﻳﻦ دﻛـﻤﻪ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪tL œ‬‬
‫‪STANDBY/ON‬‬
‫ﻟﻄﻔًﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨـﺪه ‪ HDD‬و ‪ DVD RECORDER‬ﺧﻮد را‬
‫روﺷﻦ‪/‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Í œ b Í U tL œ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي وارد ﻛﺮدن ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ اﻋﺪاد‬
‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪©bU w/ œuu® TV/DVD tLœ‬‬
‫‪tL œ‬‬
‫‪INPUT SEL‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎل ورودي را در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ورودي ﺑﻴـﺮوﻧﻲ‬
‫)ورودي ‪ AV2 ,AV1 ,PROG‬ﻳﺎ ‪ (DV INPUT‬اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ورودي ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ روي‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ TV/DVD‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪tL œ‬‬
‫‪SUBTITLE‬‬
‫اﺟﺎزه دﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺘﻬﺎي ﻣـﻌﻤﻮل ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه را ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪tL œ‬‬
‫‪AUDIO/TV MUTE‬‬
‫از اﻳﻦ دﻛﻤﻪ ﺑﺮاي دﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﻳﺎﻓﱳ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴـﺘﻬﺎي ﻣﺨﺘﻠŸ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺗﻲ در دﻳﺴﻚ )ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ (DVD‬اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴـﺪ‪ .‬اﻳﻦ دﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻌﻨﻮان ﺻﺎﻣﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺻﺪا ﻧﻴﺰ ﻛﺎر ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨـﺪ‪).‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪.(TV‬‬
‫‪tL œ‬‬
‫‪PROG‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻳﻚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳـﻮﻧﻲ اﻳﻦ دﻛﻤﻪ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪t Lœ‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺎزﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮي ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﻓﺸـﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ÍU tLœ® OK/DIRECTION ÍU tLœ‬‬
‫▲▼‹‬
‫‪tL œ‬‬
‫‪TV VOL‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ وﻟﻮم ﻳﺎ ﻣﻴﺰان ﺻﺪاي ﺗﻠﻮﻳـﺰﻳﻮن‪.‬‬
‫‪tL œ‬‬
‫‪MENU‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮي ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛـﻨﻨﺪه ‪ DVD‬و ‪ HDD‬را ﻣﻲ آورد‬
‫©‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻳﺎ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ‪/‬ﭘـﺎﻳﲔ‪ ,‬ﭼﭗ‪/‬راﺳﺖ در ﻣﻮﻗﻊ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻫﺎي ﻣﻨﻮ ﺑﻪ ﻛـﺎر ﺑﺮده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪Exit tLœ‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺧﺮوج از ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫـﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪t Lœ‬‬
‫‪g Ä t ◊ u d Í U tL œ‬‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮ‪/‬ﻋﻘﺐ‪ ,‬ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ‪ ,‬رد ﻛﺮدن‪ ,‬ﺗﻮﻗŸ‪ ,‬ﭘـﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻣﻜﺚ‬
‫‪PLAY LIST/TITLE MENU‬‬
‫‪tL œ‬‬
‫‪INFO‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت ﻓﻌﻠﻲ ﻳﺎ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ دﻳﺴـﻚ را ﳕﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪tL œ‬‬
‫‪TITLE LIST/DISC MENU‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي وارد ﺷﺪن ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨـﻮي ‪Recording list/disc‬‬
‫)ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ‪/‬دﻳﺴﻚ( از اﻳﻦ دﻛﻤﻪ اﺳﺘـﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫از اﻳﻦ دﻛﻤﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺎزﮔﺸﱳ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮي ‪) Title‬ﻋﻨـﻮان(‪,‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎي ﺿﺒـﻂ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪tL œ‬‬
‫‪REC MODE‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ زﻣﺎن دﳋﻮاه ﺿﺒﻂ و ﻛﻴﻔﻴـﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ اﻳﻦ دﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴـﺪ‪(EP/LP/SP/XP) .‬‬
‫‪tL œ‬‬
‫‪REC PAUSE / TIME SHIFT‬‬
‫در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ HDD‬از اﻳﻦ ﺑﺮاي ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر اﻧﺪاﺧﱳ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺷﻴﻔﺖ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨـﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻟﻠﺘﻮﻗŸ اﳌﺆﻗﺖ أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﺘـﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪t Lœ‬‬
‫‪TIMER / REPEAT‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ اﻣﻜﺎن ﺗﻜﺮار ﻳﻚ ﻋﻨـﻮان‪ ,‬ﻓﺼﻞ ‪ ,‬ﺗﺮاك ﻳﺎ‬
‫دﻳﺴﻚ را ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮاي ورود ﻣﺴﺘﻘـﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮي‬
‫‪) Timer Recording Mode‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺎ ﺑـﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫رﻳﺰي زﻣﺎﻧﻲ( اﻳﻦ دﻛﻤﻪ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪tL œ‬‬
‫‪A, B, C, D,‬‬
‫اﺟﺎزه دﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺘﻬﺎي ﻣﻌـﻤﻮل ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ‪ HDD‬و‬
‫‪ DVD‬را ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪t Lœ‬‬
‫‪COPY‬‬
‫اﻳﻦ دﻛﻤﻪ را ﺑﺮاي ﻛـﭙﻲ ﻛﺮدن از ‪ DVD‬روي ‪ HDD‬روي ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴـﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ را از ‪ HDD‬ﻳﺎ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﺮوي‬
‫ﲡﻬﻴﺰات ذﺧﻴﺮه ﺳﺎزي ‪ USB‬و ﺑﻠﻌﻜﺲ ﻛﭙـﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪tL œ‬‬
‫‪REC‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺮدن روي دﻳﺴـﻜﻬﺎي ‪HDD/DVD-RAM/±RW/±R‬‬
‫ﻛﺎرﺑﺮد دارد‬
‫‪tL œ‬‬
‫‪MARKER‬‬
‫اﻳﻦ دﻛﻤﻪ را در ﺣﲔ ﭘﺨﺶ دﻳﺴﻚ ﺑﺮاي ﻧـﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﮔﺬاﺷﱳ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ زدن ﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎرﺳﻲ ‪۲۱ -‬‬
‫‪—U t ŸËd‬‬
‫‪—Ëœ Á«— “« ‰dM ÁU~œ —œ ÍdU Êœ«œ —«d‬‬
‫وﺻﻞ ﻛﺮدن و ﺑﺮﭘﺎﺳﺎزي دﺳﺘﮕﺎه‬
‫‪HDD Ë DVD ÁbMM j{ Êœd qË‬‬
‫‪.۱‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ آﻧﱳ ﻫﻮاﻳﻲ را از ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن ﺧﻮد ﺟﺪا ﻛﺮده و آﻧﺮا ﺑﻪ ‪ RF IN‬در ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ‪ DVD‬و ‪ HDD‬ﺧﻮد ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.۲‬‬
‫)‪ RF OUT (TO TV‬ﺿﺒـﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ‪ DVD‬و ‪ HDD‬را ﺑـﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻛـﺎﺑﻞ آﻧﱳ ﺗﺎﻣـﲔ ﺷﺪه ﺑﻪ ورودي آﻧﱳ ﻫـﻮاﻳﻲ ﺗﻠﻮﻳـﺰﻳﻮن‬
‫ﺧﻮد وﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.۳‬‬
‫از ﻛﺎﺑـﻞ ‪ Video/Audio‬ﺑﺮاي وﺻﻞ ﻛـﺮدن ﻓﻴﺶ ﻫـﺎي ﻣﺎدﮔﻲ ‪ ANALOG AUDIO OUT(R/L)/VIDEO OUT‬ﺿـﺒﻂ ﻛﻨـﻨﺪه ‪ DVD‬و‬
‫‪ HDD‬ﺑﻪ ﻓﻴﺶ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺎدﮔﻲ ‪ Audio‬و ‪ Video‬ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.۴‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ‪ DVD‬و ‪ HDD‬و ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن را ﺑﻪ ﺑـﺮق وﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫‪.۵‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ‪ DVD‬و ‪ HDD‬و ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن را روﺷـﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.۶‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ INPUT SEL.‬ﻛﻨﺘﺮل از راه دور ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن ﺧﻮد ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ اﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎل وﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ‪ DVD‬و ‪HDD‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ روي ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن ﳕﺎﻳﺎن ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫دﻳﻮار‬
‫‪±‬‬
‫≥‬
‫≤‬
‫■ اﺗﺼﺎل ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ RF‬اﻳﻦ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﻓﻘﻂ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻟﻬﺎي ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن را ارﺳﺎل ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮاي ﲤﺎﺷﺎ ﻛﺮدن ﻳﻚ ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ‪ DVD‬و ‪ HDD‬ﺧﻮد‪ ,‬ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎي ‪ Audio/Video‬را وﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ‪ DVD‬و ‪ HDD‬را ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ,‬ﺣﺎل ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎي درﻳﺎﻓﺘﻲ از ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ TV‬را ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۲۲‬وﺻﻞ ﻛﺮدن و ﺑﺮﭘﺎﺳﺎزي دﺳﺘﮕﺎه‬
‫—‪Video wËd qU Êœd qË Í«d Íd~œ ‘Ë‬‬
‫ﭼـﻨـﺪﻳــﻦ روش ﺑـﺮاي ﺧـﺮوﺟـﻲ دادن ﺳـﻴـﮕــﻨـﺎﻟـﻬـﺎي وﻳـﺪﻳــﻮﻳـﻲ وﺟـﻮد دارد‪ .‬ﻳـﻜـﻲ از روﺷـﻬــﺎي اﺗـﺼـﺎل وﻳـﺪﻳـﻮﻳــﻲ زﻳـﺮ را ﻛـﻪ ﺑـﺮاﻳـﺘـﺎن‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺘﺮ اﺳﺖ‪ ,‬اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : ± œ—u‬وﺻﻞ ﻛﺮدن ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻴﺶ ﻣﺎدﮔﻲ ﺧـﺮوﺟﻲ ‪Video‬‬
‫‪©Áb?
Ë— gOÄ® Progressive Ë Component Video ¨S-Video wËd ÍUNU‬‬
‫• ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎي ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ ﻣﺆﻟﻔﻪ اي و ﭘﻴـﺶ روﻧﺪه )ﭘﺮوﮔﺮﺳﻴﻮ(‬
‫ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺆﻟﻔﻪ اي زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن ﺷﻤﺎ در ورودي ﺗﺼﺎوﻳﺮ ﻣﺆﻟﻔﻪ اي ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫اﮔﺮ ﺧـﺮوﺟﻲ ﺗـﺼﻮﻳـﺮ ﻣﺆﻟـﻔﻪ اي ﻛﺎر ﳕـﻲ ﻛﻨـﺪ‪ ,‬اﺗﺼـﺎﻻت ﺗﻠـﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن و ﺗـﻨﻈـﻴﻤـﺎت اﻧﺘـﺨﺎب ورودي ﺗﻠـﻮﻳﺰﻳـﻮن را ﺑﺮرﺳـﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• اﺳﻜﻦ ﭘﻴﺶ روﻧﺪه در ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺗـﺼﺎوﻳﺮ وﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ در ﻫﻢ ﺗﺎﻓﺘﻪ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‪ ,‬ﺗﻌﺪاد ﺧﻄﻮط وﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ﺗﻐـﺬﻳﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪه را‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن ﺷﻤﺎ را دو ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ,‬ﻟﺬا ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮي ﭘﺎﻳﺪار ﺗﺮ‪ ,‬ﻋﺎري از ﭘﺎرازﻳﺖ‪ ,‬و ﺷﻔﺎﻓﺘﺮ از ﺗﺼﺎوﻳﺮ وﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ در ﻫﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺎﻓﺘﻪ اﻳﺠﺎد ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﳕﻮد‪.‬‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺮاي ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻧـﻬﺎي ﺳﺎزﮔﺎر ﺑﺎ اﺳﻜﻦ ﭘﻴﺶ روﻧﺪه ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺑﻮد‪.‬‬
‫• ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ اﺳﻜﻦ ﭘﻴﺶ روﻧﺪه )‪ (۵۷۶p‬ﻣﺼﺮف ﻛﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎن ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻧﻬﺎي ﺑﺎ ﻗﺪرت ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﺑﺎﻻ‬
‫)‪ (HD‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎ اﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮل ﺳﺎزﮔﺎري ﻧﺪارﻧﺪ و ﳑﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﭘﺎرازﻳﺖ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ روي ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﳕﺎﻳﺶ دﻫﻨﺪ‪ ,‬در ﺻﻮرت‬
‫ﺑﺮوز ﻣﺸـﻜﻼت ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ ۵۷۶‬اﺳـﻜﻦ ﭘﻴﺶ روﻧـﺪه‪ ,‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷـﻮد ﻣﺼﺮف ﻛﻨﻨـﺪﮔﺎن اﺗﺼﺎل ﺧـﻮد را ﺑﻪ ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ 'ﺗﻔـﻜﻴﻚ‬
‫اﺳﺘـﺎﻧﺪارد' ﺗـﺒﺪﻳـﻞ ﻛﻨﻨـﺪ‪ .‬اﮔﺮ در زﻣـﻴﻨـﻪ ﺳﺎزﮔﺎري ﺗـﻠﻮﻳـﺰﻳﻮن ﺧﻮد ﺑـﺎ اﻳﻦ ﻣـﺪل ‪ ۵۷۶p‬دﺳﺘـﮕﺎه ﺿﺒـﻂ ﻛﻨـﻨﺪه ‪ DVD‬و ‪HDD‬‬
‫ﺳﻮاﻟﻲ دارﻳﺪ‪ ,‬ﻟﻄﻔًﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎت ﻣـﺸﺘﺮﻳﺎن ﺧﻮد ﲤﺎس ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪©w?Od® Video wËd wÖœU gO p t Êœd qË ∫ ± œ—u‬‬
‫‪.۱‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪) Video‬زرد( را ﺑﲔ ﻓﻴﺶ ﻣﺎدﮔﻲ ‪) VIDEO OUT‬زرد( روي ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ‪ DVD‬و ‪ HDD‬و ﻓﻴﺶ ﻣﺎدﮔﻲ ‪VIDEO INPUT‬‬
‫)زرد( روي ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن )ﻳﺎ آﻣﭙﻠﻴﻔﺎﻳﺮ ‪ (AV‬ﺧﻮد وﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• در اﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ از ﺗﺼﺎوﻳﺮي ﺑﺎ ﻛﻴﻔﻴـﺖ ﻋﺎدي ﻟﺬت ﺧﻮاﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﺮد‪.‬‬
‫‪.۲‬‬
‫ﻛـﺎﺑــﻠـﻬـﺎي ‪) Audio‬ﺳــﻔـﻴـﺪ و ﻗـﺮﻣــﺰ( را ﺑـﲔ ﻓـﻴــﺶ ﻫـﺎي ﻣـﺎدﮔــﻲ ‪ AUDIO OUT‬ﺿـﺒـﻂ ﻛــﻨـﻨـﺪه ‪ DVD‬و ‪ HDD‬و ‪ AUDIO IN‬روي‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن )ﻳﺎ آﻣﭙﻠﻴﻔﺎﻳﺮ ‪ (AV‬ﺧﻮد وﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﺎت ‪ ۲۵‬ﺗـﺎ ‪ ۲۶‬ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ(‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪Video/Audio‬‬
‫اﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫اﻷﺣﻤﺮ‬
‫زرد‬
‫ﻓﺎرﺳﻲ ‪۲۳ -‬‬
‫‪ÁU~œ Í“UUÄd Ë Êœd q
Ë‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪œ—u‬‬
‫≤ ‪ :‬ﻓﻴﺶ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺎدﮔﻲ ﺧﺮوﺟـﻲ ‪Component Video‬‬
‫وﺻﻞ ﻛﺮدن و ﺑﺮﭘﺎﺳﺎزي دﺳﺘﮕﺎه‬
‫‪Component Video wËd wÖœU ÍU gO ∫ ≤ œ—u‬‬
‫‪.۱‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑـﻠﻬـﺎي ‪) Component video‬ﺗﺎﻣـﲔ ﻧﺸـﺪه اﺳﺖ( را ﺑـﲔ ﻓﻴـﺶ ﻫﺎي ﻣـﺎدﮔﻲ‪ (PR ,PB ,Y) COMPONENT OUT‬ﺿـﺒﻂ ﻛـﻨﻨـﺪه‬
‫‪ DVD‬و ‪ HDD‬و ‪ (PR ,PB ,Y) COMPONENT IN‬روي ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن ﺧﻮد وﺻﻞ ﻛـﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• در اﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ از ﺑﺎزآﻓﺮﻳﻨﻲ دﻗﻴﻖ رﻧﮓ و ﺑـﺎ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻي ﺗﺼﺎوﻳﺮ ﻟﺬت ﺧﻮاﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﺮد‪.‬‬
‫‪.۲‬‬
‫ﻛـﺎﺑـﻠـﻬـﺎي ‪) Audio‬ﺳــﻔـﻴـﺪ و ﻗـﺮﻣـﺰ( را ﺑـﲔ ﻓـﻴـﺶ ﻫــﺎي ﻣـﺎدﮔـﻲ ‪ AUDIO OUT‬ﺿـﺒـﻂ ﻛـﻨـﻨـﺪه ‪ DVD‬و ‪ HDD‬و ‪ AUDIO IN‬روي‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن )ﻳﺎ آﻣﭙﻠﻴﻔﺎﻳﺮ ‪ (AV‬ﺧﻮد وﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﺎت ‪ ۲۵‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ۲۶‬ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻳـﻴﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫‪.۳‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ از وﺻﻞ ﻛﺮدن‪ ,‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﺎت ‪ ۴۱‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ۴۲‬ﻣـﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫آﺑﻲ‬
‫ﺳﺒﺰ‬
‫■‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻼءﻣﺔ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼت اﳌﺮﻣﻮزة ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮن‪ .‬وﻗﺎﺑﺴﻲ ﺧﺮوج ﻣﻜﻮن ‪ PR ,PB ,Y‬ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ HDD‬ودي ﻓﻲ دي اﳌﺴﺠﻞ‬
‫ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ اﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺑﺴﻲ دﺧﻮل اﳌﻜـﻮن اﳌﻨﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﲤﺎﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت ﭘﻴﺶ روﻧﺪه ﻓﻘﻂ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣـﻲ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ روي ﻣﺆﻟﻔﻪ اي ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ۴۱‬ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ(‬
‫‪ - ۲۴‬وﺻﻞ ﻛﺮدن و ﺑﺮﭘﺎﺳﺎزي دﺳﺘﮕﺎه‬
‫—‪Audio wËd qU Êœd qË Í«d Íd~œ ‘Ë‬‬
‫روﺷﻬﺎي ﻣﺨﺘﻠـﻔﻲ ﺑﺮاي وﺻﻞ ﻛﺮدن ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ‪ HDD‬و ‪ DVD‬ﺷﻤـﺎ وﺟﻮد دارد‪ .‬ﻧﻮع اﺗﺼﺎل ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺮاي ﺧﻮد را از ﻣـﻴﺎن‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎي زﻳﺮ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : ± œ—u‬وﺻﻞ ﻛﺮدن ﺑﻪ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن‬
‫•‬
‫≥ ‪ :‬وﺻﻞ ﻛﺮدن ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ آﻣﭙﻠﻴﻔﺎﻳﺮ ‪ AV‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﻴﺶ ﻣﺎدﮔﻲ ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ ‪Digital‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه ﲢﺖ اﻣﺘﻴﺎز ﺣﻖ ﺛـﺒﺖ اﺧﺘﺮاﻋﺎت آﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎره‪ 5,451,942 :‬و ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺣﻘﻮق ﺻﺎدر ﺷﺪه و ﻣﻌﺘﺒـﺮ ﺛﺒﺖ‬
‫اﺧﺘﺮاﻋـﺎت در ﺳﻄﺢ ﺟﻬﺎن‪ DTS .‬و ‪ DTS Digital Out‬ﻋﻼﻣـﺖ ﻫﺎي ﲡﺎري ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷـﺪه ﺑﻮده و آرم و ﳕﺎد ‪ DTS‬ﻋﻼﻣﺘـﻬﺎي ﲡﺎري‬
‫‪ DTS, Inc.‬ﻣﻲ ﺑـﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ , © 1996 ~ 2007 DTS‬ﻛـﻠﻴﻪ ﺣـﻘﻮق ﻣﺤـﻔﻮظ اﺳـﺖ‪.‬‬
‫دﻳـﺠﻴـﺘﺎل ﻛـﻪ ﲢﺖ اﻣـﺘﻴـﺎز ‪ Dolby Laboratories‬ﺳﺎﺧـﺘﻪ ﺷـﺪه اﺳﺖ‪ "Dolby" .‬و ﻋـﻼﻣﺖ ‪ D‬دوﺗـﺎﻳﻲ‪ ,‬ﻋـﻼﺋﻢ ﺛـﺒﺖ ﺷـﺪه ﲡﺎري‪Dolby‬‬
‫‪ Laboratories‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ÊueuK ÁU~œ t Êœd qË ∫ ± œ—u‬‬
‫اﮔﺮ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن ﺷﻤﺎ داراي ﻓﻴﺶ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺎدﮔﻲ ورودي ‪ Audio‬اﺳﺖ‪ ,‬از اﻳﻦ روش اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛـﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻔﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫زرد‬
‫ﻓﺎرﺳﻲ ‪۲۵ -‬‬
‫‪ÁU~œ Í“UUÄd Ë Êœd q
Ë‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪œ—u‬‬
‫‪œ—u‬‬
‫≤ ‪ :‬وﺻﻞ ﻛﺮدن ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ آﻣﭙﻠﻴﻔﺎﻳﺮ اﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺑـﺎ ﻓﻴﺶ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺎدﮔﻲ ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ ‪AV‬‬
‫وﺻﻞ ﻛﺮدن و ﺑﺮﭘﺎﺳﺎزي دﺳﺘﮕﺎه‬
‫‪AV wËd wÖœU ÍU gO U ud« dUHOKᬠp t Êœd qË ∫ ≤ œ—u‬‬
‫اﮔﺮ آﻣﭙﻠﻴﻔﺎﻳﺮ اﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮي ﺷﻤﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻴﺶ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺎدﮔﻲ ‪ L) AUDIO INPUT‬و ‪ (R‬دارد‪ ,‬از ﻓﻴﺶ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺎدﮔﻲ ‪ AUDIO OUT‬اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮﻫﺎي‬
‫ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮﻫﺎي ﺟﻠﻮ‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮ )‪(R‬‬
‫)‪(L‬‬
‫ﺳﻔﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫‪Digital wËd wÖœU gO U AV dUHOKᬠp t Êœd qË ∫ ≥ œ—u‬‬
‫?اﮔﺮ آﻣﭙﻠﻴﻔﺎﻳﺮ ‪ AV‬ﺷﻤﺎ داراي رﻣﺰﮔﺸﺎي ‪ MPEG2 ,Dolby Digital‬ﻳﺎ ‪ DTS‬ﺑﻮده و ﻓﻴﺶ ﻣﺎدﮔﻲ ورودي دﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎل دارد‪ ,‬از اﻳﻦ‬
‫روش اﺗﺼﺎل اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ اﺳﺎس ﻧﻮع آﻣﭙﻠﻲ ﻓﺎﻳﺮ ﺧﻮد‪ ,‬ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻛـﺎﺑﻞ اﭘﺘﻴﻜﺎل ﻳﺎ ﻛﻮاﻛﺴﻴﺎل وﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ۳۹~۳۸‬ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻓﺮﻣـﺎﻳﻴﺪ(‬
‫ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﭘﺸﺖ )‪(L‬‬
‫ﭘﺸﺖ )‪(R‬‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮ )‪(L‬‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮ )‪(R‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰي‬
‫‪ - ۲۶‬وﺻﻞ ﻛﺮدن و ﺑﺮﭘﺎﺳﺎزي دﺳﺘﮕﺎه‬
‫ﺳﺎب ووﻓﺮ‬
‫«‪ÊueuK t HDMI/DVI ‰UB‬‬
‫اﮔﺮ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن ﺷﻤﺎ ﻳﻚ ورودي ‪ HDMI/DVI‬دارد‪ ,‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ آداﭘﺘﻮر ‪ HDMI/DVI‬را ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن وﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬از ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ و ﺻﺪا ﺑﺎ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻟﺬت ﺧﻮاﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﺮد‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ :± œ—u‬اﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳـﺰﻳﻮن ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫‪HDMI edÄ ju ÊueuK t ‰UB« ∫ ± œ—u‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎ اﺳـﺘﻔـﺎده از ﻛﺎﺑـﻞ ‪ , HDMI‬ﭘﺮﻳـﺰ ‪ HDMI OUT‬در ﭘﺸـﺖ دﺳﺘـﮕﺎه ﺿـﺒﻂ دي وي دي را ﺑـﻪ ﭘﺮﻳـﺰ ‪ HDMI IN‬ﺗﻠـﻮﻳﺰﻳـﻮن ﻣﺘـﺼﻞ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺸﮕﺮ ورودي را ﺑﺮ روي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل از راه دور ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ اﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎل ‪ HDMI‬از دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺿﺒﻂ دي وي‬
‫دي ﺑﺮ روي ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن ﺷﻤﺎ ﳕـﺎﻳﺎن ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫■ اﮔﺮ ﺿـﺒﻂ ﻛـﻨﻨـﺪه ‪ HDD‬و ‪ DVD‬در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺧـﺮوﺟﻲ ‪ HDMI 1080P‬ﺑـﻪ ﺗﻠـﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن وﺻـﻞ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‪ ,‬ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ از ﻛﺎﺑﻠـﻬﺎي ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ )دﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪي ‪ (۲‬اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛـﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪DVI edÄ ju ÊueuK t ‰UB« ∫ ± œ—u‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻛﺎﺑﻞ آداﭘﺘﻮر‪) DVI‬ﺗﺎﻣﲔ ﻧﺸﺪه اﺳﺖ(‪ ,‬ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ‪ HDMI OUT‬در ﭘﺸﺖ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺿﺒﻂ دي وي دي را ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ‪DVI‬‬
‫‪ IN‬ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎي ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‪ ,‬ﭘﺮﻳﺰﻫﺎي ‪) AUDIO OUT‬ﻗﺮﻣﺰ و ﺳﻔﻴﺪ( در ﭘﺸﺖ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺿﺒﻂ دي وي دي را ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰﻫﺎي‬
‫‪) AUDIO IN‬ﻗﺮﻣﺰ و ﺳﻔﻴﺪ( ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن ﻣﺘـﺼﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺿﺒﻂ دي وي دي و ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن را روﺷﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺸﮕﺮ ورودي را ﺑﺮ روي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل از راه دور ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ اﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎل ‪ DVI‬از دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺿﺒﻂ دي وي دي‬
‫ﳕﺎﻳﺎن ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎرﺳﻲ ‪۲۷ -‬‬
‫‪ÁU~œ Í“UUÄd Ë Êœd q
Ë‬‬
‫• ‪œ—u‬‬
‫≤‪ :‬اﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳـﻮن ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ‪DVI‬‬
‫وﺻﻞ ﻛﺮدن و ﺑﺮﭘﺎﺳﺎزي دﺳﺘﮕﺎه‬
‫اﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫أﺣﻤﺮ‬
‫■‬
‫ﺑـﺮاي اﺳـﺘـﻔﺎده از ﻳـﻚ ﻛـﺎﺑـﻞ ‪ ,HDMI‬اﺗـﺼـﺎل ﺻـﺪا‪/‬ﺗـﺼﻮﻳـﺮ را ﭘـﻴـﺶ از وﺻـﻞ ﻛـﺮدن ﺳـﻴﻢ ﺑـﺮق ﻳـﺎ ﺑـﻌـﺪ از «ﺗـﻨـﻈﻴـﻢ‬
‫ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر ﺑﻌﺪ از اﺗﺼﺎل» ﺑﺮﻗﺮار ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬در ﺣﲔ اﳒﺎم «ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر ﺑﻌﺪ از اﺗﺼﺎل» ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬را وﺻﻞ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ‪ HDMI‬وﺻﻞ ﺷﺪه اﺳﻜﻦ ﭘﻴـﺶ روﻧﺪه ﺑﻄﻮر اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﻓﻌﺎل ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫اﮔﺮ ﮔـﻴﺮﻧـﺪه ﺗﻠﻮﻳـﺰﻳﻮن‪ HDMI/‬ﺷـﻤﺎ از ‪ DTS‬ﭘﺸـﺘﻴـﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﳕـﻲ ﻛﻨـﺪ‪ ,‬ﺻﺪاي ﺧﺮوﺟـﻲ در ﺻﻮرت ﭘﺨـﺶ دﻳﺴـﻜﻬﺎي ﺑـﺎ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ‪ DTS‬ﺷﻨﻴﺪه ﻧﺨﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) Stop‬ﺗﻮﻗŸ( ﺧﺮوﺟـﻲ ‪ HDMI‬را ﺑﻪ ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ دﻳﮕﺮي ﻋﻮض ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫اﮔﺮ از ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﺮاي وﺻﻞ ﻛﺮدن ﻳﻚ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن ‪ Samsung‬ﺑﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ‪ HDD‬و ‪ DVD‬اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ,‬ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺗـﻮاﻧـﻴﺪ ﺑـﺎ ﻛـﻨـﺘﺮل از راه دور ﺗـﻠـﻮﻳـﺰﻳﻮن ﺑـﺎ ﺿـﺒـﻂ ﻛﻨـﻨـﺪه ﻫـﻢ ﻛـﺎر ﻛﻨـﻴـﺪ‪) .‬اﻳـﻦ ﻗﺎﺑـﻠـﻴـﺖ ﺗﻨـﻬـﺎ در ﺗـﻠﻮﻳـﺰﻳـﻮن ﻫـﺎي‬
‫‪ SAMSUNG‬ﻛﻪ از)‪ (Anynet+(HDMI-CEC‬ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻣـﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ وﺟﻮد دارد‪) (.‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ۳۷‬ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ(‬
‫اﺳﺖ‪ ,‬از ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ‪ Anynet+‬ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲ‬
‫را ﭼﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ )اﮔﺮ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن ﺷﻤﺎ داراي آرم‬
‫ﻟﻄﻔًﺎ آرم‬
‫ﻛﻨﺪ‪(.‬‬
‫■‬
‫‪)HDMI HDMI‬راﺑﻂ ﭼﻨﺪرﺳﺎﻧﻪ اي ﺑﺎ ﻛﻴﻔـﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ(‬
‫‪ HDMI‬راﺑﻄﻲ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ارﺳﺎل دﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎل داده ﻫﺎي ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮي و ﺻﻮﺗﻲ را ﺑﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻳﻚ اﺗﺼﺎﻟﻲ واﺣﺪ ﳑﻜﻦ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ـﻼ ﺑﺎ ‪ DVI‬ﺳـﺎزﮔﺎر اﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﺗﻨـﻬـﺎ ﺗﻔـﺎوت ﺑﲔ ‪ HDMI‬و ‪ DVI‬اﻳـﻨـﺴﺖ ﻛـﻪ ‪ HDMI‬از‬
‫ﭼـﻮن ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﺮاﺳـﺎس ‪ DVI‬اﺳﺖ‪ ,‬ﻛـﺎﻣ ً‬
‫ﺻﺪاي ﭼـﻨﺪﻛـﺎﻧﺎﻟﻪ ﺣـﻤﺎﻳﺖ ﻣـﻲ ﻛﻨـﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘـﻔﺎده از ‪ ,HDMI‬دﺳـﺘﮕﺎه ﺿـﺒﻂ دي وي دي ﺳـﻴﮕﻨـﺎل ﺗﺼﻮﻳـﺮي و ﺻﻮﺗـﻲ‬
‫دﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎل را ارﺳﺎل ﻛﺮده و ﺑﺮ روي ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ورودي ‪ HDMI‬داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ,‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ واﺿﺤﻲ را ﳕﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫‪HDMI wUB« nOu‬‬
‫■‬
‫■‬
‫■‬
‫■‬
‫■‬
‫اﺗـﺼﺎﻟـﻲ ‪ - HDMI‬ﻫـﺮدوي داده ﻫﺎي ﺗـﺼـﻮﻳﺮي ﻓـﺸـﺮده ﻧﺸـﺪه و داده ﻫﺎي ﺻـﻮﺗـﻲ دﻳﺠـﻴـﺘﺎل )داده ﻫـﺎي ‪ LPCM‬ﻳـﺎ ‪Bit‬‬
‫‪.(Stream‬‬
‫ اﮔﺮﭼﻪ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺿﺒﻂ اچ دي دي و دي وي دي از ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ,‬ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ ﻫﺎي دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺿﺒﻂ اچ دي‬‫دي و دي وي دي ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎل دﻳﺠﻴـﺘﺎل ﺻﺎف را ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن ﻣﻲ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ اﮔﺮ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن از(‪ HDCP‬ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت دﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎل ﭘﻬﻨﺎي ﺑﺎﻧﺪ( ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﳕﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ,‬ﺑﺮﻓﻚ ﺑﺮ روي ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬‫ﳕﺎﻳﺎن ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫‪øbM w ÁœUH« HDMI“« Samsung «dÇ‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳـﻮن ﻫﺎي آﻧﺎﻟﻮگ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﮕـﻨﺎل ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪/‬ﺻﺪاي آﻧﺎﻟﻮگ ﻧـﻴﺎز دارﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ اﻳﻦ وﺟﻮد‪ ,‬ﻫﻨـﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﻳﻚ دي وي دي‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬داده ﻫﺎي ارﺳﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن دﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎل اﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه دﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎل ﺑﻪ آﻧﺎﻟﻮگ‬
‫)در دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺿﺒﻂ اچ دي دي و دي وي دي( وﻳﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه آﻧﺎﻟﻮگ ﺑﻪ دﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎل )در ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن( ﻻزم اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫در ﺣﲔ اﻳﻦ ﺗﺒـﺪﻳﻞ‪ ,‬ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼـﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﭘﺎرازﻳﺖ و از دﺳـﺖ رﻓﱳ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎل اﻓﺖ ﻣـﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮژي‪HDMI‬‬
‫‪ - ۲۸‬وﺻﻞ ﻛﺮدن و ﺑﺮﭘﺎﺳﺎزي دﺳﺘﮕﺎه‬
‫ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺑﻮده ﭼﻮن ﺑﻪ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ‪ D/A‬ﻧﻴﺎزي ﻧﺪاﺷﺘﻪ و ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎل دﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎل ﺧﺎﻟﺺ از دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺿﺒﻂ اچ دي دي و دي وي‬
‫دي ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫‪øXOÇ HDCP‬‬
‫‪DV ¨AV 2 IN ¨AV 1 IN ÍœË—Ë wÖœU gO Êœd qË‬‬
‫اﻳﻦ روش ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ اﺟﺎزه ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ‪ DVD‬و ‪ HDD‬ﺧﻮد را ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﲡﻬﻴﺰات وﺻﻞ ﻛﺮده و ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ ﻫﺎي آﻧﻬﺎ را ﳕﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫داده ﻳﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : ± œ—u‬وﺻﻞ ﻛﺮدن وﻳﺪﻳﻮ‪ (STB) Set-Top Box ,‬ﻳﺎ ﭘﺨـﺶ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ‪ DVD‬ﺑﻪ ﻓﻴﺶ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺎدﮔﻲ ‪AV 1 IN‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪œ—u‬‬
‫‪œ—u‬‬
‫≤ ‪ :‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻛﺮدن دورﺑﲔ وﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻴﺸﻬﺎي ﻣﺎدﮔﻲ ‪AV 2 IN‬‬
‫≥ ‪ :‬وﺻﻞ ﻛﺮدن ﻳﻚ دورﺑﲔ وﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻓـﻴﺶ ﻣﺎدﮔﻲ ‪DV IN‬‬
‫‪AV 1 IN wÖœU ÍU gO t DVD ÁbMM gÄ U ©STB® Set-Top Box ¨ubË Êœd qË ∫ ± œ—u‬‬
‫وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﺮوﻧﻲ ﻳﺎ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه وﻳﺪﻳﻮ را ﺑﻪ ﻓﻴﺶ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺎدﮔﻲ ‪ AUDIO/VIDEO AV 1 IN‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ‪ DVD‬و ‪ HDD‬ﺧﻮد وﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ از دﺳﺘﮕﺎه وﺻـﻞ ﺷﺪه )وﻳﺪﻳﻮ‪ STB ,‬ﻳﺎ ‪ (DVD‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺳﻔﻴﺪ‬
‫زرد‬
‫■‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﺿﻤﻨًﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗـﻮاﻧﻴﺪ از ﻓﻴﺶ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺎدﮔﻲ ‪ AV 2 IN‬واﻗﻊ در ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺟﻠﻮي ﺿﺒـﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ‪ DVD‬و ‪ HDD‬ﺧﻮد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫اﻗﻼﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﲢﺖ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻛﭙﻲ راﻳﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﻨـﺪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﺨﻮاﻫﻨﺪ ﺑﻮد‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎرﺳﻲ ‪۲۹ -‬‬
‫‪ÁU~œ Í“UUÄd Ë Êœd q
Ë‬‬
‫‪) HDCP‬ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت دﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎل ﭘﻬﻨﺎي ﺑﺎﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻻ( ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ از ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت دي وي دي اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ‬
‫از ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ‪ HDMI‬در ﺣﺎل ﻛﭙﻲ ﺷﺪن ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬اﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﭘﻴﻮﻧﺪ دﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎل اﻣﻨﻲ ﺑﲔ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ وﻳﺪﺋﻮ )ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪,‬‬
‫دي وي دي و ﻏﻴﺮه( و وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﳕﺎﻳﺶ )ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن‪ ,‬ﭘﺮوژﻛﺘﻮر و ﻏﻴﺮه( ﻓﺮاﻫﻢ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت در وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ‬
‫ﻛﺪﮔﺬاري ﺷﺪه ﺗﺎ از ﻛﭙﻲ ﻛﺮدن ﻏﻴﺮﻣﺠـﺎز ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫وﺻﻞ ﻛﺮدن و ﺑﺮﭘﺎﺳﺎزي دﺳﺘﮕﺎه‬
‫‪AV 2 IN wÖœU ÍU gO t wubË 5—Ëœ Êœd qB ∫ ≤ œ—u‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﺿـﻤﻨًﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴـﺪ از ﻓﻴﺶ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺎدﮔﻲ ‪ AV 2 IN‬واﻗـﻊ در ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺟﻞ‪ DVD‬و ‪ HDD‬ﺧﻮد اﺳـﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺷـﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ از‬
‫ﲡﻬﻴﺰات وﺻﻞ ﺷﺪه‪ ,‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻳﻚ دورﺑﲔ وﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ورودي در ﺣﲔ ﲤﺎﺷﺎي ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن ﺑﻪ ‪AV‬‬
‫‪ 2‬وﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪ ,‬ورودي ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر ﺑﻪ ‪ AV 2‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬اﮔﺮ ورودي ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻧﺸﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ,‬از‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‪) INPUT SEL.‬ورودي( ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ورودي ﺻﺤـﻴﺢ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫دورﺑﲔ وﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ‬
‫ﺳﻔﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫زرد‬
‫‪DV IN wÖœU gO t wubË 5—Ëœ p Êœd qË ∫ ≥ œ—u‬‬
‫اﮔﺮ دورﺑـﲔ وﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳـﻲ ﺷﻤﺎ داراي ﻓﻴـﺶ ﻣﺎدﮔﻲ ﺧـﺮوﺟﻲ ‪ DV‬ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‪ ,‬آﻧﺮا ﺑﻪ ﻓـﻴﺶ ﻣﺎدﮔﻲ ورودي‪ DV‬دﺳـﺘﮕﺎه ﺿـﺒﻂ ﻛﻨـﻨﺪه‬
‫‪ DVD‬و ‪ HDD‬ﺧﻮد وﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫دورﺑﲔ وﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ‬
‫■‬
‫اﮔﺮ ورودي ﺑـﻪ ﻃﻮر ﺧـﻮدﻛﺎر اﻧـﺘﺨـﺎب ﻧﺸـﺪه ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ از دﻛﻤـﻪ ‪) INPUT SEL.‬ورودي( ﺑﺮاي اﻧـﺘﺨﺎب ورودي ﺻـﺤﻴـﺢ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۳۰‬وﺻﻞ ﻛﺮدن و ﺑﺮﭘﺎﺳﺎزي دﺳﺘﮕﺎه‬
‫‪USB «eON& t Êœd qË‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ اﺟﺎزه ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨـﻨﺪه ‪ HDD‬و ‪ DVD‬ﺧﻮد را ﺑﻪ ﲡﻬﻴﺰات ‪ USB‬وﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ÁU~œ Í“UUÄd Ë Êœd q
Ë‬‬
‫اﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ‪ ,USB‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﻨـﺪه ‪ ,MP3‬دورﺑﲔ دﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎل ﺗﻮﺳﻂ درﮔﺎه ‪USB‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬
‫‪MP3‬‬
‫دورﺑﲔ‬
‫دﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎل ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‬
‫■‬
‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﺮدن ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬در ﺣﲔ ﺗﺒﺎدل داده ﻫﺎ ارﺗﺒﺎط را ﻣﺘﻮﻗŸ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ و ﳑﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ داده ﻫﺎي ذﺧﻴﺮه ﺷﺪه در‬
‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻧﻴﺰ آﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺒﺎدل داده ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ دﻟﻴﻞ اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﺴﻴﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﻛﻦ‪ ,‬ﻣﻴﺪان ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ﻳﺎ دﻻﻳﻞ دﻳﮕﺮي دﭼﺎر وﻗﻔﻪ ﺷﺪ‪ ,‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫را ﻣﺠﺪدًا اﺟﺮا ﻛﺮده و ﺳﻌﻲ ﻛﻨﻴـﺪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬را دوﺑﺎره ﻗﻄﻊ ‪ /‬وﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎرﺳﻲ ‪۳۱ -‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ و ﺑﺮﭘﺎﺳﺎزي ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫‪tH ÍË— ÍuM —œ Xd‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮي روي ﺻـﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ اﺟـﺎزه ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻠـﻴﺘﻬﺎي ﻣﺨـﺘﻠﻔﻲ را در دﺳﺘﮕـﺎه ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ‪ DVD‬و ‪ HDD‬ﺧـﻮد ﻓﻌﺎل ﻳﺎ ﻏﻴـﺮ ﻓﻌﺎل‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬از دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي زﻳﺮ ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺎز ﻛـﺮدن و ﺣﺮﻛﺖ در ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎي روي ﺻﻔﺤﻪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ʊ‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي …† ‹ ‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ﺣﺮﻛﺖ دادن ﻣﻴﻠﻪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ▲ ▼ ‹ اﻳﻦ دﻛﻤﻪ را در روي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬
‫از راه دور را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ در ﻣﻴﺎن ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫≤‪Æ‬‬
‫زر ‪OK‬‬
‫ﺑـﺮاي ﺗًﺎﻳـﻴﺪ ﻫـﺮ ﮔﻮﻧـﻪ ﺗـﻨﻈـﻴﻢ ﺟـﺪﻳـﺪ‪ ,‬اﻳﻦ دﻛـﻤﻪ را روي ﻛـﻨﺘـﺮل از راه‬
‫دور ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫≥‪Æ‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‪RETRUN‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺎزﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮي ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﳕﺎﻳﺶ داده ﺷﺪه ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮاي ﺧﺮوج از ﻣﻨﻮي روي ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪ ,‬اﻳﻦ دﻛﻤﻪ را روي دﺳﺘﮕﺎه‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل از راه دور ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Æ¥‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‪EXTI‬‬
‫اﻳﻦ دﻛﻤﻪ را ﺑﺮاي ﺧﺮوج از ﻣﻨﻮي روي ﺻﻔـﺤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪‰UB« “« bF —Uœu rOEM‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ‪ DVD‬و ‪ HDD‬ﺧﻮد را ﺑﺮاي اوﻟﲔ ﺑﺎر ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮق وﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ,‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ را‬
‫اﳒﺎم ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ داد‪ .‬اﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎه ﻫﺎي ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ و ﺳﺎﻋﺖ در ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ذﺧﻴﺮه ﺧﻮاﻫﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺷﺪ‪ .‬اﻳﻦ روﻧﺪ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ دﻗﻴﻘﻪ زﻣـﺎن ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮد‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ از آن‪ ,‬دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ‪ DVD‬و ‪ HDD‬ﺷﻤﺎ آﻣﺎده اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪Ʊ‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ RF‬را ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ آﻧﭽﻪ در ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ۲۲‬ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ وﺻﻞ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬وﺻﻞ ﻛﺮدن ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ‪ DVD‬و ‪ HDD‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬
‫از ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ RF‬و ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪(.Audio/Video‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ,HDMI‬اﺗﺼﺎل ﺻﺪا‪/‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ را ﭘﻴﺶ از‬
‫وﺻـﻞ ﻛﺮدن ﺳـﻴـﻢ ﺑﺮق ﻳـﺎ ﺑﻌـﺪ از "ﺗـﻨﻈـﻴـﻢ ﺧﻮدﻛـﺎر ﺑﻌـﺪ از اﺗـﺼﺎل"‬
‫ﺑﺮﻗﺮار ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬در ﺣﲔ اﳒﺎم "ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر ﺑﻌﺪ از اﺗﺼﺎل" ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫‪ HDMI‬را وﺻﻞ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫≤‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ‪ DVD‬و ‪ HDD‬ﺧﻮد را ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮق وﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻋﺒﺎرت "‪"AUTO‬‬
‫)ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر( روي ﳕﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺟﻠﻮ ﭼـﺸﻤﻚ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ زد‪.‬‬
‫≥‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب زﺑﺎن‪ ,‬ﻳﻜﻲ از دﻛﻤـﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻋﺪدي را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪¥‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ﺷﺮوع ‪ Auto Setup‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۳۲‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ و ﺑﺮﭘﺎﺳﺎزي ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫‪Ƶ‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ‪) Auto Channel Scan‬اﺳﻜﻦ ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر ﻛﺎﻧﺎل( آﻏﺎز ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺪاد اﻳﺴﺘـﮕﺎه ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر در ﺿﺒـﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ‪ DVD‬و‬
‫‪ HDD‬ذﺧﻴﺮه ﺧﻮاﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﺪاد اﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎه ﻫﺎي ﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ‬
‫دارد‪.‬‬
‫∑‪Æ‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﺣﺎﻻ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ‪ HDD‬و ‪ DVD‬ﺷﻤﺎ آﻣﺎده اﺳﺘﻔﺎده اﺳﺖ‪" .‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر ﺑﻌﺪ از اﺗﺼﺎل" ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‪ .‬اﮔﺮ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺧـﻮاﻫﻴـﺪ آﻧﺮا ﺗـﻐﻴـﻴﺮ دﻫـﻴﺪ‪ ,‬ﻣـﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧـﻴﺪ در ﻣـﻨﻮي "ﺗـﻨـﻈﻴـﻢ ﻛﺎﻧـﺎل ? ﺗﻨـﻈﻴـﻢ دﺳﺘـﻲ" اﻳﺴـﺘﮕـﺎه ﻫﺎ را ﺑـﻄـﻮر دﺳﺘـﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ۳۵‬ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛـﻨﻴﺪ(‬
‫■‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﺟﺮاي ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺗـﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ دﻛﻤﻪ ) ( ‪ STOP‬روي دﺳﺘـﮕﺎه را ﺑﻄﻮر ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﺮاي ‪۱۰‬‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ در ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻲ ﻛﻪ دﺳـﺘﮕﺎه ﺧﺎﻣﻮش و دﻳﺴﻜﻲ در آن ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ و زﻣﺎن را ﭼﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• اﮔﺮ‪ :‬ﺻﺤـﻴﺢ ﻫﺴﺘـﻨﺪ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬را ﻓـﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪ ,‬ﺗـﺎ ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ و زﻣﺎن‬
‫ذﺧﻴﺮه ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬اﮔﺮ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪ ,‬ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ و زﻣﺎن ﺑﻌﺪ از‬
‫‪ ۵‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر ذﺧﻴﺮه ﺧﻮاﻫـﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• اﮔﺮ‪ :‬اﺷﺘﺒﺎه‪ ,‬ﻣﺎه‪ ,‬روز‪ ,‬ﺳﺎل‪ ,‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻳﺎ دﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ را ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬
‫از دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي ▲ ▼ ‹ ﻳﺎ دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫـﺎي ﻋﺪدي وارد ﺳﺎزﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪ ,‬ﺗﺎ ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ و زﻣﺎن ذﺧﻴﺮه ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬اﮔﺮ ﻧﻴﺎز‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺗﻐـﻴﻴﺮدادن ﺗﻨﻈـﻴﻤﺎت ﺳﺎﻋﺖ داﺷﺘـﻴﺪ‪ ,‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴـﺪ اﻳﻦ ﻛﺎر را‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر دﺳﺘﻲ اﳒﺎم دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎرﺳﻲ ‪۳۳ -‬‬
‫‪rO Í“UUÄd Ë rOEM‬‬
‫∂‪Æ‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ‪) Auto Channel Scan‬اﺳﻜﻦ ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر ﻛﺎﻧﺎل( ﺗﻜﻤﻴﻞ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻇﺮف ‪ ۳‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ۴‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‪ ,‬ﻣﻨﻮي ‪) Clock Setting‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ( را ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه‬
‫ﺧـﻮاﻫـﻴـﺪ ﳕـﻮد‪ .‬اﮔـﺮ ﻣـﺎﻳـﻞ ﻫـﺴـﺘـﻴـﺪ ‪) Clock Setting‬ﺗﻨـﻈـﻴـﻢ ﺳـﺎﻋـﺖ( را‬
‫ﻓﻮرًا اﳒﺎم دﻫﻴﺪ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫـﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ و ﺑﺮﭘﺎﺳﺎزي ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺑﺮاي ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ زﻣﺎن ﻓـﻌﻠﻲ ﻛﺎرﺑﺮد دارد‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ رﻳـﺰي زﻣﺎﻧﻲ )ﺑﺎ ﺗﺎﳝﺮ( ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺘﻤًﺎ زﻣﺎن را ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﺮده ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.۱‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻮﻗ‪ 5‬اﺳﺖ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.۲‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪ Setup‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي … † را ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‹ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.۳‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪ System‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي … † را ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‹ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.۴‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪ Clock Set‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي … † را ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪OK‬‬
‫‪.۵‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪ ,‬ﺗﺎ ﺗﺎرﻳـﺦ و زﻣﺎن ذﺧﻴﺮه ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫اﮔﺮ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬را ﻓﺸﺎر ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ ,‬ذﺧﻴﺮه ﻧﺨـﻮاﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ دﻛﻤﻪ ‹ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫دﻛﻤـﻪ ﻫﺎي ▲ ▼ ‹ را ﺟـﻬﺖ وارد ﺳـﺎﺧﱳ ﻣـﺎه‪ ,‬روز‪ ,‬ﺳﺎل‪ ,‬ﺳـﺎﻋﺖ ﻳـﺎ‬
‫دﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﻓـﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮاي وارد ﺳﺎﺧـﱳ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ اﻃـﻼﻋﺎت ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻫﺎي ﻋﺪدي را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫روز ﻫﻔﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر ﳕﺎﻳـﺶ داده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﻧﺎل‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ اﺟﺎزه ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺎﻧﺪ ﺗﻴﻮﻧﺮ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ‪ DVD‬و ‪ HDD‬ﺧﻮد را ﺑﺎ آﻧﱳ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‪ ,‬ﻫﺮ ﻛﺪام را ﻛﻪ‬
‫در ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ اوﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻴﺶ ﻣﺎدﮔﻲ ‪ Antenna In‬ﺧﻮد وﺻﻞ ﻛﺮده اﻳﺪ‪ ,‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر دﺳﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﻈﻴـﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.۱‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻮﻗ‪ 5‬اﺳﺖ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.۲‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪ Setup‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي … † را ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‹ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.۳‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪ Channel Set‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي … † را ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ دﻛﻤﻪ ‹ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۳۴‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ و ﺑﺮﭘﺎﺳﺎزي ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫‪Æ¥‬‬
‫‪Ƶ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪ Auto Setup‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي … † را ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙـﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ دﻛﻤﻪ ‹ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘـﻴﺎم "‪) ."Your data will be lost. Press [OK] to continue, [Return] to exit.‬داده ﻫـﺎي ﺷـﻤﺎ از ﺑـﲔ ﺧـﻮاﻫﻨـﺪ رﻓـﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺮاي اداﻣـﻪ‬
‫]‪ [OK‬و ﺑﺮاي ﺧﺮوج ]‪ [Return‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ( ﳕـﺎﻳﺶ داده ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬اﺳﻜﻦ ﻛﺎﻧـﺎﻟﻬﺎ آﻏﺎز ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• اوﻟﲔ ﺑﺎﻧﺪ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧـﺴﻲ اﺳﻜﻦ ﺷﺪه و اوﻟﲔ اﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎه ﻳـﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه ﺑﻪ ﳕﺎﻳﺶ درآﻣﺪه و ذﺧﻴﺮه ﺧـﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ از اﻳﻦ‬
‫دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ‪ DVD‬و ‪ ,HDD‬دوﻣـﲔ اﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎه را ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻛﺮده و ﺑﻪ اﻳﻦ ﻛﺎر اداﻣﻪ ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺘﻮﻗŸ ﺳﺎﺧﱳ ﺗﻨﻈﻴـﻢ ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪wœ rOEM‬‬
‫ﺷـﻤﺎ ﻣـﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧـﻴﺪ ﻛـﺎﻧـﺎﻟﻬـﺎي ﭘﻴـﺶ ﺗـﻨﻈـﻴﻤـﻲ را ﻛﻪ ﺟـﺴـﺘﺠـﻮي ﺧﻮدﻛـﺎر ﻛﺎﻧـﺎل آﻧـﻬﺎ را ﻧـﻴﺎﻓـﺘﻪ اﺳـﺖ‪ ,‬اﺿـﺎﻓﻪ ﻛـﻨﻴـﺪ‪ .‬ﺿـﻤﻨًـﺎ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎﻳﻲ را ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺴـﺘﻴﺪ‪ ,‬ﺣﺬف ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎ را ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ رﻳﺰي ﻛﻨﻴـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‪ ,‬ﻣﺮاﺣﻞ ‪ ۱‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ۳‬در ﻗﺴـﻤﺖ "ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر" در ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ۳۴‬را دﻧﺒﺎل ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Æ¥‬‬
‫‪Ƶ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪ Maunal Setup‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي … † را ﻓـﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ دﻛﻤﻪ ‹ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑـﺮاي اﻧـﺘـﺨــﺎب ‪) PR‬ﺑـﺮﻧـﺎﻣـﻪ( دﳋـﻮاه ﺟـﻬــﺖ وﻳـﺮاﻳـﺶ‪ ,‬ﺣـﺬف‪ ,‬ﻳـﺎ ﺗـﺒــﺪﻳـﻞ‪ ,‬دﻛـﻤـﻪ ﻫـﺎي … † را ﻓـﺸــﺎر دﻫـﻴـﺪ‪ ,‬ﺳـﭙـﺲ دﻛـﻤـﻪ‬
‫‪ COLOUR‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎي ‪ Delete ,Edit‬ﻳﺎ ‪ Swap‬را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛـﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : ©tL?œ ed® ©g?«dË®Save »U??
« —u —œ‬ﻣـﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧـﻴﺪاﻃـﻼﻋﺎت‬
‫‪) PR‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ( را اﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻳﺎ وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ از ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ دادن اﻃﻼﻋﺎت‬
‫‪ ,(MFT ,Name ,Ch)PR‬ﮔـﺰﻳـﻨـﻪ ‪ Save‬را اﻧـﺘـﺨـﺎب ﻛـﺮده‪ ,‬ﺳـﭙـﺲ دﻛـﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ OK‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪ :CH‬ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎي دﳋﻮاه را ﺑﺎ دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي ‹ ﺗـﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬‫ ‪ :Name‬ﻧﺎم اﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎه را ﻛﻪ از روي ﺳﻴﮕـﻨﺎل ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮه ﺷﺪه‬‫ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ داده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪ ,‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﺧﻮدﻛـﺎر ﳕﺎﻳﺶ دﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬اﮔﺮ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ داده ﻧﺸﻮد‪ ,‬ﻣﻲ ﺗـﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﻧﺎم راﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي ▲ ▼ ‹ وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪ : ©f
Ud wœ rOEM® MFT‬ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻗﺎدر ﺧﻮاﻫﻴﺪ‬‫ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ‹ را ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴـﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪©t?L??œ e??® Delete »U???
« —u? —œ‬‬
‫)ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ( اﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﺣﺬف ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫??‪ : ©B®e‬اﻃـﻼﻋـﺎت ﻛـﺎﻧـﺎل ‪PR‬‬
‫• ‪ :©C®œ—“ e???©t?L?œ œ—“® Swap »U????
« —u? —œ‬ﻗـﺎدر ﺧـﻮاﻫــﻴـﺪ ﺑـﻮد‬
‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻛﺎﻧﺎل دو ‪) PR‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ( را ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﻨﻮان ﻣﺜﺎل‪,‬‬
‫اﮔﺮ ﻣـﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﺎﺷـﻴﺪ ‪ PR2‬را ﺑﺎ ‪ PR5‬ﺟـﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﻛـﻨﻴﺪ‪ ,‬ﮔـﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪) Swap‬ﺟـﺎﺑﺠﺎ‬
‫ﻛــﺮدن( را روي ‪ PR2‬اﻧــﺘــﺨــﺎب ﻛــﺮده‪ ,‬ﺳــﭙــﺲ روي ‪ PR5‬دﻛــﻤــﻪ ‪ OK‬را‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎرﺳﻲ ‪۳۵ -‬‬
‫‪rO Í“UUÄd Ë rOEM‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌـﺪاد اﻳﺴﺘﮕـﺎه ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﺧﻮدﻛـﺎر در ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛـﻨﻨﺪه ‪ DVD‬و ‪ HDD‬ذﺧﻴـﺮه ﺧﻮاﻫﻨـﺪ ﺷﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺗـﻌﺪاد اﻳﺴﺘـﮕﺎه ﻫﺎي‬
‫ﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ دارد‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ و ﺑﺮﭘﺎﺳﺎزي ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫‪ÊU“ ÍU tMeÖ rOEM‬‬
‫اﮔﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎي زﺑﺎن را از ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﻈـﻴﻢ ﻛﺮده ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ ,‬ﻫﺮ ﺑﺎر ﻛﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﻲ را ﲤﺎﺷﺎ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﺧﻮدﻛـﺎر ﺑﺎﻻ ﺧﻮاﻫﻨﺪ آﻣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ʊ‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه در ﺣﺎﻟـﺖ ﺗﻮﻗŸ اﺳﺖ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫≤‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺑـﺮاي اﻧــﺘـﺨـﺎب ‪ Setup‬دﻛـﻤــﻪ ﻫـﺎي … † را ﻓـﺸـﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳــﭙـﺲ دﻛـﻤـﻪ ‪ OK‬ﻳــﺎ‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‹ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫≥‪Æ‬‬
‫‪Æ¥‬‬
‫‪Ƶ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪ Language‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي … † را ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‹ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮي ‪) Language setup‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ زﺑﺎن( ﳕـﺎﻳﺶ داده ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑـﺮاي اﻧـﺘﺨـﺎب ﮔـﺰﻳـﻨﻪ دﳋـﻮاه زﺑـﺎن دﻛـﻤـﻪ ﻫﺎي … † را ﻓـﺸـﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳـﭙﺲ‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ دﻛﻤﻪ ‹ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫـﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : Audio‬ﺑﺮاي زﺑﺎن ﺻﺪاي دﻳﺴﻚ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : Subtitle‬ﺑﺮاي زﻳﺮﻧﻮﻳﺴﻬﺎي دﻳﺴﻚ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : Disc Menu‬ﺑﺮاي ﻣﻨﻮي دﻳﺴﻚ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد در دﻳـﺴﻚ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : Menu‬ﺑﺮاي ﳕﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮي روي ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺿـﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ‪ DVD‬و ‪ HDD‬ﺷﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب زﺑﺎن دﳋﻮاه دﻛﻤـﻪ ﻫﺎي … † را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ دﻛﻤﻪ ‹ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫اﮔﺮ زﺑﺎن اﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ روي دﻳﺴﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧـﺸﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ,‬زﺑﺎن ﭘﻴﺶ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪه اﺻﻠﻲ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫زﺑﺎن اﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ دﻳﺴﻚ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫‪rO ÍU tMeÖ rOEM‬‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ اﻣﻜﺎن اﳒﺎم ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤـﺎت ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ را ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ʊ‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه در ﺣﺎﻟـﺖ ﺗﻮﻗŸ اﺳﺖ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫≤‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺑـﺮاي اﻧــﺘـﺨـﺎب ‪ Setup‬دﻛـﻤــﻪ ﻫـﺎي … † را ﻓـﺸـﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳــﭙـﺲ دﻛـﻤـﻪ ‪ OK‬ﻳــﺎ‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‹ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫≥‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪ ,System‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي … † را ﻓﺸﺎر داده و ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ‬
‫‹ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Æ¥‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎي دﳋﻮاه ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي … † را ﻓﺸﺎر داده و‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ ‹ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ƶ‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ دﳋﻮاه‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي … † را ﻓﺸﺎر داده و ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ ‹ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪—Uœu Êb ‘uU rOEM‬‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ دﻛﻤﻪ اي را در ﻣﺪت زﻣﺎن اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﺪه ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪ ,‬دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ‪ DVD‬و ‪ HDD‬ﺷﻤﺎ‬
‫را ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﻛﺮد‪.‬‬
‫‪Ʊ‬‬
‫≤‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺑــﺮاي اﻧـﺘــﺨــﺎب ‪ Auto Power Off‬دﻛـﻤــﻪ ﻫــﺎي … † را ﻓـﺸــﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳــﭙـﺲ‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ دﻛﻤﻪ ‹ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨـﺎب ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ دﳋﻮاه دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي … † را ﻓـﺸﺎر داده ‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ ‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‹ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ Auto Power Off : Off‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎل ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : 2 Hours‬ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪه ‪ DVD & HDD‬ﭘﺲ از ﮔﺬﺷﺖ ‪ ۲‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ از آﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺑﺎري‬
‫ﻛﻪ دﻛﻤﻪ اي ﻓﺸﺎر داده ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‪ ,‬ﺧـﺎﻣﻮش ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : 6 Hours‬ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪه ‪ DVD & HDD‬ﭘﺲ از ﮔﺬﺷﺖ ‪ ۶‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ از آﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺑﺎري‬
‫ﻛﻪ دﻛﻤﻪ اي ﻓﺸﺎر داده ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‪ ,‬ﺧـﺎﻣﻮش ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• اﮔﺮ زﻣﺎن ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﺷﺪن ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر ﻛﻪ در ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ‪) Auto Power Off‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﺷﺪن ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر( ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ در ﺣﲔ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻳﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﺮا ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪ ,‬دﺳﺘﮕـﺎه ﺗﺎ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ آن ﭘﺨﺶ ﻳﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﺎﲤﻪ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر اداﻣﻪ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ داد‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۳۶‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ و ﺑﺮﭘﺎﺳﺎزي ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫)‪Anynet+ (HDMI CEC‬‬
‫‪Ʊ‬‬
‫ﺟــﻬـﺖ اﻧــﺘــﺨـﺎب )‪ Anynet+ (HDMI CEC‬دﻛــﻤـﻪ ﻫــﺎي … † را ﻓــﺸـﺎر داده‪,‬‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ ‹ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎي )‪Anynet+ (HDMI CEC‬‬
‫≤‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪ On‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫـﺎي … † را ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ ‹ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﳕﺎﻳﺶ داده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Anynet+ (HDMI CEC) “« ÁœUH« XN‬‬
‫‪Ʊ‬‬
‫ﺿـﺒﻂ ﻛـﻨﻨـﺪه ‪ HDD‬و ‪ DVD‬را ﺑﺎ اﺳـﺘﻔـﺎده از ﻛﺎﺑـﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﻪ ﻳـﻚ ﺗﻠـﻮﻳـﺰﻳﻮن ‪ Samsung‬وﺻـﻞ ﻛﻨـﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻـﻔﺤـﺎت ‪ ۲۸~۲۷‬را‬
‫ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ(‬
‫≤‪Æ‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ )‪ Anynet+ (HDMI CEC‬را در ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ‪ HDD‬و ‪ DVD‬ﺧﻮد روي "‪ "On‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴـﺪ‪) .‬ﺑﺎﻻ را ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ(‬
‫≥‪Æ‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن ﺧﻮد را ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺑﺮاي اﻃﻼﻋﺎت و راﻫﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑـﻪ دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ راﻫﻨﻤﺎي ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن ﺧﻮد ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪(.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺎﻻ ﻣـﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴـﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛـﻨﻨﺪه ‪ HDD‬و ‪ DVD‬را ﺑـﺎ ﻛﻨﺘـﺮل از راه دور‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﮔﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫)دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان ﺑـﺮاي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ‪ HDD‬و‬
‫‪ ,‬و ‪ ,‬دﻛـﻤﻪ ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫‪ DVD‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﺑﺮد‪, , , , :‬‬
‫~ (‬
‫• ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻲ ﻛﻪ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Anynet+‬را روي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل از راه دور ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن ﺧﻮد‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪ ,‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎي ﳕـﺎﻳﺶ ﭼﭗ را ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪bOM ÁœUH« tKOË »U?
« Í«d tMeÖ s« “« : Select Device‬‬‫ ‪.bOM ÁœUH« j{ Êœd nu? U ŸËd Í«d tMeÖ s« “« : Record‬‬‫ ‪ÆDVDË HDD ÁbMM? j{ —Ëœ Á«— “« ‰dM ÍË— MENU( ) tL?œ tUA : Menu on Device‬‬‫‪.DVDË HDD ÁbMM j?{ —Ëœ Á«— “« ‰dM ÍË— INFO ( ) tL?œ tUA : Device Operation -‬‬
‫‪æÊueuK ÍuMº‬‬
‫■‬
‫اﮔـﺮ در ﺣﲔ ﲤـﺎﺷﺎي ﺗـﻠﻮﻳـﺰﻳـﻮن دﻛﻤـﻪ ‪ STANDBY/ON‬را ﻓﺸـﺎر دﻫﻴـﺪ‪ ,‬ﺻـﻔﺤـﻪ ﺗﻠـﻮﻳﺰﻳـﻮن ﺑﻪ ﺻـﻔـﺤﻪ ﭘـﺨﺶ ﺗـﻐﻴـﻴـﺮ‬
‫ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﻛﺮد‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫اﮔﺮ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن ﺧﺎﻣﻮش اﺳـﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ‪ DVD‬را روﺷﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ,‬ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن روﺷﻦ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫اﮔﺮ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن را ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ,‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ‪ HDD‬و ‪ DVD‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪) .‬ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ‪ HDD‬و ‪ DVD‬در ﺣﺎل ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‪ ,‬ﳕﻲ ﺗﻮان آﻧﺮا ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻛﺮد‪(.‬‬
‫■‬
‫اﮔﺮ ‪ HDMI‬را ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻲ ﻛﻪ دﻳﺴﻚ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﺮوي ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن در ﺣﺎل ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ دﻳﮕﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ دﻫﻴﺪ )ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻲ‪,‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﻟﻔﻪ اي‪ ... RF ,‬ﻏﻴﺮه( ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ‪ HDD‬و ‪ DVD‬از ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺎز ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ اﻳﺴﺘﺎد‪ .‬اﻣﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ‪ HDD‬و ‪ DVD‬ﳑﻜﻦ‬
‫اﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ دﻳﺴﻚ ‪ DVD‬اداﻣﻪ دﻫـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫(‪DivX(R) X‬‬
‫ﻟـﻄﻔًـﺎ از ﻛـﺪ ﺛـﺒﺖ ﺑـﺮاي ﺛـﺒـﺖ ﻛﺮدن ﻓـﺮﻣـﺖ ‪ DivX(R) Video On Demand‬ﺑـﺮاي‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ‪ DVD‬و ‪ HDD‬اﺳـﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺴﺐ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺑﻴﺸـﺘﺮ‪,‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ‪ www.divx.com/vod‬ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎرﺳﻲ ‪۳۷ -‬‬
‫‪rO Í“UUÄd Ë rOEM‬‬
‫‪ Anynet+‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺘﻲ اﺳـﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ اﻣﻜﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ در ﺻﻮرت وﺻﻞ ﻛـﺮدن‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨـﻨﺪه ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳـﻮن ‪ Samsung‬ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‪ , HDMI‬ﺑﺎ ﻛﻨـﺘﺮل از راه‬
‫دور ﻣﺘﻌـﻠﻖ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳـﺰﻳﻮن‪ , SAMSUNG‬دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺿﺒـﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ‪ HDD‬و‪DVD‬‬
‫ﺧﻮد را ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺎت ‪ ۲۸~۲۷‬را ﺑﺒـﻴﻨﻴﺪ(‬
‫)اﻳﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑـﺮاي ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن ﻫﺎي ‪ SAMSUNG‬ﻛـﻪ از ‪ Anynet+‬ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧـﻲ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد اﺳﺖ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ و ﺑﺮﭘﺎﺳﺎزي ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫‪«b ÍU tMeÖ rOEM‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ‪ DVD‬و ‪ HDD‬ﺧﻮد را ﺑـﻪ ﻳﻚ آﻣﭙﻠﻴﻔﺎﻳﺮ ﺑﻴﺮوﻧﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎي ﺧﺎﻧﮕﻲ وﺻﻞ ﻛﻨـﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫در اﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ و ﲡﻬﻴﺰات ﺻﻮﺗﻲ را ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺧﻮد اﳒﺎم دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﲔ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ از ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ NICAM‬اﺳـﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ʊ‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻮﻗŸ اﺳﺖ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫≤‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪ Setup‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي … † را ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‹ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫≥‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪ Audio‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي … † را ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‹ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Æ¥‬‬
‫ﺑـﺮاي اﻧـﺘـﺨـﺎب ﮔـﺰﻳـﻨـﻪ ﺻـﻮﺗــﻲ دﳋـﻮاه دﻛـﻤـﻪ ﻫـﺎي … † را ﻓـﺸـﺎر داده‪,‬‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ دﻛﻤﻪ ‹ را ﻓﺸـﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ƶ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ دﳋـﻮاه دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي … † را ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ ‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ دﻛﻤﻪ ‹ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪‰UO%œ wËd‬‬
‫• ‪ : PCM‬ﻫ ــﻨ ــﮕ ــﺎﻣـ ــﻲ ﻛ ــﻪ دﺳ ــﺘ ــﮕ ــﺎه ﻗ ــﺎدر ﺑـ ــﻪ رﻣ ــﺰﮔ ــﺸ ــﺎﻳ ــﻲ( ‪Dolby Digital‬ﻳ ــﺎ‬
‫)‪ MPEG-2‬ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ ,‬اﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳـﻨﻪ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : Bitstream‬ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ را ﺑﻪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎن ﺑﻴﺖ ‪) Dolby Digital‬ﻳﺎ ‪ (MPEG-2‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬اﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ را زﻣﺎﻧﻲ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪه ‪ AV‬ﻳﺎ آﻣﭙﻠﻴﻔﺎﻳﺮ‬
‫‪ AV‬ﺷﻤﺎ داراي رﻣﺰﮔﺸﺎي ‪) Dolby Digital‬ﻳـﺎ ‪ (MPEG-2‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ دﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎل ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻳﻜﺴﺎن ﺑﺮاي ﺻﺪاﻫﺎي ‪Dolby‬‬
‫‪ Digital‬و ‪ MPEG-2‬اﻋ ــﻤ ــﺎل ﻣــﻲ ﺷ ــﻮﻧ ــﺪ‪ .‬ﺧ ــﺮوﺟــﻲ ﺻ ــﺪاﻫ ــﺎي ‪LPCM‬‬
‫ﻫـﻤـﻴـﺸـﻪ ﺑـﺼـﻮرت ‪ PCM‬ﺧـﻮاﻫـﺪ ﺑـﻮد‪ .‬اﻳــﻦ اﻣـﺮ ﻫـﻴـﭻ ارﺗـﺒـﺎﻃـﻲ ﺑـﺎ‬
‫■‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ دﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎل ﻧﺪارد‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻤًﺎ ﺧـﺮوﺟﻲ دﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎل ﺻـﺤﻴﺢ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨـﻴﺪ ﭼﻮن در ﻏﻴﺮ اﻳﻨﺼـﻮرت ﻫﻴﭻ ﺻﺪاﻳﻲ ﻧﺨـﻮاﻫﻴﺪ ﺷﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺻـﺪا‬
‫ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺑﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪DTS‬‬
‫• ‪ : Off‬ﻫـﻴﭻ ﺳـﻴـﮕـﻨﺎل ‪ DTS‬در ﺧـﺮوﺟـﻲ اﻳﺠـﺎد ﻧـﺨـﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷـﺪ‪ .‬اﻳـﻦ ﮔـﺰﻳﻨـﻪ را‬
‫زﻣﺎﻧﻲ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪه ‪ AV‬ﻳﺎ آﻣﭙﻠﻴﻔﺎﻳﺮ ‪ AV‬ﺷﻤﺎ داراي رﻣﺰﮔﺸﺎي‬
‫‪ DTS‬ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : On‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺻﺪاﻫﺎي ‪ DTS‬را ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ,‬ﺟﺮﻳﺎن ﺑﻴﺖ ‪ DTS‬را‬
‫از ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ دﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎل ﺑﻴﺮون ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‪ .‬اﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ را زﻣﺎﻧﻲ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب‬
‫ﻛـﻨـﻴـﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﮔـﻴـﺮﻧـﺪه ‪ AV‬ﻳـﺎ آﻣـﭙـﻠـﻴـﻔـﺎﻳـﺮ ‪ AV‬ﺷـﻤـﺎ داراي رﻣـﺰﮔـﺸـﺎي ‪ DTS‬ﻣـﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺻﺪاي ‪ DTS‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪ ,‬ﺻـﺪا از‬
‫‪) Analog Audio Output‬ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ آﻧﺎﻟﻮگ ﺻﺪا( ﺑﻴـﺮون ﻧﺨﻮاﻫﺪ آﻣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۳۸‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ و ﺑﺮﭘﺎﺳﺎزي ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫‪DRC‬‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻘﻂ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻌﺎل ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺑﻮد ﻛﻪ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎل ﺻﻮﺗﻲ دﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎل ‪Dolby‬‬
‫ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﻲ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : On‬در ﺻـﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﺻﺪاي ﻓـﻴﻠـﻤﻬـﺎ ﺑﺎ وﻟـﻮم ﻳﺎ ﻣـﻴﺰان ﺻـﺪاي ﭘﺎﻳـﲔ ﻳﺎ از‬
‫ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮﻫﺎي ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺷﻮد‪ ,‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﻓﺸﺮده ﺳﺎزي ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﻲ‬
‫را ﺑﺮاي ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺟﻠﻮه دادن ﺻﺪاﻫﺎي ﭘﺎﻳﲔ و ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي از ﺑـﻠﻨﺪ ﺷﺪن ﺑﻴﺶ‬
‫از ﺑﺨﺸﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺻﺪاي ﺑﺎﻻ دارﻧﺪ‪ ,‬اﻋـﻤﺎل ﳕﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪rO Í“UUÄd Ë rOEM‬‬
‫• ‪ : Off‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ از ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺎ داﻣﻨﻪ دﻳﻨـﺎﻣﻴﻚ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻟﺬت ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪NICAM‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎي ‪ NICAM‬در ‪ ۳‬ﮔﺮوه ﺗﻘﺴﻴـﻢ ﺑﻨﺪي ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪) NICAM Stereo‬اﺳﺘﺮﻳـﻮ ‪) NICAM Mono ,(NICAM‬ﻣﻮﻧﻮ ‪ (NICAM‬و‪Bilingual‬‬
‫)دوزﺑﺎﻧﻪ( )ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺑﺎ زﺑﺎﻧﻲ دﻳﮕـﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎي ‪ NICAM‬ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺻﺪاي ﻣﻮﻧﻮ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻫﻤﺮاه ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ و ﺷﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﺻﺪاي دﳋﻮاه ﺧﻮد را ﺑﺎ روﺷﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻛﺮدن ‪ NICAM‬اﻧﺘﺨﺎب‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : On‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪NICAM‬‬
‫• ‪ : Off‬ﻓﻘﻂ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ در اﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴـﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧـ ـ ـ ـ ــﻮاﻫ ـ ـ ـ ـ ــﻴـ ـ ـ ـ ــﺪ ﺻـ ـ ـ ـ ــﺪاي‬
‫اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻣﻮﻧﻮ را در ﺣﲔ‬
‫ﭘـﺨﺶ ‪ NICAM‬ﺑـﻪ ﺧﺎﻃـﺮ اﻳﻨـﻜـﻪ ﺻﺪاي اﺳـﺘﺮﻳـﻮ ﺑﺮ اﺛـﺮ ﺷﺮاﻳـﻂ ﻧـﺎﻣﻨـﺎﺳﺐ درﻳـﺎﻓﺖ دﭼـﺎر‬
‫اﺧﻼل ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‪ ,‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪wubË ÍU tMeÖ rOEM‬‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ اﻣﻜﺎن اﳒﺎم ﺗﻨﻈﻴـﻤﺎت وﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ را ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد اﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮع دﻳـﺴﻚ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ دارد‪ .‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻣﺬﻛﻮر ﺷﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺮﺧﻲ از اﻧﻮاع دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎ ﻛﺎر ﻧـﻜﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ʊ‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻮﻗŸ اﺳﺖ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫≤‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪ Setup‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي … † را ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‹ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫≥‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪ Video‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي … † را ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‹ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮي ‪ Video setup‬ﳕﺎﻳﺶ داده ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Æ¥‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ دﳋﻮاه وﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي … † را ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪,‬‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ دﻛﻤﻪ ‹ را ﻓﺸـﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ƶ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ دﳋـﻮاه دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي … † را ﻓﺸﺎر داده ‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ ‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ دﻛﻤﻪ ‹ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫
‪ÊueuK tH ÍœUF« X‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮع ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ دارﻳﺪ‪ ,‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت ﺻﻔﺤﻪ آﻧﺮا ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫دﻫﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﻧﺴﺒﺖ اﺑﻌﺎدي(‬
‫• ‪ : ©wULMO ÁœdÄ XU® 4:3 Letter Box‬زﻣـﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮاﻫﻴﺪ ﲤﺎم ﻧﺴﺒﺖ‬
‫اﺑﻌﺎدي ‪ ۹:۱۶‬ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﻫﺎي ‪ DVD‬را ﲤﺎﺷﺎ ﻛـﻨﻴﺪ‪ ,‬و ﺣﺘﻲ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ‬
‫اﺑﻌﺎدي ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﳕﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن ﺷـﻤﺎ ‪ ۳:۴‬اﺳﺖ از اﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﻮارﻫﺎي ﺳﻴﺎﻫﻲ در ﺑﺎﻻ و ﭘﺎﻳﲔ ﺻﻔـﺤﻪ ﳕﺎﻳﺶ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮاﻫﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : ©Áb ¯—e XU® 4:3 Pan - Scan‬اﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ را ﺑﺮاي ﲤﺎﺷﺎي ﺑﺨﺶ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﳕﺎﻳﺶ ‪ ۹:۱۶‬در ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﳕﺎﻳﺶ ﺳﻨﺘﻲ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺑﺨﺸﻬﺎي اﻧﺘﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﭼﭗ و راﺳﺖ ﻓﻴﻠـﻢ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﻧﺨﻮاﻫﻨﺪ ﺑﻮد‪(.‬‬
‫• ‪ : ©i?d X?U® 16:9 Wide‬ﺑﺎ اﻳـﻦ ﮔﺰﻳـﻨﻪ ﻣـﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧـﻴﺪ ﺗـﺼﺎوﻳـﺮ ﻛﺎﻣـﻞ ‪ ۹:۱۶‬را در ﺗﻠـﻮﻳﺰﻳـﻮن ﺻﻔـﺤﻪ ﻋﺮﻳـﺾ ﺧﻮد ﻣـﺸﺎﻫـﺪه‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎرﺳﻲ ‪۳۹ -‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ و ﺑﺮﭘﺎﺳﺎزي ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫‪Xd U VUM X“«—UÄ gU‬‬
‫• ‪ : Off‬ﻋﺎدي‬
‫• ‪ : On‬ﺑﺎ ﻛﺎﺳـﱳ از ﭘﺎرازﻳﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺗـﺼﻮﻳﺮي واﺿﺤـﺘﺮ اراﺋﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛـﻨﺪ )ﺑﺮاي‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ(‪.‬‬
‫‪HDMI duB Xœ‬‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﺎرﺑﺮد دارد ﻛﻪ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه از ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﻪ وﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﳕﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫دﻫﻨﺪه )ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن‪ ,‬ﭘﺮوﺟﻜﺘﻮر‪ ,‬ﻏـﻴﺮه( وﺻﻞ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪720 x 576 : 576P‬‬
‫• ‪1280 x 720 : 720P‬‬
‫• ‪1920 x 1080 : 1080i‬‬
‫• ‪1920 x 1080 : 1080P‬‬
‫«
‪wËd »U‬‬
‫• ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ‪ HDD‬و ‪ DVD‬را ﺑﺎ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳـﺰﻳﻮن وﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ورودي ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن را ﺑﺮ ‪ HDMI‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫اﺳﻜﻦ ﭘﻴﺶ روﻧﺪه وﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ‪ HDMI‬وﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪ ,‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر ﻓﻌﺎل ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮدد‪) .‬ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ‪ HDMI‬در‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺟﻠﻮي ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨـﺪه ‪ HDD‬و ‪ DVD‬ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪(.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﺑﻪ راﻫﻨﻤﺎي ﻛﺎرﺑﺮ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن رﺟﻮع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻌﻠﻮم ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ آﻳﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن ﺗﺎن از اﺳﻜﻦ ﭘﻴﺶ روﻧﺪه ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ‪ .‬اﮔﺮ اﺳﻜﻦ ﭘﻴﺶ روﻧﺪه ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪ ,‬از راﻫﻨﻤﺎي ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن در ﺧﺼﻮص ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت اﺳﻜﻦ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺶ روﻧﺪه در ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﻨﻮي ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳـﻮن اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫دﻗﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﺑﺮاي ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن ﻳﺎ ﭘﺮوﺟﻜﺘﻮر وﺻﻞ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ دارد‪ .‬ﺑﺮاي آﮔﺎﻫﻲ از ﺟﺰﻳﻴﺎت‪,‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ راﻫﻨﻤﺎي ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن ﻳﺎ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﭘـﺮوﺟﻜﺘﻮر ﺧﻮد ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ دﻗﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ را ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣـﻲ دﻫﻴﺪ‪ ,‬ﳑﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﳕﺎﻳﺎن ﺷﺪن ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﺎدي ﭼﻨﺪ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻃﻮل ﺑﻜﺸﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۴۰‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ و ﺑﺮﭘﺎﺳﺎزي ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫‪©Áb
Ë— gOÄ sJ«® Í« tHR wËd‬‬
‫اﻳـﻦ ﻗﺎﺑـﻠـﻴﺖ زﻣـﺎﻧـﻲ ﻣـﻮﺟﻮد اﺳـﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﺧﺮوﺟـﻲ وﻳـﺪﻳﻮﻳـﻲ از ﻧـﻮع ﻣﺆﻟـﻔـﻪ اي‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ اﻳﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﻴﺶ روﻧﺪه را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮاي‬
‫ﻣـﺸـﺎﻫـﺪه «ﺣـﺎﻟﺖ اﺳـﻜـﻦ ﭘـﻴـﺶ روﻧـﺪه» اﺑـﺘـﺪا ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ ﻛـﺎﺑـﻞ ﻣـﺆﻟـﻔـﻪ اي را وﺻـﻞ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ۲۴‬ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ( دﻗﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎي ﻣﺆﻟﻔﻪ اي ﺑﺪرﺳﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪Interlace‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎم «آﻳﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮاﻫﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ درﻫﻢ ﺗﺎﻓﺘﻪ را ﺣﻔﻆ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ? "ﺑﺎزﮔﺸﺖ ﻇﺮف ‪ ۱۰‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‪ ".‬ﳕﺎﻳﺶ داده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪ .‬ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺎزﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ درﻫﻢ ﺗﺎﻓﺘﻪ "ﺑﻠﻪ" را اﻧﺘـﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫اﮔﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬وﺻﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ,‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﳕـﺎﻳﺶ داده ﳕﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎرﺳﻲ ‪۴۱ -‬‬
‫‪rO Í“UUÄd Ë rOEM‬‬
‫• ‪Progressive‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎم «آﻳﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮاﻫﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﻴﺶ روﻧﺪه را ﺣﻔﻆ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ? "ﺑﺎزﮔﺸﺖ ﻇﺮف‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺛﺎﻧـﻴﻪ‪ ".‬ﳕـﺎﻳﺶ داده ﻣﻲ ﺷـﻮد‪ .‬ﺑﺮاي ﺑـﺎزﮔﺸـﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟـﺖ ﭘﻴـﺶ روﻧﺪه‬
‫"ﺑﻠﻪ" را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ و ﺑﺮﭘﺎﺳﺎزي ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫‪sb«Ë qH rOEM‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑـﻠﻴﺖ ‪ Parental Lock‬ﺑـﺮاي ‪ DVD‬ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻗﺎﺑـﻞ اﺳﺘﻔـﺎده اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ رده ﺑـﻨﺪي دارﻧﺪ و ﺑﻪ ﺷـﻤﺎ ﻛﻤـﻚ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨـﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻮع ‪ DVD‬ﻫﺎﻳـﻲ را ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻧﻮاده ﺷﻤﺎ ﲤﺎﺷﺎ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ ,‬ﻛﻨـﺘﺮل ﳕﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬در دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎ ﺗﺎ ‪ ۸‬ﺳﻄﺢ ﻃﺒﻘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪي ﺷﺪه وﺟﻮد دارد‪.‬‬
‫‪Ʊ‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻮﻗŸ اﺳﺖ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫≤‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪ Setup‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي … † را ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‹ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫≥‪Æ‬‬
‫‪Æ¥‬‬
‫ﺑــﺮاي اﻧـﺘــﺨــﺎب ‪ Parental Lock‬دﻛــﻤـﻪ ﻫــﺎي … † را ﻓــﺸـﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳــﭙــﺲ‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ دﻛﻤﻪ ‹ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫـﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮاي اوﻟﲔ ﺑﺎر ﺑـﺎ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ‪ DVD‬و ‪ HDD‬ﺧﻮد‬
‫ﻛـﺎر ﻣـﻲ ﻛـﻨـﻴـﺪ‪ ,‬ﭘـﻴـﺎم "‪) "Create the password‬ﻟـﻄـﻔًـﺎ اﺳــﻢ رﻣـﺰ را اﻳـﺠـﺎد‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ( ﳕﺎﻳﺶ داده ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻋـﺪدي دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﻛﻨﺘﺮل از راه دور اﺳﻢ رﻣﺰي ‪ ۴‬رﻗﻤﻲ وارد ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎم "‪ "Confirm the password‬ﳕﺎﻳﺶ داده ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷـﺪ‪ .‬اﺳﻢ رﻣﺰ ﺧﻮد را ﻣﺠﺪدًا وارد ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪e— r« Êœd ‘u«d —u —œ‬‬
‫‪Ʊ‬‬
‫دﻳﺴﻚ را از دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺧﺎرج ﺳﺎزﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫≤‪Æ‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ )‪ PLAY/PAUSE(u‬واﻗﻊ در ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺟﻠﻮي دﺳﺘﮕﺎه را ﻓﺸﺎر داده و ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪت ‪ ۱۰‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻧﮕﻪ دارﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Rating Level rOEM‬‬
‫‪Ʊ‬‬
‫≤‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪ Rating Level‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي … † را ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ دﻛﻤﻪ ‹ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑـﺮاي اﻧﺘـﺨـﺎب ‪ Rating Level‬ﻣـﻮرد ﻧﻈـﺮ ﺧـﻮد دﻛﻤـﻪ ﻫـﺎي … † را ﻓـﺸﺎر‬
‫داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ دﻛﻤﻪ ‹ را ﻓـﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﻨﻮان ﻣﺜﺎل‪ ,‬اﮔﺮ ﺗﺎ ‪ ۶ Level‬را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ,‬دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎي ﺣﺎوي ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫ﻫﺎي ‪ ۸ ٬۷ Level‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﺨﻮاﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻋﺪد ﺑﺰرﮔﺘﺮ ﻧﺸﺎن دﻫﻨﺪه ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
‫ﺑﻮدن ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺰرﮔﺴﺎﻻن اﺳـﺖ‪..‬‬
‫‪e— r« dOOG‬‬
‫‪Ʊ‬‬
‫≤‪Æ‬‬
‫≥‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪ Change Password‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي … † را ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ دﻛﻤﻪ ‹ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫـﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻋﺪدي دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﻛﻨﺘﺮل از راه دور اﺳﻢ رﻣﺰي ‪۴‬‬
‫رﻗﻤﻲ وارد ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎم "‪ "Confirm the password‬ﳕﺎﻳﺶ داده ﺧﻮاﻫـﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑـﺎ اﺳﺘـﻔـﺎده از دﻛـﻤﻪ ﻫـﺎي ﻋـﺪدي دﺳﺘـﮕـﺎه ﻛﻨـﺘـﺮل از راه دور اﺳـﻢ رﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺧﻮد را ﻣﺠﺪدًا وارد ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ از اﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ رﺗﺒﻪ ﺑﻨﺪي ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪ‪ ,‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ اﺳﻢ رﻣﺰ‬
‫را ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۴۲‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ و ﺑﺮﭘﺎﺳﺎزي ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫‪j{ ÍU tMeÖ rOEM‬‬
‫«‪‰uB —Uœu ÁbMM œU%‬‬
‫)ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪(V‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ ‪ DVD-Video‬از ’‪ ‘Titles‬و ’‪ ‘Chapters‬ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‪ .‬زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ را ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ,‬اﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ در ﺻﻮرت‬
‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از اﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻳﻚ ﻋﻨـﻮان را ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ داد‪ ,‬ﻳﻚ ﻋﻨﻮان ﺑﻪ ﻓﺼﻮل ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺑﻨﺪي ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫≤‪Æ‬‬
‫دﻛـﻤﻪ ﻫـﺎي … † را ﺑﺮاي اﻧـﺘﺨـﺎب ‪ Recording‬ﻓﺸـﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙـﺲ دﻛﻤـﻪ‬
‫‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ ‹ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫≥‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺑـﺮاي اﻧﺘـﺨﺎب ‪ Chapter Creator‬دﻛـﻤﻪ ﻫـﺎي … † را ﻓـﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳـﭙﺲ‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ دﻛﻤﻪ ‹ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫـﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Æ¥‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪ Off‬ﻳﺎ ‪ ,On‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي … † را ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪OK‬‬
‫‪rO Í“UUÄd Ë rOEM‬‬
‫‪ Ʊ‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي … † را ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪ Setup‬ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ‬
‫‹ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ دﻛﻤﻪ ‹ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : Off‬اﮔﺮ ﳕﻲ ﺧﻮاﻫﻴﺪ ازاﻳﺠﺎد ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺧﻮدﻛـﺎر ﻓﺼﻮل اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ,‬اﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﳕﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : On‬اﮔﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮاﻫﻴﺪ ازاﻳﺠﺎد ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺧـﻮدﻛﺎر ﻓﺼﻮل اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ,‬اﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﳕﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ) (‪ EXIT‬را ﺑﺮاي ﺧﺮوج از ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﺸـﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ƶ‬‬
‫∂‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ﺷﺮوع ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ REC‬را ﻓﺸـﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺑﺮاي آﮔـﺎﻫﻲ از ﻃـﺮز ﺗﻨﻈـﻴﻢ ﺳﺮﻋـﺖ ﺿﺒـﻂ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔـﺤﻪ ‪ ۶۶‬ﻣـﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻓـﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴـﺪ( ﭘﻴـﺎم " ‪Do you want to create the chapter‬‬
‫?‪ "menu after this recording‬ﳕﺎﻳﺶ داده ﻣﻲ ﺷـﻮد‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪ OK‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي ‹ را ﻓﺸـﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﺎزي ﺑﺮاي اﺳـﺘﻔﺎده از دﻳﺴﻚ ﻫﺎي ‪ DVD+RW‬ﺿﺮوري ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ً‬
‫∑‪Æ‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ) ( ‪ STOP‬را ﺑﺮاي ﺗﻮﻗŸ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓـﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫∏‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ﳕﺎﻳﺶ ﻋﻨﺎوﻳﻦ اﻳﺠﺎد ﺷﺪه‪ ,‬دﻳﺴﻚ را ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ )ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ۹۴‬ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ( و ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ TITLE MENU‬را‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻨﻮي ‪ Title‬ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ اﻹﻗﻔﺎل ﻏﻴﺮ ﺿﺮوري ﺑﺸـﻜﻞ ﻋﺎم ﻋﻨﺪ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﻘﺮص ‪.DVD+RW‬‬
‫‪Æπ‬‬
‫ﺑـﺮاي ﳕﺎﻳـﺶ ﻓﺼـﻮل اﻳﺠـﺎد ﺷﺪه‪ ,‬ﻋـﻨﻮان دﳋـﻮاه را اﻧﺘـﺨﺎب ﻛـﺮده و دﻛﻤـﻪ ‪ DISC MENU‬را ﻓﺸـﺎر دﻫﻴـﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻨـﻮي ‪Chapter‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ﻋﻨﻮان اﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﺧـﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑـﻠﻴـﺖ اﻳﺠﺎد ﺧـﻮدﻛﺎر ﻓﺼـﻮل ﺑﺎ ﻗـﺎﺑﻠﻴـﺖ ﺿﺒـﻂ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ و ﻳـﺎ وﻗﺘﻲ ﻛـﻪ دﺳﺘـﮕﺎه را ﺧﺎﻣـﻮش ﻣﻲ ﻛـﻨﻴﺪ ﻗـﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻧﺨﻮاﻫﺪ ﺑﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪EP ÊU“ XU rOEM‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﺑـﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر دادن ﻣﻜﺮر دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ REC MODE‬ﻳﻜﻲ از ﭼﻬﺎر ﺣﺎﻟـﺖ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫در ﺣﺎﻟـﺖ ‪) EP‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﲤﺪﻳـﺪ ﺷﺪه(‪ ,‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧـﻴﺪ زﻣﺎن ﺿـﺒﻂ را ﺑﺎ اﻳﻦ ﺗـﻨﻈﻴـﻢ‬
‫روي ‪ ۶‬ﻳﺎ ‪ ۸‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪6 Hours‬‬
‫• ‪8 Hours‬‬
‫ﻓﺎرﺳﻲ ‪۴۳ -‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ و ﺑﺮﭘﺎﺳﺎزي ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫‪EZ Record‬‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ اﺟﺎزه ﻣـﻲ دﻫﺪ ﻳﻚ دﻳﺴﻚ را ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر آﻣﺎده و ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﺎزﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ʊ‬‬
‫دﻛﻤـﻪ ﻫﺎي … † را ﺑﺮاي اﻧـﺘﺨﺎب ‪ EZ Record‬ﻓـﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙـﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ ‹ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫≤‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪ On‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي … † را ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ ‹‬
‫≥‪Æ‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ دﻳﺴﻚ ﺑﮕﺬارﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫اﮔﺮ دﻳﺴﻚ ﻧﻮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ,‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﺧﻮدﻛـﺎر آﻣﺎده ﺳﺎزي ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Æ¥‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ REC‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ƶ‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ‪ EZ Record‬دﻳﺴﻚ را در ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ زﻳﺮ ﺑـﻪ ﻃﻮر ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪(V‬‬
‫را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ﺧﺮوج از ﻣﻨﻮ دﻛﻤﻪ ) (‪ EXIT‬را ﻓﺸـﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻲ ﻛﻪ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OPEN/CLOSE‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ‪ HDD‬و ‪ DVD‬را ﺑﻌﺪ از ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ‪ %۷۰‬دﻳﺴﻚ ﻓﺸﺎر ﻣﻲ دﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻨﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ از اﲤﺎم ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﺎزي دﻳﺴﻚ ﺑـﺎز ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻓﻮق ﺗﻨﻬﺎ زﻣﺎﻧـﻲ ﻛﻪ دﻳﺴﻚ ﻫﺎي )‪ DVD+R ,DVD-RW(V‬ﻳﺎ ‪ DVD-R‬ﮔﺬاﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ ,‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺑﻮد‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫اﮔﺮ ﻳﻚ دﻳﺴﻚ ‪ DVD-RW‬ﻧﻮ ﺑﮕﺬارﻳـﺪ‪ ,‬ﺑﻌﺪ از آﻣﺎده ﺳﺎزي ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر در ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ‪ V‬ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫اﮔﺮ ﻳﻚ دﻳﺴﻚ ‪ DVD+RW‬ﻧﻮ ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ‪ ,‬ﺑـﻪ ﻃﻮر ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫اﮔﺮ ﺧﺎﻣـﻮش را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛـﻨﻴﺪ‪ ,‬ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ دﻳﺴﻚ را ﺑﻄـﻮر دﺳﺘﻲ در ﻣﻨـﻮي ﻣﺪﻳﺮ دﻳﺴـﻚ آﻣﺎده ﺳﺎزي )ﺻﻔـﺤﻪ ‪ ۶۵‬را‬
‫ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ( و ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤـﻪ ‪ ۹۴‬ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ(‬
‫■‬
‫ﻃﻮل ﻣﺪت ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮ اﺳﺎس ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣـﺘﻔﺎوت ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺑﻮد‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺎت ‪ ۴۶~۴۵‬را ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ(‬
‫‪V-Mode Compatibility‬‬
‫اﻳـﻦ ﻗـﺎﺑـﻠـﻴـﺖ ﺑـﺮاي ﺗـﻨـﻈـﻴﻤـﺎت اﻧـﺘـﺨـﺎب ﺻـﺪا در ﺣـﲔ ﭘـﺨـﺶ ‪NICAM Stereo‬‬
‫)‪ NICAM‬اﺳـﺘـﺮﻳـﻮ( )ﭼـﻨــﺪ ﺻـﺪاﻳـﻲ( از روي ‪ HDD‬ﻛـﺎرﺑـﺮد دارد‪ .‬اﻳـﻦ ﻗـﺎﺑـﻠــﻴـﺖ‬
‫ﻫﻴﭻ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮي ﺑﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴـﻢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ روي ‪ DVD‬ﻧﺨﻮاﻫﺪ داﺷﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : Off‬ﻫﺮ دو "‪"Dual L‬و "‪ "Dual R‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺻـﺪاﻳﻲ روي ‪ HDD‬ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺎوﻳﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪه روي ‪ HDD‬در اﻳﻦ ﺗـﻨﻈﻴﻢ وﺿﻌﻴﺘﻲ روي‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟـﺖ ‪ (DVD-RW/-R) V‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻛـﭙﻲ ﻛﺮدن ﳕـﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : On‬ﻳﻜﻲ از "‪ "Dual L‬ﻳﺎ "‪ "Dual R‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﭼﻨـﺪ ﺻﺪاﻳﻲ روي ‪ HDD‬ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺎوﻳﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪه روي ‪ HDD‬در اﻳﻦ ﺗـﻨﻈﻴﻢ وﺿﻌﻴﺘﻲ روي‬
‫‪ DVD-R‬ﻳﺎ ‪) DVD-RW‬ﺣﺎﻟـﺖ ‪ (V‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻛﭙـﻲ ﻛﺮدن ﻫﺴﺘـﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨـﻪ ﻫﺎي‬
‫"‪ "Dual L‬و "‪ "Dual R‬از ﻃﺮﻳـﻖ "‪ "Audio Selection‬ﻗﺎﺑـﻞ اﻧﺘـﺨﺎب ﻣـﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۴۴‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ و ﺑﺮﭘﺎﺳﺎزي ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﻫﺬا اﳉﺰء ﻳﻘّﺪم اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋŸ اﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠـﻌﺮض وﻋﺮض اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼت ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮع اﻟﻘﺮص‪.‬‬
‫اﻗﺮأ اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎت اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻋـﺮض ﻗﺮص‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ HDD‬ودي ﻓﻲ دي اﳌﺴﺠﻞ واﻷﻗﺮاص ﺣﺴﺐ اﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪ .‬وﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻼءﻣﺔ رﻣﻮز اﳌﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻫﺬه‬
‫ﻣﻦ أﺟﻞ اﻟﻘﺮص اﻟﺬي ﻳﻌﺮض‪ .‬وإذا ﻟﻢ ﺗـﻼﺋﻢ اﻟﺮﻣﻮز‪ ,‬ﻻ ﻳﻌﺮض اﻟﻘﺮص‪.‬‬
‫رﻗﻢ اﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﳉﻬﺎز ‪ HDD‬ودي ﻓﻲ دي اﳌﺴـﺠﻞ ﻣﺒﲔ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﳉﻬﺎز ‪ HDD‬ودي ﻓﻲ دي اﳌﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫
‪gÄ qU ÍUNJœ Ÿ«u
« ÊUA‬‬
‫‪STEREO CREATOR‬‬
‫‪Dolby Digital‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺻﺪاي دﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎل‬
‫‪DTS‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪ PAL‬در اﻧﮕﻠﺴﺘـﺎن‪,‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﻧﺴﻪ‪ ,‬آﳌﺎن و ﻏﻴﺮه‬
‫‪MP3‬‬
‫‪DivX‬‬
‫‪gÄ qU ÍUNJœ‬‬
‫اﻧﻮاع دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎ‬
‫آرم دﻳﺴﻚ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮاي‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪه‬
‫‪DVD+VIDEO‬‬
‫ﺻﺪا ‪ +‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪AUDIO-CD‬‬
‫ﺻﺪا‬
‫‪JPGE‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪JPEG‬‬
‫‪MP3‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ‪MP3‬‬
‫‪DivX‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪DivX‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ دﻳﺴﻚ‬
‫ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ زﻣﺎن ﭘﺨﺶ ﻳﺎ دﻗﻴﻘﻪ‬
‫ﻳﻚ روﻳﻪ)‪ ۱۲‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻲ ﻣﺘﺮ(‬
‫‪ ۲۴۰‬دﻗﻴﻘﻪ‬
‫دو روﻳﻪ)‪ ۱۲‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻲ ﻣﺘﺮ(‬
‫‪ ۴۸۰‬دﻗﻴﻘﻪ‬
‫ﻳﻚ روﻳﻪ)‪ ۸‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻲ ﻣﺘﺮ(‬
‫‪ ۸۰‬دﻗﻴﻘﻪ‬
‫دو روﻳﻪ)‪ ۸‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻲ ﻣﺘﺮ(‬
‫‪ ۱۶۰‬دﻗﻴﻘﻪ‬
‫ﻳﻚ روﻳﻪ)‪ ۱۲‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻲ ﻣﺘﺮ(‬
‫‪ ۷۴‬دﻗﻴﻘﻪ‬
‫ﻳﻚ روﻳﻪ)‪ ۸‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻲ ﻣﺘﺮ(‬
‫‪ ۲۰‬دﻗﻴﻘﻪ‬
‫ﻳﻚ روﻳﻪ)‪ ۱۲‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻲ ﻣﺘﺮ(‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ روﻳﻪ)‪ ۸‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻲ ﻣﺘﺮ(‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ روﻳﻪ)‪ ۱۲‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻲ ﻣﺘﺮ(‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ روﻳﻪ)‪ ۸‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻲ ﻣﺘﺮ(‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ روﻳﻪ)‪ ۱۲‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻲ ﻣﺘﺮ(‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ روﻳﻪ)‪ ۸‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻲ ﻣﺘﺮ(‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻓﺎرﺳﻲ ‪۴۵ -‬‬
‫‪gÄ‬‬
‫‪©DVD-Video Í«d jI® tIDM b‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫أﻧﻮاع اﻟﻘﺮص‬
‫رﻣﺰ اﻟﻘﺮص‬
‫اﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎت‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ اﻟﻘﺮص‬
‫اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬
‫أﻗﺼﻰ زﻣﻦ أو دﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ :XP)۱‬ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ(‬
‫‪DVD-RAM‬‬
‫ﺻﺪا ‪ +‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪DVD-RW‬‬
‫ﺻﺪا ‪ +‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪DVD-R‬‬
‫ﺻﺪا ‪ +‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪DVD+RW‬‬
‫ﺻﺪا ‪ +‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪DVD+R‬‬
‫ﺻﺪا ‪ +‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻚ روﻳﻪ ‪ ۱۲‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻲ‬
‫‪ :SP)۲‬ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد(‬
‫ﻣﺘﺮ )‪ ۴٫۷‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ(‬
‫‪ :LP)۴‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ(‬
‫‪ ۶‬أو ‪ :EP) ۸‬ﲤﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺪه(‬
‫‪ :XP)۲‬ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ(‬
‫دو روﻳﻪ ‪ ۱۲‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻲ‬
‫‪ :SP)۴‬ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد(‬
‫ﻣﺘﺮ )‪ ۹٫۴‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ(‬
‫‪ :LP)۸‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ(‬
‫‪ ۱۲‬أو ‪ :EP) ۱۶‬ﲤﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺪه(‬
‫‪ :XP)۱‬ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ(‬
‫‪ ۱۲‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻲ ﻣﺘﺮ‬
‫‪ :SP)۲‬ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد(‬
‫)‪ ۴٫۷‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ(‬
‫‪ :LP)۴‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ(‬
‫‪ ۶‬أو ‪ :EP) ۸‬ﲤﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺪه(‬
‫‪ :XP)۱‬ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ(‬
‫ﻳﻚ روﻳﻪ ‪ ۱۲‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻲ‬
‫‪ :SP)۲‬ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد(‬
‫ﻣﺘﺮ )‪ ۴٫۷‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ(‬
‫‪ :LP)۴‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ(‬
‫‪ ۶‬أو ‪ :EP) ۸‬ﲤﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺪه(‬
‫‪ ۱‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ و ‪ ۵۰‬دﻗﻴﻘﻪ )‪ :XP‬ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻋـﺎﻟﻲ(‬
‫دو روﻳﻪ ‪ ۱۲‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻲ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ و ‪ ۴۰‬دﻗﻴﻘﻪ )‪ :SP‬ﻛﻴﻔﻴـﺖ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد(‬
‫ﻣﺘﺮ )‪ ۸٫۵‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ(‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ و ‪ ۲۰‬دﻗﻴﻘﻪ )‪ :LP‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﻃـﻮﻻﻧﻲ(‬
‫‪ ۱۱‬ﻳﺎ ‪ ۱۴‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ و ‪ ۴۰‬دﻗﻴﻘﻪ )‪ :EP‬ﺑﺴﻂ ﻳﺎﻓـﺘﻪ(‬
‫‪ :XP)۱‬ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ(‬
‫‪ ۱۲‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻲ ﻣﺘﺮ‬
‫‪ :SP)۲‬ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد(‬
‫)‪ ۴٫۷‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ(‬
‫‪ :LP)۴‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ(‬
‫‪ ۶‬أو ‪ :EP) ۸‬ﲤﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺪه(‬
‫‪ :XP)۱‬ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ(‬
‫ﻳﻚ روﻳﻪ ‪ ۱۲‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻲ‬
‫‪ :SP)۲‬ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد(‬
‫ﻣﺘﺮ )‪ ۴٫۷‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ(‬
‫‪ :LP)۴‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ(‬
‫‪ ۶‬أو ‪ :EP) ۸‬ﲤﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺪه(‬
‫‪ ۱‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ و ‪ ۵۰‬دﻗﻴﻘﻪ )‪ :XP‬ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻋـﺎﻟﻲ(‬
‫دو روﻳﻪ ‪ ۱۲‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻲ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ و ‪ ۴۰‬دﻗﻴﻘﻪ )‪ :SP‬ﻛﻴﻔﻴـﺖ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد(‬
‫ﻣﺘﺮ )‪ ۸٫۵‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ(‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ و ‪ ۲۰‬دﻗﻴﻘﻪ )‪ :LP‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﻃـﻮﻻﻧﻲ(‬
‫‪ ۱۱‬ﻳﺎ ‪ ۱۴‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ و ‪ ۴۰‬دﻗﻴﻘﻪ )‪ :EP‬ﺑﺴﻂ ﻳﺎﻓـﺘﻪ(‬
‫‪CD-R/-RW‬‬
‫‪JPEG‬‬
‫‪DVD-RAM/‬‬
‫‪MP3‬‬
‫‪-RW/-R‬‬
‫‪DivX‬‬
‫‪ - ۴۶‬ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫«_‪UN{d sJ1 ô w« ’«d‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎ ﺷﻤﺎره ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ اي ﺑﺠﺰ "‪ "2‬ﻳﺎ "‪) "ALL‬ﻫـﻤﻪ(‬
‫• ‪ ۳٫۹ DVD-R‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺑﺮاي ﺛﺒﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪) DVD-RAM/-RW‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‪ (VR‬ﻫﺎي ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﺸﺪه ﺑﺎ روﺷﻬـﺎي اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﺿﺒﻂ وﻳﺪﻳﻮ‪ DVD-R ,‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫• ﻳﻚ دﻳﺴﻚ )‪ DVD±R/DVD-RW(V‬ﻛﻪ در ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺳـﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺷﺮﻛﺖ دﻳﮕﺮي ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪه و ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻧﺸﺪه اﺳـﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ ,DVD-ROM/PD/MV-Disc‬ﻏﻴﺮه‬
‫■‬
‫اﻳـﻦ دﺳﺘـﮕﺎه ﺿـﺒﻂ ﻛـﻨﻨـﺪه ‪ DVD‬و ‪ HDD‬ﻓﻘـﻂ ﻣﻲ ﺗـﻮاﻧﺪ ﺑـﺎ دﻳﺴـﻜﻬـﺎﻳﻲ ﻛـﺎر ﻛﻨـﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑـﺎ اﺳﺘـﺎﻧﺪارد ‪ DVD-RAM‬ﻧـﺴﺨـﻪ ‪۲٫۰‬‬
‫ﺳﺎزﮔﺎر ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ و‪/‬ﻳﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﳑﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﺮاي ﺑﻌﻀﻲ از اﻧﻮاع دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎ‪ ,‬ﻳﺎ در ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﺧﺎص‪ ,‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ زاوﻳﻪ‬
‫و ﺗﻨﻈـﻴﻢ ﻧﺴﺒـﺖ اﺑﻌﺎدي ﺗﺼﻮﻳـﺮ در ﺣﺎل اﺟﺮاﺳﺖ‪ ,‬ﻛﺎر ﻧـﻜﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬اﻃـﻼﻋﺎت ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ اﻳـﻦ دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎ ﺑـﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻣﺸﺮوح روي‬
‫ﺟﻌﺒﻪ آﻧﻬﺎ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪ .‬ﻟﻄـﻔًﺎ در ﺻﻮرت ﻟﺰوم ﺑﻪ آﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫اﺟﺎزه ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ دﻳﺴﻚ ﻛﺜﻴŸ ﺷﺪه ﻳﺎ ﺧﺮاش ﺑﺮدارد‪ ,‬اﺛﺮ اﻧﮕﺸﺖ‪ ,‬ﮔﺮد و ﺧﺎك‪ ,‬ﻏﺒﺎر‪ ,‬ﺧﺮاﺷﻴﺪﮔﻲ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ذرات ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪه از‬
‫دود ﺳﻴﮕﺎر روي ﺳﻄﻮح ﺿﺒﻂ ﳑﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ دﻳـﺴﻚ را ﺑﺮاي ﺿﺒﻂ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺳﺎزﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫دﻳﺴﻜﻬـﺎي ‪ DVD-RAM/±RW/±R‬ﳑﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ در ﺑﻌﻀـﻲ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﻫﺎي ﭘﺨﺶ ‪ DVD‬ﻛـﺎر ﻧﻜﻨﻨﺪ‪ ,‬اﻳﻦ ﺑـﻪ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻨـﻨﺪه‪,‬‬
‫دﻳﺴﻚ و ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺎز ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮدد‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎي داراي ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ‪ NTSC‬ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از اﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮل ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﭘﺨﺶ و ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪pœ p gÄ‬‬
‫‪Ʊ‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OPEN/CLOSE‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫≤‪Æ‬‬
‫دﻳﺴﻚ را ﺑﻪ آراﻣﻲ و ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮري ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﭼـﺴﺐ آن رو ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ در ﺳﻴﻨﻲ ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫≥‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺴﱳ ﺳﻴﻨﻲ دﻳﺴﻚ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤـﻪ ‪ OPEN/CLOSE‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ‪ DVD‬و ‪ HDD‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﺳﻴﻨﻲ را ﺑـﺴﺘﻪ و ﭘﺨﺶ دﻳﺴﻚ را ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر آﻏﺎز ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪ HDD & DVD RECORDER‬ﺑﻌﺪ از روﺷﻦ ﺷﺪن اﺑﺘﺪاﻳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻃـﻮر ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎ را ﭘﺨﺶ ﳕﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه روﺷﻦ ﺑﻮده و دﻳﺴﻚ درﺳﻴﻨﻲ ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ,‬دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﻓﻌﺎل ﺷﺪه و دروﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺗﻮﻗŸ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺘﻈﺮ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮاي ﺷﺮوع ﭘﺨﺶ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪PLAY‬‬
‫®‬
‫© را ﻓـﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• اﮔﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮاﻫﻴﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه در ﻫﻨﮕﺎم روﺷﻦ ﺷﺪن دﻳﺴﻜﻲ را ﻛﻪ در آن ﻗﺮار دارد ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ,‬دﺳﺘﮕﺎه‬
‫را ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر دادن دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ © ® PLAY‬روﺷﻦ ﻛـﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Æ¥‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪® STOP‬‬
‫■‬
‫© را ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺘﻮﻗŸ ﻛﺮدن ﭘـﺨﺶ ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫وﻗﺘﻲ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻳﻚ دﻳﺴﻚ را ﻣﺘﻮﻗŸ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ,‬دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ‪ DVD‬و ‪ HDD‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺘﻲ را ﻛﻪ در آن ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫دﻳـﺴﻚ را ﻣـﺘﻮﻗـŸ ﻛـﺮده اﻳﺪ در ﺣـﺎﻓﻈـﻪ ﺧـﻮد ذﺧﻴـﺮه ﻣﻲ ﻛـﻨـﺪ و وﻗﺘـﻲ ﻛـﻪ دﻛﻤـﻪ ‪ © ® PLAY‬را دوﺑﺎره ﻓـﺸـﺎر ﻣﻲ‬
‫دﻫﻴﺪ‪ ,‬ﭘﺨﺶ را از ﻫﻤﺎن ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﺷﺮوع ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ دﻳﺴﻚ را ﻣﺘﻮﻗŸ ﻛﺮده ﺑﻮدﻳﺪ‪) .‬ﻣﮕﺮ اﻳﻨﻜﻪ دﻳﺴﻚ را از دﺳﺘﮕﺎه‬
‫ﺧﺎرج ﻛﺮده ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ‪ DVD‬و ‪ HDD‬را از ﺑﺮق ﻛﺸﻴﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ,‬ﻳﺎ اﮔﺮ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ © ® STOP‬را دو ﺑﺎر ﻓﺸﺎر‬
‫داده ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪(.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ‪ DVD‬و ‪ HDD‬را در ﺣﲔ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﻜـﺎن ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ ,‬ﭼﻮن اﻳﻨﻜﺎر ﺑﻪ دﻳﺴﻚ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ زد‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺎز ﻳﺎ ﺑﺴﱳ ﺳﻴﻨﻲ دﻳﺴـﻚ‪ ,‬ﻓﻘﻂ از دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OPEN/CLOSE‬اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻴﻨﻲ دﻳﺴﻚ در ﺣﺎل ﺑﺎز ﻳﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪن اﺳﺖ آﻧﺮا ﻓﺸﺎر ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ ,‬ﭼﻮن اﻳﻨﻜﺎر ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﺺ ﻛﺎري‬
‫دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫اﺷﻴﺎي ﺑﻴﺮوﻧﻲ در داﺧﻞ ﻳﺎ روي ﺳﻴﻨـﻲ دﻳﺴﻚ ﻗﺮار ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﺑـﻌﻀـﻲ از ﻗﺎﺑـﻠﻴـﺘﻬـﺎ ﳑﻜـﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑـﺴﺘـﻪ ﺑـﻪ ﻧﻮع دﻳـﺴﻚ ﻋـﻤﻠـﻜﺮد ﻣـﺘﻔـﺎوﺗﻲ داﺷـﺘـﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻏـﻴﺮ ﻓـﻌﺎل ﺑـﺎﺷﻨـﺪ‪ .‬اﮔﺮ ﭼـﻨﲔ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻲ روي داد‪ ,‬ﺑﻪ دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻠﻬـﺎي درج ﺷﺪه روي ﺟﻌﺒﻪ دﻳﺴﻚ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﻟﻄﻔًﺎ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ دﻗﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ اﻧﮕـﺸﺖ ﻛﻮدﻛﺎن در ﺣﲔ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪن ﺳﻴﻨﻲ دﻳﺴﻚ‪ ,‬ﺑﲔ ﺳﻴﻨﻲ و ﺷﺎﺳﻲ آن ﮔﻴﺮ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﺮ ﺑﺎر ﻓﻘﻂ ﻳﻚ دﻳﺴﻚ ‪ DVD‬در دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻗﺮار دادن دو ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ دﻳﺴﻚ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﭘﺨﺶ را‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻞ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ و ﳑﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﭘـﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ‪ DVD‬و ‪ HDD‬آﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎرﺳﻲ ‪۴۷ -‬‬
‫‪gÄ‬‬
‫• ‪CVD/CD-ROM/CDV/CD-G/CD-I‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫«‪©Ê«uM® Title ÍuM Ë ©pœ® Disk ÍuM “« ÁœUH‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﻀـﻲ از اﻧﻮاع دﻳﺴﻜـﻬﺎ داراي ﺳﻴﺴﺘـﻢ اﺧﺘﺼﺎﺻـﻲ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻫﺴﺘـﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷـﻤﺎ اﺟﺎزه ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ ﻗـﺎﺑﻠﻴﺘـﻬﺎي وﻳﮋه اي را ﺑﺮاي ﻋﻨـﺎوﻳﻦ‪,‬‬
‫ﻓﺼﻮل‪ ,‬ﺗﺮاﻛﻬﺎي ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‪ ,‬زﻳﺮﻧﻮﻳﺴﻬﺎ‪ ,‬ﭘـﻴﺶ ﳕﺎﻳﺸﻬﺎي ﻓﻴﻠﻤﻬﺎ‪ ,‬اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺘﻬﺎي ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ,‬و ﻏﻴـﺮه اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﳕﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪DVD-VIDEO pœ Í«d‬‬
‫• ‪ : Disc Menu‬ﺑﺮاي وارد ﺷﺪن ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮي دﻳﺴـﻚ آن دﻳﺴﻚ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ DISC MENU‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮي ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﭘـﺨﺶ ﺑﺮوﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• در اﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻣـﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻣـﺨﺘﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ زﺑـﺎن ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻳﺎ زﻳﺮﻧﻮﻳﺲ را ﺑﺮ اﺳـﺎس آﻧﭽﻪ در دﻳﺴﻚ اراﺋﻪ ﺷﺪه‬
‫اﺳﺖ‪ ,‬اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﳕﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : Title Menu‬ﺑﺮاي رﻓﱳ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮي ﻋﻨـﺎوﻳﻦ دﻳﺴﻚ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ TITLE MENU‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• اﮔﺮ دﻳﺴﻚ داراي ﺑﻴﺶ از ﻳﻚ ﻋﻨﻮان اﺳﺖ‪ ,‬اﻳﻦ دﻛﻤﻪ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﻀﻲ از دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎ ﺷﺎﻳﺪ از ﻛﺎرﻛﺮد ﻣﻨﻮي ﻋﻨﺎوﻳﻦ‬
‫ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻧﻜﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪±RرRWØDVD-RAMØHDD pœ Í«d‬‬
‫• ‪Title List‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ TITLE LIST‬را ﻓﺸـﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻋـﻨﺎوﻳﻦ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺘـﻲ اﺳﺖ از ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺿـﺒﻂ ﺷﺪه ﻗﺒﻠﻲ‪ .‬اﮔﺮ ﻳـﻚ ﻋﻨﻮان ﺣﺬف‬
‫ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ,‬آن ﻋﻨﻮان دﻳﮕﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﭘﺨـﺶ ﻧﺨﻮاﻫﺪ ﺑﻮد‪.‬‬
‫• ))‪Play List (HDD/DVD-RAM/-RW(VR‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ PLAY LIST‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬اﻳﻦ ﺑﻪ واﺣﺪي از ﭘﺨﺶ اﺷﺎره دارد‪ ,‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺻﺤﻨﻪ اي دﳋﻮاه در ﲤﺎم ‪ Title List‬ﺗﻌﻴﲔ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮدد‪ .‬زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻓـﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ در ﺣﺎل ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ,‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺻﺤـﻨﻪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﺪه ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻛﺎرﺑﺮ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺷـﺪه و ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﻗŸ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪ .‬از آﳒﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻻزم ﺑﺮاي ﭘﺨﺶ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ دﳋﻮاه در ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ وﺟﻮد دارد‪ ,‬اﮔﺮ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺣﺬف ﺷﻮد‪ ,‬ﻣﻮارد ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪه اﺻﻠﻲ از ﺑـﲔ ﻧﺨﻮاﻫﻨﺪ رﻓﺖ‪) .‬ﻓﻘﻂ در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪(VR‬‬
‫«‪gÄ t ◊ud ÍU tLœ “« ÁœUH‬‬
‫‪„«d U qB p —œ Êœd u%‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي ‪) SEARCH‬‬
‫( ﻛﻨﺘـﺮل از راه دور را در ﺣﲔ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪HDD/DVD-VIDEO/‬‬
‫‪±R/±RW/DVD-RAM‬‬
‫ ‪← X 8 ← X4 ← X 2‬‬
‫ ‪X 128 ← X32 ← X 16‬‬
‫‪DivX‬‬
‫ ‪X 8 ← X4 ← X 2‬‬
‫)‪AUDIO CD(CD-DA‬‬
‫ ‪X 8 ← X4 ← X 2‬‬
‫• ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ را ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻋـﻜﺲ اﺳﻜﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫( را ﻓﺸﺎر داده و ﻧﮕﻪ ﻣﻲ دارﻳﺪ‪ ,‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮض ‪ X4‬اﳒﺎم ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي ‪) SEARCH‬‬
‫( را رﻫﺎ ﻛﻨﻴـﺪ‪ ,‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻋﺎدي اﳒﺎم ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫اﮔﺮ دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي ‪) SEARCH‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺎزﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻋـﺎدي‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ( ) PLAY‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫در ﺣﲔ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮي ﺳﺮﻳﻊ )‪ (X2‬در دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎي ‪ HDD/DVD-VIDEO/DVD-RAM/±RW/±R‬ﺻﺪا ﺷﻨﻴﺪه ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪) .‬اﮔﺮ در‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ اﺳﻜﻦ )ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ( در ﻳﻚ دﻳﺴﻚ ‪ DivX‬ﺑـﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ ,‬ﺻﺪا ﺷﻨﻴﺪه ﳕﻲ ﺷﻮد(‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻋﻨﻮان ﺷﺪه در اﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺷﺎﻳـﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ واﻗﻌﻲ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﺘﻔﺎوت ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۴۸‬ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫—‪U—«cÖ Xö U „«d p ¨‰uB Êœd œ‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي ‪) SKIP‬‬
‫•‬
‫( ﻛﻨﺘﺮل از راه دور را در ﺣﲔ ﭘﺨـﺶ ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫«‪¨bOœ —UA «— © ® SKIP tLœ dÖ‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ اﺑﺘﺪاي ﻓﺼﻞ‪ ,‬ﺗﺮاك ﻳﺎ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ )‪) HDD/DVD-RAM/-RW‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ ((VR‬ﻣﻲ رود‪ .‬اﮔﺮ دﻛﻤﻪ را دوﺑﺎره و ﻇﺮف ﻣﺪت ‪ ۳‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻓﺸﺎر‬
‫دﻫﻴﺪ‪ ,‬ﺑﻪ اﺑﺘﺪاي ﻓﺼﻞ‪ ,‬ﺗﺮاك ﻳـﺎ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ )‪) HDD/DVD-RAM/-RW‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ ((VR‬ﻣﻲ رود‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫«‪¨bOœ —UA «— ©© ® SKIP tLœ dÖ‬‬
‫‪gÄ‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ اﺑﺘﺪاي ﻓﺼﻞ‪ ,‬ﺗﺮاك ﻳﺎ ﻧـﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﻌﺪي )‪) HDD/DVD-RAM/-RW‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ ((VR‬ﻣﻲ رود‪.‬‬
‫‪t¬ Xd U gÄ‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي ‪) SEARCH‬‬
‫•‬
‫اﮔﺮ دﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫‪← 1/2‬‬
‫•‬
‫اﮔﺮ‬
‫‪← 1/4‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ‪)SEARCH‬‬
‫‪← 1/2‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪)SEARCH‬‬
‫‪← 1/4‬‬
‫( ﻛﻨﺘـﺮل از راه دور را در ﺣﲔ ﻣﻜﺚ ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫( را ﻓـﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪,‬‬
‫‪1/8‬‬
‫( را ﻓـﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪,‬‬
‫‪1/8‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺎزﮔﺸﺖ ﺑـﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻋﺎدي ﭘﺨﺶ‪,‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‪)PLAY‬‬
‫( را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫـﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫( را ﻓﺸﺎر داده و ﻧﮕﻪ دارﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ دﻳﺴﻚ ﺑﻪ آراﻣﻲ و ﺑﺎ ‪ 1/4‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺷﻮد‪ .‬اﮔﺮ‬
‫در ﺣﲔ ﻣﻜﺚ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي ‪) SEARCH‬‬
‫اﻳﻦ دﻛﻤﻪ رﻫﺎ ﺷﻮد‪ ,‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻜﺚ ﻣـﺠﺪدًا ﺑﺮﻗﺮار ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﺷﺪه در اﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺷـﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻋﺎدي ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﺘﻔﺎوت ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ آﻫﺴﺘﻪ در دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎي ‪ DivX‬ﻓﻘﻂ در ﺟـﻬﺖ رو ﺑﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪lDI Xd U gÄ‬‬
‫در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻜﺚ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫـﺎي ‪) SKIP‬‬
‫( را روي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل از راه دور ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺮ ﺑﺎر ﻛﻪ اﻳﻦ دﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎر داده ﺷـﻮد‪ ,‬ﻗﺎب ﺟﺪﻳﺪي ﳕﺎﻳﺎن ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ( ) SKIP‬ﻓﺸﺎر داده ﺷـﻮد‪ ,‬ﻗﺎب ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﻓﻌﺎل ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ( ) SKIP‬ﻓﺸﺎر داده ﺷـﻮد‪ ,‬ﻗﺎب ﺑﻌﺪي ﻓﻌﺎل ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺎزﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻋﺎدي ﭘﺨـﺶ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ( ) PLAY‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ در دﻳﺴﻜـﻬﺎي ‪ DivX‬ﻓﻘﻂ در ﺟﻬﺖ رو ﺑﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ ﻛﺎر ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎرﺳﻲ ‪۴۹ -‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫«‪INFO tLœ “« ÁœUH‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ‪ INFO‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻓـﺼﻮل‪ ,‬ﻋﻨﺎوﻳﻦ ﻳﺎ زﻣﺎﻧﻬﺎ دﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ داﺷﺘﻪ و ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻫﺎي دﳋﻮاه را ﺑﻪ آﺳﺎﻧـﻲ ﭘﻴﺪا ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﲔ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ زﻳﺮﻧﻮﻳﺲ و ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت ﺻﻮﺗﻲ را ﻋﻮض ﻛﺮده و ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻫﺎي وﻳﮋه ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ زاوﻳﻪ‪ ,‬ﺗﻜﺮار و زوم را ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫—‪INFO “« ÁœUH« U tH p t rOI 7‬‬
‫اﮔـﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺧـﻮاﻫـﻴـﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻋـﻨـﻮان‪ ,‬ﻓـﺼﻞ ﻳـﺎ زﻣـﺎن ﺧـﺎﺻﻲ ﺑـﺮوﻳـﺪ از اﻳـﻦ ﻗﺎﺑـﻠـﻴﺖ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﳕﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ʊ‬‬
‫در ﺣﲔ ﭘﺨﺶ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ INFO‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫≤‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘـﺨﺎب ‪ Search‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي … † را ﻓـﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪OK‬‬
‫≥‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪ Title ,Chapter‬ﻳﺎ ‪ Time‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫـﺎي … † را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Æ¥‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ دﻛﻤﻪ ‹ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑـﺮاي اﻧﺘـﺨﺎب ﺻـﺤﻨـﻪ دﳋﻮاه‪ ,‬دﻛـﻤﻪ ﻫـﺎي ‹ ﻳﺎ دﻛـﻤﻪ ﻫـﺎي ﻋﺪدي را‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ دﻛﻤﻪ را ﻓﺸـﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫اﮔﺮ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ را ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ,‬آﻧﺮا ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻋﺪدي‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‪ ,‬دﻗﻴﻘﻪ‪ ,‬و ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ وارد ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬را ﻓﺸﺎر‬
‫دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﺷﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺮﺧﻲ از اﻧﻮاع دﻳﺴﻚ ﻫﺎ ﻛـﺎر ﻧﻜﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫اﮔــﺮ دﻳــﺴــﻜــﻬــﺎي )‪ CD(CD-DA‬ﻳــﺎ دﻳــﺴــﻜــﻬــﺎي ‪ MP3/JPEG‬ﻗ ــﺮار داده‬
‫ﺑـﺎﺷـﻴـﺪ‪ ,‬اﻃـﻼﻋﺎت ﳑـﻜـﻦ اﺳـﺖ ﺑـﺴـﺘـﻪ ﺑـﻪ ﻧـﻮع دﻳـﺴﻚ ﳕـﺎﻳـﺶ داده‬
‫ﻧﺸﻮد‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮي زﻣﺎن در ﺑﻌﻀﻲ دﻳﺴـﻜﻬﺎ ﻛﺎر ﳕﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺤﻮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ RETURN‬را ﻓـﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫«‪WLd« WG —UO‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﻲ از زﺑﺎن زﻳﺮﻧﻮﻳﺲ ﻫﺎي ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷـﺪه روي دﻳﺴﻚ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﲔ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴـﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر دادن دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ SUBTITLE‬روي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل از راه دور از اﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ʊ‬‬
‫در ﺣﲔ ﭘﺨﺶ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ INFO‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫـﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫≤‪Æ‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰرﻳﻦ … † ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪.Subtitle‬‬
‫≥‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب زﺑﺎن دﳋﻮاه زﻳﺮﻧـﻮﻳﺲ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي ‹ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﳕﺎﻳﺶ زﻳﺮﻧﻮﻳﺲ ﳑﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑـﻪ ﻧﻮع دﻳﺴﻚ ﻣﺘﻔﺎوت ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب زﺑﺎن در ﺑﻌﻀﻲ از دﻳﺴﻜﻬـﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ از ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﻨﻮي دﻳﺴﻚ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ اﳒﺎم اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۵۰‬ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫«
‪wu ÍUNU
U Ë «b »U‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﻲ از ﺻﺪاﻫﺎي ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪه روي دﻳﺴﻚ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎي ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎي ‪ TV‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪه را ﻧﻴﺰ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ʊ‬‬
‫در ﺣﲔ ﭘﺨﺶ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ INFO‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫـﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫≤‪Æ‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰرﻳﻦ … † ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪.Audio‬‬
‫≥‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب آﻫﻨﮕﻬﺎ ﻳـﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺎل ﺻﻮﺗﻲ دﳋﻮاه‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي ‹ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪gÄ‬‬
‫ﺿﻤﻨًﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮاي اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از اﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ دﻛـﻤﻪ ‪ AUDIO‬روي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل از راه دور را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺻﺪا ﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎي ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﳑﻜﻦ اﺳـﺖ ﻣﺘﻔﺎوت ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﭼﻮن اﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ دارﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺻﺪا در ﺑﻌﻀﻲ از دﻳﺴﻜﻬـﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ از ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﻨﻮي دﻳﺴﻚ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ اﳒﺎم اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪5—Ëœ tË«“ Êœ«œ dOOG‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ‪ DVD‬و ‪ HDD‬ﺣﺎوي ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ زاوﻳﻪ از ﺻﺤﻨﻪ اي ﺧﺎص ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ,‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ‪) Angle‬زاوﻳﻪ( را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ʊ‬‬
‫در ﺣﲔ ﭘﺨﺶ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ INFO‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫـﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫≤‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪ Audio‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي … † را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫≥‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب زﺑﺎن زﻳﺮﻧﻮﻳﺲ دﳋـﻮاه‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي ‹ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﻼ ﺑﻪ دﻳﺴﻚ ﺑـﺴﺘﮕﻲ دارد‪ ,‬و ﺷﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮاي ﻫﻤﻪ ‪ DVD‬ﻫﺎ ﻛﺎر ﻧﻜﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻛﺎﻣ ً‬
‫■‬
‫اﮔﺮ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﺎ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ دورﺑﲔ ﭼﻨﺪ زاوﻳﻪ اي ﺿـﺒﻂ ﻧﺸﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ,‬اﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻛﺎر ﻧﺨﻮاﻫﺪ ﻛﺮد‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫زاوﻳﻪ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ و ﺗﻌﺪاد ﻛﻞ زاوﻳﻪ ﻫـﺎ را ﳕﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪gÄ —«dJ‬‬
‫‪©gÄ —«dJ® —dJ gÄ‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﲔ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﺑـﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر دادن دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ REPEAT‬روي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل از راه دور از اﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ʊ‬‬
‫در ﺣﲔ ﭘﺨﺶ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ INFO‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫـﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫≤‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪ Repeat‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي … † را ﻓﺸـﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫≥‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪ B-A ,Off‬ﻳﺎ ‪ Title‬ﻳﺎ ‪ Chapter‬ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻜﺮر آﻧﻬﺎ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي ‹ و ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬را‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫‪) HDD/DVD-RAM/-RW‬ﺣـﺎﻟـﺖ ‪ DVD±R ,(VR‬ﻧـﻬـﺎﺋـﻲ ﻧـﺸـﺪه و ‪) DVD-RW‬ﺣﺎﻟـﺖ ‪ (V‬ﻧـﻬـﺎﺋـﻲ ﻧـﺸـﺪه‪ ,‬ﻗـﺎدر ﺑـﻪ ﺗـﻜـﺮار ﻳـﻚ‬
‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﲔ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻋـﺎدي را ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر دادن دﻛﻤﻪ ) (‪ EXIT‬ﻓﻌﺎل ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎرﺳﻲ ‪۵۱ -‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫‪A-B —«dJ‬‬
‫‪Ʊ‬‬
‫در ﺣﲔ ﭘﺨﺶ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ INFO‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫـﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫≤‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪ Repeat‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي … † را ﻓﺸـﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫≥‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪ , A-B‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي ‹ را ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫‪Æ¥‬‬
‫در ﻧﻘﻄﻪ اي ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮاﻫﻴﺪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻜﺮر از آن آﻏﺎز ﺷﻮد )‪ (A‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪OK‬‬
‫را ﻓﺸﺎر داده و ﺳﭙﺲ آﻧﺮا دوﺑﺎره در ﻧﻘﻄﻪ اي ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮاﻫﻴﺪ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﻣـﻜـﺮر ﺧـﺎﲤـﻪ ﻳـﺎﺑـﺪ )‪ (B‬ﻓـﺸﺎر دﻫـﻴـﺪ‪ .‬ﭘـﺨـﺶ ﻣـﻜـﺮر ﺑـﺨـﺶ ‪ A-B‬آﻏـﺎز ﻣـﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫اﮔﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ )‪ (B‬را ﻗﺒﻞ از ﮔﺬﺷﺖ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ‪ ۵‬ﺛـﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ,‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻏﻴﺮﳑﻜﻦ ﺑﻮدن ) ( ﳕﺎﻳﺶ داده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﺿﻤﻨًﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﭘـﺨﺶ ﻋﺎدي را ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر دادن دﻛﻤﻪ ) (‪ EXIT‬ﻓﻌﺎل ﺳﺎزﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﺳﻲ دي ﻫﺎي ﺻﻮﺗﻲ )‪ ,(CD-DA‬دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎي ‪ MP3‬و دﻳﺴﻜـﻬﺎي ‪ DivX‬از ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ‪ Repeat A-B‬ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﳕﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪wULMÖ—e‬‬
‫‪Ʊ‬‬
‫در ﺣﲔ ﭘﺨﺶ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ INFO‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫـﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫≤‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪ ,Zoom‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي … † را ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‹ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪ ( ) .‬ﳕﺎﻳـﺎن ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫≥‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي رﻓﱳ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺰرگ ﻛﺮدن آن ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي ‬
‫▲ ▼ ‹ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Æ¥‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗـﺼﻮﻳـﺮ ﺑﺰرگ ﺷـﺪه و ﺑﻪ دو ﺑـﺮاﺑـﺮ اﻧﺪازه ﻋـﺎدي اش ﺗﺒـﺪﻳﻞ ﻣـﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫اﮔﺮ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬را دوﺑﺎره ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪ ,‬ﺻـﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﭼﻬﺎر ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ اﻧﺪازه ﻋﺎدي اش ﺑﺰرگ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪HDD/DVD-VIDEO/DVD-RAM/±RW/±R‬‬
‫■‬
‫‪ - ۵۲‬ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫اﻧﺪازه ﻋﺎدي ← ×‪ ← ۲× ← ۴× ← ۲‬اﻧـﺪازه ﻋﺎدي‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ EP‬اﳒﺎم ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ,‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ‪) Zoom‬ﺑﺰرﮔﻨﻤﺎﺋﻲ( ﻛﺎر ﻧﺨﻮاﻫﺪ ﻛﺮد ﻣﮕﺮ اﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ V‬ﺻﻮرت ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫«‪U—«cÖ Xö “« ÁœUH‬‬
‫)ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪(VR‬‬
‫روي ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻴﺎﻳﻠﻴﺪ آﻧﻬﺎ را دوﺑﺎره ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﮔﺬاري ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺘﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻌﺪًا ﭘﺨﺶ را از ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﮔﺬاري ﺷﺪه‬
‫آﻏﺎز ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ʊ‬‬
‫در ﺣﲔ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MARKER‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫـﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫≤‪Æ‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ دﳋﻮاﻫﺘـﺎن ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪gÄ‬‬
‫‪U Xö rOEM‬‬
‫• ﻋﺪد ‪ 01‬ﳕﺎﻳﺶ داده ﺷﺪه و ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻓـﻈﻪ ﺳﭙﺮده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫≥‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي رﻓﱳ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﻌـﺪي‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي ‹ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Æ¥‬‬
‫ﻫـﻨﮕـﺎﻣـﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺻـﺤـﻨﻪ دﳋـﻮاﻫـﺘﺎن ﻇـﺎﻫـﺮ ﺷﺪ‪ ,‬دﻛـﻤـﻪ ‪ OK‬را دوﺑﺎره ﻓـﺸـﺎر‬
‫دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﺪد ‪ 02‬ﳕﺎﻳﺶ داده ﺷﺪه و ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻓـﻈﻪ ﺳﭙﺮده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ ,HDD‬دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎي ‪ DVD-RAM‬ﻳﺎ ‪) DVD-RW‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ (VR‬ﺑﺎ ﺟﺎي ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ داراي ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬از آﳒﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﳑﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ روي ﺻﻔﺤـﺎت ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻲ ﳕﺎﻳﺶ داده ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ,‬ﺷﻤﺎره ﮔﺬاري اﻟﺰاﻣﻲ اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫اﮔﺮ ﻳﻚ دﻳﺴﻚ ﺑﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ دﻳﺴﻚ ﻛﺪﮔﺬاري ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ,‬اﻣﻜﺎن ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺬف ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻫﺎ وﺟﻮد ﻧﺪارد‪ ,‬ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ آﻧﻬﺎ را ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Áb t«cÖ Xö p gÄ‬‬
‫‪Ʊ‬‬
‫در ﺣﲔ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MARKER‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫـﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫≤‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻳﻚ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻋﻼﻣـﺖ ﮔﺬاري ﺷﺪه‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي ‹ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫≥‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي آﻏﺎز ﭘﺨﺶ از ﺻﺤﻨﻪ اﻧﺘﺨـﺎﺑﻲ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ ‪ ( ) PLAY‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• اﮔﺮ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ( ) SKIP‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪ ,‬ﺑﻪ اﺑﺘﺪاي ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ رﻓﺖ‪ .‬ﻓﺸﺎر دادن دوﺑﺎره اﻳﻦ دﻛﻤﻪ ﻇﺮف ﻣﺪت ‪ ۳‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ اﺑﺘﺪاي ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻗـﺒﻠﻲ ﺑﺎزﮔﺮدﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• اﮔﺮ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ( ) SKIP‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪ ,‬ﺑﻪ اﺑﺘﺪاي ﻋﻼﻣـﺖ ﺑﻌﺪي ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ رﻓﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪Áb t«cÖ Xö p ·c‬‬
‫‪Ʊ‬‬
‫در ﺣﲔ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MARKER‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫـﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫≤‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻳﻚ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻋﻼﻣـﺖ ﮔﺬاري ﺷﺪه‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي ‹ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫≥‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ﺣﺬف ﻋﻼﻣﺖ اﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤـﻪ ‪ (A)ed‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• اﮔﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻲ در ﺣﲔ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪) HDD/DVD-RAM/-RW‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ (VR‬ﺣﺬف ﺷﻮد‪ ,‬ﺷﻤﺎره ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻬﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﻛﺮد‪ .‬ﺑﻌﻨﻮان‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎل‪ ,‬اﮔﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ‪۷‬ام ﺑﻌﺪ از اﻳﻨﻜﻪ دو ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺣﺬف ﮔﺮدد‪ ,‬ﺷﻤﺎره ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻬﺎي ﺑﻌﺪ از ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻫﺸﺘﻢ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻃﻮر ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر ﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ ﺧﻮاﻫـﻨﺪ رﻓﺖ و ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ‪۸‬ام ﺑﻪ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ‪۷‬ام ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎرﺳﻲ ‪۵۳ -‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫«‪U t
UA
“« ÁœUH‬‬
‫)ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪(V‬‬
‫‪U t
UA
rOEM‬‬
‫‪Ʊ‬‬
‫در ﺣﲔ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MARKER‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫـﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫≤‪Æ‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ دﳋﻮاﻫﺘـﺎن ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﺪد ‪ 1‬ﳕﺎﻳﺶ داده ﺷﺪه و ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻓـﻈﻪ ﺳﭙﺮده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫≥‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي رﻓﱳ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﻌـﺪي‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي ‹ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Æ¥‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ دﳋﻮاﻫﺘـﺎن ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬را دوﺑﺎره ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺪد ‪ 2‬ﳕﺎﻳﺶ داده ﺷﺪه و ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻓـﻈﻪ ﺳﭙﺮده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮاي ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﮔﺬاري ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺘﻬـﺎ‪ ,‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﻓﻮق را ﺗﻜﺮار ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ‪ ۱۰‬ﺻﺤـﻨﻪ را ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﮔﺬاري ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻴﻨﻲ دﻳﺴﻚ ﺑﺎز و ﺳـﭙﺲ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪ ,‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ از ﺑﲔ ﺧﻮاﻫﻨﺪ رﻓﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪t
UA
p gÄ‬‬
‫‪Ʊ‬‬
‫در ﺣﲔ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MARKER‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫـﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫≤‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻳﻚ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻋﻼﻣـﺖ ﮔﺬاري ﺷﺪه‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي ‹ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫≥‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي آﻏﺎز ﭘﺨﺶ از ﺻﺤﻨﻪ اﻧﺘﺨـﺎﺑﻲ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ ‪ ( ) PLAY‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Áb t«cÖ Xö p ·c‬‬
‫‪Ʊ‬‬
‫در ﺣﲔ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MARKER‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫـﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫≤‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻳﻚ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻋﻼﻣـﺖ ﮔﺬاري ﺷﺪه‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي ‹ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫≥‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ﺣﺬف ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤـﻪ ‪ (A)ed‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۵۴‬ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫‪MP3Øwu Íœ w p gÄ‬‬
‫‪b
u w Áœd —UJ MP3/(CD-DA) wu ÍU?NJœ gÄ Í«d t —Ëœ Á«— “« ‰dM ÍË— ÍU tLœ‬‬
‫‪PAUSE‬‬
‫‪)tLœ‬‬
‫( ‪ : SKIP‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻌﺪي ﻣﻲ رود‬
‫( ‪ : SEARCH‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪) ÍU? tLœ Êœ«œ —UA‬‬
‫)‪) (۲x, ۴x, ۸x‬ﻓﻘﻂ دﻳﺴﻚ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ(‬
‫‪ : PAUSE ( )tLœ‬ﭘﺨﺶ را ﻣـﻮﻗﺘًﺎ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : PALY( ), OK tLœ‬ﻳﻚ آﻫـﻨﮓ را ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫… † ‪ :‬ﻳﻚ آﻫﻨﮓ را اﻧﺘـﺨﺎب ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‪:(A) ed‬‬
‫• ﻳﻚ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ اﻳﺠﺎد ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑـﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫• ‪MP3, CD-DA : Select All‬‬
‫• ‪MP3 : Copy‬‬
‫• ‪ : CD Import‬دﻳﺴﻚ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‬
‫‪REPEAT‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ : (B) e‬ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪) .‬ﻓﻘﻂ دﻳﺴﻚ‬
‫ﻫﺎي ‪(MP3‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ : OK‬آﻫﻨﮓ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﺪه را ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣـﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ “—‪ : (C) œ‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ را اﻧﺘﺨـﺎب ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)‪(REPEAT‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ¬‪ : (D) w‬ﻣﺤﺘﻮا را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﻲ ﻛـﻨﺪ‪) .‬ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫دﻳﺴﻚ ﻫﺎي ‪(MP3‬‬
‫‪©CD-DA®wu Íœ w p gÄ‬‬
‫‪Ʊ‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺳﻲ دي ﺻﻮﺗﻲ )‪ (CD-DA‬در ﺳﻴﻨﻲ دﻳﺴـﻚ ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻨﻮي ‪) Audio CD‬ﺳﻲ دي ﺻﻮﺗﻲ( ﳕﺎﻳﺎن ﺷﺪه و ﺗﺮاﻛﻬﺎ )آﻫﻨﮕﻬﺎ( ﺑﻪ ﻃـﻮر ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر ﭘﺨﺶ ﺧﻮاﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫≤‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺗﺮاﻛﻲ )آﻫﻨﮓ( ﻛـﻪ ﻣﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮش ﻛﺮدن آن ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي … † را ﻓﺸﺎر داده و ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤـﻪ ‪OK‬‬
‫را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪©CD-DA® wu Íœ w tH ÍU tHu‬‬
‫ﻼ در ﺣﺎل ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫‪ : ©@M¬® wKF „«d‬ﺷﻤﺎره ﺗﺮاﻛﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻌ ً‬
‫اﺳﺖ را ﳕﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫اﻳﻦ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻛﺎرﻛﺮدي دﻳﺴﻚ و زﻣﺎن ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺑـﺎ‬
‫ـﻼ در ﺣـﺎل ﭘــﺨـﺶ اﺳـﺖ را ﳕـﺎﻳــﺶ ﻣـﻲ‬
‫ﺑـﺨــﺸـﻲ ﻛـﻪ در ﻓــﻌ ً‬
‫دﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻮع ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ و ﻧﺎم ﻓﺎﻳﻞ را ﳕﺎﻳـﺶ ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻣﻮﺟﻮد را ﳕﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﳕﺎﻳﻪ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ ﭘﺨﺶ و ﺗﻌﺪاد ﻛﻞ ﺗﺮاﻛﻬﺎ را ﳕﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ دﻫـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺗﺮاﻛﻬﺎ )ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ آﻫﻨﮕـﻬﺎ( را ﳕﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎرﺳﻲ ‪۵۵ -‬‬
‫‪gÄ‬‬
‫‪ : STOP ( )tLœ‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﻳـﻚ آﻫﻨﮓ را ﻣﺘﻮﻗŸ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫‪MP3 pœ p gÄ‬‬
‫‪Ʊ‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺳﻲ دي ‪ MP3‬در ﺳﻴﻨﻲ دﻳﺴﻚ ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻨﻮ ﳕﺎﻳﺶ داده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫≤‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪ ,Library‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي … † را ﻓـﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ دﻛﻤﻪ ‹ را دو ﺑﺎر ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫≥‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪ ,Music‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي … † را ﻓـﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ دﻛﻤﻪ ‹ را دو ﺑﺎر ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Æ¥‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺗﺮاﻛﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﻳـﻞ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮش ﻛﺮدن آن ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي … † را ﻓﺸﺎر داده و ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬را ﻓﺸـﺎر‬
‫دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪MP3 tH ÍU tHu‬‬
‫ﻼ در ﺣﺎل ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫‪ : ©@M¬® wKF „«d‬ﺷﻤﺎره ﺗﺮاﻛﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻌ ً‬
‫اﺳﺖ را ﳕﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫اﻳﻦ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻛﺎرﻛﺮدي دﻳﺴﻚ و زﻣﺎن ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺑـﺎ‬
‫ـﻼ در ﺣـﺎل ﭘــﺨـﺶ اﺳـﺖ را ﳕـﺎﻳــﺶ ﻣـﻲ‬
‫ﺑـﺨــﺸـﻲ ﻛـﻪ در ﻓــﻌ ً‬
‫دﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧـﻮع ﻓـﺎﻳـﻞ ﻓـﻌـﻠـﻲ و ﻧـﺎم ﻓـﺎﻳﻞ و ﻧـﺎم ﭘـﻮﺷـﻪ را ﳕـﺎﻳـﺶ ﻣـﻲ‬
‫دﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻣﻮﺟﻮد را ﳕﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﳕﺎﻳﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ‪ ,‬ﺗﻌﺪاد ﻛﻞ ﺗـﺮاﻛﻬﺎ را ﳕﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺗﺮاﻛﻬﺎ )ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ آﻫﻨﮕﻬـﺎ( را ﳕﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪MP3Ë ©CD-DA® Íœ w —«dJ‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﲔ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴـﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر دادن دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ REPEAT‬روي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل از راه دور از اﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ REPEAT‬را در ﺣﲔ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻜﺮرًا ﻓﺸـﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻜﺮار دﳋﻮاه ﺗﺎن را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ʊ‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰر «_‪ (C) dH‬أﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐـﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪.‬‬
‫≤‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ دﳋـﻮاه دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي … † را ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪,‬‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ ‹ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪) Normal‬ﻋﺎدي )‪ (CD-DA‬و‪ : (MP3‬ﺗﺮاﻛﻬﺎي دﻳﺴﻚ ﺑـﻪ ﻫﻤﺎن ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻪ روي دﻳﺴﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪه اﻧﺪ‪ ,‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﺧﻮاﻫـﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪ - ۵۶‬ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫‪©MP3Ë (CD-DA) Íœ w —«dJ® Repeat Track‬‬
‫‪©MP3® Repeat Folder‬‬
‫‪©MP3Ë (CD-DA) tL —«dJ® Repeat All‬‬
‫‪ ∫©MP3Ë (CD-DA) wUH«® Random‬ﮔﺰﻳـﻨﻪ ‪ Random‬ﺗﺮاﻛﻬﺎي‬
‫دﻳﺴﻚ را ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ اﺗﻔﺎﻗﻲ ﭘـﺨﺶ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﻛﺮد‪.‬‬
‫‪CD Import‬‬
‫‪Ʊ‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ (A)ed‬را در ﺣﲔ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺳـﻴﻘﻲ ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫≤‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺟـﻬﺖ اﻧـﺘـﺨﺎب ‪ CD Import‬دﻛـﻤـﻪ ﻫـﺎي … † را ﻓﺸـﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳـﭙﺲ دﻛـﻤـﻪ‬
‫‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ ‹ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪gÄ‬‬
‫≥‪Æ‬‬
‫دﻛـﻤﻪ ﻫـﺎي … † را ﺟﻬـﺖ اﻧـﺘﺨـﺎب ﻓﺎﻳـﻠـﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣـﺎﻳﻞ ﺑـﻪ ﻛﭙـﻲ آن ﻫـﺴﺘـﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MARKER‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺗﻴﻚ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ‬
‫ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫• اﮔﺮ ﳕﻲ ﺧﻮاﻫﻴﺪ ﻳﻜﻲ از ورودي ﻫﺎي ﻋـﻼﻣﺖ ﮔﺬاري ﺷﺪه را ﻛﭙﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ,‬ﻛﺎﻓﻲ اﺳﺖ آن ورودي را اﻧﺘـﺨﺎب ﻛﺮده و دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MARKER‬را‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب آﻧﺮا ﻟﻐﻮ ﻛـﻨﻴﺪ‪ ,‬اﻳﻦ دﻛﻤﻪ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺗﻴﻚ ﻣﺤﻮ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪Æ¥‬‬
‫دﻛـﻤـﻪ ﻫـﺎي ‹ …† را ﺑــﺮاي اﻧـﺘـﺨـﺎب رﺳـﺎﻧـﻪ ﻫـﺪف ﻓـﺸــﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳـﭙـﺲ‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر دادن دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ (B)e‬ﭘـﻮﺷﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪي اﻳﺠﺎد ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ƶ‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ (A)ed‬را ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷـﺮوع ﻛﭙﻲ ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎم "‪ "Number of file : x‬ﳕﺎﻳﺶ داده ﻣـﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫∂‪Æ‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫـﺎي ‹ را ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪ Start‬ﻓـﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ‪ OK‬را‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﭙﻲ ﻛﺮدن ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬـﺎ آﻏﺎز ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮاي ﻟﻐﻮ ﻛﭙﻲ در ﺟﺮﻳﺎن‪ ,‬دﻛﻤـﻪ ) (‪ EXIT‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ mp3‬ﺑﻌﺪ از وارد ﻛﺮدن ﺑـﻪ اﻳﻦ ﺷﺮح ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺑﻮد‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﺮخ ﺑﻴﺖ ‪۱۲۸‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻠﻮﺑﻴﺖ در ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ‪۲‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻧﺎل )اﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ( ﻧﺮخ ﳕﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﺮداري ‪ ۴۴‬ﻛـﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫■‬
‫‪ DTS CDDA‬و دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎي ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺷـﺪه در ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ ﻛﭙﻲ را ﳕﻲ ﺗﻮان وارد ﻛﺮد‪.‬‬
‫‪bb gÄ XdN‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﺎ ‪ ۳۰‬ﺗﺮاك را در ﻓـﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺛﺒﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ʊ‬‬
‫در ﺣﲔ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪ ,‬دﻛـﻤﻪ ‪ (A)ed‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫≤‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪ ,New Playlist‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي … † را ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ دﻛﻤﻪ ‹ را دو ﺑﺎر ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫـﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫≥‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺗﺮاﻛﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ آﻧﻬﺎ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻫﺎي … † را ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤـﻪ ‪ OK‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• اﮔﺮ ﺗﺮاك اﺷﺘﺒﺎﻫﻲ را در ﻓﻬﺮﺳـﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ وارد ﻛﺮده اﻳﺪ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻫﺎي ▲ ▼ ‹ را ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺗﺮاك اﺷﺘـﺒﺎه ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Æ¥‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ذﺧﻴﺮه ‪ ,Playlist‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ (A)ed‬را ﻓﺸـﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ .OK‬ﻳﻚ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ‪ Playlist‬اﻳﺠﺎد ﺧـﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎرﺳﻲ ‪۵۷ -‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫‪gÄ XdN t Ëd‬‬
‫‪±‬‬
‫در ﺣﲔ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ (A)ed‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫≤‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺑـﺮاي اﻧــﺘـﺨــﺎب ‪ ,Go To Playlist‬دﻛـﻤـﻪ ﻫــﺎي … † را ﻓـﺸــﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳـﭙـﺲ‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ دﻛﻤﻪ ‹ را دو ﺑﺎر ﻓﺸـﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫≥‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﭘـﻮﺷﻪ دﳋﻮاه ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫـﺎي … † را ﻓﺸﺎر‬
‫داده و ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺮاﻛﻬﺎي ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر ﭘﺨـﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪gÄ XdN ·c‬‬
‫‪±‬‬
‫در ﺣﲔ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪ ,‬دﻛـﻤﻪ ‪ (A)ed‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫≤‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺑـﺮاي اﻧــﺘـﺨــﺎب ‪ ,Go To Playlist‬دﻛـﻤـﻪ ﻫــﺎي … † را ﻓـﺸــﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳـﭙـﺲ‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ دﻛﻤﻪ ‹ را دو ﺑﺎر ﻓﺸـﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫≥‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪ Playlist‬ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮاﻫﻴﺪ آﻧﺮا ﺣﺬف ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي … †‬
‫را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Æ¥‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ (A)ed‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ƶ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧـﺘﺨﺎب ‪ ,Yes‬دﻛـﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي ‹ را ﻓـﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙـﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬را‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ اﻧﺘﺨـﺎب ﺷﺪه ﺣﺬف ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻳﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻲ را ﺑﺎز ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪/‬ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪ ,‬ﲤﺎم ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺸﻬﺎي روي‬
‫دﻳﺴﻚ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ‪ USB‬ﺣﺬف ﺧﻮاﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪gÄ XdN g«dË t Ëd‬‬
‫‪±‬‬
‫در ﺣﲔ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ (A)ed‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫≤‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺑـﺮاي اﻧـﺘـﺨـﺎب ‪ ,Go To Playlist‬دﻛـﻤـﻪ ﻫـﺎي … † را ﻓـﺸـﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳـﭙـﺲ‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ دﻛﻤﻪ ‹ را دو ﺑﺎر ﻓﺸـﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫≥‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪ Playlist‬ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮاﻫﻴﺪ آﻧﺮا ﺣﺬف ﻛﻨـﻴﺪ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي †‬
‫… را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Æ¥‬‬
‫در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ (B)e‬را ﻓـﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ƶ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺗﺮاﻛﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ آﻧﻬﺎ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻫﺎي … † را ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤـﻪ ‪ OK‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• اﮔﺮ ﺗﺮاك اﺷﺘﺒﺎﻫﻲ را در ﻓﻬﺮﺳـﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ وارد ﻛﺮده اﻳﺪ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي ▲ ▼ ‹ را ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺗﺮاك اﺷﺘﺒﺎه ﻓـﺸﺎر‬
‫داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫∂‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ذﺧﻴﺮه ‪ ,Playlist‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ (A)ed‬را ﻓﺸـﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۵۸‬ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫‪wIOu XdN t Ëd‬‬
‫‪gÄ‬‬
‫‪Ʊ‬‬
‫در ﺣﲔ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ¬‪ (D)w‬را ﻓـﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﳕﺎﻳﺶ داده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫«‪Í“U Vd XOKU “« ÁœUH‬‬
‫اﮔﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮاﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ را در ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣـﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻋﻮض ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ,‬اﻳﻦ ﻛﺎر ﺑﺮاﺣﺘﻲ ﺷﺪﻧﻲ اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ʊ‬‬
‫ﻣــﻮﻗــﻌــﻲ ﻛــﻪ ﻣــﻨــﻮي ﻓــﻬــﺮﺳــﺖ ﳕــﺎﻳــﺶ داده ﻣــﻲ ﺷــﻮد‪ ,‬دﻛــﻤــﻪ ????‪ (B)e‬را‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪ Sort‬ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫≤‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺟـﻬﺖ اﻧـﺘﺨـﺎب ﮔـﺰﻳﻨـﻪ دﳋﻮاه‪ ,‬دﻛـﻤﻪ ﻫـﺎي … † را ﻓـﺸﺎر داده و ﺳـﭙﺲ‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ ‹ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : Name‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺣﺮوف اﻟﻔﺒﺎ‬
‫• ‪ : Size‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ اﻧﺪازه ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺻـﻮﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫دﻳﺴﻚ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ )‪ (CD-DA‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﳕﻲ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﺎم‪ ,‬ﻃﻮل ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﻛـﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﺷﺪه ﺑﻌﺪ از ورود دوﺑﺎره ﺑﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻛﭙﻲ ﺷﺪن ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫«
‪«u »U‬‬
‫‪Ʊ‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ¬‪ (D)w‬را ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪ Contents‬ﻓـﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫≤‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﺤﺘﻮاي ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮاﻫﻴﺪ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي … † را‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ ‹ را ﻓـﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﺎر ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﻛﺮد ﻛﻪ دﻳﺴﻚ داراي ﻣﺤﺘﻮاي‬
‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫دﻳﺴﻚ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ )‪ (CD-DA‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﳕﻲ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪fJØwIOu ÊUeL gÄ‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ در ﺣﲔ ﲤﺎﺷﺎي ﻋﻜﺴﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺳـﻴﻘﻲ ﻧﻴﺰ ﮔﻮش ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ʊ‬‬
‫≤‪Æ‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ¬‪ (D)w‬را ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪ Contents‬ﻓـﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب )‪ Photo(With Music‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي … † را ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ ‹ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻋﻜﺴﻬﺎ ﳕﺎﻳﺶ داده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪) .‬ﺑـﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ۶۰‬ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ(‬
‫■‬
‫ﺑــﺮاي ﻛ ــﺎر ﺑــﺎ اﻳ ــﻦ ﻗــﺎﺑ ــﻠــﻴ ــﺖ‪ ,‬ﺑــﺎﻳ ــﺪ دﻳــﺴــﻜ ــﻲ ﺣــﺎوي ﻫ ــﻢ ﻓــﺎﻳ ــﻠــﻬ ــﺎي‬
‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ و ﻫﻢ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎي ﻋﻜﺲ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨـﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎرﺳﻲ ‪۵۹ -‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫‪fJ p ÁbUA‬‬
‫‪Ʊ‬‬
‫ﻳــﻚ دﻳــﺴــﻚ ‪ JPEG‬در ﺳــﻴــﻨــﻲ دﻳــﺴــﻚ ﻗــﺮار دﻫ ــﻴــﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻨﻮ ﳕﺎﻳﺶ داده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫≤‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪ ,Library‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي … † را ﻓـﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ دﻛﻤﻪ ‹ را دو ﺑﺎر ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫـﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫≥‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪ ,Photo‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي … † را ﻓـﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪OK‬‬
‫‪Æ¥‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ دﻛﻤﻪ ‹ را دو ﺑﺎر ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ‪ ۸‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪي‪ ,‬دﻛـﻤﻪ ‪) SKIP‬‬
‫( را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ‪ ۸‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ‪ ,‬دﻛـﻤﻪ ‪) SKIP‬‬
‫( را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ دﳋـﻮاه‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي … †‹ را ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪bö« gU/‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‪ ,‬ﻣﺮاﺣﻞ ‪ ۱‬و ‪ ۴‬در ﺑﺎﻻ را دﻧـﺒﺎل ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ƶ‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ) (‪ PLAY‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻲ ﻛﻪ در ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻋﻜﺴﻬﺎ ﻫﺴـﺘﻴﺪ‪ ,‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر دادن‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ “—‪ (C)œ‬ﻫﻢ ﺑﺎ ﳕﺎﻳﺶ اﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﻛـﺎر ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫∂‪Æ‬‬
‫∑‪Æ‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ (A)ed‬را ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪ Speed‬ﻓﺸـﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﳕﺎﻳﺶ اﺳﻼﻳـﺪﻫﺎ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي … † را ﻓﺸﺎر‬
‫داده‪ ,‬و ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ ‹ را ﻓﺸـﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﳕﺎﻳﺶ اﺳﻼﻳﺪ آﻏﺎز ﺷﺪه و ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ اﻧﺘـﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر دادن دﻛﻤﻪ “—‪ (C)œ‬ﺑـﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻋﻜﺴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺮوﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫❖ ‪bö« gU/ 7U nu Í«d‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ STOP ( ) ,(B)e‬ﻳـﺎ ‪ RETURN‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Êb
UdÇ‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‪ ,‬ﻣﺮاﺣﻞ ‪ ۱‬و ‪ ۴‬در ﺑﺎﻻ را دﻧـﺒﺎل ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Ʊ≠µ‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ (B)e‬را ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪ Rotate‬ﻓﺸـﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫∂‪Æ‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري … † ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﺗﺪوﻳﺮ اﻟـﺰاوﻳﺔ‪ ,‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬
‫‪ OK‬أو زر ‹‪.‬‬
‫• زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ زاوﻳﻪ دوران اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﺮدﻳـﺪ‪ ,‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر‬
‫دادن دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ (A)ed‬آﻧﺮا ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر دادن دﻛﻤﻪ “—‪ (C)œ‬ﺑـﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻋﻜﺴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺮوﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫❖ ‪Êb
UdÇ 7U nu Í«d‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ STOP ( ) ,(B)e‬ﻳـﺎ ‪ RETURN‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۶۰‬ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫«‪dOJ‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‪ ,‬ﻣﺮاﺣﻞ ‪ ۱‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ۴‬در ﺻﻔـﺤﻪ ‪ ۶۰‬را دﻧﺒﺎل ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Ʊ≠µ‬دﻛﻤﻪ “—‪ (C)œ‬را ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪ Zoom‬ﻓﺸـﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫∂‪Æ‬‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﺑﺎر ﻛﻪ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪ ,‬ﺗـﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﺎ ‪) 4x‬ﭼﻬﺎر ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ‬
‫اﻧﺪازه ﻋﺎدي( ﺑﺰرگ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫← ‪Normal ← X2 ← X4 ← X2‬‬
‫‪gÄ‬‬
‫• دﻛﻤﻪ “—‪ (B)œ‬را ﺑﺮاي رﻓﱳ ﺑﻪ ‪ Photo List‬ﻓـﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫❖ ‪wzULMÖ—e 7U nu Í«d‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ STOP ( ) ,(B)e‬ﻳـﺎ ‪ RETURN‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫«‪—uB« Wzô v« ‰UI
ô‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‪ ,‬ﻣﺮاﺣﻞ ‪ ۱‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ۴‬در ﺻﻔـﺤﻪ ‪ ۶۰‬را دﻧﺒﺎل ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Ʊ≠µ‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ RETURN‬را ﺑﺮاي رﻓﱳ ﺑﻪ ‪ Photo List‬ﻓـﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫«‪Í“U Vd XOKU “« ÁœUH‬‬
‫اﮔﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮاﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ را در ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻋـﻜﺴﻬﺎ ﻋﻮض ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ,‬اﻳﻦ ﻛﺎر ﺑﺮاﺣﺘﻲ ﺷﺪﻧﻲ اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ʊ‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣـﻨﻮي ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﳕﺎﻳﺶ داده ﻣﻲ ﺷـﻮد‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ (B)e‬را ﺑﺮاي‬
‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪ Sort‬ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫≤‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺟﻬـﺖ اﻧﺘـﺨﺎب ﮔـﺰﻳﻨـﻪ دﳋﻮاه‪ ,‬دﻛـﻤﻪ ﻫـﺎي … † را ﻓﺸـﺎر داده و ﺳﭙـﺲ‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ ‹ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : Name‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺣﺮوف اﻟﻔﺒﺎ‬
‫• ‪ : Size‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ اﻧﺪازه ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺗﺼـﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﻣـﻲ ﺗـﻮاﻧـﻴـﺪ ﺑـﺮ ﺣـﺴـﺐ ﻧـﺎم ﻳـﺎ اﻧـﺪازه ﻣـﺮﺗـﺐ ﻛـﻨـﻴـﺪ‪ .‬ﺑـﻌـﺪ از ورود‬
‫دوﺑﺎره ﺑﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻋﻜﺴﻬﺎ‪ ,‬ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣـﺮﺗﺐ ﺷﺪه ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻛﭙﻲ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫«
‪«u »U‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‪ ,‬ﻣﺮاﺣﻞ ‪ ۱‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ۳‬در ﺻﻔـﺤﻪ ‪ ۶۰‬را دﻧﺒﺎل ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ʊ‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ¬‪ (D)w‬را ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪ Contents‬ﻓـﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫≤‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﺤﺘﻮاي ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮاﻫﻴﺪ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي … † را‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ ‹ را ﻓـﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﺎر ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﻛﺮد ﻛﻪ دﻳﺴﻚ داراي ﻣﺤﺘﻮاي‬
‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎرﺳﻲ ‪۶۱ -‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫‪DIVX gÄ‬‬
‫‪tLœ “« ÁœUH« U‬‬
‫‪Ʊ‬‬
‫‪MENU‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ دﻳﺴﻚ ‪ DivX‬در ﺳﻴﻨﻲ دﻳﺴﻚ ﻗـﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫• ﻣﻨﻮ ﳕﺎﻳﺶ داده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫≤‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪ ,Library‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي … † را ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪OK‬‬
‫≥‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪ ,DivX‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي … † را ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‹ را دو ﺑﺎر ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Æ¥‬‬
‫ﺑـﺮاي اﻧﺘـﺨـﺎب ﻓﺎﻳـﻞ ‪ ,(DivX) avi‬دﻛـﻤـﻪ ﻫﺎي … † را ﻓـﺸـﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙـﺲ‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ ‪ ( ) PLAY‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ƶ‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ دﻛﻤﻪ ‹ را دو ﺑﺎر ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫در ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ DivX‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪ ,‬ﻗﺎدر ﺧﻮاﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﻮد از ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺘﻬﺎي زﻳﺮ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎر ﻓﺸﺎر دادن دﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ ( )STOP‬در ﺣﲔ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ,‬ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ را ﳕﺎﻳﺶ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ داد‪ ,‬ﻓﺸﺎر دادن دوﺑﺎره اﻳﻦ دﻛﻤﻪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ ﺗﺎ از‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺧﺎرج ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪DivX ÍUœdJKL Õd‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد‬
‫ﺷﺮح‬
‫رد ﻛﺮدن‬
‫در ﺣﲔ ﭘﺨﺶ دﻛﻤﻪ )‬
‫ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ‬
‫در ﺣﲔ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪) SEARCH‬‬
‫آﻧﺮا ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪(X۸ ,X۴ ,X۲) .‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ آﻫﺴﺘﻪ‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ) (‪ SEARCH‬ﻛﻨﺘﺮل از راه دور را در ﺣﺎﻟـﺖ ﻣﻜﺚ ) ( ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)‪(۸/۱, ۴/۱, ۲/۱‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ آﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﳕﻲ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ‬
‫در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻜﺚ ) (‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ) (‪ SKIP‬ﻛـﻨﺘﺮل از راه دور را در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻘﻄﻌﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﳕﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫(‪ SKIP‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪ ,‬و ‪ ۵‬دﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻘﺐ ﺑﺮده ﺧﻮاﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫( را ﻓﺸﺎر داده و ﺑﺮاي ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺘﻲ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ‪ ,‬دوﺑﺎره‬
‫ﺑﺮﺧﻲ از ﻓـﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎي ‪ DivX‬ﺗﻬﻴـﻪ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴـﻮﺗﺮﻫﺎي ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﳑـﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ اﻳﻦ دﺳﺘـﮕﺎه ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧـﺒﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻫﻤﲔ دﻟﻴﻞ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻮع ‪ ,Codec‬وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ و ﻗﺪرت ﺗـﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ از ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﳕﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫—‪DivX fu
d“ e‬‬
‫‪Ʊ‬‬
‫≤‪Æ‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ “—‪ (C)œ‬را در ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻓـﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب زﺑﺎن زﻳﺮﻧﻮﻳﺲ ‪ DivX‬ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي … †‬
‫را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ دﻛﻤـﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۶۲‬ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫‪Central‬‬
‫اﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ‪ ,‬آﻟﺒﺎﻧﻴﺎﻳﻲ‪ ,‬ﻛﺮواﺗـﻲ‪ ,‬ﭼﻜﻲ‪ ,‬ﻣﺠﺎري‪ ,‬ﻟﻬﺴﺘﺎﻧﻲ‪ ,‬روﻣﺎﻧﻴﺎﻳﻲ‪ ,‬ﺻﺮﺑﻲ )ﻻﺗﲔ(‪ ,‬اﺳﻠﻮواك‪,‬‬
‫اﺳﻠﻮﻧﻴﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫‪Greek‬‬
‫اﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ‪ ,‬ﻳﻮﻧﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫‪Cyrillic‬‬
‫اﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ‪ ,‬آذري‪ ,‬ﺑﻼروﺳﻲ‪ ,‬ﺑﻠﻐـﺎري‪ ,‬ﻗﺰاﻗﻲ‪ ,‬ﻣﻘﺪوﻧﻴﻪ اي‪ ,‬روﺳﻲ‪ ,‬ﺻﺮﺑﻲ‪ ,‬ﺗﺎرﺗﺎري‪ ,‬اﻛﺮاﻳﻨﻲ‪ ,‬ازﺑﻜﻲ‬
‫■‬
‫اﮔﺮ زﺑﺎن زﻳﺮﻧﻮﻳﺲ ﺑﺼﻮرت ﻗﻠﻤﻬﺎي ﺷﻜﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﳕﺎﻳﺶ در ﻣﻲ آﻳﺪ‪ ,‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ زﻳﺮﻧﻮﻳﺲ ‪ DivX‬را ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ‬
‫ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ دﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬اﮔﺮ ﺑﺎز ﻫﻢ ﻛـﺎر ﻧﻜﺮد‪ ,‬ﻓﺮﻣﺖ از ﻧﻮع ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﺷﺪه ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫«‪Í“U Vd XOKU “« ÁœUH‬‬
‫اﮔﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮاﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ را در ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ‪ DivX‬ﻋﻮض ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ,‬اﻳﻦ ﻛﺎر ﺑﺮاﺣﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻧﻲ اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ʊ‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣـﻨﻮي ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﳕﺎﻳﺶ داده ﻣﻲ ﺷـﻮد‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ (B)e‬را ﺑﺮاي‬
‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪ Sort‬ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫≤‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺟﻬـﺖ اﻧﺘـﺨﺎب ﮔـﺰﻳﻨـﻪ دﳋﻮاه‪ ,‬دﻛـﻤﻪ ﻫـﺎي … † را ﻓﺸـﺎر داده و ﺳﭙـﺲ‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ ‹ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : Name‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺣﺮوف اﻟﻔﺒﺎ‬
‫• ‪ : Size‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ اﻧﺪازه ﻓﺎﻳـﻞ ‪.DivX‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧـﻴﺪ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧـﺎم ﻳﺎ اﻧﺪازه ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﻛﻨـﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ از ورود دوﺑﺎره ﺑـﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ‪ ,DivX‬ﻓﻬـﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﺷﺪه ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻛﭙﻲ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫«
‪«u »U‬‬
‫‪Ʊ‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ¬‪ (D)w‬را ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪ Contents‬ﻓـﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫≤‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﺤﺘﻮاي ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮاﻫﻴﺪ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي … † را‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ ‹ را ﻓـﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﺎر ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﻛﺮد ﻛﻪ دﻳﺴﻚ داراي ﻣﺤﺘﻮاي‬
‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎرﺳﻲ ‪۶۳ -‬‬
‫‪gÄ‬‬
‫‪Western‬‬
‫آﻓﺮﻳﻘﺎﻳﻲ‪ ,‬ﺑﺎﺳﻚ‪ ,‬ﻛﺎﺗﺎﻻن‪ ,‬داﳕﺎرﻛﻲ‪ ,‬ﻫﻠـﻨﺪي‪ ,‬ﻫﻮﻟﻨﺪى‪ ,‬اﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ‪ ,‬ﻓﺎرﺋﻮﺳﻪ‪ ,‬ﻓﻨﻼﻧﺪي‪ ,‬اﻟﻔﺮﻧﺴﻴﺔ‪,‬‬
‫ﻓﺮاﻧﺴﻮي‪ ,‬اﻳﺴﻠﻨﺪي‪ ,‬اﻧﺪوﻧﺰﻳﺎﻳﻲ‪ ,‬اﻳـﺘﺎﻟﻴﺎﻳﻲ‪ ,‬ﻣﺎﻻي‪ ,‬ﻧﺮوژي‪ ,‬ﭘﺮﺗﻐﺎﻟﻲ‪ ,‬اﺳﭙﺎﻧﻴﺎﻳﻲ‪ ,‬ﺳﻮاﻫﻴﻠﻲ‪ ,‬ﺳﻮﺋﺪي‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫در اﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺷﻴﻮه ﻫﺎي ﻣﺨﺘﻠ ﺿﺒـﻂ ‪ DVD‬و ‪ HDD‬ﺗﺸﺮﻳﺢ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫اﻳﻦ دﺳـﺘﮕـﺎه ﻣﻲ ﺗـﻮاﻧﺪ روي اﻧـﻮاع ﻣﺨـﺘﻠـﻔﻲ از دﻳﺴـﻜﻬـﺎ ﺿﺒـﻂ ﻛﻨـﺪ‪ .‬ﻗﺒـﻞ از ﺿﺒـﻂ‪ ,‬دﺳﺘـﻮراﻟﻌﻤـﻠﻬـﺎي زﻳﺮ را ﻣـﻄﺎﻟـﻌﻪ ﻛـﺮده و ﻧﻮع‬
‫دﻳﺴﻚ را ﺑﺮ اﺳﺎس ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺤﺎت ﺧﻮد اﻧﺘﺨـﺎب ﳕﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫«‪j{ qU ÍUNJœ‬‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ روي دﻳﺴﻜﻬـﺎي زﻳﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪DVD-RAM‬ﻫﺎ و‪ DVD±RW‬ﻫـﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴـﺖ ﻧﻮﺷﱳ ﻣـﺠﺪد دارﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ DVD±R‬ﻫﺎ ﻗﺎﺑـﻠﻴﺖ ﺑﺎزﻧﻮﻳـﺴﻲ ﻧﺪارﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪td
dU U Samsung XU ÍU ÁbMM j{ Í—UÖ“U‬‬
‫اﻧﻮاع‬
‫دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺘﻬﺎي‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻄﻆ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﺎزي‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ اﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ‪Samsung‬‬
‫‪DVD-RAW‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪VR‬‬
‫‪Samsung‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪j³{ qÐU‬‬
‫‪DVD-RW‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪VR‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺷﺮﻛﺘﻬﺎ‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫‪Samsung‬‬
‫½‪Ábý wzUN‬‬
‫‪j³{ qÐU dOž‬‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺷﺪه‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺷﺮﻛﺘﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪V‬‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺷﺪه‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺷﺪه‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺷﺪه‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺷﺪه‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫‪Samsung‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ در ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺷﺮﻛﺘﻬﺎ‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ در ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ‬
‫‪Samsung‬‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺷﺪه‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ در ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺷﺪه‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ در ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ‬
‫‪Samsung‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺷﺮﻛﺘﻬﺎ‬
‫‪DVD-R‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪V‬‬
‫‪DVD+RAW‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪DVD+R‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪Samsung‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺷﺮﻛﺘﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺷﺮﻛﺘﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ‪۶۴ -‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﺎزي‬
‫ﻼ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨـﻨﺪه ‪ DVD‬و‪ HDD‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪه‬
‫ اﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺷـﻤﺎ اﺟﺎزه ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ روي دﻳﺴﻚ ‪ DVD-RW‬ﻛـﻪ ﻗﺒ ً‬‫اﺳﺖ‪ ,‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻳﻚ دﻳﺴﻚ ‪ DVD-RW‬ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳـﻂ ‪) (Disc At Once) DAO‬اﻳﺠﺎد ﻳﻚ دﻓﻌﻪ دﻳﺴﻚ( در ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗـﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ درﺳﺖ‬‫ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﺎزي ﻧﻴﺴـﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻳﻚ دﻳﺴﻚ ‪ DVD-RW‬ﻛﻪ در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) Video‬وﻳﺪﻳﻮ( ﻳﺎ ﺑـﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺳﺎزﻧﺪﮔﺎن دﻳﮕﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﺎﺧﱳ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎي ‪ DVD±R‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﺎزي ﻧـﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪j{ ÍUNd‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ دﻳﺴﻚ اﺳﺘﻔـﺎده ﻧﺸﺪه در دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﻗﺮار ﻣﻲ دﻫﻴﺪ‪ ,‬ﭘﻴﺎم زﻳﺮ ﳕﺎﻳﺶ داده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪ .‬از آﳒﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻗـﺎﺑﻠﻴﺘﻬﺎي‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮع دﻳﺴﻚ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ دارﻧﺪ‪ ,‬دﻳـﺴﻜﻲ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ وﺟﻪ ﺑﺮآورﻧﺪه ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺤﺎت ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑـﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : DVD-RAM/+R‬ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻛﺮدن ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر آﻏـﺎز ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫‪ :DVD+RW‬ﺑﻌﺪ از ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻛﺮدن دﻳﺴﻚ اﺳﺘﻔـﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : DVD-RW‬ﺑﻌﺪ از آﻣﺎده ﻛﺮدن دﻳﺴﻚ اﺳﺘﻔـﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫اﮔﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮاﻫﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ را ﺑﻪ ‪ VR‬ﻳـﺎ ‪ V‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ دﻫﻴﺪ‪ ,‬ﺑﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻛﺮدن دﻳﺴﻚ در ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ۹۴‬ﻣـﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﳕﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : DVD-R‬ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻛﺮدن ‪ DVD-R‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﺿﺮوري اﺳﺖ و ﺗﻨـﻬﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪) Video‬وﻳﺪﻳﻮ( ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪©VR XU® DVD-RAM/-RW‬‬
‫• اﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ اﻣﻜﺎن اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴـﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ )ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺣﺬف ﻛﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻋﻨﻮان‪ ,‬ﺣﺬف ﺑﺨﺸﻲ از ﻳـﻚ ﻋﻨﻮان و‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮه( را ﻓﺮاﻫﻢ ﻣﻲ آورد‪.‬‬
‫• ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺨﺘﻠ وﻳﺮاﻳـﺶ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻳﻚ ‪ Playlist‬اﻳﺠﺎد ﺷﺪه‪.‬‬
‫‪-R / ©V XU® DVD-RW‬‬
‫• ﻓﺼﻮل ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر ﭘـﺲ از ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﺎزي دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎي ‪ DVD-RW/-R‬در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) Video‬وﻳﺪﻳﻮ( اﻳﺠﺎد ﻣﻲ ﺷـﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﻮل ﻓﺼﻞ )ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻴﺎن ﻓﺼـﻮل( ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺑﻮد‪.‬‬
‫• وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ ﺳﺎده )ﭘﺎك ﻛﺮدن ﻋﻨﺎوﻳﻦ‪/‬ﺗـﻐﻴﻴﺮ دادن ﻧﺎم ﻋﻨﻮان(‬
‫‪DVD+RW‬‬
‫• در دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎي ‪ DVD+RW‬ﻫﻴﭻ ﺗﻔـﺎوﺗﻲ ﻣﻴﺎن ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ‪) DVD-Video‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ (V‬ﻳﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪) DVD-Video‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ (VR‬وﺟـﻮد‬
‫ﻧﺪارد‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪۶۵ -‬‬
‫«‪qO‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﺎزي‬
‫‪ -‬اﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ‪ DVD-RW/±R‬را ﻣﻲ ﺑﻨﺪد و دﻳﮕـﺮ اﻣﻜﺎن ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺮدن روي آن وﺟﻮد ﻧﺨﻮاﻫﺪ داﺷﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫‪©j{® Recording XU‬‬
‫در زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ دﺳﺘـﮕﺎه در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻮﻗ اﺳﺖ‪ ,‬ﺑﺎ ﻓـﺸﺎر دادن ﻣﻜﺮر دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ REC MODE‬ﻳﻜﻲ از ﭼﻬـﺎر ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ را ﺑﺮاي ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ‬
‫زﻣﺎن دﳋﻮاه ﺿﺒﻂ و ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ اﻧﺘـﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻛﻠﻲ‪ ,‬ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑـﺎ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ زﻣﺎن ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ,‬ﺑﻬﺒﻮد ﻣﻲ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪ .‬در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ , FR‬ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺿﺒـﻂ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر و‬
‫ﺑﺮ اﺳﺎس زﻣﺎن ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪه روي دﻳﺴـﻚ و ﻣﺪت زﻣﺎن ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ رﻳﺰي ﺷﺪه ﺑﺮاي ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ,‬ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻳـﻜﻲ از ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎي ‪ LP ,SP ,XP‬ﻳﺎ ‪ EP‬را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ و ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴـﺪ از آن ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮاي ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫رﻳﺰي زﻣﺎﻧﻲ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪..‬‬
‫• ‪DVD-HR773‬‬
‫زﻣﺎن ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫‪ ۱۶۰)HDD‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ(‬
‫‪DVD-RAM/±RW/±R‬‬
‫)ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ( ‪XP‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ‪ ۳۳‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ‪ ۱‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ‪ ۸٫۵‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﻴـﺖ در ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬
‫)ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺘﺎﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد( ‪SP‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ‪ ۶۷‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ‪ ۲‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ‪ ۴٫۵‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﻴـﺖ در ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬
‫)ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺿﺒﻄﻄﻮﻻﻧﻲ( ‪LP‬‬
‫)ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﲤﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺪه( ‪EP‬‬
‫)ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻨﻌﻄ( ‪FR‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ‪ ۱۳۳‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ‪ ۴‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ‪ ۲‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﻴـﺖ در ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ‪ ۱۹۹‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ‪ ۶‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪ /‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪ ۱٫۶‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑـﻴﺖ در ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ‪ ۲۶۴‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ‪ ۸‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪ /‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪ ۱٫۲‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑـﻴﺖ در ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ‪ ۲۶۴-۳۳‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ‪ ۱‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ۸‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫• ‪DVD-HR775‬‬
‫زﻣﺎن ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫‪ ۲۵۰)HDD‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ(‬
‫‪DVD-RAM/±RW/±R‬‬
‫)ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ( ‪XP‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ‪ ۵۳‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ‪ ۱‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ‪ ۸٫۵‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﻴـﺖ در ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬
‫)ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺘﺎﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد( ‪SP‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ‪ ۱۰۶‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ‪ ۲‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ‪ ۴٫۵‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﻴـﺖ در ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬
‫)ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺿﺒﻄﻄﻮﻻﻧﻲ( ‪LP‬‬
‫)ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﲤﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺪه( ‪EP‬‬
‫)ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻨﻌﻄ( ‪FR‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ‪۶۶ -‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ‪ ۲۱۱‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ‪ ۴‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ‪ ۲‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﻴـﺖ در ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ‪ ۳۱۶‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ‪ ۶‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪ /‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪ ۱٫۶‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑـﻴﺖ در ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ‪ ۴۲۱‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ‪ ۸‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪ /‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ‪ ۱٫۲‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑـﻴﺖ در ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ‪ ۴۲۱-۵۳‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ‪ ۱‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ۸‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫• ‪DVD-HR777‬‬
‫زﻣﺎن ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫)ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ( ‪XP‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ‪ ۶۸‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ‪ ۱‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ‪ ۸٫۵‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﻴـﺖ در ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬
‫)ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺘﺎﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد( ‪SP‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ‪ ۱۳۵‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ‪ ۲‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ‪ ۴٫۵‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﻴـﺖ در ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬
‫)ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺿﺒﻄﻄﻮﻻﻧﻲ( ‪LP‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ‪ ۲۷۰‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ‪ ۴‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ‪ ۲‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﻴـﺖ در ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ‪ ۴۰۵‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ‪ ۶‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪ /‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪ ۱٫۶‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑـﻴﺖ در ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ‪ ۵۳۴‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ‪ ۸‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪ /‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪ ۱٫۲‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑـﻴﺖ در ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ‪ ۵۳۴-۶۸‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ‪ ۱‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ۸‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫)ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﲤﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺪه( ‪EP‬‬
‫)ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻨﻌﻄ( ‪FR‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﺿﺒﻂ ﳑﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮاﻳـﻂ ﺧﺎص ﻣﺘﻔﺎوت ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫‪ ۱‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ = ‪ ۱٫۰۰۰٫۰۰۰٫۰۰۰‬ﺑﺎﻳﺖ; ﻇﺮﻓﻴـﺖ واﻗﻌﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ از ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﳑﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﭼﻮن ﺛﺎﺑﺖ اﻓﺰار‬
‫داﺧﻠﻲ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ از ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ را ﺑﻪ ﺧـﻮد اﺧﺘﺼﺎص ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ دﻳﺴﻚ ﻫﺎي ‪ DVD±R‬دو ﻻﻳﻪ ﺗﻘـﺮﻳﺒًﺎ دو ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ دﻳﺴﻚ ﻫﺎي ﺗﻚ ﻻﻳﻪ ‪ DVD±R‬اﺳﺖ‪) .‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ۴۶‬ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ(‬
‫‪j{ qU dO dËUB‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺎوﻳﺮي ﻛﻪ در ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ ﻛﭙﻲ ﺷﺪن ﻣﺤﺎﻓـﻈﺖ ﺷﺪه اﻧﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ اﻳﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ‪ DVD‬و‪ HDD‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﳕﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣـﻲ ﻛﻪ‬
‫دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ‪ DVD‬و ‪ HDD‬در ﺣﲔ ﺿﺒـﻂ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎل ‪) Copy Guard‬ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻛﭙﻲ( درﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ,‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﻛﭙﻲ ﻣﺘـﻮﻗ ﺷﺪه و‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎم زﻳﺮ روي ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﳕﺎﻳﺶ در ﺧـﻮاﻫﺪ آﻣﺪ‬
‫‪wá UOKL ÁbMM ‰dM ÍUNUM~O Á—U—œ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ داراي ﺳﻴﮕـﻨﺎﻟﻬﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻛﭙﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺷﺎﻳﺪ ﻳﻜﻲ از ﺳﻪ ﻧﻮع ﺳﻴﮕـﻨﺎل زﻳﺮ را داﺷﺘﻪ‬
‫ﻼ ﳑﻨﻮع(‪ .‬اﮔﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮاﻫﻴـﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪) Copy-Free ,‬ﻛﭙﻲ‪-‬آزاد(‪) -Copy-Once ,‬ﻳﻚ ﺑـﺎر‪-‬ﻛﭙﻲ( و ‪) Copy-Never‬ﻛﭙﻲ‪-‬ﻛﺎﻣ ً‬
‫اي ﺑﺎ وﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎر ﻛـﭙﻲ را ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ,‬از ‪ DVD-RW‬ﺑﺎ ‪ CPRM‬در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ VR‬اﺳﺘـﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.HDD ,DVD-RAM ,‬‬
‫ﻧﻮع رﺳﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻮع ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎل‬
‫‪) DVD-RW‬وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ ‪(۱٫۱‬‬
‫‪) DVD-RW‬وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ ‪(۱٫۱‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ‪CPRM‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪VR‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪V‬‬
‫ﻛﭙﻲ‪-‬آزاد‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎر‪-‬ﻛﭙﻲ‬
‫ﻛﭙﻲ‪-‬ﻛﺎﻣﻼﳑﻨﻮع‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫*‪0‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‬‫‬‫‪-‬‬
‫‪DVD-R‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪) DVD-RW‬وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ ‪(۲٫۰‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫*‪0‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪DVD+RW‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪DVD+R‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪HDD‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫*‪0‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫اﮔﺮ ﺑﺎ ‪) Copy-Once‬ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎر‪-‬ﻛﭙﻲ( ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺮدﻳـﺪ‪ ,‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺮدن اﺿﺎﻓﻪ اﻣﻜﺎن ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻧﺨﻮاﻫﺪ ﺑﻮد‪.‬‬
‫❖ ‪©CPRM® j{ qU ÍU tU— Í«d «u “« XEU‬‬
‫‪ CPRM‬ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺴﻤﻲ اﺳـﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪه را ﺑﺎ رﺳﺎﻧﻪ اي ﻛﻪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺿـﺒﻂ روي آن اﳒﺎم ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﭘﻴﻮﻧﺪ ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ ‪.‬اﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ در ﺑﻌﻀﻲ از ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛـﻨﻨﺪه ﻫﺎي ‪ DVD‬و ‪ HDD‬وﺟﻮد دارد‪ ,‬اﻣﺎ اﻛﺜﺮ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻫﺎي ‪ DVD‬از آن ﺑﻲ ﺑﻬﺮه ﻫﺴـﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺮ ‪ DVD‬ﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ داراي ﻳﻚ ﺷﻨـﺎﺳﻪ ‪-۶۴‬ﺑﻴﺘﻲ ﻳﮕﺎﻧﻪ و ﻣﻨﺤﺼﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮد اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ در ‪ BCA‬آن ﺣﻚ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺤﺘﻮاي ﻣـﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺷﺪه روي دﻳﺴﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﻮد‪ ,‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان آﻧﺮا ﺑﺎ رﻣﺰ ‪ ۵۶‬ﺑﻴـﺘﻲ ‪ (Cryptomeria) C2‬ﻛﻪ از‬
‫ﺷﻨﺎﺳﻪ رﺳﺎﻧﻪ اﺳﺘﺨﺮاج ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪ ,‬رﻣـﺰ ﳕﻮد‪.‬‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﻪ در ﺣﲔ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ,‬از ‪ BCA‬ﺧﻮاﻧﺪه ﺷـﺪه و ﺑﺮاي اﻳﺠﺎد ﻛﻠﻴﺪ رﻣﺰﮔﺸﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت دﻳﺴﻚ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﺑﺮده ﻣـﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫اﮔﺮ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت دﻳﺴﻚ روي رﺳﺎﻧﻪ اي دﻳـﮕﺮ ﻛﭙﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ,‬ﺷﻨﺎﺳﻪ وﺟﻮد ﻧﺪاﺷﺘﻪ ﻳﺎ اﺷﺘﺒﺎه ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺑﻮد ﻟـﺬا داده ﻫﺎي ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫رﻣﺰﮔﺸﺎﻳﻲ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪۶۷ -‬‬
‫«‪qO‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫‪ ۳۲۰)HDD‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ(‬
‫‪DVD-RAM/±RW/±R‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫{‪Í—u j‬‬
‫‪ŸËd
“« q‬‬
‫‪Ʊ‬‬
‫≤‪Æ‬‬
‫ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ دﻳﺴﻚ ﻓﻀﺎي ﻛﺎﻓـﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﺿﺒﻂ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ HDD‬ﻳﺎ ‪ DVD‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫اﮔﺮ ‪ DVD‬را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ,‬دﻛـﻤﻪ ‪ OPEN/CLOSE‬را ﻓﺸﺎر داده و ﻳﻚ دﻳﺴﻚ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ در ﺳﻴﻨﻲ ﺑﮕﺬارﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺴﱳ ﺳﻴﻨﻲ دﻳﺴـﻚ ‪ OPEN/CLOSE‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺘﻈﺮ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻋﺒﺎرت ‪ LOAD‬از ﳕﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﺟـﻠﻮي دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﻣﺤﻮ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫{‪b?O ʬ ÍU
U9 ‰U —œ t ÊueuK wKF tUd Êœd j‬‬
‫‪Ʊ‬‬
‫≤‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ در ﺣﺎل ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛـﻪ ﻣﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ آن ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ‪,‬‬
‫( ﻳـﺎ دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻋﺪدي را ﻓـﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‪) PROG‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺳﺮﻋﺖ )ﻛﻴﻔـﻴﺖ( ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ REC MODE‬را ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر‬
‫ﻣﻜﺮر ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪) ,‬ﻳﺎ دﻛـﻤﻪ ‪ REC MODE‬را ﻓﺸﺎر داده و ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻫﺎي ة را ﻓﺸـﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫← ‪XP ← EP ← LP ← SP‬‬
‫≥‪Æ‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ REC‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﺎل روي ﺻﻔﺤـﻪ ﳕﺎﻳﺶ داده ﺷﺪه‪ ,‬و ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺿﺒﻂ آﻏﺎز ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮدد‪.‬‬
‫ﳕﺎد )‪ (● REC‬روي ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺟﻠﻮ ﭘﺪﻳـﺪار ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫{‪b?O UN¬ tUd ÍU
U9 ‰U —œ t wËdO «eON& “« Êœd j‬‬
‫‪Ʊ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ورودي ﺑـﺮ اﺳﺎس اﺗﺼﺎﻻﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﻗﺮار ﻛﺮده اﻳﺪ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ INPUT SEL.‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﳕﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺟﻠﻮ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ زﻳﺮ ﺗـﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﻛﺮد‪:‬‬
‫← ‪DV ← AV2 ← AV1 ← PR Number‬‬
‫اﮔﺮ ﻳﻚ دورﺑﲔ وﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ دﻳﺠﻴـﺘﺎل وﺻﻞ ﻛﺮده اﻳﺪ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ INPUT SEL.‬را ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪ DV‬ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤـﻪ‬
‫‪ ۶۹‬ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ(‬
‫≤‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺳﺮﻋﺖ )ﻛﻴﻔـﻴﺖ( ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ REC MODE‬را ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻣﻜﺮر ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪) ,‬ﻳﺎ دﻛﻤـﻪ ‪ REC MODE‬را‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎر داده و ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛـﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي ة را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫≥‪Æ‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ REC‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ورودي ﺑﻴـﺮوﻧﻲ روي ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﳕﺎﻳﺶ داده ﺷﺪه‪ ,‬و ﺳﭙﺲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺿﺒﻂ آﻏﺎز ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮدد‪.‬‬
‫ﳕﺎد )‪ (● REC‬روي ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺟﻠﻮ ﭘﺪﻳـﺪار ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ‪۶۸ -‬‬
‫‪j{ —œ Êœd YJ Í«d‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮاي ﻣﻜﺚ در ﺣﲔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﺎري‪ ,‬دﻛـﻤﻪ ‪ REC PAUSE‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮاي از ﺳﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﱳ ﺿﺒﻂ در ﻃﻮل ﻣﻜـﺚ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ REC PAUSE‬را ﻣﺠﺪدًا ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧـﻴﺪ در زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣـﻜﺚ ﻗﺮار دارد‪ ,‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر دادن دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي ‪) PROG‬‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫( ﺑـﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ را ﻋﻮض‬
‫• اﮔﺮ در ﺣﲔ ﻣﻜﺚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ DV‬را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛـﻨﻴﺪ‪ ,‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺘﻮﻗ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫اﮔﺮ در ﺣﲔ ﻣﻜﺚ ﺿﺒﻂ در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ DV‬ﻣﻨـﺒﻊ ورودي را ﻋﻮض ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ,‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺘﻮﻗ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫• اﮔﺮ از دﻳﺴﻜﻬـﺎي ‪ DVD-RAM±RW/±R‬اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ,‬ﭘﻴـﺎم "‪"Updating the information of disc. Please wait for a moment‬‬
‫ﳕﺎﻳﺎن ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫در ﺣﲔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺮدن اﻣﻜﺎن ﺗﻐﻴﻴـﺮ دادن ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ وﺟﻮد ﻧﺪارد‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫اﮔﺮ ﻓﻀﺎي ﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺮدن ﻣﻮﺟـﻮد ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﻄﻮر ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر ﻣﺘﻮﻗ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫روي ﻳﻚ دﻳﺴﻚ ‪ DVD-RAM-RW/-R‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ۹۹‬ﻋﻨﻮان و روي ﻳﻚ دﻳﺴﻚ ‪ DVD+RW/+R‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ۴۸‬ﻋﻨﻮان ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺮد‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﺗﺎ ‪ ۹۹۹‬ﻋﻨﻮان روي ‪ HDD‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺛﺒﺖ اﺳـﺖ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ HDD‬ﺑﺮاي ﺗﺎ ‪ ۲۴‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد اﺳﺖ‪ ,‬و وﻗﺘﻲ ﺑﺮاي ‪ ۲۴‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ۳ ,‬ﻋﻨﻮان ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮل ‪۸‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫اﮔﺮ ﺗـﺼﻮﻳـﺮي ﻣﺤـﺎﻓﻈـﺖ ﺷﺪه در ﺑـﺮاﺑﺮ ﻛﭙـﻲ اﻧﺘـﺨﺎب ﻛـﺮده ﺑﺎﺷـﻴﺪ‪ ,‬ﻋـﻤﻠﻴـﺎت ﺿﺒـﻂ ﺑﻄـﻮر ﺧﻮدﻛـﺎر ﻣﺘـﻮﻗ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎي ‪ DVD+RAM/±RW‬را ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ از ﺷﺮوع ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻛﺮد‪ .‬ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎي ﻧﻮ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻧﺸﺪه ﺑﻔﺮوش ﻣﻲ‬
‫رﺳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫از دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎي ﻣﺎدر ‪ DVD-R‬در اﻳﻦ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه اﺳﺘـﻔﺎده ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪w?ubË 5?—Ëœ p ÍË— “« Êœd w?á‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴـﺪ دورﺑﲔ وﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ﺧﻮد را ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از واﺳﻂ ‪ (DV) IEEE1394‬ﻛﻨـﺘﺮل ﳕﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ʊ‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﺶ ﻣﺎدﮔﻲ ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ ‪ DV‬دورﺑﲔ وﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ﺧﻮد را ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫‪ DV‬ﺑﻪ ﻓﻴﺶ ﻣﺎدﮔﻲ ورودي ‪ DV‬ﺟﻠﻮي ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ‪ DVD‬و ‪ HDD‬وﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫≤‪Æ‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ DVD‬ﻳﺎ ‪ HDD‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫اﮔـﺮ ‪ DVD‬را اﻧــﺘـﺨــﺎب ﻛـﺮده اﻳـﺪ‪ ,‬دﻛــﻤـﻪ ‪ OPEN/CLOSE‬را ﻓــﺸـﺎر داده و ﻳـﻚ‬
‫دﻳﺴﻚ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ در ﺳﻴﻨﻲ دﻳﺴﻚ ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺴﱳ ﺳﻴﻨﻲ دﻳﺴﻚ‪,‬‬
‫دﻛ ــﻤــﻪ ‪ OPEN/CLOSE‬را ﻓ ــﺸــﺎر دﻫ ــﻴــﺪ‪ .‬ﻣ ــﻨــﺘ ــﻈــﺮ ﺷ ــﻮﻳــﺪ ﺗ ــﺎ ﻋ ــﺒــﺎرت ‪LOAD‬‬
‫)ﺑﺎرﮔﺬاري( از روي ﳕﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺟﻠـﻮ ﻣﺤﻮ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫≥‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺑـﻪ ﻣﻨـﻈﻮر اﻧـﺘﺨـﺎب ﺳﺮﻋـﺖ ﺿـﺒﻂ )ﻛـﻴﻔـﻴﺖ( دﻛـﻤـﻪ ‪ REC MODE‬را ﺑﻪ ﻃـﻮر‬
‫ﻣﻜﺮر ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Æ¥‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪ ,DV‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ INPUT SEL.‬را ﻓﺸـﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫اﮔﺮ ورودي روي ‪ DV‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷـﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ,‬ﻣﻨﻮي ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻪ اﻣـﻜﺎن ﻛﺎر‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟـﻬﺎي دورﺑﲔ وﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ را ﻓﺮاﻫﻢ ﻣـﻲ آورد در ﺑﺎﻻي ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﳕﺎﻳﺎن‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪Ƶ‬‬
‫ﳕﺎد ‪ (‹) Play‬را در ﺑﺨﺶ ﺑﺎﻻي ﺻﻔﺤﻪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ دورﺑﲔ وﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ در آﻣﺪه و ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ اﺑـﺘﺪاﻳﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ را ﺑﻴﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬
‫∂‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺑـﺮاي آﻏــﺎز ﺿـﺒــﻂ‪ ,‬دﻛـﻤــﻪ ﻫـﺎي ‹ را ﻓــﺸـﺎر دﻫـﻴــﺪ ﺗـﺎ ﳕــﺎد ‪ (●) Record‬در‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻي ﺻﻔﺤﻪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﻮد‪ ,‬ﺳﭙـﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي آﻏﺎز ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴـﺪ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ REC‬ﻛﻨﺘﺮل از راه دور را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪۶۹ -‬‬
‫«‪qO‬‬
‫‪j{ UOKL Êœd nu Í«d‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺘﻮﻗ ﻛﺮدن ﻳﺎ ﭘـﺎﻳﺎن دادن ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﺎري‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ( ) STOP‬را ﻓـﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫‪j{ UOKL Êœd nu Í«d‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺘﻮﻗ ﻛﺮدن ﻳﺎ ﭘـﺎﻳﺎن دادن ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﺎري‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ( ) STOP‬را ﻓـﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• اﮔﺮ از دﻳﺴﻜﻬـﺎي ‪ DVD-RAM±RW/±R‬اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ,‬ﭘﻴـﺎم "‪"Updating the information of disc. Please wait for a moment‬‬
‫ﳕﺎﻳﺎن ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ﺑﻪ ﳕﺎﻳﺶ در آوردن ﳕﺎدﻫﺎي ﻣﺮﺑـﻮط ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ در روي ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪ ,‬ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ از دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺟﻬﺖ دار روي‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل از راه دور را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫{?‪©OTR® t?Lœ ÊœdA —U? p U Êœd j‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر دادن دﻛـﻤﻪ ‪ REC‬زﻣﺎن ﺿﺒﻂ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ‪ DVD‬و ‪ HDD‬ﺧﻮد را ﻫﺮ ﺑﺎر ‪ ۳۰‬دﻗﻴﻘﻪ و ﺗـﺎ ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ‪۸‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ اﻓﺰاﻳﺶ دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ʊ‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ DVD‬ﻳﺎ ‪ HDD‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫اﮔﺮ ‪ DVD‬را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﺮده اﻳـﺪ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OPEN/CLOSE‬را ﻓﺸﺎر داده و‬
‫ﻳﻚ دﻳﺴﻚ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ در ﺳﻴﻨﻲ دﻳـﺴﻚ ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺴﱳ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻨﻲ دﻳﺴﻚ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OPEN/CLOSE‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴـﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻨﺘﻈﺮ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﻋﺒﺎرت ‪) LOAD‬ﺑﺎرﮔﺬاري( از روي ﳕﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﭘﺎﻧـﻞ ﺟﻠﻮ ﻣﺤﻮ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫≤‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ اي ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺿـﺒﻂ آن ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫‪) PROG‬‬
‫≥‪Æ‬‬
‫‪Æ¥‬‬
‫( ﻳﺎ دﻛﻤـﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻋﺪدي را ﻓﺸـﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي آﻏﺎز ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ REC‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫـﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ دﳋﻮاه‪ ,‬دﻛﻤـﻪ ‪ REC‬را ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻣﻜﺮر ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫← ‪Off ← 8:00... ← 1:00 ← 0:30‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎرﻧﺪه ﺗﺎﳝﺮ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻃـﻮر دﻗﻴﻘﻪ اي ﻛﻢ ﺷﺪه و زﻣﺎن را از‬
‫‪ 8:00‬ﺑﻪ ‪ 0:00‬ﻣﻲ رﺳﺎﻧﺪ‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛـﻨﻨﺪه ‪ DVD‬و ‪HDD‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﻗ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪j{ UOKL Êœd nu Í«d‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ( ) STOP‬را ﻓﺸـﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﻴﺎم "?‪ "Do you want to stop recording‬ﺑﻪ ﳕﺎﻳﺶ در ﺧـﻮاﻫﺪ آﻣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪ ,Yes‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي ‹ را ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙـﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺎ اﻳﻨﻜﻪ دﻛـﻤﻪ ‪ ( ) STOP‬را ﻣﺠﺪدًا ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ‪۷۰ -‬‬
‫{‪ÊUeL gÄ Ë j‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﺨﺶ را از اﺑﺘـﺪاي ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ اي ﻛﻪ در ﺣﺎل ﺿﺒﻂ آن ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ‪ ,‬آﻏﺎز ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ در ﺣﲔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺮﻧـﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﻪ ﲤﺎﺷﺎي ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻋﻨﺎوﻳﻦ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﺑﭙﺮدازﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪PLAY ( ) tLœ “« ÁœUH« U‬‬
‫«‪qO‬‬
‫‪Ʊ‬‬
‫ﻣـﻮﻗـﻌـﻲ ﻛـﻪ دﺳــﺘـﮕـﺎه در ﺣـﺎﻟـﺖ ﺿـﺒـﻂ اﺳـﺖ‪ ,‬دﻛـﻤــﻪ ‪ ( )PLAY‬را ﻓـﺸـﺎر‬
‫دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮاﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ در ﺣﺎل ﺿﺒﻂ آن ﻫﺴﺘﻴـﺪ از اﺑﺘﺪا ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ‪ ۱۰‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ آﻏﺎزﻳﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻣﻜـﺎن ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻧﺨﻮاﻫﺪ ﺑﻮد‪.‬‬
‫ﺷـﻤـﺎ ﻣــﻲ ﺗـﻮاﻧـﻴـﺪ ﺑـﺮاي ﻣــﺸـﺎﻫـﺪه ﻓـﻬـﺮﺳــﺖ اﻗـﻼم ﺿـﺒـﻂ ﺷـﺪه ﻗــﺒـﻠـﻲ از‬
‫( ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﭘﺨﺶ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‪) SKIP‬‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪j{ Ø gÄ 7U nu‬‬
‫‪Ʊ‬‬
‫≤‪Æ‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ( ) STOP‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔـﺤﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﺤﻮ ﺷﺪه و ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺿﺒـﻂ ﺟﺎري ﭘﺪﻳﺪار ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫اﮔﺮ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ( ) STOP‬را ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎر دﻳـﮕﺮ ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪ ,‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺘﻮﻗ ﺧﻮاﻫـﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪TITLE LIST tLœ “« ÁœUH« U‬‬
‫‪ Ʊ‬ﻫـﻨـﮕـﺎﻣـﻲ ﻛـﻪ دﺳـﺘـﮕـﺎه در ﺣـﺎﻟـﺖ ‪ Recording‬اﺳـﺖ‪ ,‬دﻛـﻤـﻪ ‪ TITLE LIST‬را‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎر ﻓﻮق ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺣﺪود ‪ ۱۰‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ از آﻏﺎز ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ اﳒﺎم‬
‫اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫(‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧـﺘﺨﺎب ﻓـﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻋﻨـﺎوﻳﻦ ﺿﺒـﻂ دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫـﺎي … † ‪) SKIP /‬‬
‫را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫≤‪Æ‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ ‪ ( ) PLAY‬را ﻓـﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮاﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ در ﺣﺎل ﺿﺒﻂ آن ﻫﺴﺘﻴـﺪ از اﺑﺘﺪا ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫«‪MENU —“ «b‬‬
‫‪Ʊ‬‬
‫≤‪Æ‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻲ ﻛﻪ دﺳﺘﮕـﺎه در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ اﺳﺖ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪ Title‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫـﺎي … † را ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻋﻨﺎوﻳﻦ ﳕﺎﻳـﺶ داده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫( را ﺟـﻬﺖ اﻧـﺘﺨـﺎب ﻓﻬـﺮﺳﺖ ﻋـﻨﺎوﻳـﻦ ﺿﺒـﻂ ﻓﺸـﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙـﺲ دﻛﻤـﻪ ‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ ‹ را ﻓـﺸﺎر‬
‫≥‪ Æ‬دﻛﻤـﻪ ﻫﺎي … † ‪) SKIP /‬‬
‫دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮاﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ در ﺣﺎل ﺿﺒﻂ آن ﻫﺴﺘﻴـﺪ از اﺑﺘﺪا ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪j{ Ø gÄ 7U nu‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ( ) STOP‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔـﺤﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﺤﻮ ﺷﺪه و ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺿﺒـﻂ ﺟﺎري ﭘﺪﻳﺪار ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ʊ‬‬
‫≤‪Æ‬‬
‫≥‪ Æ‬اﮔﺮ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ( ) STOP‬را ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎر دﻳـﮕﺮ ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪ ,‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺘﻮﻗ ﺧﻮاﻫـﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭘﻴـﺸﺮﻓﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ( ) MENU‬را دوﺑﺎره ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﻫﻴﭻ ﺻﺪاﻳﻲ در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) Search‬ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ( ﺑﻪ ﮔـﻮش ﻧﺨﻮاﻫﺪ رﺳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎي ‪ DVD‬در ﺣﲔ اﳒﺎم ﺿﺒﻂ روي ‪ HDD‬اﻣـﻜﺎن ﭘﺬﻳﺮ اﺳﺖ‪ .‬اﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎي‬
‫‪ MP3 ,JPEG‬و ‪ DivX‬روي دﻳﺴﻚ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﺨـﻮاﻫﻨﺪ ﺑﻮد‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ از روي ‪ HDD‬در ﺣﲔ اﳒﺎم ﺿﺒﻂ روي ‪ DVD‬اﻣﻜﺎن ﭘﺬﻳـﺮ اﺳﺖ‪ .‬اﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎي‬
‫‪ JPEG‬و ‪ MP3‬روي ‪ HDD‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﺨﻮاﻫﻨـﺪ ﺑﻮد‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪۷۱ -‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫‪Áb“ ‰UM~O p Ê«uMF wU“ XHO
XOKU‬‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻣﻮارد ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺮا ﺑـﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎل زﻧﺪه ﳕﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫اﮔﺮ در ﺣﲔ ﲤﺎﺷﺎي ﻳﻚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ ﻛﺎري ﺑﺮاي ﺗﺎن ﭘﻴﺶ آﻣﺪ‪ ,‬ﻛﺎﻓﻲ اﺳﺖ‬
‫دﻛـﻤــﻪ ‪ TITLE SHIFT‬را ﻓـﺸـﺎر دﻫــﻴـﺪ‪ ,‬و ﺿـﺒــﻂ ﻛـﻨـﻨــﺪه ‪ HDD‬و ‪ DVD‬ﻓـﻮرًا ﺑـﺮﻧــﺎﻣـﻪ را‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫«‪wU“ XHO
XOKU “« ÁœUH‬‬
‫‪Ʊ‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ TITLE SHIFT‬ﻛﻨﺘﺮل از راه دور را ﻓـﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮي ﺷﻴﻔﺖ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﳕﺎﻳﺶ داده ﻣـﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫≤‪Æ‬‬
‫≥‪Æ‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ … † را ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪ On‬ﻓﺸـﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ دارﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ اي را ﻛﻪ ﭘﺨـﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ( ) PAUSE‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻜﺚ ﺗـﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪه و ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﺷﻴﻔﺖ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﳕﺎﻳﺶ داده ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Æ¥‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ از ﺳﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﱳ ﲤﺎﺷﺎي ﺑﺮﻧـﺎﻣﻪ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ( ) PLAY‬را دوﺑﺎره ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫«‪wU“ XHO
tH ¡«e‬‬
‫رﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺟﺎري را ﳕﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ را ﳕﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﲤﺎﺷﺎ‪.‬‬
‫زﻣﺎن ﭘﺨﺶ ﺟﺎري‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﻪ زﻧﺪه‪.‬‬
‫زﻣﺎن زﻧﺪه‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﻠﻪ زﻣﺎن ﺷﻴﻔﺖ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫‪w?U“ XHO
XOKU Í«d ÁœUH« œ—u —Ëœ Á«— “« ‰dM ÍU tLœ‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ) ( ‪ : PLAY‬ﭘـﺨﺶ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ʊ‬‬
‫≤‪Æ‬‬
‫( ‪ : SEARCH‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ )‪(X۱۲۸ ,X۳۲ ,X۱۶ ,X۸ ,X۴ ,X۲‬‬
‫≥‪ Æ‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫـﺎي)‬
‫‪ Æ¥‬دﻛﻤﻪ ) ( ‪ ,STOP‬دﻛﻤﻪ ) ( ‪ : SKIP‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن زﻧﺪه ﺑﺎز ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮدد‪.‬‬
‫‪ Ƶ‬دﻛﻤﻪ ) ( ‪ : SKIP‬ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ آﻏﺎز ﺷﻴﻔﺖ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺎز ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮدد‪.‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ) ( ‪ : PAUSE‬ﻣﻜﺚ در ﭘـﺨﺶ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن زﻧﺪه‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ‪۷۲ -‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺷﻴﻔﺖ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺗﻨﻬـﺎ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻲ در دﺳﺘﺮس اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ HDD‬اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮاي ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ دو ﺳﺎﻋـﺖ از اﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫اﮔﺮ ﺷﻴﻔﺖ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ روي ‪ On‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷـﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ,‬ﳕﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻣﻨﻮ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﺤﺘﻮا ﺑﭙﺮدازﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ﻟﻐﻮ ﺷﻴﻔﺖ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ دﻛـﻤﻪ ‪ TITLE SHIFT‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫{‪wU“ Íe— tUd U j‬‬
‫‪.۱‬‬
‫ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ آﻧﱳ وﺻﻞ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.۲‬‬
‫زﻣﺎن ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪه دﻳﺴﻚ را ﭼﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.۳‬‬
‫ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺑﻮدن ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ و زﻣﺎن را ﭼﻚ ﻛﻨـﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ )‪ (Setup-Clock Set‬ﻗـﺒﻞ از اﻗﺪام ﺑﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ رﻳﺰي زﻣﺎﻧﻲ‪ ,‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‪) .‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫‪ ۳۴‬ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ(‬
‫‪Ʊ‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗـﻮﻗ اﺳﺖ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ TIMER‬را ﻓﺸﺎر‬
‫دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫≤‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪ ,Scheduled List‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫـﺎي ▲ ▼ را ﻓﺸﺎر داده و ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ ‹ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫≥‪Æ‬‬
‫‪Æ¥‬‬
‫«‪qO‬‬
‫‪TIMER tLœ “« ÁœUH« U‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬را ﻓﺸﺎر داده و ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Add a list‬را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ رﻳﺰي زﻣﺎﻧﻲ را ﺗﻨـﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• اﻗﻼم ورودي را ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از دﻛﻤـﻪ ﻫﺎي ▲ ▼ ‹ و دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي‬
‫ﻋﺪدي ﺗﻜﻤﻴﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‹ ‪ :‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮرد ﻗﺒﻠﻲ‪/‬ﺑﻌﺪي ﻣﻲ رود‪.‬‬
‫… †‪ : ۹ - ۰ ,‬داري را ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : To‬رﺳﺎﻧﻪ اي را ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮاﻫﻴﺪ روي آن ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛـﻨﻴﺪ‪ DVD ,‬ﻳﺎ‬
‫‪ HDD‬را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : Source‬ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ورودي وﻳﺪﻳﻮ )‪ ,(AV2 ,AV1‬ﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺎل ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ را‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮاﻫﻴﺪ از روي آن ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ رﻳـﺰي زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪,‬‬
‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﳕﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : Date‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ رﻳـﺰي زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ اﺟﺎزه ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬
‫زﻣﺎن ﺿﺒﻂ را در ﻣﺤﺪوده ﻳﻚ ﻣﺎﻫﻪ ﺗﻨـﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬روزي را ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺧﻮاﻫﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ در آن اﳒﺎم ﺷﻮد‪ ,‬ﺗﻨـﻈﻴﻢ ﳕﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﻣﺎه‪/‬روز(‬
‫‪Every SUN‬‬
‫‪JAN 31‬‬
‫‪.....‬‬
‫‪JAN 30‬‬
‫‪Every SAT‬‬
‫‪JAN 29‬‬
‫‪MON-FRI‬‬
‫‪.....‬‬
‫‪MON-SAT‬‬
‫‪JAN 02‬‬
‫‪Every Day‬‬
‫‪JAN 01‬‬
‫• ‪ : Start/End Time‬زﻣﺎن ﺷﺮوع و ﭘﺎﻳﺎن ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﻧـﺎﻣﻪ رﻳﺰي زﻣﺎﻧﻲ را ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪∫©j{ XU® Mode‬‬
‫ ‪ :©nDFM j{® FR‬اﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨـﻪ را زﻣﺎﻧﻲ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮاﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ وﻳﺪﻳﻮ را ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر‬‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ , FR‬ﻣﻨﺎﺳـﺒﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر و ﺑﺮ اﺳﺎس زﻣﺎن ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪه روي‬
‫دﻳﺴﻚ و ﻣﺪت زﻣﺎن ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ رﻳﺰي ﺷﺪه ﺑﺮاي ﺿـﺒﻂ‪ ,‬ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬اﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻳﻜﻲ از ﺣﺎﻟﺘـﻬﺎي ‪,XP‬‬
‫‪ LP ,SP‬و ‪ EP‬را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪ :©ôU XOHO® XP‬اﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ را ﻫﻨﮕـﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ وﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ اﻫﻤﻴﺖ زﻳﺎدي دارد اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬‫ ‪ :©œ—«bU« XOHO® SP‬ﺑﺮاي ﺿﺒـﻂ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد اﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬‫ ‪ :©5UÄ XOHO® LP‬در ﻣﻮاردي ﻛﻪ زﻣـﺎن ﺿﺒﻂ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﺎﺷﺪ اﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬‫ ‪ :©Áb
bb9 XU® EP‬در ﻣﻮاردي ﻛﻪ زﻣـﺎن ﺿﺒﻂ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ ﺗﺮ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﺎﺷﺪ اﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴـﺪ‪.‬‬‫• ‪ : TITLE‬ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ زدن ﻧﺎم ﻋﻨـﻮان‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ (A) ed‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻋﻮض ﻛﺮدن ﻧﺎم ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻴﮕﺮدد‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺮاﺣﻞ ‪ ۴‬و ‪ ۵‬ﺑﺨﺶ "ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺎم )ﺑـﺮﭼﺴﺐ زﻧﻲ( ﻋﻨﺎوﻳﻦ" ﺻﻔﺤﺎت ‪ ۷۸-۷۷‬را اﳒﺎم دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪۷۳ -‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫‪Ƶ‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ از اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﻘﺎدﻳﺮ ﺗﻨﻈـﻴﻤﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﻫﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬را ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪ Save‬ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫روي ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺟﻠﻮ ﭘﺪﻳﺪار ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬اﻳﻦ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ رﻳﺰي زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﮔﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت ﺗﺎﳝﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺗﺪاﺧﻞ داﺷﺘـﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ;‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ اوﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪) .‬اﻳﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ‪ ۱‬ﻳﻜﺴﺎن اﺳﺖ( ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ اول اوﻟﻮﻳﺖ‬
‫دارد‪ .‬ﭘﺲ از اﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣـﻪ اول ﲤﺎم ﺷﺪ‪ ,‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ دوم آﻏﺎز ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺮوج ﺑﺪون ذﺧﻴﺮه ﻛﺮدن ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت ﻓﻌـﻠﻲ‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ) (‪ EXIT‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎزﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮي ﻗﺒﻠﻲ‬
‫اﮔﺮ ﳕﻲ ﺧﻮاﻫﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻄﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺑـﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ رﻳﺰي زﻣﺎﻧﻲ اﳒﺎم دﻫﻴﺪ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ RETURN‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪..‬‬
‫∂‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ﭘﺎﻳﺎن دادن ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت ﺿﺒـﻂ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ رﻳﺰي زﻣﺎﻧﻲ‪ ,‬دﺳﺘﮕﺎه را ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ رﻳﺰي زﻣﺎﻧﻲ در ﺻـﻮرت روﺷﻦ ﺑﻮدن دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﻛﺎر ﻧﺨﻮاﻫﺪ ﻛﺮد‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫زﻣﺎن ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ رﻳﺰي زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﳑﻜﻦ اﺳـﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ دﻳﺴﻚ و وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺗﺎﳝﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻔﺎوت‬
‫ﻼ‪ ,‬زﻣﺎن ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺘـﺪاﺧﻞ‪ ,‬ﻳﺎ وﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ در ﻣﺤﺪوده ‪ ۲‬دﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ از زﻣـﺎن‬
‫داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )ﻣﺜ ً‬
‫آﻏﺎز ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﻌﺪي ﲤﺎم ﺷﻮد‪(.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ‪ ۱۲‬ﺿﺒﻂ زﻣﺎﻧـﻲ اﳒﺎم دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫اﮔﺮ دﻳﺴﻚ ‪ HDD‬ﻓﻀﺎﻳـﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﺪاﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪,‬‬
‫‪HDD‬ﻓﻀﺎﻳﻲ ﺑـﺮاي ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﺪارد‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﺸﻤـﻚ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ زد‪ .‬اﻳﻦ ﺑﺪان ﻣﻔﻬﻮم اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ دﻳـﺴﻚ‬
‫‪Áb
ÍbM ÊU“ XdN g«dË‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻨﺪي ﺷﺪه از اﻳـﻦ دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﭘﻴﺮوي ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‪ ,‬ﻣﺮاﺣﻞ ‪ ۱‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ۲‬در ﻗﺴﻤـﺖ «اﳒﺎم ﺿﺒﻂ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ» ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ۷۳‬را دﻧﺒﺎل ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫≥‪Æ‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي … † را ﺟﻬﺖ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﻤﺎره ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻨﺪي ﺷﺪه ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮاﻫﻴﺪ وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻓـﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻮاردي را ﻛـﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮاﻫـﻴﺪ‪ ,‬وﻳﺮاﻳـﺶ ﻛﻨﻴـﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮاي آﮔﺎﻫـﻲ ﺑﻴﺸـﺘﺮ در‬
‫ﻣﻮرد اﻗﻼم ورودي ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ رﻳﺰي زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ "ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺑـﺮﻧــﺎﻣـﻪ رﻳـﺰي زﻣــﺎﻧـﻲ" ﻣـﺮاﺟــﻌـﻪ ﻛـﻨــﻴـﺪ‪) .‬ﺑـﻪ ﺻــﻔـﺤـﻪ ‪ ۸۴~۸۳‬ﻣــﺮاﺟـﻌـﻪ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ(‬
‫‪Æ¥‬‬
‫‪Ƶ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ ﺷـﺪه‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ از اﲤﺎم ﻛﺎر‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ) (‪ EXIT‬را ﻓﺸـﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ زﻣﺎن ﺑﻨﺪي ﺷﺪه ﻧﺎﭘﺪﻳـﺪ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫«‪Áb
Íb?M ÊU“ X?dN p? ÊœËe‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ اﻓﺰودن ﻳﻚ ورودي در ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺑـﻨﺪي ﺷﺪه از اﻳﻦ دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎ ﭘﻴﺮوي ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‪ ,‬ﻣﺮاﺣﻞ ‪ ۱‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ۲‬در ﻗﺴـﻤﺖ "اﳒﺎم ﺿﺒﻂ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ" ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ۷۳‬را دﻧﺒﺎل ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫≥‪Æ‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي … † را ﺟﻬﺖ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﻤﺎره ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻨﺪي ﺷﺪه ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ (A) ed‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻮاردي را ﻛﻪ ﻣـﻲ ﺧﻮاﻫﻴﺪ اﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛـﻨﻴﺪ‪ ,‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴـﻢ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺴـﺐ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺑﻴﺸﺘـﺮ در ﺧﺼﻮص اﻗﻼم و ﮔﺰﻳﻨـﻪ‬
‫ﻫﺎي ورودي ﺿﺒﻂ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ "اﳒﺎم ﺿﺒـﻂ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ" ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﺎت ‪ ۷۴-۷۳‬ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ(‬
‫‪Æ¥‬‬
‫‪Ƶ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ اﻓﺰوده ﺷـﺪه‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ از اﲤﺎم ﻛﺎر‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ) (‪ EXIT‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻـﻔﺤﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ زﻣﺎﻧﺒﻨﺪي ﺷﺪه ﻣﺤﻮ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ‪۷۴ -‬‬
‫‪Áb?
ÍbM ÊU“ X?dN p? ·c‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﺬف ﻳﻚ ورودي از ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻨـﺪي ﺷﺪه از اﻳﻦ دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﭘﻴﺮوي ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‪ ,‬ﻣﺮاﺣﻞ ‪ ۱‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ۲‬در ﻗﺴﻤـﺖ «اﳒﺎم ﺿﺒﻂ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ» ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ۷۳‬را دﻧﺒﺎل ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫≥‪Æ‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي … †را ﺟﻬﺖ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﻤﺎره ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻨﺪي ﺷﺪه ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮاﻫﻴﺪ ﺣﺬف ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ (B) e‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫـﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Æ¥‬‬
‫«‪qO‬‬
‫• ﺣﺎل ﭘﻴﺎم ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺣﺬف ﺑـﻪ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ اﻳﻦ ﺷﺮح ﳕﺎﻳﺶ داده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد "?‪."Do you want to delete‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪ , Yes‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي ‹ را ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳـﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻮرد اﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ از ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺣﺬف ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ƶ‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ از اﲤﺎم ﻛﺎر‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ) (‪ EXIT‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴـﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ زﻣﺎن ﺑﻨﺪي ﺷﺪه ﻧﺎﭘﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪U Áb
j{ XdN t Ëd‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫـﺎي ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪه را ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫«‪—“ «b‬‬
‫‪Ʊ‬‬
‫≤‪Æ‬‬
‫≥‪Æ‬‬
‫‪TIMER‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻮﻗ اﺳﺖ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ TIMER‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑـﺮاي اﻧــﺘـﺨـﺎب ‪ ,Recorded List‬دﻛــﻤـﻪ ﻫـﺎي … † را ﻓـﺸــﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳـﭙـﺲ‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ دﻛﻤﻪ ‹ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ از اﲤﺎم ﻛﺎر‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ) (‪ EXIT‬را ﻓﺸـﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ Recorded List‬ﻣﺤﻮ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫«‪U Áb
j{ XdN Á—U—œ wUö‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻓﻘﻴﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻋﺪم ﻣﻮﻓﻘﻴﺖ اﺟﺮاي ﺿـﺒﻂ ﺑﺎ وﻗﺖ ﻧﮕﻬﺪار از ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪه ﻫﺎي ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ را اﻋﻼم ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫≥ ‪ Æ۱-‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي … † را ﺟﻬﺖ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﻤﺎره ‪) Recorded List‬ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺷﺪه ﻫﺎ( ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬را ﻓـﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪U Áb
j{ XdN ·c‬‬
‫ﺣﺬف ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪه ﻫـﺎ‪.‬‬
‫≥ ‪ Æ۱-‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي … † را ﺟﻬﺖ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﻤﺎره ‪) Recorded List‬ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺷﺪه ﻫﺎ( ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮاﻫﻴﺪ ﺣﺬف ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ (A) ed‬را‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫‪Æ¥‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧـﺘﺨـﺎب ‪ ,Yes‬دﻛﻤـﻪ ﻫﺎي … † را ﻓﺸـﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙـﺲ دﻛﻤـﻪ ‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‹ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪۷۵ -‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫‪U Áb
j{ XdN Êœd „UÄ‬‬
‫ﲤﺎﻣﻲ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺘﻬﺎي ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪه ﻫـﺎ را ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎره ﭘﺎك ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫≥ ‪ Æ۱-‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ (B) e‬را ﻓـﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Æ¥‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪ ,Yes‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي … † را ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‹ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Áb
ÍbM ÊU“ XdN t Ëd‬‬
‫ﺑﺮو ﺑﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ زﻣﺎن ﺑﻨﺪي ﺷﺪه‬
‫≥ ‪ Æ۱-‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ “—‪ (C) œ‬را ﻓﺸـﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ‪۷۶ -‬‬
‫وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ‬
‫در اﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺘﻬﺎي اﺻﻠﻲ و ﭘﺎﻳﻪ وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ ﺷﺪه و ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺘﻬﺎي وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ زﻣﺎن ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﻚ دﻳﺴﻚ و ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺘﻬﺎي‬
‫وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ ﻛﻞ دﻳﺴﻚ ﺗـﻮﺿﻴﺢ داده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻄﻔًﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ ,‬ﻣﻮاردي ﻛـﻪ آﺳﻴﺐ دﻳﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺮﮔﺮداﻧﺪن ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ اﺻﻠﻲ ﺧﻮد ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫«‪qbF‬‬
‫‪©sËUM XdN® ÁœU g«dË‬‬
‫‪sËUM XdN gÄ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﺮدن ﻳﻚ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ از ﻓﻬﺮﺳـﺖ ﻋﻨﺎوﻳﻦ‪ ,‬ﻣﺮاﺣﻞ زﻳﺮ را دﻧﺒﺎل ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪tLœ “« ÁœUH« U‬‬
‫‪Ʊ‬‬
‫‪TITLE LIST‬‬
‫ﻫﻨـﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛـﻪ دﺳﺘﮕـﺎه در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗـﻮﻗ‪/‬ﭘﺨـﺶ اﺳﺖ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤـﻪ ‪TITLE LIST‬‬
‫را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫≤‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻋﻨﻮاﻧﻲ از ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻋﻨﺎوﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ آن ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ‪,‬‬
‫دﻛﻤـﻪ ﻫﺎي … † را ﻓـﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙـﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬ﻳـﺎ دﻛﻤـﻪ ‪ ( ) PLAY‬را‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ورودي )ﻋﻨﻮان( اﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺧﻮاﻫـﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫≥‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺘﻮﻗ ﻛﺮدن ﭘﺨﺶ ﻳﻚ ﻋﻨﻮان‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ( ) STOP‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻋﻨﺎوﻳﻦ ﺑـﺎز ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﮔﺸﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ê«uM? p ©Í—«cÖ V?Çd® ÂU dO?OG‬‬
‫ﻼ‪ ,‬وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ ﻋـﻨﻮان ﻳﻚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪه ﻣﺮاﺣﻞ زﻳﺮ را دﻧﺒﺎل ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺎم ﻳﻚ ورودي ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻋﻨﺎوﻳﻦ‪ ,‬ﻳﺎ ﻣﺜ ً‬
‫‪tLœ “« ÁœUH« U‬‬
‫‪Ʊ‬‬
‫≤‪Æ‬‬
‫≥‪Æ‬‬
‫‪TITLE LIST‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻮﻗ‪/‬ﭘﺨﺶ اﺳﺖ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ TITLE LIST‬را‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧـﺘﺨﺎب ﻳـﻜﻲ از ورودﻳﻬـﺎي ﻓﻬﺮﺳـﺖ ﻋﻨﺎوﻳـﻦ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﻳـﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻐـﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻧﺎم آن ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي … † را ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ (A) ed‬را‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪ ,Rename‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي … † را ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪OK‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ دﻛﻤﻪ √ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ Rename‬ﳕﺎﻳﺶ داده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪Æ¥‬‬
‫ﻛﺎراﻛﺘﺮﻫﺎي ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ را ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي ▲ ▼ √ ‪ œ‬اﻧﺘﺨﺎب‬
‫ﳕﻮده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪ed tLœ) VI t? XAÖd‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮد‪.‬‬
‫)‪ : ((A‬ﻣـﻜﺎن ﳕﺎ را ﻳﻚ ﻣـﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ‬
‫• ‪ : ((B) e tLœ) tKU‬ﻳﻚ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺧﺎﻟﻲ وارد ﳕﻮده و ﻣﻜﺎن ﳕﺎ را ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮد )ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤـﺖ راﺳﺖ(‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪Êœd „UÄ‬‬
‫ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ : ((C) œ—“ tLœ‬ﲤﺎم ﻛﺎراﻛﺘﺮﻫﺎي وارد ﺷﺪه را ﺣﺬف ﻣﻲ‬
‫• –‪ : ((D) w¬ tLœ) ÁdO‬ﻛـﺎراﻛﺘﺮﻫﺎي وارد ﺷﺪه را ﺛﺒﺖ و ذﺧﻴﺮه ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪۷۷ -‬‬
‫وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ‬
‫‪Ƶ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ذﺧﻴﺮه دﻛﻤـﻪ )‪ w¬ (D‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧـﺎم ﻋـﻨﻮان ﺗـﻐـﻴـﻴـﺮ ﻳﺎﻓـﺘـﻪ در ﻧـﺎم ﻋﻨـﻮان ورودي اﻧـﺘـﺨـﺎﺑﻲ ﳕـﺎﻳـﺶ داده‬
‫ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ê«uM? p ©Êœd? XE?U?® Êœd q?H‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﺮدن ﻳﻚ ورودي و ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈـﺖ از آن در ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ ﻫﺎي اﺗﻔﺎﻗﻲ اﻳﻦ دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎ را دﻧﺒﺎل ﻛـﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪tLœ “« ÁœUH« U‬‬
‫‪Ʊ‬‬
‫≤‪Æ‬‬
‫‪TITLE LIST‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻮﻗ‪/‬ﭘﺨﺶ اﺳﺖ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ TITLE LIST‬را‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫دﻛـﻤـﻪ ﻫـﺎي … † را ﺟـﻬـﺖ اﻧـﺘﺨـﺎب آن ورودي از ﻓـﻬـﺮﺳـﺖ ﻋـﻨـﺎوﻳـﻦ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ از آن ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MARKER‬را‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺗﻴﻚ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﻮد‪ .‬ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻋﻨﺎوﻳﻦ اﺿﺎﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ اﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ را ﺗﻜﺮار ﻛﻨـﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• اﮔﺮ ﳕﻲ ﺧﻮاﻫﻴﺪ ﻳﻜﻲ از ورودي ﻫﺎي ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﮔﺬاري ﺷﺪه را ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ,‬ﻛﺎﻓﻲ اﺳﺖ آن ورودي را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﺮده و ‪ MARKER‬را ﻓﺸﺎر‬
‫دﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب آﻧﺮا ﻟﻐﻮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ,‬اﻳﻦ دﻛﻤﻪ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻴﻚ ﻣﺤﻮ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫≥‪ Æ‬ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ed‬‬
‫)‪ (A‬را ﻓـﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮي وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ ﳕﺎﻳﺶ داده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪Æ¥‬‬
‫‪Ƶ‬‬
‫∂‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧـﺘﺨﺎب ‪ ,Protection‬دﻛﻤـﻪ ﻫﺎي … † را ﻓﺸـﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤـﻪ‬
‫‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ دﻛﻤﻪ √ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ √ ‪ œ‬را ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪ On‬ﻓﺸـﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬را ﻓﺸﺎر‬
‫دﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﳕﺎد ﻛﻠﻴﺪ در ﭘﻨﺠﺮه اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ورودي ﻣـﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﺑﻪ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻗﻔﻞ‬
‫← (‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪) .‬‬
‫اﮔﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮاﻫﻴﺪ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ را ﻟـﻐﻮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ Off ,‬را در ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ‪ ۵‬اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﺮده و ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﳕﺎد ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺑﺎز ﺗـﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪) .‬‬
‫■‬
‫←‬
‫(‬
‫اﮔﺮ "‪ "Select All‬را در ﻣﻨﻮي وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛـﻨﻴﺪ‪ ,‬ﲤﺎم ﻋﻨﺎوﻳﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﮔﺬاري ﺧﻮاﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ ‪۷۸ -‬‬
‫‪Ê«uM p ·c‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ﺣﺬف ﺑﺨﺸﻲ از ﻳﻚ ورودي در ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻋـﻨﺎوﻳﻦ‪ ,‬ﻣﺮاﺣﻞ زﻳﺮ را دﻧﺒﺎل ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪tLœ “« ÁœUH« U‬‬
‫≤‪Æ‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻮﻗ‪/‬ﭘﺨﺶ اﺳﺖ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ TITLE LIST‬را‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫دﻛـﻤـﻪ ﻫـﺎي … † را ﺟـﻬـﺖ اﻧـﺘـﺨـﺎب آن ورودي از ﻓـﻬـﺮﺳـﺖ ﻋـﻨـﺎوﻳـﻦ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻳـﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺬف آن ﻫـﺴﺘﻴـﺪ ﻓﺸـﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛـﻤﻪ ‪ MARKER‬را ﻓﺸـﺎر‬
‫دﻫﻴﺪ ﺗـﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺗﻴﻚ ﻇﺎﻫـﺮ ﺷﻮد‪ .‬ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨـﺎب ﻋﻨﺎوﻳﻦ اﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﺟـﻬﺖ‬
‫ﺣﺬف اﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ را ﺗﻜﺮار ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫«‪qbF‬‬
‫‪Ʊ‬‬
‫‪TITLE LIST‬‬
‫• اﮔﺮ ﳕﻲ ﺧﻮاﻫﻴﺪ ﻳﻜﻲ از ورودي ﻫﺎي ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﮔﺬاري ﺷﺪه را ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ,‬ﻛﺎﻓﻲ اﺳﺖ آن ورودي را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﺮده و ‪ MARKER‬را ﻓﺸﺎر‬
‫دﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب آﻧﺮا ﻟﻐﻮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ,‬اﻳﻦ دﻛﻤﻪ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻴﻚ ﻣﺤﻮ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫≥‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ (A) ed‬را ﻓـﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮي وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ ﳕﺎﻳﺶ داده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪Æ¥‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪ ,Delete‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي … † را ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ √ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﭘﻴﺎم ﳑﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮع دﻳﺴﻚ ﻣﺘﻔﺎوت ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻚ ﭘﻴﺎم ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﺧﻮاﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﺮد‪.‬‬
‫‪) DVD-RAM ,HDD‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‪) DVD-RW ,(VR‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‪ : (VR‬اﮔـﺮ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﺑـﺎﺷﺪ‪ ,‬ﭘﻴﺎم?‪"Do you want to delete‬‬
‫")‪ (Related playlists may be deleted.‬ﳕﺎﻳﺶ داده ﻣـﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪) DVD-RW‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‪ : ±R/+RW/ (VR‬اﮔﺮ ﻓﻬـﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ ,‬ﭘـﻴﺎم "?‪ "Do you want to delete‬ﳕﺎﻳﺶ داده ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪Ƶ‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ √ ‪ œ‬را ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪ Yes‬ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳـﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﳕﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ورودي ﻣﺤﺎﻓـﻈﺖ ﺷﺪه را ﺣﺬف ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬اﮔﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮاﻫﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ورودي ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺷﺪه را‬
‫ﺣﺬف ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ,‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ "‪ "Off‬را در ﻣﻨﻮي ‪ Title Protection‬اﻧﺘـﺨﺎب ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ۷۸‬ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ(‬
‫■‬
‫زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Disc Protection‬روي ‪ Protected‬ﺗﻨﻈـﻴﻢ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ,‬اﻣﻜﺎن ﺣﺬف ﻋﻨﺎوﻳﻦ وﺟﻮد ﻧﺨﻮاﻫﺪ داﺷﺖ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ۹۲‬ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ(‬
‫■‬
‫زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ورودي از ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻋﻨـﺎوﻳﻦ ﭘﺎك ﺷﺪ‪ ,‬اﻣﻜﺎن ﺑﺎزﻳﺎﺑﻲ آن وﺟﻮد ﻧﺨﻮاﻫﺪ داﺷﺖ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ‪ DVD±RW//±R‬ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺷـﻮد‪ ,‬اﻣﻜﺎن ﺣﺬف آن وﺟﻮد ﻧﺨﻮاﻫﺪ داﺷﺖ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫در ﻣﻮرد ‪ ,DVD±R‬ﻋﻨﺎوﻳﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ از ﻣﻨﻮ ﺣﺬف ﺧـﻮاﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ ,‬اﻣﺎ ﻋﻨﺎوﻳﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻓﻴﺰﻳﻜﻲ روي دﻳﺴﻚ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ‬
‫ﺧﻮاﻫﻨﺪ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫اﮔﺮ "‪ "Select All‬را در ﻣﻨﻮي وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛـﻨﻴﺪ‪ ,‬ﲤﺎم ﻋﻨﺎوﻳﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﮔﺬاري ﺧﻮاﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪۷۹ -‬‬
‫وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ‬
‫‪©tJ® Ê«uM p “« g Êb
tJ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ﺗﻜﻪ ﺷﺪن ﺑﺨﺶ از ﻳﻚ ورودي در ﻓﻬﺮﺳـﺖ ﻋﻨﺎوﻳﻦ‪ ,‬ﻣﺮاﺣﻞ زﻳﺮ را دﻧﺒﺎل ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪tLœ “« ÁœUH« U‬‬
‫‪Ʊ‬‬
‫≤‪Æ‬‬
‫‪TITLE LIST‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻮﻗ‪/‬ﭘﺨﺶ اﺳﺖ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ TITLE LIST‬را‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻳﻜﻲ از ورودﻳﻬﺎي ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻋﻨﺎوﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻜﻪ ﻛﺮدن‬
‫آن ﻫـﺴـﺘـﻴـﺪ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤـﻪ ﻫـﺎي … † را ﻓـﺸـﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳـﭙـﺲ دﻛـﻤﻪ ?‪ (A) e?d‬را‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮي ‪ Edit‬ﳕﺎﻳﺶ داده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫≥‪Æ‬‬
‫‪Æ¥‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪ ,Splitt‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي … † را ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ √ ‪ œ‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي رﻓﱳ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺘـﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮاﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﻜﻪ ﺷﺪن از آﳒﺎ اﳒﺎم ﺷﻮد‬
‫((را ﻓـﺸـﺎر‬
‫دﻛـﻤـﻪ ﻫـﺎي ﻣـﺮﺑـﻮط ﺑـﻪ ﭘـﺨـﺶ )‪) SEARCH ,( ) PLAY‬‬
‫داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫اﮔـﺮ ﻣـﻮﻗـﻌـﻴـﺘـﻲ ﺑـﺮاي ﺗـﻜـﻪ ﺷـﺪن در ﻧـﻈـﺮ ﻧـﺪارﻳـﺪ‪ ,‬دﻛـﻤـﻪ ‪ RETURN‬را‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻟﻐﻮ ﺷﻮد‪ .‬ﺑﺮاي رﻓﱳ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺗﻜﻪ ﺷﺪن از‬
‫دﻛﻤـﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺮﺑـﻮط ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨـﺶ اﺳﺘﻔـﺎده ﻛﺮده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙـﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬را ﻓـﺸﺎر‬
‫دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ƶ‬‬
‫∂‪Æ‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬را ﻓﺸﺎر داده و ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Split‬را اﻧـﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ √ ‪ œ‬را ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب‬
‫‪ Yes‬ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ OK‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋ ـ ــﻨـ ــﻮان ﺗ ـ ــﻜ ـ ــﻪ ﺷـ ــﺪه ﺑ ـ ــﻪ دو‬
‫ﻋ ـ ــﻨـ ـ ــﻮان ﺗ ـ ــﺒ ـ ــﺪﻳ ـ ــﻞ ﺷـ ـ ــﺪه‪ ,‬و‬
‫ﻋﻨﺎوﻳﻦ ﺑﻌﺪي ﻳﻚ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻋﻘﺐ ﺑﺮده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪©wze? ·c® Ê«uM? p “« wA? ·c‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ﺣﺬف ﺑﺨﺸﻲ از ﻳﻚ ورودي در ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻋـﻨﺎوﻳﻦ‪ ,‬ﻣﺮاﺣﻞ زﻳﺮ را دﻧﺒﺎل ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪tLœ “« ÁœUH« U‬‬
‫‪Ʊ‬‬
‫≤‪Æ‬‬
‫‪TITLE LIST‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻮﻗ‪/‬ﭘﺨﺶ اﺳﺖ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ TITLE LIST‬را‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻳﻜﻲ از ورودﻳﻬﺎي ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻋﻨﺎوﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ‬
‫آن ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي ة را ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ (A) ed‬را ﻓﺸﺎر‬
‫دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪) Edit Title List‬وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻋـﻨﺎوﻳﻦ( ﳕﺎﻳﺶ داده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫≥‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺑــﺮاي اﻧـﺘــﺨــﺎب ‪ ,Partial Delete‬دﻛـﻤــﻪ ﻫــﺎي … † را ﻓـﺸــﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳــﭙـﺲ‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ دﻛﻤﻪ √ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫـﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ ‪۸۰ -‬‬
‫)اﻟﻮﺿـﻊ ‪(VR‬‬
‫‪Æ¥‬‬
‫در ﻧﻘﻄﻪ آﻏﺎز دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳـﺮ و زﻣﺎن ﻧﻘﻄـﻪ آﻏﺎز در ﺑﺨﺶ ﭘـﻨﺠﺮه ﺣﺬف ﻧـﻘﻄﻪ آﻏﺎز ﳕـﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫داده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻧﻘﺎط آﻏﺎز و ﭘﺎﻳﺎن ﺑﺨﺸﻲ را ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮاﻫﻴﺪ ﺣﺬف ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬
‫از دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﳕـﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﭘﺨﺶ ‪:‬‬
‫)‪) SEARCH ,( ) PAUSE ,( ) PLAY‬‬
‫در ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎن دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫـﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ و زﻣﺎن ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎن در ﺑﺨﺶ ﭘﻨﺠﺮه ﺣﺬف ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎن ﳕﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫داده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫∂‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪ ,Delete‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي √ ‪ œ‬را ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬را‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫∑‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺑـﺮاي اﻧﺘـﺨـﺎب ‪ ,Yes‬دﻛﻤـﻪ ﻫﺎي √ ‪ œ‬را ﻓـﺸـﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙـﺲ دﻛـﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬را‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺨﺶ اﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﺣﺬف ﺷـﺪه اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫∏‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪ ,Return‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي √ ‪ œ‬را ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬را‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺧﺎﲤﻪ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬
‫«‪qbF‬‬
‫‪Ƶ‬‬
‫((‬
‫■‬
‫ﻃﻮل ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮاﻫﻴﺪ ﺣﺬف ﻛﻨﻴـﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ‪ ۵‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎن ﳕﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ زودﺗﺮ از ﻧﻘـﻄﻪ ﺷﺮوع ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫■‬
‫اﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﺶ اﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﺣﺎوي ﻳﻚ ﻋﻜـﺲ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ,‬اﻣﻜﺎن ﺣﺬف آن وﺟﻮد ﻧﺨﻮاﻫﺪ داﺷﺖ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ از اﲤﺎم ﻛﺎر‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ) (‪ EXIT‬را ﻓﺸـﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ Title List‬ﻣﺤﻮ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫«‪©sËUM XdN® Í“U Vd XOKU “« ÁœUH‬‬
‫اﮔﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮاﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ را در ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻋـﻨﺎوﻳﻦ ﻋﻮض ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ʊ‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻨﻮي ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﳕﺎﻳﺶ داده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ (B) e‬را ﺑﺮاي‬
‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪ Sort‬ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫≤‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺟﻬـﺖ اﻧﺘـﺨﺎب ﮔﺰﻳـﻨﻪ دﳋﻮاه‪ ,‬دﻛـﻤﻪ ﻫـﺎي … † را ﻓﺸﺎر داده و ﺳـﭙﺲ‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ √ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : Date‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺗـﺎرﻳﺦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﻨﺎوﻳﻦ‬
‫• ‪ : Name‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴـﺐ ﺣﺮوف اﻟﻔﺒﺎ‬
‫• ‪ : Length‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻃـﻮل ﻋﻨﻮان ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪه‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : Channel lnfo‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴـﺐ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻛﺎﻧﺎل‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ‪ ,‬ﻧﺎم‪ ,‬ﻃﻮل‪ ,‬اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻛﺎﻧﺎل ﻣﺮﺗﺐ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ از ورود دوﺑﺎره ﺑﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻋـﻨﺎوﻳﻦ‪ ,‬ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﺷﺪه ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻛﭙﻲ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪۸۱ -‬‬
‫وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ‬
‫‪Navigation ÍuM‬‬
‫‪wU“ Xd‬‬
‫)اﻟﻮﺿـﻊ ‪(VR‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از اﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ را از ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻋﻨﺎوﻳﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺼﻮرت دﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺑﻪ دﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪tLœ “« ÁœUH« U‬‬
‫‪TITLE LIST‬‬
‫‪Ʊ‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻮﻗ‪/‬ﭘﺨﺶ اﺳﺖ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ TITLE LIST‬را‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫≤‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻋﻨﻮاﻧﻲ از ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻋﻨﺎوﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ آن ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ‪,‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي … † را ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳـﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ “—‪ (C) œ‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫≥‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘـﺨﺎب ‪ ,Time Navigation‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي … † را ﻓﺸـﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ دﻛﻤﻪ √ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫـﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Æ¥‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي رد ﻛﺮدن ﻳﻚ دﻗﻴﻘﻪ در ﻫﺮ ﺑﺎر و ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ در ﺻﺤﻨﻪ دﳋﻮاه‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻫـﺎي √ ‪œ‬را ﻓﺸـﺎر دﻫﻴـﺪ‪ ,‬ﺳـﭙﺲ دﻛـﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬ﻳـﺎ دﻛـﻤﻪ‪ ( ) PLAY‬را ﻓـﺸﺎر‬
‫دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫اﮔﺮ ﻋﻨﻮان ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪه اﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﻛﻮﺗﺎه ﺗﺮ از ‪ ۱‬دﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ,‬ﻣﻜﺎن‬
‫ﳕﺎ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻧﺨﻮاﻫﺪ ﻛﺮد‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﻋﻤـﻠﻜـﺮد ‪ Navigation‬ﺷﺎﻳﺪ در دﻳـﺴﻜﻬـﺎﻳﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﺑﺎ اﻳﻦ دﺳـﺘﮕﺎه ﺿـﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺪه اﻧﺪ‪ ,‬ﻛﺎر ﻧﻜﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﻳـﻚ ﻋـﻨـﻮان وﻳـﺮاﻳـﺶ ﺷـﺪه ﺷـﺎﻳـﺪ زﻣـﺎن دﻗـﻴـﻖ ﺟـﺴـﺘـﺠـﻮ را ﻧﺸـﺎن‬
‫ﻧﺪﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪U tM 5 —œ Xd‬‬
‫)اﻟﻮﺿـﻊ ‪(VR‬‬
‫اﮔـﺮ ﻋﻨـﻮاﻧﻲ از ﻋـﻼﻣﺖ ﮔـﺬارﻫﺎ ﺗـﺸﻜـﻴﻞ ﺷـﺪه ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ )ﺑﻪ ﺻـﻔﺤـﻪ ‪ ۵۳‬ﻣﺮاﺟـﻌﻪ ﻛـﻨﻴـﺪ(‪ ,‬ﺧﻮاﻫـﻴﺪ ﺗـﻮاﻧﺴـﺖ ﺑﺎ اﺳـﺘﻔـﺎده از ‪Scene‬‬
‫‪ Navigation‬در آن ﺑﻪ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺑﭙﺮدازﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪tLœ “« ÁœUH« U‬‬
‫‪TITLE LIST‬‬
‫‪Ʊ‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻮﻗ‪/‬ﭘﺨﺶ اﺳﺖ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ TITLE LIST‬را‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫≤‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻋﻨﻮاﻧﻲ از ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻋﻨﺎوﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ آن ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ‪,‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي … † را ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳـﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ “—‪ (C) œ‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫≥‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪ Scene Navigation‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي … † را ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ دﻛﻤﻪ √ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫـﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Æ¥‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺻﺤﻨﻪ دﳋﻮاه دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي √ ‪ † … œ‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ دﻛـﻤﻪ ‪ ( ) PLAY‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫■‬
‫ﮔﺮ ﻋـﻨﻮان اﻧـﺘﺨـﺎﺑﻲ داراي ﻋﻼﻣـﺖ ﻧﺒـﺎﺷﺪ‪ Scene Navigation ,‬ﻛـﺎر‬
‫ﻧﺨﻮاﻫﺪ ﻛﺮد‪.‬‬
‫وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ ‪۸۲ -‬‬
‫«‪«u »U‬‬
‫‪Ʊ‬‬
‫≤‪Æ‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ (B) e‬را ﺑﺮاي اﻧـﺘﺨﺎب ‪ Contents‬ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﺤﺘﻮاي ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮاﻫﻴﺪ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي … † را‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ ‹ را ﻓﺸـﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫«‪qbF‬‬
‫■‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﺎر ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﻛﺮد ﻛﻪ دﻳﺴﻚ داراي ﻣﺤﺘﻮاي‬
‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪©gÄ XdN® tdAOÄ g«dË‬‬
‫«‪gÄ XdN œU‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻳﺠﺎد ﻳﻚ ورودي ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺟـﺪﻳﺪ از ﻳﻚ ﻋﻨﻮان ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪه‪ ,‬ﻣﺮاﺣﻞ زﻳﺮ را دﻧﺒﺎل ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪tLœ “« ÁœUH« U‬‬
‫)اﻟﻮﺿـﻊ ‪(VR‬‬
‫‪TITLE LIST‬‬
‫‪Ʊ‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻮﻗ‪/‬ﭘﺨﺶ اﺳﺖ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ TITLE LIST‬را‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫≤‪Æ‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ (A) ed‬را ﻓﺸـﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮي وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ ﳕﺎﻳﺶ داده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫≥‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪ ,New Playlist‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي … † را ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ دﻛﻤﻪ ‹ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ Make Playlist‬ﳕﺎﻳﺶ داده ﻣﻲ ﺷـﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪Æ¥‬‬
‫در ﻧﻘﻄﻪ آﻏﺎز دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ و زﻣﺎن ﻧﻘﻄﻪ آﻏﺎز در ﭘـﻨﺠﺮه ‪ Start‬ﳕﺎﻳﺶ داده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻴﻠﻪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب زرد رﻧﮓ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﻣﻮرد اﻧـﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻧﻘـﻄﻪ آﻏـﺎز ﺑﺨـﺸﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧـﻮاﻫﻴﺪ از آن ﻳـﻚ ﺻﺤـﻨﻪ ﺟـﺪﻳﺪ درﺳـﺖ‬
‫ﻛـﻨــﻴـﺪ را ﺑــﺎ اﺳـﺘــﻔـﺎده از دﻛــﻤـﻪ ﻫــﺎي ﻣـﺮﺑــﻮط ﺑـﻪ ﭘــﺨـﺶ )‪,( ) PLAY‬‬
‫(( اﻧﺘـﺨﺎب ﳕـﺎﻳﻴـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫(‪) SEARCH ,‬‬
‫‪) SKIIP‬‬
‫‪Ƶ‬‬
‫در ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎن دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫـﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ و زﻣﺎن ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎن در ﭘـﻨﺠﺮه ‪ End‬ﳕﺎﻳﺶ داده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻴﻠﻪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب زرد رﻧﮓ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﮔـﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Make‬ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫∂‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪ ,Make‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي √ ‪ œ‬را ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬را‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮاي اﻳﺠﺎد ﻳﻚ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘـﺨﺶ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺻﻔﺤـﻪ ‪) Make Scene‬اﻳﺠﺎد ﺻﺤﻨﻪ( ﺟـﺪﻳﺪ ﳕﺎﻳﺶ داده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻳـﺠﺎد ﻳـﻚ ﺻﺤﻨـﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ در ﻓـﻬﺮﺳـﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ,‬ﮔـﺎﻣﻬـﺎي ‪ ۴‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ۶‬را‬
‫ﺗﻜﺮار ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻌـﻠﻲ اﻓﺰوده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ دز ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ Edit Playlist‬ﲤﺎﻣﻲ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ را ﭼﻚ ﻛﺮده‬
‫و ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﳕﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ۸۵‬ﻣﺮاﺟـﻌﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ(‬
‫• ﻟﺼﻨﻊ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪة‬
‫ﺮر اﳋﻄﻮات ‪ ۶ - ۱‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ أﻧﻚ ﺻﻨﻊ ﻻﺋـﺤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪة‬
‫ﻛ ّ‬
‫∑‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪ ,Return‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي‹ را ﻓﺸـﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺧﺎﲤﻪ ﻳﺎﺑـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ‪ ۹۹‬ﻋﻨـﻮان ورودي ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ اﻳﺠﺎد ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﳕﺎﻳﺶ در آﻣﺪه‪ ,‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﺑﺴـﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮع دﻳﺴﻚ ﺗﻔﺎوﺗﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪۸۳ -‬‬
‫وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ‬
‫‪gÄ XdN —œ œuu ÍUNœË—Ë gÄ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ﭘﺨﺶ ورودي ﻫﺎي ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣـﺮاﺣﻞ زﻳﺮ را دﻧﺒﺎل ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪tLœ “« ÁœUH« U‬‬
‫‪Ʊ‬‬
‫≤‪Æ‬‬
‫≥‪Æ‬‬
‫)اﻟﻮﺿـﻊ ‪(VR‬‬
‫‪PLAY LIST‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻮﻗ‪/‬ﭘﺨﺶ اﺳﺖ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ PLAY LIST‬را‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑـﺮاي اﻧﺘـﺨﺎب ﻗـﻬـﺮﺳﺖ ﭘـﺨـﺸﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﻣﺎﻳـﻞ ﺑـﻪ ﭘﺨـﺶ آن ﻫـﺴﺘـﻴﺪ‪ ,‬دﻛـﻤـﻪ‬
‫ﻫـﺎي ة را ﻓــﺸـﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳـﭙـﺲ دﻛــﻤـﻪ ‪ OK‬ﻳـﺎ دﻛـﻤــﻪ ‪ ( ) PLAY‬را ﻓـﺸـﺎر‬
‫دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺘﻮﻗ ﺳﺎﺧـﱳ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ( ) STOP‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ Playlist‬ﺑﺎز ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮدد‪.‬‬
‫‪g?Ä XdN —œ ÍœË—Ë p? ÂU dOO?G‬‬
‫)اﻟﻮﺿـﻊ ‪(VR‬‬
‫ـﻼ‪ ,‬وﻳﺮاﻳـﺶ ﻧﺎم ﻳﻚ ورودي در ﻓـﻬﺮﺳـﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣـﺮاﺣﻞ زﻳـﺮ را دﻧﺒﺎل‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ﺗـﻐﻴـﻴﺮ ﻧﺎم ﻳـﻚ ورودي در ﻓﻬـﺮﺳﺖ ﻋﻨـﺎوﻳﻦ‪ ,‬ﻣﺜ ً‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪tLœ “« ÁœUH« U‬‬
‫‪Ʊ‬‬
‫≤‪Æ‬‬
‫‪PLAY LIST‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻮﻗ‪/‬ﭘﺨﺶ اﺳﺖ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ PLAY LIST‬را‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻋﻨﻮاﻧﻲ از ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ دادن ﻧﺎم آن‬
‫ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي … † را ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬و ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ (A) ed‬را ﻓﺸﺎر‬
‫دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮي ‪ Edit‬ﳕﺎﻳﺶ داده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫≥‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪ ,Rename‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي ▲ ▼ را ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪OK‬‬
‫‪Æ¥‬‬
‫ﻛﺎراﻛﺘﺮﻫﺎي ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ را ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي‹ … † اﻧﺘﺨﺎب‬
‫ﳕﻮده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙـﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴـﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺎ دﻛﻤﻪ ) را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤـﻪ ‪ Rename‬ﳕﺎﻳﺶ داده ﻣﻲ ﺷـﻮد‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : ((A) ed? tLœ) V?I t XA?Öd‬ﻣﻜـﺎن ﳕﺎ را ﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﻗـﻌﻴﺖ ﺑـﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮد‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : ((B) e tLœ) tKU‬ﻳﻚ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺧﺎﻟﻲ وارد ﳕﻮده و ﻣﻜﺎن ﳕﺎ را ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮد )ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤـﺖ راﺳﺖ(‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : ((C) œ—“ tLœ) Êœd? „UÄ‬ﲤـﺎم ﻛﺎراﻛﺘﺮﻫـﺎي وارد ﺷﺪه را ﺣﺬف ﻣـﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• –‪ : ((D) w¬ tLœ) Ád?O‬ﻛـﺎراﻛﺘﺮﻫـﺎي وارد ﺷﺪه را ﺛﺒﺖ و ذﺧـﻴﺮه ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ƶ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ذﺧﻴﺮه دﻛﻤـﻪ )‪ w¬ (D‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺎم ﻋﻨﻮان ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ در ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮان اﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ از ورودي ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﳕﺎﻳﺶ داده ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬
‫وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ ‪۸۴ -‬‬
‫‪g?Ä XdN Í«d? tM p? g«dË‬‬
‫)اﻟﻮﺿـﻊ ‪(VR‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻳﻚ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘـﺨﺶ‪ ,‬ﻣﺮاﺣﻞ زﻳﺮ را دﻧﺒﺎل ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪tLœ “« ÁœUH« U‬‬
‫≤‪Æ‬‬
‫«‪qbF‬‬
‫‪Ʊ‬‬
‫‪PLAY LIST‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻮﻗ‪/‬ﭘﺨﺶ اﺳﺖ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ‪ PLAY LIST‬را‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧـﺘﺨﺎب ﻋﻨـﻮاﻧﻲ از ﻓﻬـﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛـﻪ ﻣﺎﻳﻞ ﺑـﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴـﺮ دادن ﻧﺎم‬
‫آن ﻫـﺴـﺘﻴـﺪ‪ ,‬دﻛـﻤـﻪ ﻫﺎي ة را ﻓـﺸـﺎر داده‪ ,‬و ﺳـﭙﺲ دﻛـﻤـﻪ ?‪ (A) ed‬را‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮي ‪ Edit‬ﳕﺎﻳﺶ داده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫≥‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪ ,Edit Playlist‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي ▲ ▼ را ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ دﻛﻤﻪ ‹ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤـﻪ ‪ Edit Scene‬ﳕﺎﻳﺶ داده ﻣﻲ ﺷـﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪wU« tM p gÄ‬‬
‫‪Æ¥‬‬
‫اﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺻـﺤﻨﻪ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮاي ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ,‬دﻛـﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي ▲ ▼ ‹ را ﻓﺸﺎر داده و ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤـﻪ ‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ ‪ ( ) PLAY‬را‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫• ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺘﻮﻗ ﻛﺮدن ﭘـﺨﺶ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ( ) STOP‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫«‪©tM? Êœd se~?U® tM? p Õö‬‬
‫ﺟﻬـﺖ ﺗﻨـﻈﻴﻢ‪ ,‬ﻣـﺮاﺣﻞ ‪ ۱‬ﺗـﺎ ‪.۳‬‬
‫‪ Æ۱- ¥‬ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺻﺤﻨﻪ اي ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ اﺻـﻼح آن ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي‬
‫▲ ▼ ‹ را ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤـﻪ —‪ (A) e‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ اﺻﻼح ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﳕﺎﻳﺶ داده ﻣﻲ ﺷـﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪Ƶ‬‬
‫در ﻧﻘﻄﻪ آﻏـﺎز ﺻﺤﻨﻪ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬را ﻓﺸـﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ و زﻣـﺎن ﻧﻘﻄﻪ آﻏﺎز در ﭘﻨﺠـﺮه ‪ Start‬ﳕﺎﻳﺶ داده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫• ﻧﻘﻄﻪ آﻏﺎز ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﺎن ﺑﺨﺶ ﻣﻮرد ﻧـﻈﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ اﺻﻼح را ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬
‫(‪,‬‬
‫از دﻛﻤـﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺮﺑـﻮط ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨـﺶ‪) SKIIP) ,( ) PLAY) ,‬‬
‫(( اﻧﺘﺨـﺎب ﳕﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪)SEARCH‬‬
‫∂‪Æ‬‬
‫در ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﭘـﺎﻳﺎن ﺻﺤﻨﻪ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬را ﻓـﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ و زﻣـﺎن ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎن در ﭘﻨﺠـﺮه ‪ End‬ﳕﺎﻳﺶ داده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫∑‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب‪ ,Change‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي ‹ را ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ‪OK‬‬
‫را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺻـﺤـﻨــﻪ اي ﻛـﻪ ﻣـﺎﻳـﻞ ﺑــﻪ ﺗـﻐـﻴـﻴــﺮ دادن آن ﺑـﻮدﻳـﺪ ﺑـﺎ ﺑــﺨـﺶ اﻧـﺘـﺨــﺎﺑـﻲ‬
‫ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪۸۵ -‬‬
‫وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ‬
‫‪©tM p XOFu Êœ«œ dOOG® tM p Êœd UU‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‪ ,‬ﻣﺮاﺣﻞ ‪ ۱‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ۳‬در ﺻﻔـﺤﻪ ‪ ۸۵‬را دﻧﺒﺎل ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Æ۱- ¥‬ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺻﺤﻨﻪ اي ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﻛﺮدن )ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ دادن ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ(‬
‫آن ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي ▲ ▼ ‹ را ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ (B) e‬را‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻚ ﭘـﻨﺠـﺮه زرد رﻧﮓ ﺑـﺮاي اﻧﺘـﺨﺎب در ﺻﺤـﻨﻪ اي ﻛـﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧـﻮاﻫﻴـﺪ‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﳕﺎﻳﺶ داده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪Ƶ‬‬
‫ﺑـﺮاي اﻧـﺘـﺨﺎب ﻣـﻮﻗـﻌـﻴـﺘـﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣـﻲ ﺧـﻮاﻫـﻴـﺪ ﺻـﺤﻨـﻪ اﻧـﺘـﺨـﺎﺑـﻲ را ﺑﻪ آن‬
‫ﺑـﺒـﺮﻳﺪ‪ ,‬دﻛـﻤـﻪ ﻫـﺎي ▲ ▼ ‹ را ﻓﺸـﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳـﭙـﺲ دﻛﻤـﻪ ‪ OK‬را ﻓـﺸـﺎر‬
‫دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﳕﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ را ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺑﻌﺪي ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ,‬ﭼﻮن ﺻﺤﻨﻪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ از آن‬
‫ﻗﺮار داده ﺷﻮد‪ ,‬و اﻳﻨﻜﺎر ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑـﻪ اﻗﺪام ﺧﺎﺻﻲ ﻧﺪارد‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﳕﺎﻳﺶ در آﻣﺪه‪ ,‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﺑﺴـﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮع دﻳﺴﻚ ﺗﻔﺎوﺗﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫≈«{‪t?M p? Êœd t?U‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‪ ,‬ﻣﺮاﺣﻞ ‪ ۱‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ۳‬در ﺻﻔـﺤﻪ ‪ ۸۵‬را دﻧﺒﺎل ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Æ۱- ¥‬دﻛــﻤـﻪ ﻫــﺎي ▲ ▼ ‹ را ﺟـﻬــﺖ اﻧــﺘـﺨــﺎب ﺻــﺤـﻨــﻪ اي ﻛـﻪ ﻣــﻲ ﺧــﻮاﻫـﻴــﺪ‬
‫ﺻﺤﻨﻪ اي ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ از آن درج ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ “—‪(C) œ‬‬
‫را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ Add Scene‬ﳕﺎﻳﺶ داده ﻣﻲ ﺷـﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪Ƶ‬‬
‫در ﻧﻘﻄﻪ آﻏـﺎز ﺻﺤﻨﻪ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬را ﻓﺸـﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺻﻮﻳﺮ و زﻣﺎن ﻧـﻘﻄﻪ آﻏﺎز در ﭘﻨﺠـﺮه ‪ Start‬ﳕﺎﻳﺶ داده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫• ﻧﻘﻄﻪ آﻏﺎز ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﺎن ﺑﺨﺶ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ اﺻﻼح را ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از‬
‫(‪SEARCH,‬‬
‫دﻛـﻤـﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻣـﺮﺑـﻮط ﺑـﻪ ﭘـﺨﺶ‪) SKIIP ,( ) PLAY) ,‬‬
‫(( اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﳕﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)‬
‫∂‪Æ‬‬
‫در ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﭘـﺎﻳﺎن ﺻﺤﻨﻪ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬را ﻓـﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ و زﻣـﺎن ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎن در ﭘﻨﺠـﺮه ‪ End‬ﳕﺎﻳﺶ داده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑـﺮاي ﻟـﻐــﻮ اﻳـﻦ ﻋـﻤـﻠـﻴـﺎت‪ ,‬دﻛــﻤـﻪ ﻫـﺎي ‹ را ﻓـﺸـﺎر دﻫــﻴـﺪ ﺗـﺎ ﮔـﺰﻳـﻨـﻪ‬
‫‪Return‬اﻧﺘﺨـﺎب ﺷﺪه و ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤـﻪ ‪ OK‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫∑‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺑـﺮاي اﻧـﺘـﺨـﺎب ‪ Add‬دﻛـﻤـﻪ ﻫـﺎي ‹ را ﻓـﺸـﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳـﭙـﺲ دﻛﻤـﻪ ‪ OK‬را‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮاﻫﻴﺪ اﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ از ﺻﺤﻨﻪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﺪه در‬
‫ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ‪ ۱- ۴‬اﻓﺰودن ﺻﺤﻨﻪ اﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺧـﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫?‪t?M? p ·c‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‪ ,‬ﻣﺮاﺣﻞ ‪ ۱‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ۳‬در ﺻﻔـﺤﻪ ‪ ۸۵‬را دﻧﺒﺎل ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Æ۱- ¥‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي ▲ ▼ ‹ را ﺟﻬﺖ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺻﺤﻨﻪ اي ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮاﻫﻴﺪ ﺣﺬف‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤـﻪ ‪ (B) e‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﭘﻴﺎم "? ‪ "Do you want to delete the scene‬ﺑﻪ ﳕﺎﻳـﺶ در ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ آﻣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ƶ‬‬
‫ﺑـﺮاي اﻧـﺘﺨـﺎب ‪ ,Yes‬دﻛـﻤـﻪ ﻫـﺎي ‹ را ﻓﺸـﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳـﭙـﺲ دﻛﻤـﻪ ‪ OK‬را‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ﺣﺬف ﺻﺤﻨﻪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫـﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ ‪۸۶ -‬‬
‫‪g?Ä XdN “« g?Ä XdN? ÍœË—Ë p ·c‬‬
‫‪tLœ “« ÁœUH« U‬‬
‫≤‪Æ‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻮﻗ‪/‬ﭘﺨﺶ اﺳﺖ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ PLAY LIST‬را‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫دﻛـﻤـﻪ ﻫـﺎي … † را ﺟـﻬـﺖ اﻧـﺘـﺨـﺎب آن ورودي از ﻓـﻬـﺮﺳـﺖ ﻋـﻨـﺎوﻳـﻦ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ از آن ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MARKER‬را‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺗﻴﻚ ﻇـﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﻮد‪ .‬ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻋﻨﺎوﻳﻦ اﺿﺎﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ اﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ را ﺗﻜﺮار ﻛﻨـﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫«‪qbF‬‬
‫‪Ʊ‬‬
‫‪PLAY LIST‬‬
‫• اﮔـﺮ ﳕﻲ ﺧـﻮاﻫﻴـﺪ ﻳﻜـﻲ از ورودي ﻫﺎي ﻋـﻼﻣﺖ ﮔـﺬاري ﺷﺪه را ﺣـﺬف‬
‫ﻛـﻨـﻴـﺪ‪ ,‬ﻛـﺎﻓــﻲ اﺳـﺖ آن ورودي را اﻧـﺘـﺨـﺎب ﻛـﺮده و دﻛـﻤـﻪ ‪ OK‬ﻳـﺎ ) را‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب آﻧﺮا ﻟﻐﻮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ,‬اﻳﻦ دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻣﺤﻮ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫≥‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ (A) ed‬را ﻓـﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮي وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ ﳕﺎﻳﺶ داده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫≥‪Æ‬‬
‫دﻛــﻤـﻪ ‹ را ﺑــﺮاي اﻧــﺘـﺨــﺎب ‪ Delete‬ﻓــﺸــﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳـﭙــﺲ دﻛــﻤـﻪ ‪ OK‬را‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﭘﻴﺎم ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺣـﺬف "?‪ "Do you want to delete‬ﳕﺎﻳﺶ داده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪Ƶ‬‬
‫ﺑـﺮاي اﻧﺘـﺨﺎب ‪ ,Yes‬دﻛـﻤـﻪ ﻫﺎي ‹ را ﻓـﺸـﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙـﺲ دﻛﻤـﻪ ‪ OK‬را‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎل ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر و ﺑﻌﺪ از اﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺣﺬف ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎن رﺳﻴﺪ‪ ,‬ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ Playlist‬ﺑﺎز ﺧﻮاﻫﻴﺪ ﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫■‬
‫اﮔﺮ "‪ "Select All‬را در ﻣﻨﻮي وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ,‬ﲤﺎم ﻋﻨﺎوﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﮔﺬاري ﺧﻮاﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫«‪©gÄ XdN® Í“U Vd “« ÁœUH‬‬
‫اﮔﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮاﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ را در ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘـﺨﺶ ﻋﻮض ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ,‬اﻳﻦ ﻛﺎر ﺑﺮاﺣﺘﻲ ﺷﺪﻧﻲ اﺳﺖ‬
‫‪Ʊ‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻨﻮي ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﳕﺎﻳﺶ داده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ (B) e‬را ﺑﺮاي‬
‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪ Sort‬ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫≤‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺟﻬـﺖ اﻧﺘـﺨﺎب ﮔﺰﻳـﻨﻪ دﳋﻮاه‪ ,‬دﻛـﻤﻪ ﻫـﺎي … † را ﻓﺸﺎر داده و ﺳـﭙﺲ‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ ‹ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : Date‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺗﺎرﻳـﺦ اﻳﺠﺎد ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎي ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫• ‪ : Name‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴـﺐ ﺣﺮوف اﻟﻔﺒﺎ‬
‫■‬
‫ﻣـﻲ ﺗـﻮاﻧــﻴـﺪ ﺑـﺮ ﺣـﺴـﺐ ﺗــﺎرﻳـﺦ ﻳـﺎ ﻧـﺎم ﻣـﺮﺗـﺐ ﻛــﻨـﻴـﺪ‪ .‬ﺑـﻌـﺪ از ورود‬
‫دوﺑﺎره ﺑـﻪ ﻓﻬـﺮﺳﺖ ﭘـﺨﺶ‪ ,‬ﻓـﻬﺮﺳـﺖ ﻣﺮﺗـﺐ ﺷﺪه ﺑـﻪ ﺗﺮﺗـﻴﺐ ﻛـﭙﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪۸۷ -‬‬
‫وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ‬
‫‪fJFU U DVD d HDD “« Êœd wá‬‬
‫‪sËUM XdN Êœd wá‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮاﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﭙﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺪار ﻓﻀﺎي ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﺑﺮوي دﻳﺴﻚ را ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬
‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﺬا اﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ اﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻘﺮص‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎي ﻛﭙﻲ ﺷـﺪه در آن ذﺧﻴﺮه ﺷﺪه اﻧﺪ‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ﺷﺮوع ﻛﭙﻲ‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﺳﺎزي )ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ‪ ,‬ﻧﺎم‪ ,‬اﻧﺪازه‪ ,‬اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻛﺎﻧﺎل(‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب‬
‫‪ :Select All‬ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ورودي ﻫﺎي ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ ﻋـﻼﻣﺖ‬‫ﮔﺬاري ﺧﻮاﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Unselect All‬اﻧـﺘـﺨـﺎب ﲤـﺎم ورودي ﻫـﺎي ﻋـﻼﻣـﺖ ﮔـﺬاري‬‫ﺷﺪه ﻟﻐﻮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻛﭙﻲ ﻛﺮدن ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت‬
‫‪DVD ← HDD‬‬
‫‪HDD ← DVD‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮان وﻳﺪﻳﻮي ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪه‬
‫ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮان ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺷﺪه در ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ ﻛﭙـﻲ‬
‫ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﳕﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﳕﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻋﻨﺎوﻳﻨﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎر‬
‫ﻛﭙﻲ ﻛﺮدن از آﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺠﺎز اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻛﺮدن )ﻋﻨﻮان را ﭘﺲ از‬
‫ﻛﭙﻲ از روي ‪ HDD‬ﭘﺎك ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ(‬
‫ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﳕﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻛﭙﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎ دﻳﺴﻚ ﻫﺎي ﺳﺎزﮔﺎر ﺑﺎ ‪ CPRM‬ﻋـﻤﻠﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫اﮔﺮ "ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ اي ﺑﺎ وﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﻳـﻚ ﺑﺎر ﻛﭙﻲ" روي ‪ DVD‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‪ ,‬دﻳﮕﺮ ﳕﻲ ﺗﻮان آﻧﺮا روي ‪ HDD‬ﻛﭙﻲ ﻛﺮد‪.‬‬
‫اﻣﺎ "ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ اي ﺑﺎ وﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﻳـﻚ ﺑﺎر ﻛﭙﻲ" روي ‪ HDD‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‪ ,‬اﻳﻦ ﻋﻨﻮان را ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان ﺑﺮ ‪) DVD-RW‬ﺣﺎﻟـﺖ ‪ (VR‬ﻳﺎ‬
‫‪ DVD-RAM‬ﻛﭙﻲ ﳕﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪tLœ “« ÁœUH« U‬‬
‫‪Ʊ‬‬
‫≤‪Æ‬‬
‫≥‪Æ‬‬
‫‪Æ¥‬‬
‫‪Ƶ‬‬
‫∂‪Æ‬‬
‫‪TITLE LIST‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OPEN/CLOSE‬را ﻓﺸﺎر داده و ﻳـﻚ دﻳﺴﻚ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ در ﺳﻴـﻨﻲ دﻳﺴﻚ ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑـﺮاي ﺑـﺴـﱳ ﺳـﻴﻨـﻲ دﻳـﺴـﻚ‪ ,‬دﻛـﻤـﻪ ‪ OPEN/CLOSE‬را ﻓـﺸـﺎر دﻫـﻴـﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻨـﺘـﻈـﺮ‬
‫ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻋﺒﺎرت ‪) LOAD‬ﺑﺎرﮔﺬاري( از روي ﳕﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺟﻠﻮ ﻣﺤﻮ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ دﻳﺴﻚ ﻓﻀﺎي ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺑـﺮاي ﺿﺒﻂ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ دﳋـﻮاه را ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر دادن دﻛـﻤﻪ ‪ HDD‬ﻳﺎ ‪ DVD‬روي ﻛﻨـﺘﺮل از راه دور‬
‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ دﳋﻮاه را ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸـﺎر دادن دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ HDD/DVD‬روي ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺟﻠﻮي دﺳﺘﮕﺎه‬
‫ﻫﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫـﻨـﮕـﺎﻣـﻲ ﻛﻪ دﺳـﺘـﮕـﺎه در ﺣـﺎﻟـﺖ ﺗـﻮﻗـ‪/‬ﭘـﺨـﺶ اﺳﺖ‪ ,‬دﻛـﻤـﻪ ‪ TITLE LIST‬را‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫دﻛﻤـﻪ ‪ COPY‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• در ﺣﲔ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر دادن دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ COPY‬ﻋﻨﻮان را ﻛﭙﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي … † را ﺟﻬﺖ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻋﻨﻮاﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻛﭙﻲ آن ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎر‬
‫داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MARKER‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻋـﻼﻣﺖ ﺗﻴﻚ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻋﻨﺎوﻳﻦ اﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻛـﭙﻲ اﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ را ﺗﻜﺮار ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• اﮔﺮ ﳕﻲ ﺧﻮاﻫﻴﺪ ﻳﻜﻲ از ورودي ﻫﺎي ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﮔﺬاري ﺷﺪه را ﻛﭙﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪,‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻓﻲ اﺳﺖ آن ورودي را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﺮده و دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MARKER‬ﻳﺎ‹ را ﻓﺸﺎر‬
‫دﻫﻴﺪ ﺗـﺎ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب آﻧﺮا ﻟـﻐﻮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ,‬اﻳـﻦ دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ را ﻓﺸـﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻋـﻼﻣﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ ‪۸۸ -‬‬
‫∑‪Æ‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ (A) ed‬را ﺑﺮاي اﻧـﺘﺨﺎب ‪ Start Copy‬ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﻮاﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺮار اﺳﺖ ﺑﺮوي ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﳕﺎﻳﺶ داده ﳕﻲ ﺷﻮد‪ ,‬و ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت‬
‫ﻛـﭙـﻲ ﻣﻮﻗـﻌـﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﺑﺮﻧـﺎﻣـﻪ در ﺣـﺎل ﭘـﺨﺶ ﺑـﺮوي ﺻـﻔـﺤﻪ ﻣـﺸـﺎﻫـﺪه ﻣـﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻮد آﻏﺎز ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ INFO‬را ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓـﺖ ﻛﭙﻲ ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫اﮔﺮ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ INFO‬را دوﺑﺎره ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪ ,‬ﻣﻴﻠـﻪ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺖ ﻛﭙﻲ ﻣﺤﻮ‬
‫ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫«‪qbF‬‬
‫∏‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ﻟﻐﻮ ﻛﺎر ﻛﭙﻲ در ﺣﺎل اﺟـﺮا‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ed‬‬
‫)‪ (A‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ از اﲤﺎم ﻣﻮﻓﻘﻴﺖ آﻣـﻴﺰ ﻛﭙﻲ‪ ,‬ﭘﻴﺎم "‪ "The title is successfully copied‬ﳕﺎﻳﺶ داده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪DVD-Video wá‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OPEN/CLOSE‬را ﻓﺸﺎر داده و ﻳﻚ دﻳﺴـﻚ ‪ DVD-Video‬در ﺳﻴﻨﻲ دﻳﺴﻚ ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ʊ‬‬
‫≤‪Æ‬‬
‫≥‪ Æ‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ COPY‬را در ﺣﲔ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺴﱳ ﺳﻴﻨﻲ دﻳﺴـﻚ ‪ OPEN/CLOSE‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﭙﻲ ﺷﺮوع ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻛﭙﻲ در ﻣﻮارد زﻳﺮ ﻛﺎر ﻧﺨـﻮاﻫﺪ ﻛﺮد‪:‬‬
‫ اﮔﺮ ﺳﻌﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ از ﻳﻚ ﻣﻨﻮ را ﻛـﭙﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬‫ دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎي ‪ NTSC‬ﻳﺎ دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎي ﻣﺤﺎﻓـﻈﺖ ﺷﺪه در ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ ﻛﭙﻲ‬‫ ﻋﻨﺎوﻳﻨﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮه آﻧﻬﺎ ﻣـﺘﻔﺎوت اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬‫ ﻋﻨﻮان ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻛﭙﻲ ﺷﺪه روي ‪ HDD‬در ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ‪ 2ch AC3‬ﺿـﺒﻂ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬‫‪ -‬ﺑﺮاي ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ ,DTS‬ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺻـﻮﺗﻲ ﻛﭙﻲ ﻧﺨﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪DivX U JPEG ¨MP3 Êœd wá‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻛﭙﻲ ﻛﺮدن ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت‪.‬‬
‫‪ DVD ← HDD‬ﻳﺎ‪USB‬‬
‫‪ HDD ← DVD‬ﻳﺎ‪USB‬‬
‫‪HDD ← USB‬ﻳﺎ‪DVD‬‬
‫‪MP3‬‬
‫ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت‬
‫‪) JPEG‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬
‫ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫‪DivX‬‬
‫ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫‪CD-DA‬‬
‫ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﳕﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﳕﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﳕﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫• دﻳﺴﻚ )‪) DVD+RW/DVD-RW/() DVD±R ,CD-R/CD-DA/CD-RW/DVD-RAM‬ﻧﻬـﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﺎزي( ← ‪ HDD‬ﻳﺎ ‪USB‬‬
‫• ‪ DVD-RW(V) ,DVD-R ← HDD‬ﻳﺎ ‪USB‬‬
‫• ‪ HDD ← USB‬ﻳﺎ ‪DVD-RW(V) ,DVD-R‬‬
‫• اﮔﺮ ﺑﺮوي ‪ USB‬ﻛﭙﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ PTP USB ,‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﻧﺨﻮاﻫـﺪ ﺑﻮد‪.‬‬
‫• اﮔﺮ دﻳﺴﻚ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ‪ Disc Manager‬ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺷﺪه ﺑـﺎﺷﺪ‪ ,‬ﺑﻌﻨﻮان ﻳﻚ دﻳﺴﻚ داراي ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ UDF‬ﺑﺎ ‪ PC‬ﺳﺎزﮔﺎري‬
‫ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ داﺷﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪qU Êœd wá‬‬
‫‪Ʊ‬‬
‫≤‪Æ‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ دﻳﺴﻚ ‪ ,JPEG‬دﻳﺴﻚ ‪ MP3‬ﻳﺎ ‪ DivX‬در ﺳﻴﻨـﻲ دﻳﺴﻚ ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑـﺮاي ﺑـﺴـﱳ ﺳـﻴـﻨـﻲ دﻳـﺴـﻚ‪ ,‬دﻛـﻤـﻪ ‪ OPEN/CLOSE‬را ﻓـﺸـﺎر دﻫـﻴـﺪ‪ .‬ﻣـﻨـﺘـﻈـﺮ‬
‫ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻋﺒﺎرت ‪ LOAD‬از روي ﳕﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺟﻠﻮ ﻣﺤﻮ ﺷﻮد‪ .‬ﭼﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ‬
‫دﻳﺴﻚ ﻓﻀﺎي ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﺿﺒﻂ داﺷﺘـﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫≥‪ Æ‬ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪ ,Library‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي … † را ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‹ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Æ¥‬ﺟﻬﺖ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪ Photo ,Music‬ﻳﺎ ‪ DivX‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي ‪ ts‬را ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ ‹ را ﻓـﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Ƶ‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ COPY‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤـﻪ ﻛﭙﻲ ﳕﺎﻳﺶ داده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪۸۹ -‬‬
‫وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ‬
‫∂‪ Æ‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي ▲ ▼ را ﺟﻬﺖ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ ,MP3‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻳﺎ ‪ DivX‬ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻛﭙﻲ آن ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MARKER‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻴﻚ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫• اﮔﺮ ﳕﻲ ﺧﻮاﻫﻴﺪ ﻳﻜﻲ از ورودي ﻫﺎي ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﮔﺬاري ﺷﺪه را ﻛﭙﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪,‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻓﻲ اﺳﺖ آن ورودي را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛـﺮده و‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MARKER‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب آﻧﺮا ﻟﻐﻮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ,‬اﻳﻦ دﻛﻤﻪ را‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺗﻴﻚ ﻣﺤﻮ ﺷـﻮد‪.‬‬
‫∑‪ Æ‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي ▲ ▼ ‹ را ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب رﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺪف ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ OK‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر دادن دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ (B) e‬ﭘـﻮﺷﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪي اﻳﺠﺎد ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫∏‪ Æ‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ )‪ (A‬را ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘـﺨﺎب ‪ Start Copy‬ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎم "‪ "Number of file : x‬ﳕﺎﻳﺶ داده ﻣـﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪ Æπ‬دﻛـﻤﻪ ﻫـﺎي ‹ را ﺑﺮاي اﻧـﺘﺨـﺎب ‪ Start‬ﻓﺸـﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳـﭙﺲ دﻛـﻤﻪ‪ OK‬را‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﭙﻲ ﻛﺮدن ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ آﻏﺎز ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮاي ﻟﻐﻮ ﻛﭙﻲ در ﺟﺮﻳﺎن‪ ,‬دﻛﻤـﻪ ) (‪ EXIT‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪t
uÄ Êœd wá‬‬
‫‪Ʊ‬‬
‫≤‪Æ‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ دﻳﺴﻚ )‪ JPEG ,MP3‬ﻳﺎ ‪ (DivX‬در ﺳﻴﻨﻲ دﻳـﺴﻚ ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪ ,Library‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي … † را ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‹ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫≥‪ Æ‬ﺟـﻬــﺖ اﻧـﺘـﺨـﺎب ‪ Photo ,Music‬ﻳــﺎ ‪ DivX‬دﻛـﻤـﻪ ﻫــﺎي … † را ﻓـﺸـﺎر داده‪,‬‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ ‹ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ‪ JPEG ,MP3‬ﻳﺎ ‪ DivX‬ﳕﺎﻳﺶ داده ﻣـﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪ Æ¥‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ COPY‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤـﻪ ﻛﭙﻲ ﳕﺎﻳﺶ داده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪ Ƶ‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي … † را ﺟﻬﺖ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب آن ورودي از ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻋﻨﺎوﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺑـﻪ ﻣﺤـﺎﻓﻈـﺖ از آن ﻫﺴـﺘﻴـﺪ ﻓﺸـﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙـﺲ دﻛﻤـﻪ ‪ MARKER‬را ﻓـﺸﺎر‬
‫دﻫـﻴـﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻋـﻼﻣـﺖ ﺗـﻴـﻚ ﻇﺎﻫـﺮ ﺷـﻮد‪ .‬ﺑـﺮاي اﻧـﺘﺨـﺎب ﻋـﻨـﺎوﻳـﻦ اﺿﺎﻓـﻲ ﺟـﻬـﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ اﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ را ﺗﻜﺮار ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• اﮔــﺮ ﳕـﻲ ﺧــﻮاﻫـﻴــﺪ ﻳـﻜــﻲ از ورودي ﻫـﺎي ﻋــﻼﻣـﺖ ﮔــﺬاري ﺷـﺪه را ﺣــﺬف‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ,‬ﻛﺎﻓﻲ اﺳﺖ آن ورودي را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﺮده و دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ ) را ﻓﺸﺎر‬
‫دﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب آﻧﺮا ﻟﻐﻮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ,‬اﻳﻦ دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫∂‪ Æ‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي ▲ ▼ ‹ را ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب رﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺪف ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ OK‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر دادن دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ (B) e‬ﭘـﻮﺷﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪي اﻳﺠﺎد ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫∑‪ Æ‬ادﻛﻤﻪ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ )‪ (A‬را ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨـﺎب ‪ Start Copy‬ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎم "‪ "Number of file : x‬ﳕﺎﻳﺶ داده ﻣـﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫∏‪ Æ‬دﻛـﻤﻪ ﻫـﺎي ‹ را ﺑﺮاي اﻧـﺘﺨـﺎب ‪ Start‬ﻓﺸـﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳـﭙﺲ دﻛـﻤﻪ‪ OK‬را‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﭙﻲ ﻛﺮدن ﭘﻮﺷﻪ آﻏﺎز ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫زﻳﺮ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎ و ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎي ﭘﻮﺷﻪ اﻧﺘـﺨﺎب ﺷﺪه ﻛﭙﻲ ﺧﻮاﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮاي ﻟﻐﻮ ﻛﭙﻲ در ﺟﺮﻳﺎن‪ ,‬دﻛﻤـﻪ ) (‪ EXIT‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ ‪۹۰ -‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ‪ ۵۰۰‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻳﺎ ‪ ۵۰۰‬زﻳﺮﭘﻮﺷﻪ در ﻳﻚ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ داﺷﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪[MP3, JPEG, DivX] .‬‬
‫■‬
‫اﮔﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮاﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻲ ﻛﭙﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ,‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭘﻴﺶ از ﺷﺮوع ﻛﭙﻲ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ‬
‫اي ﺟﺪﻳﺪ اﻳﺠﺎد ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻤـﺎ ﳕﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴـﺪ ﺑﺪون اﻳﺠﺎد ﭘـﻮﺷﻪ اي ﺟﺪﻳـﺪ ﭼﻴﺰي در ﺑﺎﻻﺗـﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫ﭘﻮﺷﻪ )رﻳﺸﻪ( ﻛﭙﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫اﮔﺮ از ﻗﺒﻞ ‪ ۵۰۰‬ﭘﻮﺷﻪ در ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ )رﻳﺸﻪ( وﺟﻮد داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ,‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ از اﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺑﺘﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪي‬
‫اﻳﺠﺎد ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ از آﻧـﻬﺎ را ﭘﺎك ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫اﻧﺪازه ﻓﺎﻳﻞ روي دﻳﺴﻚ و ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻛﭙﻲ ﺷﺪه روي ‪ HDD‬ﳑﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ دﻟﻴﻞ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺘﻔﺎوت ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫اﮔـﺮ ﺑـﺮاي از ورودﻳــﻬـﺎي ﭘـﻮﺷـﻪ ﻓـﻌــﻠـﻲ را ﻋـﻼﻣـﺖ ﮔــﺬاري ﻛـﺮده و ﺑـﻪ ﭘـﻮﺷـﻪ ﻣــﺘـﻔـﺎوﺗـﻲ ﺑـﺮوﻳــﺪ‪ ,‬ﻋـﻼﻣـﺖ ﮔـﺬاري آن‬
‫ورودﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر ﻟﻐﻮ ﺷﺪه و از ﻓﻬـﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﺣﺬف ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪DivXØduBØwIOu qU ÂU Êœ«œ dOOG‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﻧﺎم ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴـﻘﻲ‪ ,‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻳﺎ ‪ DivX‬ﻛﭙﻲ ﺷﺪه در ‪ HDD‬را ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ʊ‬‬
‫≤‪Æ‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي … † را ﺟﻬﺖ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب آن ورودي ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺎم آن‬
‫ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤـﻪ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ )‪ (A‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟـﻬـﺖ اﻧـﺘـﺨـﺎب ‪ Rename‬دﻛﻤـﻪ ﻫـﺎي … † را ﻓـﺸـﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳـﭙـﺲ دﻛـﻤـﻪ‬
‫‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ ‹ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺎم ﳕﺎﻳﺶ داده ﻣﻲ ﺷـﻮد‪.‬‬
‫≥‪ Æ‬ﺟﻬﺖ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺣﺮوف دﳋﻮاه دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي ▲ ▼‹ را ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : ((A) ed tLœ) VI t? XAÖd‬ﻣـﻜﺎن ﳕﺎ را ﻳﻚ ﻣـﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮد‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : ((B) e tLœ) tKU‬ﻳﻚ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺧﺎﻟﻲ وارد ﳕﻮده و ﻣﻜﺎن ﳕﺎ را ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮد )ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤـﺖ راﺳﺖ(‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : ((C) œ—“ tLœ) Êœd „UÄ‬ﲤﺎم ﻛﺎراﻛﺘﺮﻫﺎي وارد ﺷﺪه را ﺣﺬف ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• –‪ : ((D) w¬ tLœ) ÁdO‬ﻛﺎراﻛﺘﺮﻫﺎي وارد ﺷـﺪه را ﺛﺒﺖ و ذﺧﻴﺮه ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Æ¥‬ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ذﺧﻴﺮه دﻛﻤـﻪ آﺑﻲ )‪ (D‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺎم ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﻓﺎﻳـﻞ روي ورودي ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﳕﺎﻳﺶ داده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪۹۱ -‬‬
‫«‪qbF‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﻓـﺸﺎر دادن دﻛـﻤﻪ‪ ( ) EXIT‬در ﺣـﲔ ﻛﭙـﻲ ﭘﻮﺷـﻪ ﻋﻤـﻠﻴـﺎت ﻛﭙـﻲ را‬
‫ﭘﺲ از اﲤﺎم ﻛﭙﻲ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺟﺎري ﻟﻐﻮ ﺧـﻮاﻫﺪ ﻛﺮد‪.‬‬
‫وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ‬
‫‪pœ Xdb‬‬
‫‪pœ ÂU g«dË‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻧﺎم ﺑﺮاي ﻳﻚ دﻳﺴﻚ ﻣـﺮاﺣﻞ زﻳﺮ را دﻧﺒﺎل ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ʊ‬‬
‫ﻫـﻨـﮕـﺎﻣـﻲ ﻛـﻪ دﺳـﺘــﮕـﺎه در ﺣـﺎﻟـﺖ ﺗـﻮﻗـ اﺳـﺖ‪ ,‬دﻛـﻤـﻪ ‪ MENU‬را ﻓـﺸـﺎر‬
‫دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫≤‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺑـﺮاي اﻧــﺘـﺨـﺎب ‪ ,Disc Manager‬دﻛــﻤـﻪ ﻫـﺎي … † را ﻓـﺸــﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳـﭙـﺲ‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ دﻛﻤﻪ ‹ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫≥‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪ Rename‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي ‹ را ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ‪OK‬‬
‫را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤـﻪ ‪ Rename‬ﳕﺎﻳﺶ داده ﻣﻲ ﺷـﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪ Æ¥‬ﻛﺎراﻛﺘﺮﻫﺎي ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ را ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي ▲ ▼ ‹ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب‬
‫ﳕﻮده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙـﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Ƶ‬ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ذﺧﻴﺮه دﻛﻤﻪ آﺑـﻲ )‪ (D‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺎم ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺷﺪه ﺑﻪ دﻳﺴﻚ اﺧﺘـﺼﺎص داده ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﻗـﺒـﻞ از آﻏـﺎز وﻳـﺮاﻳﺶ ﺑـﺎﻳـﺪ ﮔـﺰﻳـﻨـﻪ ﻫـﺎي ﺣـﻔـﺎﻇـﺖ دﻳﺴـﻚ را ﻟـﻐـﻮ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﳕﺎﻳﺶ در آﻣﺪه‪ ,‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮع دﻳﺴﻚ ﻣﺘﻔﺎوت‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪pœ “« XEU‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑـﻠﻴـﺖ ﻣﺤﺎﻓـﻈﺖ از دﻳـﺴﻚ ﺑﻪ ﺷـﻤﺎ اﻳﻦ اﻣـﻜﺎن را ﻣـﻲ دﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ از ﻓـﺮﻣﺖ ﺷـﺪن ﻳﺎ ﺣﺬف دﻳـﺴﻚ ﺑـﺮ اﺛﺮ ﻋﻤـﻠﻴـﺎت ﻧﺎﺧﻮاﺳـﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي ﺑﻌﻤﻞ آورﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ʊ‬‬
‫≤‪Æ‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻮﻗ اﺳﺖ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ‪ MENU‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑـﺮاي اﻧــﺘـﺨـﺎب ‪ ,Disc Manager‬دﻛــﻤـﻪ ﻫـﺎي … † را ﻓـﺸــﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳـﭙـﺲ‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ دﻛﻤﻪ ‹ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫≥‪ Æ‬ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘـﺨﺎب ‪ ,Protection‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫـﺎي ‹ را ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙـﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫‪OK‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Æ¥‬ﺑـﺮاي اﻧـﺘـﺨـﺎب ‪ ,On‬دﻛـﻤـﻪ ﻫـﺎي ‹ را ﻓـﺸـﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳـﭙـﺲ دﻛـﻤـﻪ ‪ OK‬را‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ ‪۹۲ -‬‬
‫‪sËUM ÍU XdN tL ·c‬‬
‫‪Ʊ‬‬
‫≤‪Æ‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻮﻗ اﺳﺖ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ‪ MENU‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑـﺮاي اﻧــﺘـﺨــﺎب ‪ ,Disc Manager‬دﻛـﻤـﻪ ﻫــﺎي … † را ﻓـﺸـﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳــﭙـﺲ‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ دﻛﻤﻪ ‹ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫≥‪ Æ‬ﺑـﺮاي اﻧﺘـﺨـﺎب ‪ ,Delete All‬دﻛـﻤﻪ ﻫـﺎي ▲ ▼ ‹ را ﻓـﺸـﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙـﺲ‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﭘﻴﺎم ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ "?‪ "Do you want to delete all title lists‬ﳕﺎﻳﺶ داده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫«‪qbF‬‬
‫• زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ورودي ﻫﺎي ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺷﺪه وﺟﻮد داﺷﺘـﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ :‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ‬
‫‪) Delete All Title List‬ﺣـﺬف ﻫـﻤﻪ ﻓـﻬـﺮﺳـﺖ ﻫـﺎي ﻋﻨـﺎوﻳـﻦ( ﻛـﺎر ﻧـﺨﻮاﻫـﺪ‬
‫ﻛﺮد‪ .‬ﺿﻤﻨًﺎ اﮔﺮ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮي ﺛﺎﺑﺖ در ﻳﻚ ﻋﻨﻮان وﺟﻮد داﺷﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ,‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻣﺬﻛﻮر ﻛﺎر ﻧﺨﻮاﻫﺪ ﻛﺮد‪ .‬اﮔﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮاﻫﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ورودي‬
‫ﻣﺤـﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺷـﺪه را ﺣﺬف ﳕـﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪) Protect ,‬ﻣـﺤﺎﻓﻈـﺖ( آﻧﺮا در ﮔـﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫‪) Lock‬ﻗﻔﻞ( ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎل ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• اﮔﺮ از ﻳـﻚ ‪ DVD-RAM/-RW‬ﻣﺤـﺎﻓﻈـﺖ ﺷﺪه اﺳـﺘﻔـﺎده ﻣﻲ ﻛـﻨﻴـﺪ‪ ,‬داده‬
‫ﻫﺎ از روي دﻳﺴﻚ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﺬف ﻧﺨﻮاﻫﻨـﺪ ﺑﻮد‪.‬‬
‫• اﮔﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Yes‬را اﻧـﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ,‬ﭘﻴﺎم ﺗﺎﻳـﻴﺪ‬
‫"?‪ "All playlists will also be deleted. Do you want to continue‬ﳕﺎﻳـﺶ‬
‫داده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪ Æ¥‬ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪ ,Yes‬دﻛﻤـﻪ ﻫﺎي‹ را ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎي ﻋﻨﺎوﻳﻦ ﭘﺎك ﺷـﺪه اﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪duB ÍU Xd?NØwIOu w« XdNØDivX XdNØsËUM ÍU XdN wU9 ·c‬‬
‫‪Ʊ‬‬
‫≤‪Æ‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻮﻗ اﺳﺖ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑـﺮاي اﻧــﺘـﺨــﺎب ‪ ,Disc Manager‬دﻛـﻤـﻪ ﻫــﺎي … † را ﻓـﺸـﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳــﭙـﺲ‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ دﻛﻤﻪ ‹ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫≥‪ Æ‬ﺑﺮاي اﻧـﺘﺨﺎب ‪ Delete‬دﻛـﻤﻪ ﻫـﺎي ‹ را ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳـﭙﺲ دﻛﻤـﻪ‪OK‬‬
‫را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ورودي ﻫﺎي ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺷﺪه وﺟﻮد داﺷﺘـﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ :‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ‬
‫‪ Delete All Title List‬ﻛـﺎر ﻧﺨـﻮاﻫـﺪ ﻛـﺮد‪ .‬ﺿﻤـﻨًـﺎ اﮔﺮ ﻋـﻜـﺲ ﻳـﺎ ﺗﺼـﻮﻳـﺮي‬
‫ﺛﺎﺑﺖ در ﻳﻚ ﻋﻨﻮان وﺟﻮد داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ,‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻣﺬﻛﻮر ﻛﺎر ﻧﺨﻮاﻫﺪ‬
‫ﻛـﺮد‪ .‬اﮔﺮ ﻣـﻲ ﺧـﻮاﻫﻴـﺪ ﻳـﻚ ورودي ﻣﺤـﺎﻓـﻈـﺖ ﺷﺪه را ﺣـﺬف ﳕـﺎﻳﻴـﺪ‪,‬‬
‫‪ Protect‬آﻧﺮا در ﮔﺰﻳـﻨﻪ ‪ Lock‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎل ﻛـﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Æ¥‬ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨـﺎب ‪ Music ,DivX ,Title‬ﻳﺎ ‪ ,Photo‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي ‹ را ﻓ ــﺸﺎر‬
‫داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛـﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫـﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Ƶ‬ﺑﺮاي اﻧـﺘﺨﺎب ‪ ,Yes‬دﻛـﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي ‹ را ﻓﺸـﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛـﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬را‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﲤﺎﻣﻲ ﻓـﻬﺮﺳﺘﻬﺎي ﻋﻨـﺎوﻳﻦ‪ ,‬ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺘﻬـﺎي ‪ ,DivX‬ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺘﻬـﺎي ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻜﺲ ﭘﺎك ﺷﺪه اﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪۹۳ -‬‬
‫وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ‬
‫‪pœ p Êœd Xd‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻛﺮدن ﻳﻚ دﻳﺴﻚ ﻣﺮاﺣﻞ زﻳﺮ را دﻧـﺒﺎل ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ دﻳﺴﻚ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺘﻤًـﺎ ﻟﻐﻮ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Ʊ‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ دﺳـﺘﮕﺎه در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻮﻗ اﺳﺖ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫـﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫≤‪Æ‬‬
‫ﺑـﺮاي اﻧــﺘـﺨــﺎب ‪ ,Disc Manager‬دﻛـﻤــﻪ ﻫـﺎي ▲ ▼ را ﻓــﺸـﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳــﭙـﺲ‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ دﻛﻤﻪ ‹را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫≥‪ Æ‬ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪ Format‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي √ ‪œ‬را ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬را‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪HDD/DVD-RAM/+RW‬‬
‫• ﭘـﻴـﺎم ﺗﺎﻳـﻴـﺪ "?‪ "Current media: *** Do you want to format‬ﳕـﺎﻳـﺶ داده‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫• اﮔﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Yes‬را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ,‬ﭘﻴﺎم ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ "?‪ "All data will be deleted. Do you want to continue‬ﳕﺎﻳﺶ داده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪DVD-RW‬‬
‫• ﭘﻴﺎم ﺗًﺎﻳﻴـﺪ "‪ "Choose the recording format for DVD-RW.‬ﳕﺎﻳﺶ داده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫• اﮔﺮ ﻧﻮع ﻓﺮﻣﺖ دﳋﻮاه را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ,‬ﭘﻴﺎم ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ "?‪ "All data will be deleted. Do you want to continue‬ﳕﺎﻳﺶ داده ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪ Æ¥‬ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨـﺎب ‪ ,Yes‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي √ ‪œ‬را ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛـﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬دﻳﺴـﻚ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪ DVD-VR‬و ‪ DVD-V‬ﺑﺮ اﺳﺎس ﻓﺮﻣـﺘﻬﺎي ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻮد ﺗﻌـﻴﲔ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫دﻳﺴﻚ‬
‫‪DVD-VR‬‬
‫‪DVD-V‬‬
‫‪DVD-RAM/-RW‬‬
‫‪DVD-RW/DVD-R‬‬
‫• در دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎي ‪ DVD+RW‬ﻫﻴﭻ ﺗﻔﺎوﺗﻲ ﻣﻴﺎن ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ‪) DVD-Video‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ (V‬ﻳﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪) DVD-Video‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ (VR‬وﺟﻮد‬
‫ﻧﺪارد‪.‬‬
‫?‪p?œ p? 7U? w?zUN‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ از اﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻋﻨﺎوﻳﻦ را ﺑﺎ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ‪ DVD‬و ‪ HDD‬ﺧﻮد روي ﻳﻚ‬
‫دﻳـﺴﻚ ‪ DVD-RW/±R‬ﺿـﺒـﻂ ﻛﺮدﻳـﺪ‪ ,‬ﺑـﺎﻳﺪ آﻧـﺮا اﺑﺘـﺪا ﻧـﻬﺎﺋـﻲ ﺳـﺎﺧﺖ ﺗـﺎ اﻣـﻜﺎن‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ در دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﻫﺎي ﺑﻴﺮوﻧﻲ را داﺷﺘـﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Ʊ‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻮﻗ اﺳﺖ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫≤‪ Æ‬ﺑــﺮاي اﻧـﺘــﺨــﺎب ‪ ,Disc Manager‬دﻛـﻤــﻪ ﻫــﺎي ▲ ▼ را ﻓــﺸـﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳــﭙــﺲ‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ دﻛﻤﻪ ‹را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫≥‪ Æ‬ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪ Finalise‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي ▲ ▼ ‹ را ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ OK‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎم ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ "?‪ "Do you want to finalise disc‬ﳕـﺎﻳﺶ داده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪ Æ¥‬ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪ ,Yes‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي ‹ را ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙـﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ا اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴـﺪ‪ ,‬ﻣﺠﺪدًا ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻀﻤﻮن "?‪ "Disc will be finalised. Do you want to continue‬ﳕﺎﻳﺶ داده ﻣـﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪ Ƶ‬ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪ ,Yes‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي ‹ را ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙـﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫دﻳﺴﻚ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ ‪۹۴ -‬‬
‫■‬
‫زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ دﻳﺴﻚ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺷـﺪ‪ ,‬دﻳﮕﺮ ﳕﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ورودي ﻫﺎ را از ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ آن ﺣﺬف ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﻛﺎرﻛﺮد دﻳﺴـﻜﻬﺎي ‪) DVD±R/RW‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) Video‬وﻳﺪﻳﻮ(( ﺑﻌـﺪ از ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺷﺪن‪ ,‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎﻧﻨـﺪ دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎي ‪ DVD-Video‬ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻮد‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﳕﺎﻳﺶ در آﻣﺪه‪ ,‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﺑﺴـﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮع دﻳﺴﻚ ﻣﺘﻔﺎوت ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫زﻣﺎن ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﺎزي ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﺑﺴـﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﺰان داده ﻫﺎي ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪه روي دﻳﺴﻚ ﻣﺘﻔﺎوت ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫اﮔﺮ در ﺣﲔ ﻓﺮاﻳﻨﺪ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﺎزي دﺳـﺘﮕﺎه ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﺷﻮد‪ ,‬داده ﻫﺎي روي دﻳﺴﻚ آﺳﻴﺐ ﺧﻮاﻫﻨﺪ دﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗـﻮاﻧﻴﺪ دﻳـﺴﻚ را ﺑﻪ ﻃـﻮر ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر ﺑـﺎ اﺳﺘـﻔﺎده از ﻗﺎﺑـﻠﻴﺖ ‪ EZ Record‬ﻧـﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺳـﺎزﻳﺪ‪) .‬ﺑﻪ ﺻـﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ۴۴‬ﻣـﺮاﺟﻌﻪ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ(‬
‫«‪qbF‬‬
‫‪©VRØV XU® pœ p 7U wzUN dO‬‬
‫‪ Ʊ‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻮﻗ‪ D‬اﺳﺖ‪ ,‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫≤‪ Æ‬ﺑـﺮاي اﻧــﺘـﺨـﺎب ‪ ,Disc Manager‬دﻛـﻤــﻪ ﻫـﺎي … † را ﻓـﺸــﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳـﭙـﺲ‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬ﻳﺎ دﻛﻤﻪ ‹را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫≥‪ Æ‬ﺑـﺮاي اﻧﺘـﺨـﺎب ‪ Unfinalise‬دﻛـﻤﻪ ﻫـﺎي ‹ را ﻓـﺸـﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙـﺲ دﻛـﻤـﻪ‬
‫‪ OK‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎم ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ "?‪ "Do you want to unfinalise disc‬ﳕـﺎﻳﺶ داده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪ Æ¥‬ﺑﺮاي اﻧـﺘﺨﺎب ‪ ,Yes‬دﻛـﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي ‹ را ﻓﺸـﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻛـﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬را‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ا اﻧـﺘــﺨـﺎب ﻛــﻨـﻴـﺪ‪ ,‬ﻣــﺠـﺪدًا ﭘــﻴـﺎم "‪Disc will be unfinalised. Do you want to‬‬
‫?‪ "continue‬ﳕﺎﻳﺶ داده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪ Ƶ‬ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪ ,Yes‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي ‹ را ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ,‬ﺳﭙـﺲ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫دﻳﺴﻚ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫■‬
‫ﻳﻚ دﻳﺴﻚ ‪ DVD-RW‬در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) Video‬وﻳﺪﻳﻮ( ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻧـﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﺎﺧﱳ اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﺎزي‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﺎزي‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎن‬
‫)‪DVD-Video (RW‬‬
‫)‪DVD-RW (V‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ‪DVD-Video‬‬
‫اﻣﻜﺎن ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ,‬ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ و‬
‫ﺣﺬف ﻣﺠﺪد وﺟﻮد دارد‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ دﻳﺴﻚ ‪ DVD-RW‬در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ VR‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻳـﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﺎﺧﱳ اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﺎزي‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎن‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﺎزي‬
‫)‪DVD-RW (VR:F‬‬
‫)‪DVD-RW (VR‬‬
‫اﻣﻜﺎن ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ,‬ﺣﺬف‪ ,‬وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ‪ ,‬و‬
‫اﻣﻜﺎن ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ,‬ﺣﺬف‪ ,‬وﻳﺮاﻳـﺶ‪ ,‬دارد‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﻣﺠﺪد وﺟﻮد ﻧﺪارد‪.‬‬
‫و ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﻣﺠﺪدوﺟﻮد‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪۹۵ -‬‬
‫راﻫﻨﻤﺎي ﻣﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫‪wU VO‬‬
‫اﮔﺮ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺷﻤﺎ دﭼﺎر ﻧﻘﺎﻳﺺ ﻛﺎري ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‪ ,‬ﻟﻄﻔًﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ از اﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻜﻲ از ﻣﺮاﻛﺰ ﻣﺠﺎز ﺧﺪﻣﺎت ‪ Samsung‬ﲤﺎس ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪,‬‬
‫ﻣﻮارد زﻳﺮ را ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪qJA‬‬
‫‪qŠ Á«—ØÕdý‬‬
‫دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ‪ DVD‬و ‪ HDD‬ﺑـﻌﺪ از روﺷﻦ ﺷﺪن ﺑﻪ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺮاي آﻣﺎده ﺳﺎزي‬
‫وﻗﺘﻲ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه روﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪,‬‬
‫ورودي ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺪﺗﻲ ﳕﺎﻳﺶ داده ﻣﻲ ﺷـﻮد‪ .‬ﻧﻴﺎز دارد و ورودي ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺪت ﺣﺪودًا ‪ ۱۰‬ﺛﺎﻧـﻴﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ از روﺷﻦ ﺷﺪن ﳕﺎﻳﺶ داده ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﭼﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺮق ﺑـﺨﻮﺑﻲ در داﺧﻞ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ دﻳﻮاري ﻗﺮار داده ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ‬
‫ﳑﻜﻦ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• آﻳﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬـﺎي ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ‪ DVD‬و ‪ HDD‬ﺧﻮد را ﺑﺪرﺳﺘﻲ اﳒﺎم داده اﻳﺪ?‬
‫• ﻓﻀﺎي ﺧﺎﻟﻲ روي دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎي ‪ HDD/DVD-RAM/±RW/‬ﺧـﻮد را ﭼﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫اﻧﻮاع دﻳﺴﻚ ﻫﺎي ﻣﻮﺟﻮد را ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴـﺪ‪) .‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ۶۴‬ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ(‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ REC‬را ﻓﺸﺎر ﻣﻲ دﻫﻢ اﻣﺎ‬
‫دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﻫﻴﭻ ﻛﺎري اﳒﺎم ﳕﻲ دﻫﺪ‪ .‬اﮔﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ در ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ ﻛﭙﻲ ﺷﺪن ﻣﺤﺎﻓـﻈﺖ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ,‬ﳕﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ آﻧﺮا ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﭼﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ دﻳﺴﻚ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﺻـﺤﻴﺢ و ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻮدن ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ دار آن در داﺧﻞ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ دﻳﺴﻚ ﳑﻜﻦ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﻗﺮار داده ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻛﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ اي دﻳﺴﻚ ‪ DVD‬ﺧﻮد را ﭼﻚ ﻛﻨـﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• اﻳﻦ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ‪ DVD‬و ‪ HDD‬ﻗﺎدر ﺑﻪ ﭘـﺨﺶ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ اﻧﻮاع دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﺎت ‪ ۴۵ , ۸‬ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴـﺪ(‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ از دﻻﻳﻞ زﻳﺮ ﻗﺎدر ﺑﻪ اﺳﺘﻔـﺎده از اﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﻳﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﳕﺎد روي ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫)‪ (۱‬دﻳﺴﻚ ‪ DVD‬آﻧﺮا ﻣﺤﺪود ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ اﺳـﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ـﻼ‪ ,‬زاوﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ( ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﳕﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫)‪ (۲‬دﻳﺴﻚ ‪ DVD‬ﺷﻤﺎ از اﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ )ﻣﺜ ً‬
‫)‪ (۳‬اﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ در ﺣﺎل ﺣﺎﺿﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﻧـﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (۴‬ﺷﻤﺎ درﺧﻮاﺳﺖ ﻋﻨﻮان‪ ,‬ﻓﺼﻞ‪ ,‬ﻳـﺎ زﻣﺎن اﺳﻜﻨﻲ را ﻛﺮده اﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ از ﻣﺤﺪوده ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺧﺎرج اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ Play‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت دﻳﺴﻚ از ﻫﻤﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺘﻬﺎي اﻧﺘﺨـﺎب ﺷﺪه ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﳕﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬در اﻳﻦ ﺻﻮرت‪ ,‬ﳑﻜﻦ‬
‫اﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﺧﻲ از ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ در ﻣـﻨﻮي ‪ Setting‬اﳒﺎم ﻣﻲ دﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﺪرﺳﺘﻲ ﻛﺎر ﻧﻜﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫اﳒﺎم ﺷﺪه در ﻣﻨﻮي ‪Setting‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻔﺎوت اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ دادن ﻧﺴﺒﺖ اﺑﻌﺎدي ﳑﻜﻦ ﻧﻴﺴـﺖ‪ .‬ﻧﺴﺒﺖ اﺑﻌﺎدي ﺑﺮاي دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎي ‪ DVD‬ﺛـﺎﺑﺖ اﺳﺖ‪) .‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﺎت ‪ ۳۹‬ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ(‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ دادن زاوﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻓـﻘﻂ ﺑﺮاي دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎﻳﻲ وﺟﻮد دارد ﻛﻪ ﺣﺎوي ﺗﺼﺎوﻳﺮي‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد زاوﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ در ﺣﲔ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪه در زواﻳﺎي ﻣﺨﺘﻠ ﺑﺎﺷﻨـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫دﻳﺴﻚ ‪ DVD‬ﻛﺎر ﳕﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﺪا و زﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي زﻳﺮﻧﻮﻳﺴﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺧـﻮد دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ دارﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﻂ آن دﺳﺘﻪ از ﺻﺪاﻫﺎ و‬
‫زاوﻳﻪ و‪/‬ﻳﺎ زﺑﺎن زﻳﺮﻧﻮﻳﺲ‬
‫زﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎي زﻳﺮﻧﻮﻳﺲ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺷـﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ در ﻣﻨﻮي دﻳﺴﻚ ﺑﻪ ﳕﺎﻳﺶ در آﻣﺪه و در‬
‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﭘﺨﺶ ﳕﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫دﻳﺴﻚ ‪ DVD‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮان ﻳﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ دﻳﮕﺮ‬
‫• دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎي ‪ DVD‬رﻣﺰ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎ اﻣﻜﺎﻧﺎت ﻣـﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ از دﻳﺴﻚ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻛﭙﻲ ﻛﺮدن روي‬
‫‪ HDD‬ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻛﭙﻲ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﺷﺪن ﻋـﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﻛﭙﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ "ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻛﭙﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت" ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ۶‬ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ اﻳﻨﻜﻪ آﻳﺎ ﻛﭙﻲ ﻛﺮدن ﭘﺸﺘـﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ‬
‫"‪ "V-Mode Compatibility‬در ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ۴۴‬ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛـﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫دﻳﺴﻚ ﻣﻲ ﭼﺮﺧﺪ‪ ,‬اﻣﺎ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮي‬
‫• ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴـﻤﺎت ‪) Video‬وﻳﺪﻳﻮ( ﺑﺪرﺳﺘﻲ اﳒﺎم ﺷﺪه اﻧﺪ‪) .‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﺎت‬
‫‪ ۴۱-۳۹‬ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ(‬
‫وﺟﻮد ﻧﺪارد ﻳﺎ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﺎوﻳﺮ‬
‫• ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ آﻳﺎ دﻳﺴﻚ ﺻـﺪﻣﻪ دﻳﺪه ﻳﺎ ذرات ﺧﺎرﺟﻲ روي آن وﺟﻮد دارﻧﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ ﺑﺪ اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻌﻀﻲ از دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ آﻧﻬـﺎ ﺑﺪ اﺳﺖ ﳑﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• اﮔﺮ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﮔﺎه از ﺗﺎرﻳﻚ ﺑﻪ روﺷﻦ ﺗـﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ,‬ﳑﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﺘﻲ ﻟﺮزش ﻋﻤﻮدي داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ,‬اﻣﺎ اﻳـﻦ ﻳﻚ اﺷﻜﺎل ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﺪاﻳﻲ ﭘﺨﺶ ﳕﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫• آﻳﺎ در ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎي ‪ Slow‬ﻳﺎ ‪ Skip‬ﻣﺸﻐﻮل ﲤﺎﺷـﺎي ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ?‬
‫اﮔﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ اي را ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴـﺮ از ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻋﺎدي ﲤﺎﺷﺎ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ,‬ﺻﺪاﻳﻲ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﻧﺨﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪) .‬ﺑﺠﺰ ﺑﺮاي ﺟﺴﺘـﺠﻮ رو ﺑﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ )‪ (X2‬در دﻳﺴﻚ‪(.‬‬
‫• اﺗﺼﺎﻻت و ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت را ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﺎت ‪ ۳۹ ~ ۳۸ ٬۲۶ ~ ۲۵‬ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ(‬
‫• ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ دﻳﺴﻚ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﻧـﺪﻳﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬در ﺻﻮرت ﻟﺰوم‪ ,‬دﻳﺴﻚ را ﲤﻴﺰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﭼﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ دﻳﺴﻚ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﺻـﺤﻴﺢ و ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻮدن ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ دار آن در داﺧﻞ‬
‫دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﻗﺮار داده ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫راﻫﻨﻤﺎي ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ‪۹۶ -‬‬
‫ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ وﺟﻮد ﻧﺪارد‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﺮاغ ﺗﺎﳝﺮ ﭼﺸﻤﻚ ﻣﻲ زﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• وﺟﻮد ﻓﻀﺎي ﻛـﺎﻓﻲ روي دﻳﺴﻚ ﻳﺎ ‪ HDD‬ﺑﺮاي ﺿﺒﻂ را ﺑـﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﻮدن دﻳﺴﻚ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ را ﺑﺮرﺳـﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻤًﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ از آﻏﺎز ﺿﺒﻂ اﻳﻦ ﻣﻮرد‬
‫را ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ رﻳﺰي زﻣﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫)ﺑﺎ ﺗﺎﳝﺮ( ﺑﺪرﺳﺘﻲ اﳒﺎم ﳕﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت زﻣﺎن آﻏﺎز ﺿﺒﻂ و زﻣﺎن ﭘـﺎﻳﺎن را دوﺑﺎره ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• اﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ دﻟﻴﻞ ﻗﻄﻌﻲ ﺑﺮق و ﻳﺎ ﻫﺮ دﻟـﻴﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ دﻳﮕﺮي در ﺣﲔ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ,‬ﺑﺮق دﺳﺘﮕﺎه‬
‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﺷﻮد ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺿﺒﻂ ﻟﻐﻮ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫اﻣﻜﺎن ﻛﭙﻲ روي ‪ USB‬ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬
‫• اﺗﺼﺎل ‪ USB‬را ﭼﻚ ﻛـﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺟﺪا ﻛﺮده و دوﺑﺎره وﺻـﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ "ﲡﻬـﻴﺰات ‪ USB‬ﺳﺎزﮔﺎر در درﮔﺎه ﻣﻴﺰﺑﺎن" ﺻﻔﺤـﻪ ‪ ۸‬ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺮوﺟـﻲ ‪ HDMI‬وﺟﻮد ﻧﺪارد‪.‬‬
‫• ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛـﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ وﻳﺪﺋﻮ ‪ HDMI‬ﻓـﻌﺎل ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ارﺗﺒﺎط ﺑﲔ ﺗـﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن و ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ‪ HDMI‬دﺳـﺘﮕﺎه ﺿﺒﻂ اچ دي دي و دي وي دي را‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﻛـﻪ آﻳﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن ﺷﻤﺎ از ‪ HDMI‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳـﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺻﻮﺗﻲ( اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﺮده اﻳـﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ‪) .‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ۳۹-۳۸‬ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ(‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤـﻪ ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ ‪ HDMI‬ﻏﻴﺮﻋـﺎدي‬
‫ﮔﺮ ﺑﺮﻓﻚ ﺑﺮ روي ﺻـﻔﺤﻪ ﳕﺎﻳﺎن ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪ ,‬اﻳﻦ ﻳﻌﻨـﻲ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن از ‪) HDCP‬ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت دﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎل ﭘﻬﻨﺎي ﺑﺎﻧﺪ( ﭘﺸـﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﳕﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺮزش ﺧـﺮوﺟﻲ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫• ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن ﺑـﻄﻮر ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻄﻔًﺎ ﺑﻪ دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ راﻫﻨﻤﺎي ﻛﺎرﺑﺮ ﺗـﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻧﺘﺎن رﺟﻮع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﻛﻨﺘﺮل از راه دور‬
‫ﳕﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﻛﻨﺘﺮل از راه دور را ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤـﺖ ﺳﻨﺴﻮر ﻛﻨﺘﺮل از راه دور روي ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺎر‬
‫ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ‪ DVD‬و ‪ HDD‬ﺧﻮد ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠـﻪ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻞ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻮاﻧﻊ ﻣﻴﺎن ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ‪ DVD‬و ‪ HDD‬و ﻛﻨﺘـﺮل از راه دور را ﺑﺮدارﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ آﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻳﻬﺎ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﺷـﺪه اﻧﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ آﻳـﺎ دﻛﻤﻪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ‪ TV‬اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ ﻳـﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫اﺳﻢ رﻣﺰ ﻧﻈﺎرت واﻟﺪﻳﻦ ر‬
‫ﻓﺮاﻣﻮش ﻛﺮده ام‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻲ ﻛﻪ دﻳﺴـﻜﻲ در دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﻧﻴﺴﺖ دﻛﻤﻪ )‪ PLAY/PAUSE (u‬واﻗﻊ در ﭘﺎﻧـﻞ ا‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮي دﺳﺘﮕﺎه را ﻓﺸﺎر داده و ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪت ‪ ۱۰‬ﺛـﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻧﮕﻪ دارﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫اﮔﺮ واﻗﻌًﺎ ﺿﺮوري ﻧﻴﺴﺖ از اﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴـﺖ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺗﻮﺟﻪ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از اﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﳑـﻜﻢ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺑﻮد ﻛﻪ دﻳﺴﻜﻲ در دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﻗﺮار ﻧﺪاﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪(.‬‬
‫آﻳﺎ اﻣﻜﺎن ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ زﻳﺮﻧﻮﻳﺲ و‬
‫ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎل ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻳﻚ دﻳﺴﻚ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪه وﺟﻮد دارد?‬
‫ﻳﻚ دﻳﺴﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪه ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎ زﻳﺮﻧﻮﻳـﺲ و ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎل ﺻﻮﺗﻲ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﺪه در ﺣﲔ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﻜﻼت‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻨﺪرﺟﺎت را ﻣﺮور ﻛﺮده و ﺑﺨﺸﻬـﺎﻳﻲ را ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮح ﻣﺸﻜﻞ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﭘﺮدازﻧﺪ‪ ,‬ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ و ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨـﻴﺪ‪ ,‬و از دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻠﻬﺎي داده ﺷﺪه ﭘﻴﺮوي ﳕﺎﻳﻴﺪ‬
‫• دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه و‪ HDD‬ﺧﻮد را از ﺑـﺮق ﻛﺸﻴﺪه و‪ .‬دوﺑﺎره ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮق ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• اﮔﺮ ﻣﺸﻜﻞ از ﺑﲔ ﻧﺮﻓﺖ‪ ,‬ﺑﺎ ﻣـﺮﻛﺰ ﻣﺠﺎز ﺧﺪﻣﺎت ‪ Samsung‬ﻧﺰدﻳﻚ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮد ﲤﺎس‬
‫ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪۹۷ -‬‬
‫—«‪ld ÍULM‬‬
‫‪qJA‬‬
‫‪qŠ Á«—ØÕdý‬‬
‫ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ آﻳﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ دﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎل را در ﻣﻨﻮي ‪Audio Option‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ‬
‫‪UBA‬‬
‫‪wuLŽ‬‬
‫‪͜˗Ë‬‬
‫‪włËdš‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﺑﺮق‬
‫‪Hz ۶۰/۵۰ v ۲۴۰-۱۱۰‬‬
‫ﻣﺼﺮف ﺑﺮق‬
‫‪ ۳۰‬وات ‪ ۲٫۲ /‬وات )ﺧﺎﻣﻮش(‬
‫وزن‬
‫‪ ۳٫۸‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮم‬
‫اﺑﻌﺎد‬
‫‪ ۳۴۰‬ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﺘﺮ )ﻃﻮل( ‪ ۳۰۰ x‬ﻣﻴﻠـﻲ ﻣﺘﺮ )ﻋﺮض( ‪ ۵۵ x‬ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﺘﺮ )ارﺗﻔﺎع(‬
‫دﻣﺎي ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺎر‬
‫‪ ۵+‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ۳۵+‬درﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮاد‬
‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ‬
‫دﺳﺘﮕﺎه را در ﺣﲔ ﻛﺎر روي ﺳﻄﺤﻲ ﺗﺮاز ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬رﻃﻮﺑﺖ در ﺣﲔ ﻛﺎر ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺘﺮ از ‪ %۷۵‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫وﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ‬
‫وﻳﺪﻳﻮي ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻲ‪ ۱٫۰ :‬وﻟﺖ ‪ p-p‬در ﺑﺎر ‪ ۷۵‬اﻫﻢ‪ ,‬ﺳـﻨﻜﺮون ﻣﻨﻔﻲ‬
‫ﺻﺪا‬
‫ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺻﺪاي ورودي‪Vrms ۲ :‬‬
‫ورودي ‪DV‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﺶ ﻧﺮي ﺳﺎزﮔﺎر ﺑﺎ )‪IEEE 1394(4p‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎي ﻗﺎﺑﻞ درﻳﺎﻓﺖ‬
‫‪I ,D/K ,SECAM-B/G ,PAL‬‬
‫ﺻﺪا‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﻋﺪد ﻓﻴﺶ ﻣﺎدﮔﻲ ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ آﻧﺎﻟﻮگ ‪۱X‬‬
‫ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ ﻧﻮري‪/‬ﻛﻮاﻛﺴﻴﺎل ﺻﺪاي دﻳﺠﻴﺘـﺎل‬
‫وﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ‬
‫وﻳﺪﻳﻮي ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻲ‪ ۱:‬ﻋﺪد ﻓﻴﺶ ﻣﺎدﮔﻲ ﺧـﺮوﺟﻲ وﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪۱X‬‬
‫‪ ۱‬ﻋﺪد ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ ‪ ۱٫۰ :Y) Component‬وﻟﺖ ‪ ۰٫۷۰ Pb: ,p-p‬وﻟﺖ ‪ ۰٫۷۰ :Pr ,p-p‬وﻟﺖ‬
‫‪ p-p‬در ﺑﺎر ‪ ۷۵‬اﻫﻢ(‬
‫)‪HDMI/DVI (576p, 720, 1080i, 1080p‬‬
‫{‪j³‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻓﺸﺮده ﺳﺎزي ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪MPEG-II‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻓﺸﺮده ﺳﺎزي ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‬
‫‪ Dolby Digital 2‬ﻛﺎﻧﺎل‪ ۲۵۶/‬ﻛـﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﻴﺖ در ﺛـﺎﻧﻴﻪ‪MPEG-II ,‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫‪) XP‬ﺣﺪود ‪ ۸٫۵‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑـﻴﺖ در ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ(‪) SP ,‬ﺣﺪود ‪ ۴٫۵‬ﻣﮕـﺎﺑﻴﺖ در ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ(‪,‬‬
‫‪) LP‬ﺣﺪود ‪ ۲٫۵‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑـﻴﺖ در ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ(‪,‬‬
‫‪) EP‬ﺣﺪود ‪ ۱٫۶‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﻴﺖ در ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻳـﺎ ﺣﺪود ‪ ۱٫۲‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﻴﺖ در ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ(‬
‫واﻛﻨﺶ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‬
‫‪ ۲۰‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺗﺎ ‪ ۲۰‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪HDD‬‬
‫‪DVD-HR773‬‬
‫‪GB ۱۶۰‬‬
‫‪XOdþ‬‬
‫‪DVD-HR775‬‬
‫‪GB ۲۵۰‬‬
‫‪USB‬‬
‫‪DVD-HR777‬‬
‫‪GB ۳۲۰‬‬
‫‪USB 2.0 H/S‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺑﺎن ×‪۱‬‬
‫‪wu wËd‬‬
‫ﺑـﺮاي دﻳﺴـﻜﻬـﺎي ‪ ,DVD‬ﺳـﻴﮕـﻨﺎﻟـﻬﺎي ﺻـﻮﺗـﻲ ﺿﺒـﻂ ﺷﺪه ﺑـﺎ ﻧـﺮخ ﳕﻮﻧـﻪ ﺑﺮداري ‪ ۹۶‬ﻛـﻴـﻠﻮﻫـﺮﺗﺰ ﺑـﻪ ﺧﺮوﺟـﻲ ‪ ۴۸‬ﻛـﻴﻠـﻮﻫﺮﺗـﺰ ﺗـﺒﺪﻳـﻞ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻮع دﻳﺴﻚ‬
‫دي ﻓﻲ دي‬
‫ﺳﻲ دي ﺻﻮﺗﻲ )‪(CD-DA‬‬
‫ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ آﻧﺎﻟﻮگ‬
‫‪ ۹۶ / ۴۸‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪ ۴۴٫۱‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ دﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎل‬
‫‪ ۴۸‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪ ۴۴٫۱‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ‪۹۶ -‬‬
CONTACT SAMSUNG WORLD WIDE
If you have any questions or comments relating to Samsung products, please contact the SAMSUNG customer care center.
AK68-01559D
DVD-HR773
DVD-HR775
DVD-HR777
DVD
user manual
imagine the possibilities
Thanks you for purchasing this Samsung product.
To receive more complete service, please register
your product at
www.samsung.com/global/register
getting started
Warning
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE THE COVER (OR BACK).
NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS ARE INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
This symbol indicates “dangerous
voltage” inside the product that
presents a risk of electric shock or
personal injury.
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC
This symbol indicates important
SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK)
instructions accompanying the
NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER
product.
SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
Do not install this equipment in a confined space such as a bookcase or similar unit.
WARNING : To prevent damage which may result in fire or electric shock hazard, do not expose this appliance to
rain or moisture.
CAUTION : HDD & DVD RECORDER USES AN INVISIBLE LASER BEAM WHICH CAN CAUSE HAZARDOUS
RADIATION EXPOSURE IF DIRECTED. BE SURE TO OPERATE HDD & DVD RECORDER
CORRECTLY AS INSTRUCTED.
CAUTION
THIS PRODUCT UTILIZES A LASER.
USE OF CONTROLS OR ADJUSTMENTS OR PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN THOSE
SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT IN HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE.
DO NOT OPEN COVERS AND DO NOT REPAIR YOURSELF. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED PERSONNEL.
IMPORTANT NOTE
The mains lead on this equipment is supplied with a moulded plug incorporating a fuse. The value of the fuse is
indicated on the pin face of the plug. If it requires replacing, a fuse approved to BS1362 of the same rating must be
used.
Never use the plug with the fuse cover omitted if the cover is detachable. If a replacement fuse cover is required, it
must be of the same colour as the pin face of the plug. Replacement covers are available from your dealer.
If the fitted plug is not suitable for the power points in your house or the cable is not long enough to reach a power
point, you should obtain a suitable safety approved extension lead or consult your dealer for assistance.
However, if there is no alternative to cutting off the plug, remove the fuse and then safely dispose of the plug. Do not
connect the plug to a mains jack, as there is a risk of shock hazard from the bared flexible cord.
To disconnect the apparatus from the mains, the plug must be pulled out from the mains socket, therefore the
mains plug shall be readily operable.
The product unit accompanying this user manual is licenced under certain intellectual property rights of certain third
parties. This licence is limited to private non-commercial use by end-user consumers for licenced contents.
No rights are granted for commercial use.
The licence does not cover any product unit other than this product unit and the licence does not extend to any
unlicenced product unit or process conforming to ISO/IEC 11172-3 or ISO/IEC 13818-3 used or sold in
combination with this product unit. The licence only covers the use of this product unit to encode and/or decode
audio files conforming to the ISO/IEC 11172-3 or ISO/IEC 13818-3. No rights are granted under this licence for
product features or functions that do not conform to the ISO/IEC 11172-3 or ISO/IEC 13818-3.
_ getting started
Precaution
Important Safety Instructions
Read these operating instructions carefully before using the unit. Follow all the safety instructions listed below.
Keep these operating instructions handy for future reference.
Read these instructions.
2)
Keep these instructions.
3)
Heed all warnings.
4)
Follow all instructions.
5)
Do not use this apparatus near water.
6)
Clean only with dry cloth.
7)
Do not block any ventilation openings, Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
8)
Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus
(including amplifiers) that produce heat.
9)
Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding- type plug. A polarized plug has two
blades with one wider than the other. A grounding-type plug has two blades and a third grounding
prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit
into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet.
10) Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles,
the point where they exit from the apparatus.
11) Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer.
12) Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the
apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury
from tip-over.
13) Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time.
14) Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been
damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects
have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate
normally, or has been dropped.
Handling Cautions
~ Before connecting other components to this HDD & DVD RECORDER, be sure to turn them all off.
~ Do not move the HDD & DVD RECORDER while a disc is being played, or the disc may be scratched or
broken, the HDD & DVD RECORDER internal parts may be damaged.
~ Do not put a flower vase filled with water or any small metal objects on the HDD & DVD RECORDER.
~ Be careful not to put your hand into the disc tray.
~ Do not place anything other than the disc in the disc tray.
~ Exterior interference such as lightning and static electricity can affect normal operation of this HDD & DVD
RECORDER. If this occurs, turn the HDD & DVD RECORDER off and on again with the STANDBY/ON
button, or disconnect and then reconnect the AC power cord to the AC power outlet. The HDD & DVD
RECORDER will operate normally.
~ Be sure to remove the disc and turn off the HDD & DVD RECORDER after use.
~ Disconnect the AC power cord from the AC outlet when you don’t intend to use the HDD & DVD
RECORDER for long periods of time.
~ Clean the disc by wiping in a straight line from the inside to the outside of the disc.
~ Apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing and no objects filled with liquids, such as vases,
shall be placed on the apparatus.
~ The Mains plug is used as a disconnect device and shall stay readily operable at any time.
English _
getting started
1)
getting started
Maintenance of Cabinet
For safety reasons, be sure to disconnect the AC power cord from the AC outlet.
~ Do not use benzene, thinner, or other solvents for cleaning.
~ Wipe the cabinet with a soft cloth.
HDD (Hard Disk Drive)
The hard disk has a high storage density, which enables long recording durations and quick access to written
data. However, it can easily be damaged by shock, vibration or dust and should be kept away from magnets.
To avoid losing important data, observe the following precautions.
~ Do not use the HDD & DVD RECORDER in a place subject to extreme changes in temperature.
~ Do not apply a strong shock to the HDD & DVD RECORDER.
~ Do not place the HDD & DVD RECORDER in a location subject to mechanical vibrations or in an unstable
location.
~ Do not place the HDD & DVD RECORDER on top of a heat source.
~ Do not disconnect the AC power cord while the power is on.
~ Do not attempt to change the hard disk. This may result in a malfunction.
Should the hard disk be damaged, you cannot recover lost data. The hard disk is only a temporary storage
space.
Disc Handling
~ Use discs with regular shapes. If an irregular disc (a disc with a special shape) is
used, this HDD & DVD RECORDER may be damaged.
Holding discs
~ Avoid touching the surface of a disc where recording is performed.
DVD-RAM, DVD±RW and DVD±R
~ Clean with an optional DVD-RAM/PD disc cleaner (LF-K200DCA1 where available). Do not
use cleaners or cloths for CDs to clean DVD-RAM/±RW/±R discs.
DVD-Video, Audio-CD
~ Wipe off dirt or contamination on the disc with a soft cloth.
Cautions on handling discs
~ Do not write on the printed side with a ball-point pen or pencil.
~ Do not use record cleaning sprays or antistatic. Also, do not use volatile chemicals, such as benzene or
thinner.
~ Do not apply labels or stickers to discs. (Do not use discs fixed with exposed tape adhesive or leftover
peeled-off stickers.)
~ Do not use scratch-proof protectors or covers.
~ Do not use discs printed with label printers available on the market.
~ Do not load warped or cracked discs.
Disc Storage
Be careful not to harm the disc because the data on these discs is highly vulnerable to the environment.
~ Do not keep under direct sunlight.
~ Keep in a cool ventilated area.
~ Store vertically.
_ getting started
~ Keep in a clean protection jacket.
~ If you move your HDD & DVD RECORDER suddenly from a cold place to a warm place, condensation may
generate on the operating parts and lens and cause abnormal disc playback. If this occurs, do not connect
the plug to the power outlet and wait for two hours. Then insert the disc and try to play back again.
Disc Specifications
This unit allows you to record and playback high quality digital video on DVD-RAM/±RW/±R discs or on the
HDD.
You can also edit digital images on DVD-RAM/±RW discs or HDD.
❖ DVD-Video
~ A digital versatile disc (DVD) can contain up to 135-minutes of images, 8 audio languages and 32
subtitle languages. It is equipped with MPEG-2 picture compression and Dolby digital surrounding,
allowing you to enjoy vivid and clear theatre quality images in the comfort of your own home.
~ When switching from the first layer to the second layer of a dual-layered DVD Video disc, there may be
momentary distortion in the image and sound. This is not a malfunction of the unit.
~ Once a DVD-RW/±R recorded in Video Mode is finalised, it becomes DVD-Video.
❖ Audio CD
~ An audio disc on which 44.1 kHz PCM Audio is recorded.
~ Plays CD-DA format audio CD-R and CD-RW discs.
~ The unit may not be able to play some CD-R or CD-RW discs due to the condition of the recording.
❖ CD-R/-RW
~ Use a 700MB (80 minutes) CD-R/-RW disc. If possible, do not use a 800MB (90 minutes) or above
disc, as the disc may not play back.
~ If the CD-R/-RW disc was not recorded as a closed session, you may experience a delay in the early
playback time, all recorded files may not play.
~ Some CD-R/-RW discs may not be playable with this unit, depending on the device which was used to
burn them. For contents recorded on CD-R/-RW media from CDs for your personal use, playability may
vary depending on contents and discs.
❖ DVD±R Disc Playback and Recording
~ Once a DVD±R recorded in Video Mode is finalised, it becomes DVD-Video.
~ You can record onto the available space on the disc and perform editing functions such as giving titles
to discs and programmes and erasing programmes before finalising.
~ When programming is erased from a DVD±R, that space does not become available. Once an area on
a DVD±R is recorded on, that area is no longer available for recording, whether the recording is erased
or not.
~ It takes about 30 seconds for the unit to complete recording management information after recording
finishes.
~ This product optimizes the DVD±R for each recording. Optimizing is carried out when you start
recording after inserting the disc or turning on the unit. Recording onto the disc may become impossible
if optimizing is carried out too many times.
~ Playback may be impossible in some cases due to the condition of recording.
~ This unit can play back DVD±R discs recorded and finalised with a Samsung DVD video recorder. It
may not be able to play some DVD±R discs depending on the disc and the condition of the recording.
❖ DVD-RW Disc Playback and Recording
~ Recording and playback can be performed on DVD-RW discs in both the Video and VR Modes.
~ Once a DVD-RW recorded in both the Video and VR Modes is finalised, you cannot perform additional
recording.
~ Once a DVD-RW recorded in Video Mode is finalised, it becomes DVD-Video.
English _
getting started
Disc Type
getting started
~ In both modes, playback can be performed before and after finalisation, but additional recording,
deleting and editing can not be performed after finalisation.
~ If you want to record the disc in VR Mode and then record in V Mode, be sure to execute Format.
Be careful when executing Format because all the recorded data may be lost.
~ A DVD-RW blank disc is initialized to VR Mode when first initialized.
❖ DVD+RW Disc Playback and Recording
~ With DVD+RW discs, there is no difference between DVD-Video format(Video mode) and DVD-Video
Recording format(VR mode).
~ Finalising is generally unnecessary when using a DVD+RW disc.
❖ DVD-RAM Disc Playback and Recording
~ Ensure that the recording mode is set to VR mode. Otherwise, this product will not be able to play the
recording.
~ You cannot play a DVD-RAM in most DVD components due to compatibility issues.
~ Only DVD-RAM standard Version 2.0. discs can be played in this unit.
~ DVD-RAM recorded on this unit may not work with other DVD components. To determine compatibility
with these DVD-RAM discs, refer to the user’s manual for the player.
~ For cartridge type DVD-RAM discs, remove the cartridge and use the disc only.
Disc Copy
Contents Copy Specifications
Contents
HDD  DVD
DVD  HDD
Recorded Video Title
Supported
Supported
Copy Protected Title
Not supported
Not supported
Copy Once Title
Move
(Deletes the Title in the HDD after
copying)
Not supported
Once “Copy Once programme” has been recorded on the DVD disc, this title cannot be copied to HDD
anymore.
But “Copy Once programme” has been recorded on the HDD, this title can be copied to DVD-RW
(VR mode) or DVD-RAM.
Contents Copy Specifications
~
~
~
~
~
Contents
HDD ➔ DVD or USB
DVD ➔ HDD or USB
USB ➔ HDD or DVD
MP3
Supported
Supported
Supported
JPEG(photo)
Supported
Supported
Supported
DivX
Supported
Supported
Supported
CD-DA
Not supported
Supported
Not supported
Disc(CD-R/CD-DA/CD-RW/DVD-RAM, DVD±R(Finalise)/DVD+RW/DVD-RW(Finalise)) ➔ HDD or USB
HDD ➔ DVD-R, DVD-RW(V) or USB
USB ➔ HDD or DVD-R, DVD-RW(V)
PTP USB is not available when you copy to USB.
If the disc is finalised through Disc Manager, it can be compatible with PC as a disc with a UDF file system.
_ getting started
COPY PROTECTION
~ Many DVD discs are encoded with copy protection. Because of this, you should only connect your HDD & DVD RECORDER
directly to your TV, not to a VCR. Connecting to a VCR results in a distorted picture from copy-protected DVD discs.
~ This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by methods claims of certain U.S. patents and
other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright
protection technology must be authorised by Macrovision Corporation, is intended for home and other limited viewing
uses only unless otherwise authorised by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
This HDD & DVD RECORDER can allow you to protect the contents of your discs, as described below.
~ Programme-protected: See page 78 “Locking (Protecting) a Title”
~ Disc-protected: See page 92 “Disc Protection”
❋ DVD-RAM/±RW/±R discs that are incompatible with the DVD-VIDEO format cannot be played with this
product.
❋ For more information on DVD recording compatibility, consult your DVD-RAM/±RW/±R manufacturer.
❋ Use of poor quality DVD-RAM/±RW/±R discs may cause following unexpected problems including,
without limitation, recording failure, loss of recorded or edited materials or damage to the HDD & DVD
RECORDER.
Disc Format
❖ Using MP3 disc
~ CD-R/-RW, DVD-RAM/±RW/±R, HDD, USB with MP3 files recorded with UDF, ISO9660 or JOLIET
format can be playbacked.
~ Only MP3 files with the “.mp3” or “.MP3” extension can be played.
~ For MP3 files recorded with a VBR(Variable Bit Rates), from 32 Kbps to 320 Kbps, the sound may cut in
and out.
~ Playable bit-rate range is from 56 Kbps to 320 Kbps.
~ Each folder can have up to 500 items including files and sub folders.
❖ Using JPEG disc
~ CD-R/-RW, DVD-RAM/±RW/±R, HDD, USB recorded with UDF, ISO9660 or JOLIET format can be
playbacked.
~ Only JPEG files with the “.jpg” or “.JPG” extension can be displayed.
~ Each folder can have up to 500 items including files and sub folders.
~ MOTION JPEG and progressive JPEG are not supported.
❖ Using DivX disc
~ Disc : CD-R/-RW, DVD-RAM/±RW/±R, HDD, USB
~ Video File with following extensions can be played. : .avi, .divx, .AVI, .DIVX
~ DivX Video (Codec) Format : DivX 3.11 DivX 4.x
DivX 5.x (without QPEL and GMC)
~ DivX Audio (Codec) Format : MP3, MPEG1 Audio Layer 2, LPCM, AC3, DTS
~ Supported subtitle file formats: .smi, .srt, .sub, .psb, .txt, .ass
~ Each folder can have up to 500 items including files and sub folders.
~ You cannot play back the disc that is larger than a 720 x 576 pixel resolution.
English _
getting started
Protection
getting started
Do not use the following discs!
~ LD, CD-G, CD-I, CD-ROM and DVD-ROM discs should not be used in this product.
[Note]
Disc types that can be played : CD/CD-R/-RW/MP3/JPEG/DVD-Video/DVD-RAM/±RW/±R.
For a DVD-RW/±R disc, which has been recorded in Video Mode on another component, it can play only
when finalised.
~ Some commercial discs and DVD discs purchased outside your region may not be playable with this
product. When these discs are played, either “No disc.” or “Please check the regional code of the disc.” will
be displayed.
~ If your DVD-RAM/±RW/±R discs is an illegal copy or is not in DVD video format, it may also not be playable.
❖ Disc compatibility
~ Not all brands of discs will be compatible with this unit.
❖ Compatible USB Devices at host port
~ The USB host port acts as the one of desktop or laptop computer.
❋ This product is compatible with mass storage devices(removable storage devices) and PTP devices
(such as digital still cameras)
~ The USB host port provides USB2.0 connectivity and also backward compatibility with USB1.1
(USB1.0) devices.
~ Supported devices at host port
❋ Mass Storage Devices
- Digital Still Camera
- MP3 Player
- Memory stick
- Card Reader (One or Multi-slot Card Reader)
- External Hard disk drive : Only supports FAT32 formatted HDD.
- Others removable storage devices.
❋ PTP ( Picture Transfer Protocol ) devices
- Digital Still Camera (in PTP mode among USB connection modes)
~ This product only supports FAT16/32 file system
~ This product supports up to maximum 4 partitions
~ Notice (Caution)
❋ If you happen to use a bad quality USB cable, the USB device might not be recognized.
❋ The compatibility with MP3 players is somewhat restricted.
- This product can playback only mp3 format contents.
- This product does not support the audio contents encrypted by DRM (Digital Right Management)
❋ Either USB hub device or hub extension connectivity is not supported.
❋ There are lots of different kinds of USB devices.
Some of the USB devices mentioned above might not be compatible with this product.
In other words, the USB host function of this product does not guarantee the compatibility with all of
USB devices.
_ getting started
~ TPL ( Target Peripheral List )
Since this product is not a Windows XP but a embedded USB host system, naturally the supported USB
devices cannot help being limited.
The USB host functionality and compatibility of this product have been proved with following items. (Except
these items , we expect lots of other USB devices will work well with this product )
❋ DSC (Digital Still Camera)
Brand
Samsung
VP-MS11, S800, Pro815, V20, V10, D60, UCA5
Sony
DSC-W50, DSC-R1, DSC-P200, DSC-P150
Olympus
C-70 zoom, SP-700, FE5500, C-470Z
Nikon
Coolpix 7900, Coolpix-p3, Coolpix S2
Panasonic
DMC-FX01, DMC-LX1S, DMC-FZ5
Canon
IXUS 60, IXUS 600, PowerShot A700, IXUS 700, A620, S80
Fuji
Finepix-F700
Vendor
Brand
i-river
N11, T30, T10, Mplayer
Samsung
YP-T8, YP-U2, YP-T9, YP-P2
getting started
Vendor
❋ MP3
❋ Others
M
Product
Vendor
Brand
PMP
COWON
A2
External HDD
DATAgram
DHC-350
Card Reader
Unicon
UC-601R
` Among MP3 players in the list above, those that do not use Mass Storage Class are not supported.
English _
contents
getting started
2
connecting & setting up
22
2
3
12
13
14
16
18
21
22 Connecting the HDD & DVD RECORDER
23 Other type of connecting the Video output
cable
25 Other type of connecting the Audio output
cable
27 Connecting HDMI/DVI to a TV
29 Connecting to AV 1 IN, AV 2 IN, DV input
jack
31 Connecting to USB Devices
system setup
32
32
34
34
36
36
38
39
42
43
On-Screen Menu Navigation
Plug & Play Setup
Setting the Clock
Channel Set
Setting up the Language Options
Setting up the System Options
Setting up the Audio Options
Setting up the Video Options
Setting up the Parental Lock
Setting up the Recording Options
playback
45
45
45
47
48
48
50
50
51
Region code (DVD-Video only)
Logos of Discs that can be played
Disc types that can be played
Playing a Disc
Using the Disc Menu & Title Menu
Using the playback related buttons
Using the INFO button
Selecting the Subtitle Language
Selecting the Soundtracks & Audio
Channels
Changing the Camera Angle
Repeat Play
Zooming-In
Using Markers
Using the Bookmarks
Playing an Audio CD/MP3
Viewing a Picture
Playing a DivX
32
45
51
51
52
53
54
55
60
62
10_ contents
Warning
Precaution
General Features
Before reading the user’s manual
How to use the HDD & DVD RECORDER
Unpacking
Description
Tour of the Remote Control
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
75
Recordable Discs
Recording Formats
Recording Mode
Unrecordable pictures
Recording immediately
Copying from a Camcorder
Making a One Touch Recording (OTR)
Simultaneous Recording and Playback
Time Shift function as a live signal
Making a Timer Recording
Go To Recorded List
editing
77
81
82
83
83
88
89
91
92
Basic Editing (Title List)
Using the Sort function (Title List)
Navigation Menu
Select Contents
Advanced Editing (Playlist)
Copying from HDD to DVD or vice-versa
Copying MP3, JPEG or DivX
Changing the name of Music/Photo/DivX file
Disc Manager
64
77
reference
96
appendix
98
96 Troubleshooting
98 Specifications
English _11
Contents
recording
getting started
General Features
This unit allows you to record and playback high quality digital video on DVD-RAM/±RW/±R discs or on the HDD.
You can also edit digital images on DVD-RAM/±RW discs or HDD.
DD Recording
H
~ DVD-HR773
You can record up to Approx. 264 hours of video (in EP mode (8 Hours)) on the internal 160GB (gigabyte) hard
disk (HDD).
~ DVD-HR775
You can record up to Approx. 421 hours of video (in EP mode (8 Hours)) on the internal 250GB (gigabyte) hard
disk (HDD).
~ DVD-HR777
You can record up to Approx. 534 hours of video (in EP mode (8 Hours)) on the internal 320GB (gigabyte) hard
disk (HDD).
With both recordable DVD and a high-capacity HDD in the same recorder, you have the flexibility to keep
recordings on the HDD for quick access anytime, or record to DVD for archiving or playing on other DVD
players.
Copy between HDD and DVD
You can copy recordings from the HDD to recordable DVD, or from DVD to the HDD.
You can only copy in the same record mode as the source title.
Simultaneous Recording and Playback
Playback and recording for both the DVD and the built-in hard disk drive (HDD) are completely independent.
For example you can record a broadcast programme to either a recordable DVD or the HDD, while watching
another recording you already made on the same DVD or on the HDD.
Automated Quality Adjustment for Timer Recording
If FR mode is selected, the video quality is adjusted automatically so that all video for the scheduled time can
be recorded onto the free disc space. (See page 73)
Copying data from a digital camcorder using a DV input jack
Record DV Device video onto HDD and DVD-RAM/ ±RW/±R discs using the DV input jack
(IEEE 1394-4pin/4pin). (See page 69)
High quality progressive scan
Progressive scanning provides high resolution and flicker free video. The 10-bit 54-MHz DAC and 2D Y/C
Separating Circuitry provides the highest image playback and recording quality. (See page 41)
DivX Certification
DivX, DivX Certified, and associated logos are trademarks of DivX Networks, Inc and are used
under licence.
~ Official DivX® Certified product
~ Plays all versions of DivX® video (including DivX® 6) with standard playback of DivX® media files
HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface)
HDMI reduces picture noise by allowing a pure digital video/audio signal path from the
HDD & DVD RECORDER to your TV.
This HDD & DVD RECORDER supports 576P, 720P, 1080i and 1080P.
Anynet+(HDMI CEC)
Anynet+ is a function that can be used to operate the recorder using a Samsung TV remote
control, by connecting the HDD & DVD RECORDER to a SAMSUNG TV using an HDMI
Cable. (This is only available with SAMSUNG TVs that support Anynet+.)
n
EZ Record Mode
This function allows you Initialise and Finalise a disc automatically. (See page 44)
USB Interface for Data Transfer
You can transfer JPEG, MP3 and DivX file of the MP3 player, USB memory or digital camera to a HDD & DVD
RECORDER using the USB interface. You can also copy JPEG, MP3 and DivX file of the HDD &DVD RECORDER
to MP3 player, USB memory or digital camera using the USB interface.
12_ getting started
Before reading the user’s manual
Make sure to check the following terms before reading the user manual.
Icons that will be used in manual
Icon
Definition
HDD
This involves a function available on the HDD.
DVD
This involves a function available on DVD or DVD±R/-RW(V) discs that have been
finalised.
RAM
This involves a function available on DVD-RAM.
-RW
This involves a function available on DVD-RW.
-R
+RW
+R
This involves a function available on DVD-R.
This involves a function available on DVD+RW.
This involves a function available on DVD+R.
CD-DA
This involves a function available on a data CD (CD-R or CD-RW).
JPEG
This involves a function available on CD-R/-RW, DVD±R/±RW/-RAM discs or HDD.
MP3
This involves a function available on CD-R/-RW, DVD±R/±RW/-RAM discs or HDD.
DivX
This involves a function available on CD-R/-RW, DVD±R/±RW/-RAM discs or HDD.
Caution
NOTE
One-Touch
button
USB
This involves a case where a function does not operate or settings may be cancelled.
This involves tips or instructions on the page that help each function operate.
A function that can be operated by using only one button.
This involves a function available on USB.
About the use of this user’s manual
1) Be sure to be familiar with Safety Instructions before using this product. (See pages 2~9)
2) If a problem occurs, check the Troubleshooting. (See pages 96~97)
Copyright
©2008 Samsung Electronics Co.
All rights reserved; No part or whole of this user’s manual may be reproduced or copied without the prior
written permission of Samsung Electronics Co.
English _13
getting started
S
Z
X
C
V
K
L
o
G
A
D
J
M
N
F
Term
getting started
How to use the HDD & DVD RECORDER
Step 1: Select the disc type or HDD
Please check available disc type before recording.
If you want to repeatedly record on the same disc or you want to edit the disc after recording, select a
rewritable DVD±RW or DVD-RAM type disc. If you want to save a recording without any changes, choose a
non-rewritable DVD±R. You can record files directly to the built-in HDD or edit a recorded file.
Step 2: Format the disc to start recording
Unlike a VCR, the HDD & DVD RECORDER automatically starts formatting when an unused disc is inserted.
This is required for the preparation of recording on a disc.
DVD+R DVD+ReWritable
DVD+R DVD+ReWritable
Using the HDD
Formatting unnecessary.
Using a DVD-RAM
This type of disc can be formatted in DVD-Video Recording format (VR mode). You can edit recorded images
and create a playlist in a specific sequence according to your requirements.
Using a DVD-RW
This type of disc can be formatted in either DVD-Video format (V mode) or DVD-Video Recording format (VR
mode). For an unused disc, a message that asks whether to initialize a disc or not. If you select
“DVD-VR” or “DVD-V”, initialising will be started.
You can play a Video mode disc on various DVD components. A VR mode disc allows more varied editing.
Using a DVD-R
Formatting disc is unnecessary and only V Mode Recording is supported. You can play these types of discs
on various DVD components only when they have been finalised.
Using a DVD+RW
~ For an unused DVD+RW disc, a message that asks whether to format a disc or not. If you select
“DVD+RW”, formatting will be started.
Using a DVD+R
This type of disc will be formatted automatically.
14_ getting started
Step 3 : Recording
There are two different recording methods, Direct Recording and Timer Recording. Timer recording is
classified as follows:
Recording mode : XP (high quality mode), SP (standard quality mode), LP (long recording mode), and EP
(extended mode) according to the recording mode. When recording is set in the FR mode, the best quality
picture is recorded with regards to the remaining time on the disc.
Step 4 : Playing
A DVD consists of sections, called titles, and sub- sections, called chapters.
Step 5: Editing a recorded disc
Editing on discs is easier than conventional video tapes. The HDD & DVD RECORDER supports many
different edit functions, possible only with DVDs and HDD.
With a simple and easy edit menu, you can operate various edit functions, such as delete, copy, rename,
lock, etc., on a recorded title.
Creating a playlist (DVD-RAM/-RW in VR mode, HDD)
With this HDD & DVD RECORDER, you can create a new playlist on a disc and edit it without the original,
pre-existing recording.
Step 6 : Finalising & Playing on other DVD components
To play your DVD on other DVD components, finalising may be necessary. First, finish all editing and
recording operations, then finalise the disc.
When using a DVD-RW disc in VR Mode
DVD discs recorded in VR mode can only be played back in DVD recorders, not players.
When using a DVD-RW disc in Video Mode
The disc should be finalised first to enable playback on anything other than this HDD & DVD RECORDER. No
more editing or recording can be made on the disc once it has been finalised.
To enable recording on the disc again, the disc must be unfinalised.
When using a DVD±R disc
You should finalise the disc to play it on a component other than this HDD & DVD RECORDER. You cannot
edit or record on the disc once it has been finalised.
M
` You can finalise the disc automatically using EZ Record function. (See page 44)
English _15
getting started
You can select the title you want to play in a displayed menu and then immediately start playback.
getting started
Unpacking
Accessories
Check for the supplied accessories below.
USB
PAUSE
HDMI Cable
Video/Audio Cable
RF Cable for TV
REPEAT
Batteries for Remote
Control (AAA Size)
Instruction Manual
Quick Guide
Remote Control
Preparing the Remote Control
Install Batteries in the Remote Control
~ Open the battery cover on the back of the remote control.
~ Insert two AAA batteries. Make sure that the polarities (+ and –) are aligned correctly.
~ Replace the battery cover.
If the remote does not operate properly:
~ Check the polarity +/– of the batteries (Dry-Cell)
~ Check if the batteries are drained.
~ Check if remote sensor is blocked by obstacles.
~ Check if there is any fluorescent lighting nearby.
Dispose of batteries according to local environmental regulations. Do not put them in the household
trash.
To determine whether your television is compatible, follow the instructions below.
1. Switch your television on.
2. Point the remote control towards the television.
3. Press and hold the TV STANDBY/ON button and enter the two-figure code corresponding to the brand
of your television, by pressing the appropriate number buttons.
16_ getting started
Controllable TV Codes
BRAND
BUTTON
SAMSUNG
01, 02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 07, 08, 09
BRAND
BUTTON
NOBLEX
66
NOKIA
74
82
10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18
NORDMENDE
72, 73, 75
BANG & OLUFSEN
57
PANASONIC
53, 54, 74, 75
BLAUPUNKT
71
PHILIPS
06, 55, 56, 57
BRANDT
73
PHONOLA
06, 56, 57
BRIONVEGA
57
PIONEER
58, 59, 73, 74
CGE
52
RADIOLA
06, 56
CONTINENTAL EDISON
75
RADIOMARELLI
57
DAEWOO
19, 20, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34
RCA
45, 46
EMERSON
64
REX
74
FERGUSON
73
SABA
FINLUX
57, 72, 73, 74, 75
06, 49, 57
SALORA
74
FORMENTI
57
SANYO
41, 42, 43, 44, 48
FUJITSU
84
SCHNEIDER
06
GRADIENTE
70
SELECO
74
49, 52, 71
SHARP
36, 37, 38, 39, 48
GRUNDIG
HITACHI
60, 72, 73, 75
SIEMENS
71
IMPERIAL
52
SINGER
57
SINUDYNE
57
JVC
61, 79
LG
06, 19, 20, 21, 22, 78
SONY
LOEWE
06, 69
TELEAVA
LOEWE OPTA
06, 57
TELEFUNKEN
MAGNAVOX
40
THOMSON
METZ
57
THOMSON ASIA
MITSUBISHI
06, 48, 62, 65
MIVAR
TOSHIBA
getting started
AIWA
ANAM
35, 48
73
67, 73, 75, 76
72, 73, 75
80, 81
47, 48, 49, 50, 51, 52
52, 77
WEGA
57
NEC
83
YOKO
06
NEWSAN
68
ZENITH
63
Result: If your television is compatible with the remote control, it will switch off.
It is now programmed to operate with the remote control.
M
` If several codes are indicated for your television brand, try each one in turn until you find one that works.
` If you replace the remote control’s batteries, you must set the brand code again.
Then you can control the television using the following buttons after pressing
the TV button.
Button
TV STANDBY/ON
INPUT SEL.
TV VOL (+ / –)
PROG (, / .)
TV MUTE
Number
M
Function
Used to switch the television on and off.
Used to select an external source.
Used to adjust the volume of the television.
Used to select the desired channel.
Used to toggle the sound on and off.
Used to input number directly.
` The functions listed above does not necessarily work on all televisions. If you encounter problems, operate the
television directly.
English _17
getting started
Description
Front Panel
1
2
8
12
11
10
3
7 6
5 4
9
OPEN/CLOSE button
Opens and closes the disc tray.
DISPLAY
Displays the playing status, time, etc.
PLAY/PAUSE button
Plays a disc or pauses playback.
SEARCH/SKIP buttons
Goes to the next title/chapter/track or goes back to the previous title/chapter/track.
(Playback mode)
Select TV preset Channels. (Stop mode)
STOP button
Stops disc playback.
REC button
Starts recording.
HDD/DVD button
Selects HDD/DVD mode.
DISC TRAY
Opens to accept a disc.
USB HOST
Connects to digital still camera, MP3 player, memory stick, Card reader, external
HDD or other removable storage devices
10
DV-INPUT
Connects to external digital equipment with a DV jack. (such as a camcorder)
11
AV 2 INPUT
Connects to external equipment.
12
STANDBY/ON button
Turns the HDD & DVD Recorder on and off .
18_ getting started
Rear Panel
Fan
1
2
5
3
4
getting started
The fan always revolves when the power
is on. Ensure a minimum of 10 cm clear
space on all sides of the fan when
installing the product.
6
7
8
9 10
1
In from aerial
connector
Connects RF cable from antenna.
2
Out to TV
connector
Connects RF cable to TV antenna input.
3
AV 1 AUDIO IN
4
AV 1 VIDEO IN
5
HDMI OUT
Connects to equipment having HDMI input.
6
COMPONENT VIDEO
OUT
Connects to equipment having Component video input.
7
AV AUDIO OUT
Connects to the audio input of external equipment using audio cables.
8
AV VIDEO OUT
Connects the input of external equipment using a Video cable.
9
DIGITAL AUDIO
OUT(COAXIAL)
Connects to an amplifier having a digital coaxial audio input jack.
10
DIGITAL AUDIO
OUT(OPTICAL)
Connects to an amplifier having a digital optical audio input jack.
Connects the output of external equipment using
an audio cables.
Connects the output of external equipment using
an video cables.
English _19
getting started
Front Panel Display
10
Playback-related,
Open/Close indicator
Lights when playback-related and open/close buttons are selected.
In Disc Indicator
Lights status icon.
DVD VIEW Indicator
Lights when DVD mode is selected.
HDD VIEW Indicator
Lights when HDD mode is selected.
USB VIEW Indicator
Lights when USB mode is selected.
Disc Media Indicator
Lights when a DVD±RW/±R disc is loaded.
TIMER Indicator
Lights to indicate the timer record mode.
HDMI Indicator
Lights to indicate when HDMI is connected.
REC Indicator
Lights in the record mode.
STATUS Indicator
Playing time/clock/current status indicator.
20_ getting started
Tour of the Remote Control
Your HDD & DVD RECORDER remote control will work with Samsung televisions and compatible brands.
Installing batteries in the Remote Control
. Install two AAA size batteries.
Make sure to match the “+” and “–” ends of
the batteries with the diagram inside the
compartment.
TV button
USB
Press this to operate TV.
. Replace the cover.
Assuming typical TV usage, the batteries last
for about one year.
SELECT
(DVD, HDD, USB)
OPEN/CLOSE button
STANDBY/ON button
To open and close the disc tray.
Press to turn the HDD & DVD RECORDER
On/Off.
TV STANDBY/ON button
Press to turn the TV On/Off.
NUMBER buttons
Used to input number directly.
TV/DVD button(Not available)
INPUT SEL. button
Press TV/DVD button to select the Video input on
your TV.
SUBTITLE button
Press this to switch the DVD’s subtitle language.
Select input signal in external input mode
(PROG, AV1, AV2 or DV input)
PAUSE
Playback-related Buttons
TV MUTE/AUDIO button
Forward/Rewind, Search, Skip, Stop, Play/Still.
In TV mode, this operates as sound mute.
Use this to access various audio functions on a
disc. (DVD mode)
TV VOL button
PROG button
TV volume adjustment.
Use this to select a TV programme.
MENU button
RETURN button
Brings up the HDD & DVD RECORDER’s setup
menu.
Press to return to the previous menu.
OK/DIRECTION buttons (▲▼◀▶ buttons)
Used to select or move up/down, left/ right when
setting the menu function.
INFO button
This will display current setting or disc status.
EXIT button
Press to exit the setup screen.
TITLE LIST/DISC MENU button
Use this to enter the View Recording list/disc
menu.
PLAY LIST/TITLE MENU button
Use this to return to the Title menu, or to view the
recorded files list.
A, B, C, D button
Allows access to common function of HDD &
DVD RECORDER.
COPY button
Press this when you copy DVD to HDD and viceversa.
You can also copy files from HDD or DVD to the
USB storage devices and vice-versa.
REC button
Use to make a recording on HDD/DVD-RAM/
±RW/±R discs.
MARKER button
Use this to bookmark a position while playing a disc.
REPEAT
REC MODE button
Use this to set the desired Recording time and
picture quality. (XP/SP/LP/EP).
REC PAUSE/TIME SHIFT button
Use this to pause during recording.
In HDD mode, use this to operate Time shift function.
TIMER/REPEAT button
Press to directly enter the Timer Recording Mode
menu.
Allows you to repeat a title, chapter, track or disc.
English _21
getting started
1. Lift the cover at the back of the remote
control upward as shown.
connecting & setting up
Connecting the HDD & DVD RECORDER
1. Disconnect the aerial cable from your TV and connect it to In from aerial connector on the rear panel of the
HDD & DVD RECORDER.
2. Connect Out to TV connector of the HDD & DVD RECORDER and the aerial input of your TV using the
supplied aerial cable.
3. Use the Video/Audio Cable to connect ANALOG AUDIO OUT(R/L)/VIDEO OUT jacks on the HDD & DVD
RECORDER to the Audio &Video jacks on the TV.
4. Plug in the HDD & DVD RECORDER and TV
5. Turn on the HDD & DVD RECORDER and TV.
6. Press the INPUT SEL. button on your TV remote control until the Video signal from the HDD & DVD
RECORDER appears on the TV screen.
Wall
1
3
2
M
` The RF cable connection of this product sends only signals of TV.You must connect Audio/ Video cables to watch a
DVD from your HDD & DVD RECORDER.
` Power off HDD & DVD RECORDER, then you can watch programmes received through 2 RF cable.
22_ connecting & setting up
Other type of connecting the Video output cable
There are several ways to output video signal. Select one of the following video connecting that best suits you
below.
~ Case 1 : Connecting to a Video (Composite) output jack
~ Case 2 : Component Video output jacks
Case 1 : Connecting to a Video (Composite) output jack
1. Connect a video (Yellow) cable between the VIDEO (yellow) OUT jack on HDD & DVD RECORDER and
VIDEO (yellow) INPUT jack on your TV (or AV amplifier).
~ You will enjoy regular quality images.
2. Connect audio cables (white and red) between the AUDIO OUT jacks on the HDD & DVD RECORDER
and AUDIO IN jacks on TV (or AV amplifier). (See pages 25~26)
Video/Audio Cable
Yellow
Red
White
English _23
connecting & setting up
Component video and Progressive Output Modes
~ Component video output is available only if your TV supports Component video input, respectively.
If Component video output does not work, check the TV connections and the TV input selection settings.
~ Compared to standard interlaced video, progressive scan doubles the amount of video lines fed to your TV,
resulting in a more stable, flicker-free, clear image than interlaced video. This is only available with TVs that
support progressive scan.
~ Progressive Scan Output (576P)
Consumers should note that not all high definition television sets are fully compatible with this product and
may cause artifacts to be displayed in the picture, in case of 576 progressive scan picture problems, It is
recommended that the user switch the connection to the ‘standard definition’ output. If there are questions
regarding our TV set compatibility with this model 576P HDD & DVD RECORDER, please contact our
customer service centre.
connecting & setting up
Case 2 : Component Video output jacks
1. Connect Component video cables(not supplied) between the COMPONENT OUT(Y, Pb, Pr) jacks on HDD
& DVD RECORDER and COMPONENT IN(Y, Pb, Pr) jacks on your TV.
~ You will enjoy high quality and accurate colour reproduction images.
2. Connect audio cables (white and red) between the AUDIO OUT jacks on the HDD & DVD RECORDER
and AUDIO IN jacks on TV (or AV amplifier).
(See pages 25~26).
3. After connecting, refer to the page 41.
Green
M
Blue
Red
` Make sure that the colour coded connections match. The Y, Pb, Pr component output jacks of your HDD & DVD
RECORDER must be connected to the exact corresponding component input jacks on your TV.
` Progressive setting is only available when the Video Out is set to Component.
(See page 41)
24_ connecting & setting up
Other type of connecting the Audio output cable
There are several ways to connect your HDD & DVD RECORDER. Select the audio connection that best suits you
below.
~ Case 1 : Connecting to your TV
~ Case 2 : Connecting to a stereo amplifier with AV output jacks
~ Case 3 : Connecting to an AV amplifier with a digital output jack
Manufactured under licence from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
Case 1 : Connecting to your TV
If your TV has audio input jacks, use this connection.
Yellow
Red
White
English _25
connecting & setting up
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #: 5,451,942 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending.
DTS and DTS Digital Out are registered trademarks and the DTS logos and Symbol are trademarks of DTS, Inc.
© 1996-2007 DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
connecting & setting up
Case 2 : Connecting to a stereo amplifier with AV output jacks
If your stereo amplifier only has AUDIO INPUT jacks (L and R), use the AUDIO OUT jacks
Red
Front(L)
speaker
White
Front(R)
speaker
Case 3: Connecting to an AV amplifier with a digital output jack
If your AV amplifier has a Dolby Digital, MPEG2 or DTS decoder and a digital input jack, use this connection.
To enjoy Dolby Digital, MPEG2 or DTS sound, you will need to set up the audio settings. According to your
amplifier, connect to an optical cable or a coaxial cable. (See pages 38~39)
or
Rear(R)
Rear(L)
Front(L)
Front(R)
Subwoofer
26_ connecting & setting up
Centre
Connecting HDMI/DVI to a TV
If your TV has a HDMI/DVI input, connect HDMI/DVI Adapter cable to a TV. You will enjoy the best quality images
and sounds.
~ Case 1 : Connecting to a TV with HDMI Jack
~ Case 2 : Connecting to a TV with DVI Jack
~ Using the HDMI cable connect the HDMI OUT jack on the rear of the HDD & DVD RECORDER to the HDMI
IN jack of your TV.
~ Press the input selector on your TV remote control until the HDMI signal from the HDD & DVD RECORDER
appears on your TV screen.
M
` If the HDD & DVD RECORDER is connected to your TV in HDMI 1080p output mode, you must use High
speed(category2) HDMI cable.
Case 2 : Connecting to a TV with DVI Jack
~ Using the DVI Adapter cable (not supplied), connect the HDMI OUT jack on the rear of the HDD & DVD
RECORDER to the DVI IN jack of your TV.
~ Using the audio cables, connect the AUDIO (red and white) OUT jacks on the rear of the HDD & DVD
RECORDER to the AUDIO (red and white) IN jacks of your TV. Turn on the HDD & DVD RECORDER and
TV.
~ Press the input selector on your TV remote control until the DVI signal from the HDD & DVD RECORDER
appears on your TV screen.
English _27
connecting & setting up
Case 1 : Connecting to a TV with HDMI Jack
connecting & setting up
Red
J
White
` To use HDMI cable, make the Audio/Video connection before plugging in the power cord or after finishing the “Plug
& Play Setup.” Do not connect the HDMI cable while the “Plug & Play Setup” is progressing.
`
`
`
`
Progressive scan automatically activates when HDMI is connected.
If TV/HDMI Receiver does not support DTS, Audio output is not available when you play disc in DTS format.
You can switch from the HDMI output to other output only in stop mode.
If you use an HDMI cable to connect a Samsung TV to the HDD & DVD RECORDER, you can operate the recorder using the
TV remote control. (This is only available with SAMSUNG TVs that support Anynet+(HDMI-CEC).) (See page 37)
` Please check the ' logo (If your TV has an ' logo, then it supports Anynet+ function.)
M
` HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface)
HDMI is an interface to enable the digital transmission of video and audio data with just a single connector. Since
HDMI is based on DVI, it is completely compatible with DVI. The only difference between HDMI and DVI is that HDMI
supports multi-channel audio. Using HDMI, the HDD & DVD RECORDER transmits a digital video and audio signal
and displays a vivid picture on a TV having an HDMI input jack.
` HDMI connection description
HDMI connector - Both uncompressed video data and digital audio data (LPCM or Bit Stream data).
- Though the HDD & DVD RECORDER uses a HDMI cable, the HDD & DVD RECORDER outputs only a pure digital
signal to the TV.
- If TV does not support HDCP (High -bandwidth Digital Content Protection), snow noise appears on the screen.
` Why does Samsung use HDMI?
Analog TVs require an analog video/audio signal. However, when playing a DVD, the data transmitted to a TV is digital.
Therefore either a digital-to-analog converter (in the HDD & DVD RECORDER) or an analog-to-digital converter (in the TV) is
required. During this conversion, the picture quality is degraded due to noise and signal loss. HDMI technology is superior
because it requires no D/A conversion and is a pure digital signal from the HDD & DVD RECORDER to your TV.
` What is the HDCP?
HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) is a system for protecting DVD content outputted via HDMI from
being copied. It provides a secure digital link between a video source (PC, DVD. etc) and a display device (TV,
projector. etc). Content is encrypted at the source device to prevent unauthorized copies from being made.
28_ connecting & setting up
Connecting to AV 1 IN, AV 2 IN, DV input jack
This allows you to connect your HDD & DVD RECORDER to other external devices and view or record their outputs.
~ Case 1 : Connecting a VCR, Set-Top Box(STB) or DVD player to the AV 1 IN jacks
~ Case 2 : Connecting a Camcorder to the AV 2 IN jacks
~ Case 3 : Connecting a Camcorder to the DV IN jack
Case 1 : C
onnecting a VCR, Set- Top Box(STB) or DVD player to the AV 1 IN jacks
Connecting a VCR or external device to AV1 IN jacks of the HDD & DVD RECORDER. You can record from
connecting & setting up
connected equipment (VCR, STB or DVD).
VCR
STB
DVD
Yellow
M
Red
White
` You can also use the AV 2 IN jacks on the front panel of the HDD & DVD RECORDER.
` Copy protected content cannot be recorded.
English _29
connecting & setting up
Case 2 : Connecting a Camcorder to the AV 2 IN jacks
You can also use the AV 2 IN jacks on the front panel of the HDD & DVD RECORDER.You can record from
connected equipment, such as a camcorder. When an input source is inserted into AV 2 while viewing TV,
the input will be switched to AV 2 automatically. If the input is not selected automatically, use INPUT SEL.
button to select proper input.
Camcorder
Yellow
Red
White
Case 3 : Connecting a Camcorder to the DV IN jack
If your digital camcorder has a DV output jack, connect it to the DV input jack of your HDD & DVD
RECORDER.
Camcorder
M
` If the input is not selected automatically, use INPUT SEL. button to select proper input.
30_ connecting & setting up
Connecting to USB Devices
This allows you to connect your HDD & DVD RECORDER to USB devices.
Connecting a USB memory, MP3 player, Digital Camera to the USB HOST.
connecting & setting up
MP3 Player
Digital Camera
M
` Disconnecting the USB cable during the data transfer will stop the communication and may damage data stored in
the memory.
` When data communication is disrupted due to static electricity, magnetic field or other reason, restart the
programme or try to disconnect / connect the USB Cable again.
English _31
system setup
On-Screen Menu Navigation
The on-screen menus allow you to enable or disable various functions on your HDD & DVD RECORDER.
Press the MENU button to open the on-screen menu and then use the following buttons to navigate through the on
screen menus.
1. ▲▼, ◀▶ buttons
Press these buttons on the remote control to move the selection
bar ▲▼, ◀▶ to cycle through the menu options.
. OK button
Press this button on the remote control to confirm any new settings.
. RETURN button
Press this button on the remote control to return to the Previous
menu screen displayed or to exit the on-screen menu.
HDD & DVD RECORDER
HDD
Library
Timer Record
Disc Manager
Library
Title
\
DivX
\
Music
\
Photo
\
Setup
mMove
sSelect
rReturn
eExit
. EXIT button
Press this button to exit the on-screen MENU.
Plug & Play Setup
Your HDD & DVD RECORDER will automatically set itself up when it is plugged in for the first time. TV stations and
clock will be stored in memory. The process takes a few minutes. Your HDD & DVD RECORDER will then be ready
for use.
1. Connect the RF cable as indicated on page 22.
(Connecting Your HDD & DVD RECORDER to the TV Using the RF
Cable and scart cable.)
To use HDMI cable, make the Audio/Video connection before
plugging in the power cord or after finishing the “Plug & Play Setup”
Do not connect the HDMI cable while the “Plug & Play Setup” is
progressing.
. Plug the HDD & DVD RECORDER into the mains. “AUTO” in the
front panel display flickers.
. Press a number button to select the language.
. Press the OK button to start the auto setup.
Press 1 English
Touche 2 Français
Drücken Sie 3 Deutsch
Pulse 4 Español
Premere 5 Italiano
Druk op 6 Nederlands
Tryck 7 Svensk
Tryk 8 Dansk
Paina 9 Suomi
Trykk 0Norsk
MACROVISION
MP52H
Auto setup will be started.
Yes
32_ system setup
No
. Auto channel scan will be started.
~ The number of stations automatically stored by the HDD & DVD
RECORDER depends on the number of stations that it has found.
Auto channel scan completed successfully.
. Auto Channel Scan is completed. In 3~4 seconds, you will see
Clock Setting Menu. If you want to start Clock Setting immediately,
Press OK button.
M
OK
` Now, your HDD & DVD RECORDER is ready for use. “Plug & Play Setup”
is complete. If you want to change it, you can by Presetting the Stations
manually “Channel Set – Manual Setup” menu. (See page 35)
system setup
` Auto setup function can be performed by pressing STOP ( ) on the
unit continuously for 10 seconds or more during power off with no disc inserted.
. Check the date and time.
~ If it is Correct, press OK button then the date and time will be
saved. If you don’t press the OK button, the date and time will be
saved automatically after 5 seconds.
~ If it is Incorrect, input correct Month, Day, Year, Hour or Minute
using ▲▼, ◀▶ buttons or number buttons. Press OK button
then the date and time will be saved. When you need to change
clock setting, you can set it up manually.
Clock Set
mo.
da.
yr.
hr.
min.
JAN
01
2008
12
00
Tuesday
English _33
system setup
Setting the Clock
This menu is used to set the current time.
You need to set the time to use timer recording.
1. With the unit in Stop mode, press the MENU button.
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select Setup, then press the OK or ▶
button.
HDD & DVD RECORDER
HDD
Library
Timer Record
Disc Manager
Setup
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select System, then press the OK or ▶
button.
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select Clock Set, then press the OK or
▶ button.
Press the ▲▼◀▶ buttons to input Month, Day, Year, Hour or
Minute. Press the number buttons to input clock data directly.
The day of the week is displayed automatically.
Setup
System
\
Channel Set
\
Language
\
\
Audio
\
Video
Parental Lock
\
1
\
Recording
mMove
sSelect
rReturn
eExit
HDD & DVD RECORDER
HDD
Library
Timer Record
Disc Manager
. Press the OK button, then the date and time will be saved. If you
don’t press the OK button, it will not be saved.
System
\
Clock Set
Auto Power Off
: Off
\
Anynet+ (HDMI CEC)
: On
\
\
DivX(R) Registration
Setup
mMove
sSelect
rReturn
eExit
HDD & DVD RECORDER
HDD
Clock Set
Library
Timer Record
Disc Manager
Setup
mo.
da.
yr.
hr.
min.
JAN
01
2008
12
00
Tuesday
<Move
sSelect
rReturn
eExit
Channel Set
Auto Setup
This feature allows you to manually set the HDD & DVD RECORDER tuner band to Antenna or Cable,
whichever you connected to the Antenna In jack during initial setup.
1. With the unit in Stop mode, press the MENU button.
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select Setup, then press the OK or ▶
button.
HDD & DVD RECORDER
HDD
Library
Timer Record
Auto Setup
\
Manual Setup
\
Disc Manager
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select Channel Set, then press the OK
or ▶ button.
Setup
mMove
34_ system setup
Channel Set
sSelect
rReturn
eExit
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select Auto Setup, then press the OK or ▶ button.
The message “Your data will be lost. Press [OK] to continue, [RETURN] to exit.” is displayed.
. Press the OK button. Channel scan will be started.
~ The first frequency band is scanned and the first station found is displayed and stored. And the HDD &
DVD RECORDER searches for the second station and so on.
~ The number of stations automatically stored by the HDD & DVD RECORDER depends on the number
of stations that it has found.
M
` Press the OK button to stop the Auto Setup
You can add preset channel that Auto Channel Search missed. And you can delete a channel you wish to
remove. You can programme the order of channels.
To setup, follow steps 1 to 3 in “Auto Setup“ on page 34.
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select Manual Setup, then press the OK or ▶ button.
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select a PR (programme) you wish to edit, delete, or swap, then press the
COLOUR button.
Select Edit, Delete or Swap.
~ In case of Edit (RED(A) button) : You can add or edit PR
(programme) information. After change PR informations (CH.,
Name, select Save, then press the OK button.
- CH : Tune the channel using ◀▶ buttons.
- Name : Display station name automatically detected in
broadcasting signal. If not detected, you can edit name
by using ▲▼◀▶ buttons.
- MFT (Manual Frequency Tunning) : You can tune up the
channel frequency better using ◀▶ buttons.
~ In case of Delete (GREEN(B) button) : the channel information of
selected PR(programme) will be removed.
Manual Setup
CH 002
004
- - -
- - -
- - -
- - -
- - -
PR 01
02
03
04
05
06
07
Edit
Delete
Swap
Manual Setup
PR
01
CH
002
Name
~ In case of Swap (YELLOW(C) button) : You can swap the
channel information of two PR(programme). For example, if you
wish to swap PR2 and PR5, select swap at PR2, then press the
OK button at PR5.
Name
----------------------
----
MFT
Save
mMOVE sSelect
English _35
system setup
Manual Setup
system setup
Setting up the Language Options
If you set the language options, in advance, they will come up automatically every time you watch a movie.
1. With the unit in Stop mode, press the MENU button.
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select Setup, then press the OK or ▶
button.
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select Language, then press the OK or
▶ button.
Language setup menu will be displayed.
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select the desired language option, press
the OK or ▶ button.
~ Audio : For the disc audio language.
~ Subtitle : For the disc subtitles.
~ Disc Menu : For the disc menu contained on the disc
~ Menu : For the on-screen menu of your HDD & DVD RECORDER.
HDD & DVD RECORDER
HDD
Library
Timer Record
Disc Manager
Language
Audio
: Original
\
Subtitle
: Automatic
\
Disc Menu
: English
\
Menu
: English
\
Setup
mMove
sSelect
rReturn
eExit
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select the desired language, then press the OK or ▶ button.
M
` If the selected language is not recorded on the disc, the original pre-recorded language is selected.
` The selected language will only appear if it is supported on the disc.
Setting up the System Options
This function allows you to setup the system setting.
1. With the unit in Stop mode, press the MENU button.
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select Setup, then press the OK or ▶
button.
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select System, then press the OK or ▶
button.
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select the desired system option, then
press the OK or ▶ button.
HDD & DVD RECORDER
HDD
Library
Timer Record
Disc Manager
System
\
Clock Set
Auto Power Off
: Off
\
Anynet+ (HDMI CEC)
: On
\
DivX(R) Registration
\
Setup
mMove
sSelect
rReturn
eExit
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select the desired item, then press the
OK or ▶ button.
Auto Power Off Setting
This feature automatically turns off your HDD & DVD RECORDER, if you do not press any button for the
selected time.
1. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select Auto Power Off, then press the
OK or ▶ button.
HDD & DVD RECORDER
HDD
Library
System
Clock Set
\
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select the desired item, then press the
\
Auto Power Off Off
: Off
Timer Record
\
Anynet+ (HDMI CEC)
2 Hours : On
OK or ▶ button.
Disc Manager
\
DivX(R) Registration6 Hours
Setup
~ Off : Auto power off is disabled.
~ 2 Hours : HDD & DVD RECORDER will automatically turn off for 2
hours after the last button is pressed.
mMove
sSelect
rReturn
eExit
~ 6 Hours : HDD & DVD RECORDER will automatically turn off for 6
hours after the last button is pressed.
~ If the turn off time set with the Auto Power off function is reached during playback or recording, the
device will operate until the playback or recording is finished.
36_ system setup
Anynet+ (HDMI CEC)
Anynet+ is a function that can be used to operate the recorder using a
Samsung TV remote control, by connecting the HDD & DVD
RECORDER to a SAMSUNG TV using an HDMI Cable. (See pages
27~28)
(This is only available with SAMSUNG TVs that support Anynet+.)
HDD & DVD RECORDER
HDD
Library
Timer Record
Disc Manager
System
\
Clock Set
Auto Power Off
: Off
\
Anynet+ (HDMI CEC)
Off
: On
\
DivX(R) RegistrationOn
\
Setup
1. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select Anynet+ (HDMI CEC), then press
the OK or ▶ button. Anynet+ (HDMI CEC) items will be displayed.
mMove
sSelect
rReturn
eExit
system setup
2. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select On, then press the OK or ▶
button.
For using Anynet+ (HDMI CEC)
1. Connect the HDD & DVD RECORDER to a Samsung TV with an HDMI cable. (See pages 27~28)
. Set the Anynet+ (HDMI CEC) to “On” on your HDD & DVD RECORDER.
(see above)
. Set the Anynet+ function on your TV.
(See the TV instruction manual for more information.)
~ You can operate the HDD & DVD RECORDER by using TV
n
remote control.
DVDR
View TV
(TV buttons that can be used to control the HDD & DVD RECORDER :
Select Device
, , , ,
,
and , buttons, ~ button)
Record
Menu on Device
~ When you press Anynet+ button on the TV remote control, the
Device Operation
Receiver : Off
OSD to the left will appear.
Setup
>Move
sEnter
- Select Device : Use this option to select device.
eExit
- Record : Use this option to start recording or stop recording.
- Menu on Device : Same as MENU button ( ) on the HDD &
<TV Menu>
DVD RECORDER remote control.
- Device Operation : Same as INFO button ( ) on the HDD & DVD RECORDER remote control.
M
` By pressing the STANDBY/ON button of the recorder while watching TV, the TV screen will change to the play
screen.
` If you power on a DVD recorder when the TV power is off, the TV will power On.
` If you turn the TV off, the HDD & DVD Recorder will power off automatically. (When the HDD & DVD Recorder is
recording, it can’t be powered off.)
` If you change the HDMI to other sources (Composite, Component, RF... etc) in TV while playing the DVD disc, the
HDD & DVD Recorder will stop playing. But the HDD & DVD Recorder may keep the DVD disc Recording.
DivX(R) Registration
Please use the Registration code to register this HDD & DVD
RECORDER with the DivX(R) Video On Demand format. For more
information, visit www.divx.com/vod
HDD & DVD RECORDER
HDD
Library
System
\
Clock Set
DivX(R) Video OnAuto
Demand
Power Off
: Off
Timer Record
Anynet+ (HDMI
Your registration
codeCEC)
is: XXXXXXXX: On
Disc Manager
Registration
To learnDivX(R)
more visit
www.divx.com/vod
Setup
OK
sSelect
rReturn
\
\
\
eExit
English _37
system setup
Setting up the Audio Options
You can connect the HDD & DVD RECORDER to an external amp or Home theatre.
Allows you to setup the Audio device and sound status depending on the audio system in use.
You can also set NICAM mode.
1. With the unit in Stop mode, press the MENU button.
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select Setup, then press the OK or ▶
button.
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select Audio, then press the OK or ▶
button.
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select the desired audio option, then
press the OK or ▶ button.
HDD & DVD RECORDER
HDD
Library
Timer Record
Disc Manager
Setup
Setup
System
\
Channel Set
\
Language
\
Audio
\
\
Video
Parental Lock
1
mMove
sSelect
\
\
Recording
rReturn
eExit
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select the desired item, then press the
OK or ▶ button.
Digital Output
~ PCM : Select this when your equipment does not decode Dolby
Digital (or MPEG-2) compatible.
~ Bitstream : Outputs Dolby Digital (or MPEG-2) audio as bitstream.
Select this when your AV receiver or AV amplifier has a Dolby Digital
(or MPEG-2) Decoder.
M
HDD & DVD RECORDER
HDD
Library
Timer Record
Disc Manager
Audio
Digital Output
DTS
: PCM
PCM
Bitstream : Off
\
\
DRC
: On
\
NICAM
: On
\
Setup
` Digital output setting is equally applied to both Dolby Digital and MPEG2 audio. LPCM sound track is always outputted as PCM. It has no
relation with Digital Output setting.
mMove
sSelect
rReturn
eExit
` Be sure to select the correct Digital Output or you will hear no sound or
a loud noise.
DTS
~ Off : Doesn’t output DTS signal. Select this when your AV receiver (or
AV amplifier) does not have a DTS decoder.
~ On : Outputs DTS Bitstream via digital output when you play DTS
track. Select this only when your AV receiver (or AV amplifier) has a
DTS decoder.
M
HDD & DVD RECORDER
HDD
Library
Timer Record
Disc Manager
Audio
Digital Output
DTS
DRC
Off
On
NICAM
: PCM
\
: Off
\
: On
\
: On
\
Setup
` When DTS soundtrack is played, sound does not output from AV Audio
Output.
38_ system setup
mMove
sSelect
rReturn
eExit
DRC
HDD & DVD RECORDER
HDD
Library
Timer Record
Disc Manager
Audio
Digital Output
: PCM
\
DTS
: Off
\
: On
\
: On
\
DRC
NICAM
Off
On
Setup
mMove
sSelect
rReturn
eExit
NICAM
NICAM programmes are divided into 3 types. NICAM Stereo, NICAM
Mono and Bilingual (transmission in another language). NICAM
programmes are always accompanied by a standard mono sound
broadcast and you can select the desired sound by setting NICAM on
or off.
~ On : NICAM mode
~ Off : Only set at this position to record the standard mono sound
during a NICAM broadcast if the stereo sound is distorted due to
inferior reception conditions.
HDD & DVD RECORDER
HDD
Library
Timer Record
Disc Manager
Audio
Digital Output
: PCM
\
DTS
: Off
\
DRC
: On
\
: On
\
NICAM
Setup
mMove
sSelect
Off
On
rReturn
eExit
Setting up the Video Options
This function allows you to setup the video setting.
This function depends on disc type. It may not work for some disc types.
1. With the unit in Stop mode, press the MENU button.
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select Setup, then press the OK or ▶
button.
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select Video, then press the OK or ▶
button. Video setup menu will be displayed.
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select the desired video option, then
press the OK or ▶ button.
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select the desired item, then press the
OK or ▶ button.
HDD & DVD RECORDER
HDD
Library
Timer Record
Disc Manager
Setup
Setup
System
\
Channel Set
\
Language
\
Audio
\
\
Video
Parental Lock
1
mMove
sSelect
\
\
Recording
rReturn
eExit
TV Aspect
Depending on the type of television you have, you may want to adjust the screen setting. (aspect ratio)
~ 4:3 Letter Box : Select when you want to see the total 16:9 ratio
HDD & DVD RECORDER
Video
HDD
screen DVD supplies, even though you have a TV with a 4:3 ratio
\
4:3 Letter: 16:9
Box Wide
Library TV Aspect
screen. Black bars will appear at the top and bottom of the screen.
\
3D Noise Reduction4:3 Pan-Scan
: Off
Timer Record
16:9
Wide
\
HDMI Resolution
: 576P
~ 4:3 Pan-Scan : Select this for conventional size TV when you want to
Disc Manager
\
Component Output
: Interlace
see the central portion of the 16:9 screen. (Extreme left and right side
Setup
\
of movie picture will be cut off.)
~ 16:9 Wide : You can view the full 16:9 picture on your wide screen
mMove
sSelect
rReturn
eExit
TV.
English _39
system setup
This is only active when a Dolby Digital signal is detected.
~ On : When Movie soundtracks are played at low volume or from
smaller speakers, the system can apply appropriate compression to
make low-level content more intelligible and prevent dramatic
passages from getting too loud.
~ Off : You can enjoy the movie with the standard Dynamic Range.
system setup
3D Noise Reduction (motion adaptive noise reduction)
~ Off : Normal
~ On : Provides a clear picture through noise reduction (for recording).
HDD & DVD RECORDER
HDD
Library
Timer Record
Disc Manager
Video
TV Aspect
: 16:9 Wide
\
3D Noise ReductionOff
: Off
\
HDMI Resolution On
: 576P
\
Component Output
: Interlace
\
Setup
mMove
\
sSelect
rReturn
eExit
HDMI Resolution
This setting is used when the unit is connected by HDMI with Display
devices (TV, projector, etc).
HDD & DVD RECORDER
HDD
Library
Timer Record
~
~
~
~
576P : 720 x 576
720P : 1280 x 720
1080i : 1920 x 1080
1080P : 1920 x 1080
Disc Manager
Video
TV Aspect
: 16:9 Wide
\
3D Noise Reduction
: Off
\
HDMI Resolution
Component Output
Setup
mMove
sSelect
: 576P
576P
720P
: Interlace
1080i
1080P
rReturn
\
\
\
eExit
Output selection
~ Connect the HDD & DVD RECORDER to your TV via HDMI.
Set your TV’s input to HDMI.
M
` Progressive scan automatically activates when HDMI is connected. (Please make sure HDMI is indicated on the front
panel of the HDD & DVD RECORDER.)
` Consult your TV User’s Manual to find out if your TV supports Progressive Scan.
If Progressive Scan is supported, follow the TV User’s Manual regarding Progressive Scan settings in the TV’s menu
system.
` The resolutions available for HDMI output depend on the connected TV or projector. For details, see the user’s
manual of your TV or projector.
` When the resolution is changed it may take a few seconds for a normal image to appear.
40_ system setup
Component Output (Progressive Scan)
This function is available when video output is component. This setting
enables you to select progressive mode. To view ‘Progressive scan
mode’, first connect the component cable. (See page 24) Be sure the
Component cables are connected properly.
HDD & DVD RECORDER
HDD
Library
Timer Record
Disc Manager
M
Setup
mMove
: 16:9 Wide
\
3D Noise Reduction
: Off
\
HDMI Resolution
: 576P
\
Component Output
: Interlace
Interlace
Progressive
sSelect
rReturn
\
eExit
` When the HDMI cable is connected, this screen is not displayed.
English _41
system setup
~ Progressive
The message “Do you want to maintain progressive mode? Reverting
in 10 seconds.” will be displayed. Select “Yes” to revert progressive
mode.
~ Interlace
The message “Do you want to maintain interlace mode? Reverting in
10 seconds.” will be displayed. Select “Yes” to revert interlace mode.
Video
TV Aspect
system setup
Setting up the Parental Lock
Z
The Parental Lock function works in conjunction with DVDs that have been assigned a rating which helps you control the
types of DVDs that your family watches. There are up to 8 rating levels on a disc.
1. With the unit in Stop mode, press the MENU button.
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select Setup, then press the OK or ▶
button.
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select Parental Lock, then press the OK
or ▶ button.
When you operate your HDD & DVD RECORDER for the first time,
the “Create the Password” message will be displayed.
HDD & DVD RECORDER
HDD
Library
Timer Record
Disc Manager
Setup
Setup
System
\
Channel Set
\
Language
\
Audio
\
\
Video
Parental Lock
\
1
\
Recording
mMove
sSelect
. Enter the 4-digit password using the number buttons on the remote
control.
The “Confirm the password” message will be displayed. Enter your password again.
rReturn
eExit
If you forgot your password
1. Remove the disc.
. Press and hold the PLAY/PAUSE (p) button on the front panel for 10 seconds or more.
Setting the Rating Level
Library
Timer Record
Disc Manager
Setup
Parental Lock
Rating Level
: Off
Off
Change Password Level8 - Adults
Level7
Level6
Level5
Level4
Level3
Level2
\
\
▶
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select the rating level you want, then
press the OK or ▶ button.
For example, if you select up to Level 6, discs that contain Level 7,
8 will not play. A larger number indicates that the programme is
intended for adult use only.
HDD & DVD RECORDER
HDD
◀
1. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select Rating Level, then press the OK
or ▶ button.
mMove
sSelect
rReturn
eExit
Changing the Password
1. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select Change Password, then press
the OK or ▶ button.
. Enter the 4-digit password using the number buttons on the remote
control. The “Confirm the password” message will be displayed.
. Enter your password again using the number buttons on the remote
control.
M
` After Rating Level has been set, you can change the password.
42_ system setup
HDD & DVD RECORDER
HDD
Library
Timer Record
Parental Lock
Rating Level
: Level7
Change Password
\
\
Disc Manager
Setup
mMove
sSelect
rReturn
eExit
Setting up the Recording Options
Automatic Chapter Creator
CVKL
(V-mode)
A DVD-Video consists of ‘Titles’ and ‘Chapters’. When you record one programme, it makes one Title.
If you use this function, the Title will be divided into Chapters.
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select Recording, then press the OK or
▶ button.
HDD & DVD RECORDER
DVD-RW(V)
Library
Timer Record
Disc Manager
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select Chapter Creator, then press the
OK or ▶ button.
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select Off or On, then press the OK or ▶
button.
~ Off : Select if you do not want use Automatic Chapter Creator.
~ On : S
elect this option to use the Automatic Chapter Creator feature.
Press the EXIT (
Recording
: Off
\
: 6 Hours
\
EZ Record
: Off
\
V-Mode Compatibility
: Off
\
Chapter Creator
EP Mode Time
Off
On
Setup
mMove
sSelect
rReturn
eExit
) button exit the menu.
. Press the REC button to start recording.
(See page 66 about how to set recording speed)
The message “Do you want to create the chapter menu after this recording?” is displayed.
. Press the ◀▶ buttons to select OK, then press the OK button.
~ A new chapter is created according to the selected recording mode. A chapter will be about 5 minutes
long in XP and SP, and about 15 minutes long in LP and EP mode.
. Press the STOP (
) button to stop recording.
. To display the created titles, finalise the disc (See page 94) and then press the TITLE MENU button.
The title menu will be displayed.
~ Finalising is generally unnecessary when using a DVD+RW disc.
. To display the created chapters, select the desired Title and then press the DISC MENU button.
The chapter menu for the selected Title will be displayed.
J
` The Automatic Chapter Creator function does not work during Timer Recording or when you turn the power off.
EP Mode Time Setting
You can select one of four recording modes by pressing the REC
MODE button repeatedly.
In EP(Extended Play) mode, you can set recording time to 6 or 8 hours
with this setting.
~ 6 Hours
~ 8 Hours
HDD & DVD RECORDER
HDD
Library
Timer Record
Disc Manager
Recording
Chapter Creator
EP Mode Time
EZ Record
\
: Off
6 Hours : 6 Hours
8 Hours : Off
V-Mode Compatibility
: Off
\
\
\
Setup
mMove
sSelect
rReturn
eExit
English _43
system setup
1. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select Setup, then press the OK or ▶
button.
system setup
EZ Record
CVKL
(V-mode)
This function allows you to Initialise and Finalise a disc automatically.
1. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select EZ Record, then press the OK or
▶ button.
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select On, then press the OK or ▶
button.
Press the EXIT ( ) button to exit the menu.
. Insert a disc.
If the disc is new, it will initialise automatically.
HDD & DVD RECORDER
HDD
Library
Timer Record
Disc Manager
Recording
Chapter Creator
: Off
\
EP Mode Time
: 6 Hours
\
EZ Record
: Off
\
: Off
\
Off
On
V-Mode Compatibility
Setup
mMove
sSelect
rReturn
eExit
. Press the REC button.
. EZ Record function will automatically Finalise the disc under the following conditions.
~ When you press the OPEN/CLOSE button on your HDD & DVD RECORDER after recording on at least
70% of the disc. The tray will open after the disc has been finalised.
~ The above feature is available only when a DVD-RW(V), DVD+R or DVD-R disc is inserted.
M
` If you insert a new DVD-RW disc, it will be formatted in V mode after auto initialising.
` If you insert a new DVD+RW disc, it will be formatted automatically.
` If you select off, you must initialise (See page 65) and finalise the disc manually in the Disc Manager menu.
(See page 94)
` The length of Recording is different according to recording mode. (See pages 45~46)
V-Mode Compatibility
This feature is about the setup for selecting audios when recording the
NICAM STEREO (Multi-audio) broadcasting on HDD. It does not directly
affect DVD recording of a programme.
~ Off : Both “Dual L” and “Dual R” of the multi-audio broadcasting are
recorded on HDD. Titles recorded on HDD under such setup status
cannot be copied to DVD-R or DVD-RW (V mode).
~ On : Either “Dual L” or “Dual R” of the multi-audio broadcasting is
recorded on HDD. Titles recorded on HDD under such setup status
can be copied to DVD-R or DVD-RW (V mode). “Dual L” and “Dual R”
options can be selected from “Audio Selection.”
HDD & DVD RECORDER
HDD
Library
Timer Record
Disc Manager
Chapter Creator
: Off
\
EP Mode Time
: 6 Hours
\
EZ Record
: Off
\
V-Mode Compatibility
Off
: Off
\
Setup
mMove
On
sSelect
rReturn
eExit
HDD & DVD RECORDER
HDD
Library
Timer Record
Disc Manager
Setup
mMove
44_ system setup
Recording
Recording
Chapter Creator
: Off
\
EP Mode Time
: 6 Hours
\
EZ Record
: Off
\
V-Mode Compatibility
: On
\
Audio Selection
: Dual L
\
sSelect
Dual L
Dual R
rReturn
eExit
playback
This section introduces basic functions of playback and playback by disc type.
Read the following information before playing a disc.
Region code (DVD-Video only)
2
ALL
Logos of Discs that can be played
STEREO CREATOR
Dolby Digital
Stereo
DTS
PAL broadcast system in U.K,
France, Germany, etc.
Digital Audio
DivX
MP3
Disc types that can be played
Disc Types
DVD-VIDEO
Disc Logo
content
Recorded
content
Disc Shape
Max. Playing Time
Single sided(12cm)
240 min.
VIDEO
Double sided(12cm)
480 min.
AUDIO
AUDIO-CD
AUDIO
JPEG
JPEG Image
MP3
MP3 Audio
DivX
DivX Movie
Single sided(8cm)
80 min.
Double sided(8cm)
160 min.
Single sided(12cm)
74 min.
Single sided(8cm)
20 min.
Single sided(12cm)
–
Single sided(8cm)
–
Single sided(12cm)
–
Single sided(8cm)
–
Single sided(12cm)
–
Single sided(8cm)
–
English _45
playback
Both the HDD & DVD RECORDER and the discs are coded by region. These regional codes must match in
order for the disc to play. If the codes do not match, the disc will not play. The Region Number for this HDD
& DVD RECORDER is described on the rear panel of the HDD & DVD RECORDER.
playback
Disc Types
Disc Logo
content
Recorded
content
Disc Shape
Max. Playing Time
Single Layer(12cm)
2 hrs. (SP: Standard Quality)
(4.7GB)
4 hrs. (LP: Long Playback)
1 hr. (XP: Excellent Quality)
DVD-RAM
6 or 8 hrs. (EP: Extended)
AUDIO
VIDEO
2 hr. (XP: Excellent Quality)
Dual Layer(12cm)
(9.4GB)
4 hrs. (SP: Standard Quality)
8 hrs. (LP: Long Playback)
12 or 16 hrs. (EP: Extended)
1 hr. (XP: Excellent Quality)
DVD-RW
AUDIO
VIDEO
12cm (4.7GB)
2 hrs. (SP: Standard Quality)
4 hrs. (LP: Long Playback)
6 or 8 hrs. (EP: Extended)
1 hr. (XP: Excellent Quality)
Single Layer(12cm)
(4.7GB)
DVD-R
2 hrs. (SP: Standard Quality)
4 hrs. (LP: Long Playback)
6 or 8 hrs. (EP: Extended)
AUDIO
VIDEO
1 hr. 50 min (XP: Excellent Quality)
Dual Layer(12cm)
(8.5GB)
3 hrs. 40 min (SP: Standard Quality)
7 hrs. 20 min (LP: Long Playback)
11 or 14 hrs. 40 min (EP: Extended)
1 hr. (XP: Excellent Quality)
DVD+RW
AUDIO
VIDEO
12cm (4.7GB)
2 hrs. (SP: Standard Quality)
4 hrs. (LP: Long Playback)
6 or 8 hrs. (EP: Extended)
1 hr. (XP: Excellent Quality)
Single Layer(12cm)
(4.7GB)
DVD+R
2 hrs. (SP: Standard Quality)
4 hrs. (LP: Long Playback)
6 or 8 hrs. (EP: Extended)
AUDIO
VIDEO
1 hr. 50 min (XP: Excellent Quality)
Dual Layer(12cm)
(8.5GB)
3 hrs. 40 min (SP: Standard Quality)
7 hrs. 20 min (LP: Long Playback)
11 or 14 hrs. 40 min (EP: Extended)
CD-R/-RW
DVD-RAM/-RW/-R
46_ playback
JPEG
MP3
DivX
–
–
Discs that cannot be played
DVD-Video with a region number other than “2” or “ALL”
3.9 GB DVD-R Disc for Authoring.
DVD-RAM/-RW(VR mode) not recorded following the Video Recording Standard
A DVD±R/DVD-RW(V) disc which has been recorded and not finalised in a different manufacturer’s
recorder.
~ DVD-ROM/PD/MV-Disc, etc
~ CVD/CD-ROM/CDV/CD-G/CD-I
~
~
~
~
` This HDD & DVD RECORDER can only operate with discs that are compatible with DVD-RAM Standard Version 2.0.
` Playback and/or recording may not work for some types of discs, or when specific operations, such as angle change
and aspect ratio adjustment, are being performed. Information about the discs is written in detail on the box. Please
refer to this if necessary.
` Do not allow the disc to become dirty or scratched, finger prints, dirt, dust, scratches or deposits of cigarette smoke
on the recording surface may make it impossible to use the disc for recording.
` DVD-RAM/±RW/±R discs may not be able to play on some DVD players, depending on the player, disc and the
condition of the recording.
` Discs with NTSC programmes recorded on them cannot be played and recorded using this product.
Playing a Disc
1. Press the OPEN/CLOSE button.
. Place a disc gently into the tray with the disc’s label facing up.
. Press the OPEN/CLOSE button to close the disc tray.
~ Your HDD & DVD RECORDER closes the disc tray and plays the disc automatically.
~ The HDD & DVD RECORDER does not play discs automatically after being powered on initially.
~ When the HDD & DVD RECORDER is powered on and a disc is in the tray, the unit will be activated and
wait in stop status.
~ Press the PLAY ( ) button to start playback.
~ If you want the unit to play automatically when it is powered on with a disc in the unit, power on with the
PLAY ( ) button.
. Press the STOP (
) button to stop playback.
M
` When you stop playing back a disc, the HDD & DVD RECORDER remembers where you stopped, so when you press
J
` Do not move your HDD & DVD RECORDER while playing, as this may cause damage to the disc.
PLAY ( ) button again, it will pick up where you left off. (Unless the disc is removed or the HDD & DVD RECORDER
is unplugged, or if you press the STOP ( ) button twice.)
` Make sure to press the OPEN/CLOSE button to open or close the disc tray.
` Do not push the disc tray while it is being opened or closed, as this may cause a product malfunction.
` Do not place foreign materials on or in the disc tray.
` Some functions may perform differently or be disabled depending on the disc type.
If this occurs, refer to the instructions written on the disc case.
` Be especially careful that children’s fingers are not caught between the disc tray and the tray chassis when it closes.
` You must only insert one DVD disc at a time. Inserting two or more discs will not allow playback and may cause
damage to the HDD & DVD RECORDER.
English _47
playback
M
playback
Using the Disc Menu & Title Menu
Some type of discs contain a dedicated menu system that allows you to select special functions for title, chapter,
audio track, subtitle, film preview, information on characters, etc.
For DVD-VIDEO Disc
Z
~ Disc Menu : Press the DISC MENU button to enter the disc menu of the disc.
~ Move to the setup menu related to playback operation.
~ You can select audio language and subtitle etc. provided by the disc.
~ Title Menu : Press the TITLE MENU button to move to the title menu of the disc.
~ Press this button if the disc contains more than one title. Some discs may not support the title menu
functionality.
For HDD/DVD-RAM/±RW/±R Disc
SXCVKL
~ Title List
Press the TITLE LIST button. Title List is a list of previously recorded programmes. If a title is deleted, that
title cannot be played again.
~ Play List (HDD/DVD-RAM/-RW(VR))
Press the PLAY LIST button. This refers to a list of user-selected titles. When one playlist is played, only the
scene selected by the user will play and then stop. Since only the information necessary for playing a
desired scene is included in a playlist, even if that playlist is deleted, the original recording will not be
deleted. (only VR mode)
Using the playback related buttons
Searching through a Chapter or Track
SZXCVBKL
During play, press the SEARCH (
HDD/DVD-VIDEO/
DVD-RAM/±RW/±R
) buttons on the remote control.
)X2)X4)X8
) X 16  ) X 32  ) X 128
DivX
)X2)X4)X8
AUDIO CD (CD-DA)
)X2)X4)X8
~ You can scan the programme in reverse.
~ When you press and hold the SEARCH (
) buttons, playback is done at the default speed of X 4.
If you release the SEARCH (
) buttons , playback is performed at a normal speed.
~ To return to normal speed playback, press the PLAY ( ) button.
M
` You can hear sound during forward search(X 2) in HDD/DVD-VIDEO/DVD-RAM/±RW/±R disc.
(No sound is heard during Scan(Search) mode in DivX disc.)
` The speed marked in this function may be different from the actual playback speed.
48_ playback
Skipping Chapters, Titles or Markers
SZXCVBKL
During play, press the SKIP (
) buttons on the remote control.
Slow Motion Play
SZXCVKLD
In pause mode, press the SEARCH (
) buttons on the remote control.
~ If you press the SEARCH ( ) button,
* 1/2  * 1/4  * 1/8
~ If you press the SEARCH ( ) button,
& 1/2  & 1/4  & 1/8
~ To return to normal speed playback, press the PLAY (
) button.
Press and hold the SEARCH (
) buttons during pause, the disc will play slowly at 1/4 speed.
If the button is released, the pause operation will resume.
M
` The speed marked in this function may be different from the actual playback speed.
` Slow motion operates only in the forward direction on DivX discs.
Step Motion Play
SZXCVKLD
Press the SKIP( , ) buttons on the remote control in the pause mode.
~ Each time the button is pressed, a new frame will appear.
When the SKIP( ) button is pressed, the previous frame will be activated.
When the SKIP( ) button is pressed, the next frame will be activated.
~ To return to normal speed playback, press the PLAY ( ) button.
M
` Step motion operates only in the forward direction on DivX discs.
English _49
playback
~ If you press the SKIP ( ) button,
it moves to the beginning of the chapter or Title or marker (HDD/DVD-RAM/-RW(VR mode)).
Pressing the button once again within 3 seconds returns to the beginning of the previous chapter or Title or
marker (HDD/DVD-RAM/-RW(VR mode)).
~ If you press the SKIP ( ) button,
it moves to the next chapter or track or marker (HDD/DVD-RAM/-RW(VR mode)).
playback
Using the INFO button
The INFO function allows you to easily search for a desired scene by accessing title, chapter, or time.
You can also change the subtitle and audio settings and set some features including Angle, Repeat, and Zoom.
Moving to a scene directly using the INFO
SZXCVKLD
If you want to move to a certain title, chapter or time, use this function.
1. Press the INFO button during playback.
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select Search, then press the OK or ▶
button.
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select Title, Chapter or Time.
. Press the ◀▶ buttons or number buttons to select the desired
scene, then press the OK button.
In case of searching a time, enter the time in the sequence of hours,
minutes, and seconds using the number buttons.
Then press the OK button.
M
` This may not work for some discs.
When an audio CD(CD-DA) or an MP3/JPEG disc is inserted, depending
on the disc type, the information display may not appear.
DVD-VIDEO
� Search
O Subtitle
Q Audio
� Angle
P Repeat
� Zoom
>MOVE
Search
� Title
� Chapter
� Time
<Change
Info
\
Off
ENG 2 D 5.1 CH
1/1
Off
Off
sSelect
\
Info
1/3
1/40
00:00:37
sSelect
` The Time Search function does not operate on some discs.
` To make the screen disappear, press the RETURN button.
Selecting the Subtitle Language
ZD
Selects one of the subtitle languages recorded on the disc.
You can also operate this function by pressing the SUBTITLE button on the remote control.
1. Press the INFO button during playback.
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select Subtitle.
. Press the ◀▶ buttons to select the desired subtitle language.
M
` The subtitle display may be different depending on the disc type.
` Some discs allow you to select the language from the disc menu only.
50_ playback
Selecting the Soundtracks & Audio Channels
SZXCKLD
Selects one of the soundtracks recorded on the disc. Also selects the audio channels from recorded TV
programmes.
You can also operate this function by pressing the AUDIO button on the remote control.
1. Press the INFO button during playback.
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select Audio.
playback
. Press the ◀▶ buttons to select the desired soundtracks or audio channel.
M
` Soundtracks or Audio channel may be different because they are disc-specific.
` Some discs allow you to select the audio language from the disc menu only.
Changing the Camera Angle
Z
When a DVD VIDEO contains multiple angles of a particular scene, you can select the Angle function.
1. Press the INFO button during playback.
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select Angle.
. Press the ◀▶ buttons to select the desired angle.
M
` This function is disc-dependent, and may not work on all DVDs.
` This function does not work when a DVD has not been recorded with a multi-camera angle system.
` Displays the current angle and the total angle number.
Repeat Play
Playing Repeatedly (Repeat Playback)
SZXCVKLD
You can also operate this function by pressing the REPEAT button on the remote control.
1. Press the INFO button during playback.
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select the Repeat.
. Press the ◀▶ buttons to select Off, A-B or Title or Chapter you want to play repeatedly, then press the
OK button.
M
` HDD/DVD-RAM/-RW(VR mode), unfinalised DVD±R and unfinalised DVD-RW (V mode) discs will do not repeat a
chapter.
` You can also activate Normal Playback by pressing the EXIT (
) button.
English _51
playback
Repeat A-B
SZXCVKL
1. Press the INFO button during playback.
Repeat
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select Repeat.
A-B >
. Press the ◀▶ buttons to select A-B, then press the OK button.
. Press the OK button at the point where you want the repeat play to
start (A) and press it again at the point where you want the repeat
play to stop (B). Repeat playback of the A-B section starts.
M
>change
sSelect
` If you set point (B) before five seconds of playback has lapsed, the prohibition mark ( ) will appear.
` You can also activate Normal Playback by pressing the EXIT (
) button.
` Audio CDs(CD-DA), MP3 discs and DivX discs do not support the Repeat A-B function.
Zooming-In
SZXCVKL
1. Press the INFO button during playback.
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select Zoom, then press the OK or ▶
button. ( ) will be displayed.
. Press ▲▼◀▶ buttons to move to the area you want to enlarge.
. Press the OK button.
The screen will be enlarged to twice the normal size. Pressing the
OK button again to enlarge the screen size to four times the normal
size.
HDD/DVD-VIDEO/DVD-RAM/±RW/±R
M
normal size → X2 → X4 → X2 → normal size
` When the recording is done in EP mode, the zoom function is not supported except when the recording has been in
V mode.
52_ playback
Using Markers
SXC
(VR mode)
Set marks at scenes you want to see again so that you can start playback from the marked position.
Setting Markers
1. Press the MARKER button during playback.
Marker
01 02 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
N:2
. Press the ▶ button to move to the next position.
. Press the OK button again when the desired scene appears.
~ The number 02 is displayed and the scene is memorized.
<Move
sPlay
rReturn
Cancel
~ HDD, DVD-RAM or DVD-RW (VR Mode) discs have the Marker
function instead of the Bookmark function. Since the scenes may
be displayed as many different pages, numbering is necessary.
If a disc in use is encoded with Disc Protection, Markers cannot be set or deleted, only playback is
available.
Playing back a marker
1. Press the MARKER button during playback.
. Press the ◀▶ buttons to select a marked scene.
. Press the OK or PLAY ( ) button to start playing from the selected scene.
~ If you press the SKIP ( ) button, it moves to the beginning of the marker. Pressing the button once
again within 3 seconds returns to the beginning of the previous marker.
~ If you press the SKIP ( ) button, it moves to the next marker.
Clearing a marker
1. Press the MARKER button during playback.
. Press the ◀▶ buttons to select a marked scene.
. Press the RED(A) button to delete the selected mark.
~ When a marker is cleared while HDD/DVD-RAM/-RW (VR mode) is playing, marker numbers will
change. For example, if the 7th marker is cleared after ten markers are registered, the marker numbers
after the eighth will automatically move back by one and the 8th marker becomes the 7th.
English _53
playback
. Press the OK button when the desired scene appears.
~ The number 01 is displayed and the scene is memorized.
playback
Using the Bookmarks
ZCVKL
(V mode)
Setting Bookmarks
1. Press the MARKER button during playback.
Bookmark
. Press the OK button when the desired scene appears.
~ The number 1 is displayed and the scene is memorized.
1
2
-
-
-
-
-
-
- --
. Press the ▶ button to move to the next position.
. Press the OK button again when the desired scene appears.
The number 2 is displayed and the scene is memorized.
~ Repeat above to bookmark other positions.
~ You can bookmark up to 10 scenes.
M
<Move
` When the disc tray is opened and then closed, bookmarks will disappear.
Playing back a bookmark
1. Press the MARKER button during playback.
. Press the ◀▶ buttons to select a bookmarked scene.
. Press the OK or PLAY (
) button to start playing from the selected scene.
Clearing a bookmark
1. Press the MARKER button during playback.
. Press the ◀▶ buttons to select a bookmarked scene.
. Press the RED(A) button to delete the selected bookmark.
54_ playback
sPlay
Cancel
rReturn
Playing an Audio CD/MP3
Buttons on the Remote Control used for Audio CD(CD-DA)/MP3 playback
2
3
2
5
5 9
6
10
11
7
8
REPEAT
1
SKIP (
page.
) button : Moves to the previous or next
2
Press the SEARCH (
) buttons : Fast Play
(X 2, X 4, X 8) (Audio CD only)
3
STOP (
4
PAUSE (
5
PLAY (
6
▲▼ : Selects a track (song).
7
RED(A) button :
• Creates a playlist or go to playlist.
• Select All : MP3, CD-DA
• Copy : MP3
• CD Import : Audio CD
8
GREEN(B) button : Selects the sort order.
(MP3 disc only)
9
OK button : Plays the selected track (song).
) button : Stops a track(song).
) button : Pauses playback.
), OK button : Plays a track (song).
10 YELLOW(C) button : Selects the play mode. (REPEAT)
11 BLUE(D) button : Selects a contents. (MP3 disc only)
Playing an Audio CD(CD-DA)
1. Insert an audio CD (CD-DA) into the disc tray.
~ The audio CD menu appears and the tracks (songs) are played automatically.
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select the track (song) you want to hear, and then press the OK button.
Audio CD(CD-DA) Screen Elements
➀
CD
Q TRACK01
➁
Music List
1/10
No.
Title
Q TRACK01
Length
4:19
002 TRACK02
3:57
003 TRACK03
3:57
( @ ▶ # )0 0:02:22
004 TRACK04
4:03
� TRACK01
005 TRACK05
4:09
006 TRACK06
5:08
007 TRACK07
3:31
➂
➃
Edit
[/] Previous/Next Page
Play Mode
a Check
➄
➅
Current track (song) : Displays the number of the track
currently being played.
Displays available buttons and a playback time
corresponding to a portion that is currently played.
Displays the current file type and file name.
Display available buttons.
Displays the current play index, total track number.
eExit
Displays the track list (song list).
English _55
playback
1
4
1
PAUSE
playback
Playing an MP3 Disc
1. Insert an MP3 disc into the disc tray.
~ The menu is displayed
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select Library, then press the OK or + button.
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select Music, then press the OK or + button.
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select the track you want to hear, and then press the OK button.
MP3 Screen Elements
➀
CD
Q Song 1.mp3
Music List
1/9
No.
Title
Y ROOT
➁
➂
➃
@▶#
0 0:02:22
9 Song 1.mp3
E ROOT
Edit
Sort
[/] Previous/Next Page
Q Song 1.mp3
3.8 MB
002 Song 2.mp3
3.8 MB
003 Song 3.mp3
5.1 MB
004 Song 4.mp3
9.2 MB
005 Song 5.mp3
5.2 MB
006 Song 6.mp3
10.3 MB
Play Mode
a Check
➄
Size
Contents
eExit
➅
Current track (song) : Displays the name of the track
being played.
Displays available buttons and a playback time
corresponding to a portion that is currently played.
Displays the current file type, file name and folder name.
Displays available buttons.
Displays the current play index, total track number.
Displays the track list (song list).
Repeat CD (CD-DA) & MP3
You can also operate this function by pressing the REPEAT button on the remote control.
During playback, press the REPEAT button repeatedly to select the repeat mode you want.
1. Press the YELLOW(C) button during the Music List playback.
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select desired play mode, then press the
OK or + button.
~ Normal (CD (CD-DA)/MP3) : Tracks on a disc are played in the
order in which they were recorded on the disc.
~
Repeat Track (CD (CD-DA)/MP3)
~
Repeat Folder (MP3)
~
Repeat All (CD (CD-DA)/MP3)
~
Random (CD (CD-DA)/MP3) : The random option plays a
disc’s tracks in random order.
56_ playback
CD
Q TRACK01
Music List
1/10
No.
Title
Q TRACK01
Length
4:19
002 TRACK02
3:57
003 TRACK03
3:57
( @ ▶ # )0 0:02:22
004 TRACK04
Normal
4:03
� TRACK01
005 TRACK05
Repeat Track
4:09
006 TRACK06
Repeat All
5:08
007 TRACK07
Random
3:31
Edit
[/] Previous/Next Page
Play Mode
a Check
eExit
CD Import
o
1. Press the RED(A) button during the Music List playback.
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select CD Import, then press the OK or
+ button.
002 TRACK02
3:57
003 TRACK03
3:57
004 TRACK04
4:03
TRACK01
New�
Playlist
Go To Playlist
Select All
005 TRACK05
4:09
006 TRACK06
5:08
007 TRACK07
3:31
Play Mode
[/] Previous/Next Page
a Check
CD
Selected Items:
eExit
CD Import
Available:
Source : DVD
To : HDD
E HDD
001 TRACK01
002 TRACK02
. Press the RED(A) button to select Start Copy.
The message “Number of file : x” is displayed.
M
Length
4:19
( @ ▶ # )0 0:02:22
CD Import
Edit
. Press the ▶▲▼ buttons to select the target media,then press the
OK button.
~ You can create a new folder by pressing the GREEN(B) button.
. Press the ◄▶ buttons to select Start, then press the OK button.
File copy begins.
~ To cancel the copying in progress, press the EXIT ( ) button.
Music List
1/10
No.
Title
Q TRACK01
� CDDA
� 3.84MB
003 TRACK03
004 TRACK04
005 TRACK05
006 TRACK06
Start Copy
Sort [/] Previous/Next Page
CD
Selected Items: 9.68MB (2)
` The format of a mp3 file after imported is as follows:
� 3.84MB
eExit
To : HDD
Free space 001
: 236623
MB
TRACK01
Number of file
1/2
002 : TRACK02
File Name :003
Song
1.CDA
TRACK03
� CDDA
Unselect All
CD Import
Available: 236724MB
Source
: DVD
Copying...
Bitrate 128kbps
Channel 2(stereo)
Sampling Rate 44KHz
Select All
a Check
E HDD
004 TRACK04
33%
005 TRACK05
006 TRACK06
` DTS CDDA and copy protected discs can not be imported.
Start Copy
New Folder
eExit
New Playlist
oA
You can register a maximum 30 tracks in the playlist.
CD
1. Press the RED(A) button during the Music List playback.
No.
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select New Playlist, then press the OK or
+ button.
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select tracks in the order in which you
want them to play, then press the OK button.
~ If you playlisted a wrong track, press the +▲▼ buttons to select
the wrong track, then press the OK button.
. To store the Playlist, press the RED(A) button.
A new Playlist will be created.
Make Playlist
Title
No.
Playlist
001 TRACK01
001 TRACK10
002 TRACK02
002 TRACK08
003 TRACK03
003 TRACK04
004 TRACK04
004 TRACK07
005 TRACK05
006 TRACK06
007 TRACK07
Save
mMove
Music List
sAdd
rReturn
eExit
CD
Playlist
�
�
No.
Title
Length
Y PLAYLIST
E PLAYLIST01
( @ ▶ # )0 0:00:00
Y PLAYLIST
mMove
sSelect
a Check
eExit
English _57
playback
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select file you want to copy, then press
the MARKER button until a checkmark appears.
~ If you don’t want to copy a certain one of the checked entries,
simply select that entry and press MARKER button to deselect it
until a checkmark disappears.
CD
Q TRACK01
playback
Go To Playlist
oA
1. Press the RED(A) button during the Music List playback.
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select Go To Playlist, then press the OK
or ▶ button.
CD
Playlist
�
�
No.
Title
Length
Y PLAYLIST
E PLAYLIST01
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select the desired playlist folder, then
press the OK button.
The selected tracks are played automatically.
( @ ▶ # )0 0:02:22
Y PLAYLIST
mMove
sSelect
a Check
eExit
Delete the Playlist
oA
1. Press the RED(A) button during the Music List playback.
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select Go To Playlist, then press the OK
or ▶ button.
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select the Playlist you want to delete.
. Press the RED(A) button.
. Press the ◀▶ buttons to select Yes, then press the OK button.
The selected Playlist is deleted.
M
CD
�
Playlist
1/2
�
No.
Title
Y
Length
PLAYLIST
E to
PLAYLIST01
Do you want
delete?
E PLAYLIST02
( @ ▶ # )0 0:00:00
� PLAYLIST01
Delete
<Move
Yes
Edit Playlist
sSelect
No
New Playlist
Music List
rReturn
eExit
` When the player turns off or opens a file /disconnects, any playlists in the disc or USB memory will be deleted.
Go To Edit Playlist
oA
1. Press the RED(A) button during the Music List playback.
CD
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select Go To Playlist, then press the OK
or ▶ button.
No.
Edit Playlist
Title
No.
001 TRACK01
001 TRACK10
002 TRACK02
002 TRACK04
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select the Playlist you want to edit.
003 TRACK03
003 TRACK06
004 TRACK04
004 TRACK07
. Press the GREEN(B) button in playlist mode.
005 TRACK05
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select tracks in the order in which you
want them to play, then press the OK button.
~ If you playlisted a wrong track, press the ▶▲▼ buttons to select
the wrong track, then press the OK button.
007 TRACK07
. To store the Playlist, press the RED(A) button.
Playlist will be edited.
58_ playback
Playlist
006 TRACK06
Save
mMove
Music List
sAdd
rReturn
eExit
Go To Music List
oA
1. Press the BLUE(D) button during the Playlist playback.
The Music List will be displayed.
CD
Q TRACK04
Playlist
1/4
�
No.
Title
Length
Y
PLAYLIST01
R
TRACK04
4:03
002
TRACK02
3:57
( @ ▶ # )0 0:02:22
003
TRACK06
5:08
I TRACK04
� PLAYLIST01
004
TRACK01
4:19
Edit Playlist
New Playlist
Music List
eExit
Using the Sort
A
When you need to change the Sort order of Music List, you can change
it simply.
CD
Q Song 10.mp3
Music List
1/10
No.
1. While the list menu is displayed, press the GREEN(B) button to
select Sort.
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select the desired item, then press the
OK or ▶ button.
~ Name : In alphabetical order
~ Size : In order of audio file size.
M
Title
Size
Y ROOT
Q Song 10.mp3
@▶#
0 0:02:22
9 Song 10.mp3
E ROOT
Name
5.8MB
003 Song 2.mp3
5.1MB
004 Song 3.mp3
Size
Edit
3.8MB
002 Song 1.mp3
9.2MB
005 Song 4.mp3
5.2MB
006 Song 5.mp3
10.3MB
Sort
Play Mode
[/] Previous/Next Page
a Check
Contents
eExit
` Audio CD(CD-DA) is not available.
` You can sort by Name, Length. Sorted list will be resorted in copied order upon reentering Music List.
Select Contents
A
1. Press the BLUE(D) button to select Contents.
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select the contents you want to move,
then Press the OK or ▶ button.
CD
Q Song 10.mp3
Music List
1/10
No.
Title
Size
Y ROOT
Q Song 10.mp3
3.8MB
002 Song 1.mp3
M
` This function is possible only when the disc contains the selected
contents.
` Audio CD(CD-DA) is not available.
@▶#
0 0:02:22
003 Song 2.mp3
9 Song 10.mp3
E ROOT
004 Song 3.mp3
005 Song 4.mp3
006 Song 5.mp3
Edit
Sort
5.8MB
Title 5.1MB
DivX 9.2MB
Music 5.2MB
10.3MB
Photo(With
Music)
Play Mode
[/] Previous/Next Page
a Check
Contents
eExit
Music/Photo Simultaneous Playback
A
You can listen to the music while watching the photo.
1. Press the BLUE(D) button to select Contents.
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select the Photo(With Music), then
Press the OK or ▶ button.
The photo List will be displayed. (See page 60)
CD
Q Song 10.mp3
Music List
1/10
No.
Title
Y ROOT
Q Song 10.mp3
M
music files and photo file.
3.8MB
002 Song 1.mp3
@▶#
0 0:02:22
9 Song 10.mp3
E ROOT
003 Song 2.mp3
004 Song 3.mp3
005 Song 4.mp3
006 Song 5.mp3
` To operate this function, you have to select the disc containing both
Size
Edit
Sort
[/] Previous/Next Page
5.8MB
Title 5.1MB
DivX 9.2MB
Music 5.2MB
10.3MB
Photo(With
Music)
Play Mode
a Check
Contents
eExit
English _59
playback
playback
Viewing a Picture
G
1. Insert a JPEG disc into the disc tray.
~ The menu is displayed
CD
Image 1.jpg
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select Library, then press the OK or ▶
button.
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select Photo, then press the OK or ▶
button.
~ To see the next 8 pictures, press the SKIP ( ) button.
~ To see the previous 8 pictures, press the SKIP( ) button.
Photo List
1/17
ROOT
Image 1.jpg
Image 10.jpg
Image 11.jpg
Image 13.jpg
Image 14.jpg
Image 15.jpg
Image 16.jpg
Edit
Sort
[/] Previous/Next Page
Slideshow
a Check
Contents
eExit
. Press the ▲▼◀▶ buttons to select a desired picture, then press the OK button.
Slide Show
To setup, follow steps 1 and 4 above.
Image 1.jpg
. Press the PLAY ( ) button.
~ Once in the Photo List, you can also operate slideshow in by
pressing the YELLOW(C) button.
1/17
. Press the RED(A) button to select Speed.
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select the slideshow speed, then press
the OK or + button.
The slideshow starts and plays at the selected speed.
~ You can go to Photo List by pressing YELLOW(C) button.
Rotate
>Photo
▶ SlideShow
Zoom
rReturn
Image 1.jpg
eExit
1/17
❖ To stop the Slide Show
Press the GREEN(B), STOP (
) or RETURN button.
Fast
Normal
Slow
Speed
>Photo
Slide Show Off
▶ Slideshow
Photo List
rReturn
eExit
Rotate
To setup, follow steps 1 and 4 above.
5-1. Press the GREEN(B) button to select Rotate.
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select the rotate angle, then press the
OK or + button.
~ Once you select a rotate angle, you can change it by pressing the
RED(A) button.
~ You can go to Photo List by pressing YELLOW(C) button.
Image 1.jpg
>Photo
1/17
Off
Rotate 90
Rotate 180
Rotate 270
Rotate
Zoom
▶ Slideshow
rReturn
eExit
❖ To stop the Rotate
Press the GREEN(B), STOP (
) or RETURN button.
Rotate
Rotate Off
60_ playback
Photo List
rReturn
eExit
Zoom
To setup, follow steps 1 to 4 in page 60.
5-1. Press the YELLOW(C) button to select Zoom.
. Each time the OK button is pressed, the picture is enlarged up to
4x (four times the normal size).
➞ X2 ➞ X4 ➞ X2 ➞ Normal
~ You can go to Photo List by pressing YELLOW(C) button.
playback
❖ To stop the Zoom
Press the GREEN(B), STOP (
) or RETURN button.
Go To Photo List
To setup, follow steps 1 to 4 in page 60.
5-1. Press the RETURN button to go to Photo List.
Using the Sort
When you need to change the Sort order of Photo List, you can
change it simply.
1. While the list menu is displayed, press the GREEN(B) button to
select Sort.
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select the desired item, then press the
OK or ▶ button.
~ Name : In alphabetical order
~ Size : In order of photo file size.
M
CD
Image 1.jpg
Photo List
1/17
ROOT
Image 1.jpg
Image 10.jpg
Image 11.jpg
Image 13.jpg
Name
Image 14.jpg
Size
Image 15.jpg
Image 16.jpg
Edit
Sort
[/] Previous/Next Page
Slideshow
a Check
Contents
eExit
` You can sort by Name and Size. Sorted list will be resorted in copied order upon re-entering Photo List.
Select Contents
To setup, follow steps 1 to 3 in page 60.
1. Press the BLUE(D) button to select Contents.
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select the contents you want to move,
then Press the OK or ▶ button.
CD
Image 1.jpg
ROOT
Image 13.jpg
M
` This function is possible only when the disc contains the selected
Edit
Photo List
1/17
Image 1.jpg
Image 14.jpg
Sort
[/] Previous/Next Page
Image 10.jpg
Image 11.jpg
Image 15.jpg
Title
DivX
Music
Image 16.jpg
Photo
Slideshow
a Check
Contents
eExit
contents.
English _61
playback
Playing a DivX
N Using the MENU button
1. Insert a DivX disc into the disc tray.
~ The menu is displayed
CD
Movie_01.avi
DivX List
1/1
No.
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select Library, then press the OK or ▶
button.
Size
Y ROOT
001 Movie_01.avi
162.8MB
3 DivX
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select DivX, then press the OK or ▶
button.
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select the avi file (DivX), then press the
OK or PLAY ( ) button.
Title
E ROOT
Edit
Sort
Subtitle Enc.
Contents
a Check
eExit
. When DivX file is played, you can use following functions. Pressing the STOP ( ) button once during
playback will display the file list, pressing the button again will exit the menu screen.
DivX Function Description
Function
Skip Scene
Search
Slow Motion Play
Description
During play, press the SKIP (
) buttons,
it moves forward or backward 5 minutes.
During play, press the SEARCH (
(X 2, X 4, X 8)
In pause mode(
(1/2, 1/4, 1/8)
) buttons and press again to search at a faster speed.
), press the SEARCH (
) button on the remote control.
Reverse Slow Motion Play is not available.
Step Motion Play
M
In pause mode(
), press the SKIP (
) button on the remote control in the still mode.
Reverse Step Motion Play is not available.
` Some DivX files created on a personal computer may not be play back. That is why Codec Type, Version and Higher
resolution over specification are not supported.
DivX Subtitle Encoding
1. Press the YELLOW(C) button in the file list.
CD
Movie_01.avi
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select a supported DivX subtitle language
by region, then press the OK button.
DivX List
1/1
No.
Size
Y ROOT
001 Movie_01.avi
3 DivX
E ROOT
Edit
62_ playback
Title
Sort
Western(Windows)
Central(Windows)
Greek(Windows)
Cyrillic(Windows)
Subtitle Enc.
a Check
162.8MB
Contents
eExit
Western
Afrikaans, Basque, Catalan, Danish, Dutch, English, Faeroese, Finnish, French, German,
Icelandic, Indonesian, Italian, Malay, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish, Swahili, Swedish
Central
English, Albanian, Croatian, Czech, Hungarian, Polish, Romanian, Serbian(Latin), Slovak,
Slovenian
Greek
English, Greek
Cyrillic
English, Azeri, Belarusian, Bulgarian, Kazakh, Macedonian, Russian, Serbian, Tatar, Ukrainian,
Uzbek
` If the subtitle language is displayed in broken fonts, change DivX Subtitle to the appropriate region. If is still does not
work, the format is not supported.
Using the Sort
When you need to change the Sort order of DivX List, you can change
it simply.
CD
Movie_01.avi
DivX List
1/3
No.
1. While the list menu is displayed, press the GREEN(B) button to
select Sort.
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select the desired item, then press the
OK or ▶ button.
~ Name : In alphabetical order
~ Size : In order of DivX file size.
M
Title
Size
Y ROOT
3 DivX
001 Movie_01.avi
162.8MB
002 Movie_02.avi
238.2MB
003 Movie_03.avi
118.4MB
E ROOT
Name
Size
Edit
Sort
Subtitle Enc.
Contents
a Check
eExit
` You can sort by Name, Size. Sorted list will be resorted in copied order upon reentering DivX List.
Select Contents
1. Press the BLUE(D) button to select Contents.
CD
Movie_01.avi
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select the contents you want to move,
then Press the OK or ▶ button.
DivX List
1/1
No.
Title
Y ROOT
001 Movie_01.avi
E ROOT
Edit
162.8MB
Title
DivX
Music
Photo
3 DivX
M
Size
Sort
Subtitle Enc.
Contents
a Check
eExit
` This function is possible only when the disc contains the selected contents.
English _63
playback
M
recording
This section shows various HDD & DVD Recording methods.
This unit can record on various types of discs. Before recording, read the following
instructions and select the disc type according to your preference.
Recordable Discs
This HDD & DVD RECORDER can record on the following discs.
HDD
DVD-RAM
DVD-RW
DVD-R
DVD+RW
DVD+R
~ DVD-RAMs and DVD±RWs are rewritable.
~ DVD±Rs are non-rewritable.
Compatibility between Samsung and Other Company’s Recorder
Disc Types
Recording
format
DVD-RAM
VR Mode
Recording Device
Finalising
Additional Recording in
Samsung Recorder
Samsung
X
Recordable
Other Company
X
Recordable
finalised
Not recordable
not finalised
Recordable
finalised
Not recordable
not finalised
Recordable
finalised
Not recordable
not finalised
Recordable
Samsung
VR Mode
Other Company
DVD-RW
Samsung
V Mode
finalised
Not recordable
not finalised
Not recordable
finalised
Not recordable
not finalised
Recordable
finalised
Not recordable
not finalised
Not recordable
Samsung
X
Not recordable in some cases
Other Company
X
Not recordable in some cases
finalised
Not recordable
not finalised
Not recordable in some cases
finalised
Not recordable
not finalised
Not recordable in some cases
Other Company
Samsung
DVD-R
V Mode
Other Company
DVD+RW
–
Samsung
DVD+R
–
Other Company
64_ recording
M
` Finalise
- This closes the DVD-RW/±R so no additional recording can be done.
` Unfinalise
- This allows additional recording on a DVD-RW disc originally recorded on the HDD & DVD RECORDER.
- A DVD-RW disc that has been recorded by DAO(Disc At Once) in a PC cannot be unfinalised.
- A DVD-RW disc that has been recorded in Video Mode of a different maker’s recorder cannot be unfinalised.
- A DVD±R disc cannot be unfinalised.
When you insert an unused disc, the following message appears. Since available functions differ depending on the
disc type, select a disc that best fits your preferences.
DVD-RAM/+R : Formatting will be started automatically.
DVD+RW : Use after formatting the disc.
DVD-RW : Use after initializing the disc.
If you want to change the VR or V mode, refer to Formatting a Disc on page 94.
DVD-R : Formatting disc is unnecessary and only V Mode Recording is supported.
DVD-RAM/-RW(VR mode)
~ This mode allows multiple editing functions (such as deletion of the whole title, partial deletion of a title, etc.).
~ Various editing options using a created Playlist.
DVD-RW(V mode)/-R
~ Chapters will be created automatically when you finalise recording on DVD-RW/-R discs in V mode.
The chapter’s length (interval between chapters) varies according to the recording mode.
~ Simple editing (erasing titles/changing title name).
DVD+RW
~ With DVD+RW discs, there is no difference between DVD-Video format(Video mode) or DVD-Video
Recording format(VR mode).
English _65
recording
Recording Formats
recording
Recording Mode
Select one of four recording modes by pressing the REC MODE button repeatedly while the unit is in Stop mode
for the desired recording time and picture quality. In general, picture quality improves as the recording time
decreases. In FR mode, the most suitable record mode is adjusted automatically, according to remaining time on
the disc and length of the timer recording. This function is selected only one mode in XP, SP, LP and EP modes and
you can use this mode for timer recording.
~ DVD-HR773
Recording Mode
Recording Times
HDD (160GB)
DVD-RAM/±RW/±R
XP
(high quality mode)
Approx. 33 hours
Approx. 1 hour about 8.5 Mbps
SP
(standard quality mode)
Approx. 67 hours
Approx. 2 hours about 4.5 Mbps
LP
(long recording mode)
Approx. 133 hours
Approx. 4 hours about 2 Mbps
Approx. 199 hours
Approx. 6 hours/ about 1.6 Mbps
Approx. 264 hours
Approx. 8 hours/ about 1.2 Mbps
Approx. 33 hours ~ 264 hours
Approx. 1~8 hours
EP
(extended mode)
FR
(Flexible Recording)
~ DVD-HR775
Recording Mode
Recording Times
HDD (250GB)
DVD-RAM/±RW/±R
XP
(high quality mode)
Approx. 53 hours
Approx. 1 hour about 8.5 Mbps
SP
(standard quality mode)
Approx. 106 hours
Approx. 2 hours about 4.5 Mbps
LP
(long recording mode)
Approx. 211 hours
Approx. 4 hours about 2 Mbps
Approx. 316 hours
Approx. 6 hours/ about 1.6 Mbps
Approx. 421 hours
Approx. 8 hours/ about 1.2 Mbps
Approx. 53 hours ~ 421 hours
Approx. 1~8 hours
EP
(extended mode)
FR
(Flexible Recording)
66_ recording
~ DVD-HR777
Recording Times
Recording Mode
XP
(high quality mode)
SP
(standard quality mode)
LP
(long recording mode)
FR
(Flexible Recording)
M
DVD-RAM/±RW/±R
Approx. 68 hours
Approx. 1 hour about 8.5 Mbps
Approx. 135 hours
Approx. 2 hours about 4.5 Mbps
Approx. 270 hours
Approx. 4 hours about 2 Mbps
Approx. 405 hours
Approx. 6 hours/ about 1.6 Mbps
Approx. 534 hours
Approx. 8 hours/ about 1.2 Mbps
Approx. 68 hours ~ 534 hours
Approx. 1~8 hours
` Recording time may vary according to specific conditions.
` 1GB = 1,000,000,000 bytes; actual formatted capacity may be less as the internal firmware uses a portion of the
memory.
` The dual layer DVD±Rs have approximately double the capacity of single layer DVD±Rs. (See page 46)
Unrecordable pictures
Video with copy protection cannot be recorded on this HDD & DVD RECORDER.
When the HDD & DVD RECORDER receives a copy- guard signal while recording, recording stops and the following
message appears on the screen.
Concerning Copy Control Signals
TV broadcasts that contain copy control signals may have one of the following three signal types, Copy-Free,
Copy-Once and Copy-Never. If you want to record a copy-once type programme, use DVD-RW with CPRM
in VR Mode, DVD-RAM, HDD.
Signal type
Copy-Free
Copy-Once
Copy-Never
O
–
–
VR mode
O
O*
–
V mode
DVD-R
DVD-RAM (Ver.2.0)
DVD+RW
DVD+R
HDD
O
O
O
O
O
O
O*
–
–
O*
–
–
–
–
–
–
Media
DVD-RW (Ver.1.1)
DVD-RW(Ver.1.1)
with CPRM
Once “Copy Once” has been recorded, recording cannot be done anymore.
❖ Content Protection for Recordable Media (CPRM)
CPRM is a mechanism that ties a recording to the media on which it is recorded. It is supported by some
HDD & DVD RECORDERs, but not by many DVD players. Each blank recordable DVD has a unique 64-bit
media ID etched in the BCA. When protected content is recorded onto the disc, it can be encrypted with a
56-bit C2 (Cryptomeria) cipher derived from the media ID.
During playback, the ID is read from the BCA and used to generate a key to decrypt the contents of the disc.
If the contents of the disc are copied to other media, the ID will be absent or wrong and the data will not be
decryptable.
English _67
recording
EP
(extended mode)
HDD (320GB)
recording
Recording immediately
Before you start
SXCVKL
1. Check that the disc has enough available space for the recording.
. Press the HDD or DVD button.
If you select DVD, Press the OPEN/CLOSE button and place a recordable disc on the disc tray.
Press the OPEN/CLOSE button to close the disc tray.
Wait until LOAD disappears from the front panel display.
Recording the current TV programme you are watching
1. Press the PROG (
) or number buttons to select the current
programme you want to record.
Record Mode
SP(35:12)
. Press the REC MODE button repeatedly, (or press the REC MODE
button and then press the ▲▼ buttons) to select the recording
speed(quality).
➞ SP ➞ LP ➞ EP ➞ XP
. Press the REC button.
Information concerning the channel is displayed on the screen, then
recording begins.
Icon(!REC) is displayed on the front panel.
HDD
! Recording:
PR 1 [SP]
Recording from external equipment you are watching
1. Press the INPUT SEL. button to select the input source according to the connection you made.
The front panel display changes in the following sequence:
➞ PR Number ➞ AV1 ➞ AV2 ➞ DV
If you connect a digital camcorder, press the INPUT SEL. button to select DV. (See page 69)
. Press the REC MODE button repeatedly, (or press the REC MODE button, then press the ▲▼ buttons)
to select the recording speed (quality).
. Press the REC button.
Information concerning the external input mode is displayed on the screen, then recording begins.
Icon(!REC) is displayed on the front panel.
68_ recording
To pause recording
~
~
~
~
Press the REC PAUSE button to pause a recording in progress.
Press the REC PAUSE button again during pause to resume recording.
You can switch channels by pressing the PROG (
) buttons while recording pauses.
If you select DV mode during rec pause, recording will be stopped.
If you change the input source during rec pause in DV mode , recording will be stopped.
To stop recording
M
` You can not change the recording mode while recording.
` Recording will stop automatically if there is no free space left for recording.
` Up to 99 titles can be recorded onto a DVD-RAM/-RW/-R disc, and up to 48 titles onto a DVD+RW/+R disc.
` Up to 999 titles can be registered on the HDD.
` HDD recording is available for up to 24 hours, and when recording for 24 hours, 3 titles will be recorded with each
being 8 hours in length.
` Recording will stop automatically if a copy protected image is selected.
` DVD-RAM/±RW discs must be formatted before starting to record. Most new discs are sold unformatted.
` Do not use DVD-R authoring discs with this unit.
Copying from a Camcorder
SXCVKL
You may control the Camcorder using the IEEE1394 (DV) interface.
1. Connect the DV output jack of your camcorder to the DV input jack
on the front of your HDD & DVD RECORDER using a DV cable.
Record Mode
SP(35:12)
. Press the HDD or DVD button.
If you select DVD, press the OPEN/CLOSE button and place a
recordable disc on the disc tray. Press the OPEN/CLOSE button to
close the disc tray. Wait until LOAD disappears from the front panel
display.
. Press the REC MODE button repeatedly to select the recording
speed(quality).
DV
. Press the INPUT SEL. button to select DV.
If the input is set to DV, a playback/record menu that enables
camcorder control appears on the top of the screen.
. Select the Play (▶) icon on the upper part of the screen to playback
the camcorder and find the starting position to copy.
. To start recording, use the ◀▶ buttons to select Record ( ● ) icon
in the top side of the screen, then press the OK button.
You can press the REC button of the remote control to start recording.
The DV device is connected
<Move
rReturn
English _69
recording
Press the STOP ( ) button to stop or finish a recording in progress.
~ When using DVD-RAM/±RW/±R discs, the message “Updating the information of disc. Please wait for a
moment” is displayed.
recording
To stop recording
Press the STOP ( ) button to stop or finish a recording in progress.
~ When using DVD-RAM/±RW/±R discs, the message “Updating the information of disc. Please wait for a
moment” is displayed.
M
` To display playback related icons on the screen, press any direction button on the remote control.
Making a One Touch Recording (OTR)
SXCVKL
You can set the HDD & DVD RECORDER to record in 30-minute increments up to 8 hours by pressing the REC
button.
1. Press the HDD or DVD button.
If you select DVD, press the OPEN/CLOSE button and place a
recordable disc on the disc tray. Press the OPEN/CLOSE button to
close the disc tray. Wait until LOAD disappears from the front panel
display.
HDD
! Recording:
PR 1 [SP]
. Press the PROG (
) or number buttons to select the
programme to record.
. Press the REC button to start recording.
. Press the REC button repeatedly to adjust the desired recording
time.
OTR Mode
0:30
➞ 0:30 ➞ 1:00 ➞ ... 8:00 ➞ Off
M
` The timer counter decreases by the minute from 8:00 to 0:00, then the
HDD & DVD RECORDER stops recording.
To stop recording
Press the STOP ( ) button. The message “Do you want to stop recording?” is displayed.
~ Press the ◀▶ buttons to select Yes, then press the OK button.
~ Or press the STOP ( ) button again.
70_ recording
Simultaneous Recording and Playback
S
You can play back from the beginning of the programme you are currently recording.
You can watch the previous title list while recording a programme.
Using the PLAY (
) button
1. With the unit in recording mode, press the PLAY ( ) button.
It plays back the title that you are currently recording from the
beginning.
Playback is not available for 10 seconds from the start of recording.
You can use the SKIP (
) and other playback-related buttons
to view the previous recorded list.
HDD
▶ Play
recording
Stopping Playback / Recording
1. Press the STOP (
) button. Playback screen disappears and the recording in progress screen appears.
. Pressing the STOP (
) button once more will stop the recording.
N Using the TITLE LIST button
HDD
RECORDING...
1. With the unit in recording mode, press the TITLE LIST button.
The above operation is possible from approx.10 seconds or more
after recording starts.
Press the ▲▼/SKIP (
) buttons to select the recording title list.
. Press the OK or PLAY ( ) button.
It plays back the title that you are currently recording from the
beginning.
Title List
4/4
No.
Title
Length
001 JAN/01/2008 17:30 PR 01:00:00
002 JAN/01/2008 21:00 PR 01:00:00
003 JAN/01/2008 23:15 PR 00:30:00
3 MPEG2
004 RECORDING...
00:00:00
4 JAN/02/2008 00:00
1 XP
eExit
N Using the MENU button
1. With the unit in recording mode, press the MENU button.
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select Title, then press the OK button. Title List screen is displayed.
. Press the ▲▼/SKIP (
) buttons to select the recording title list, then press the OK or ▶ button.
It plays back the title that you are currently recording from the beginning.
Stopping Playback / Recording
1. Press the STOP (
) button once, playback screen disappears and the Title List screen appears.
. Pressing the MENU (
) button again, the recording in progress screen appears.
. Pressing the STOP (
) button once more will stop the recording.
M
` No sound is heard during search mode.
` DVD disc or HDD playback is available during HDD recording. However, JPEG, MP3, and DivX files in the disc cannot
be played back.
` HDD playback is available during DVD recording. However, JPEG and MP3 files in the HDD cannot be played back.
English _71
recording
Time Shift function as a live signal
S
This function replays recordings as a live signal.
If you are interrupted while watching a TV programme, simply press the TIME
SHIFT button, and the HDD & DVD RECORDER immediately starts recording
the programme.
Time Shift
>CHANGE
On
sSELECT
Using the Time Shift function
1. Press the TIME SHIFT button on the remote control.
The Time Shift menu is displayed.
. Press the ▲▼ button to select On, then press the OK button.
. While watching the currently broadcasting programme, press the PAUSE ( ) button.
The programme on TV is set in pause mode and the Time Shift Bar is displayed.
. Press the PLAY (
) button to resume watching the programme.
Time Shift Screen Elements
Displays the current media.
1
2
3 4
13:25:04
▶
HDD
5
6
Displays the current status.
14:02:28
Play
Watching Point.
Current play time.
7
5
Live Point.
6
Live Time.
7
Time Shift Time Bar
Buttons on the Remote Control used for Time Shift function
1. PLAY (
) button : Playback.
2. PAUSE (
) button : Pause live TV.
3. SEARCH (
) buttons : Fast play ( X 2, X 4, X 8, X 16, X 32, X 128)
4. SKIP (
) button, STOP (
5. SKIP (
) button : Returns to the point where Time Shift begins.
M
`
`
`
`
) button : Switches to live TV.
The Time Shift is available only when HDD mode is selected.
You can use this function for up to maximum two hours.
You can only play the contents by using the menu when the Time Shift is set to On.
Press TIME SHIFT button to cancel the Time shift function.
72_ recording
Making a Timer Recording
SXCVKL
1. Check if the antenna cable is connected.
2. Check the remaining time of the disc.
3. Check if the date and time are correct.
Make sure the Clock (Setup-Clock Set) is set before you proceed with a timer recording. (See page 34)
1. With the unit in Stop mode, press the TIMER button.
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select the Scheduled List, then press
the OK or ▶ button.
HDD & DVD RECORDER
HDD
Library
Timer Record
\
Setup
mMove
sSelect
rReturn
HDD
To Source
Date
Start
Add a list
End
sSelect
rReturn
JAN 30
JAN 29
To
HDD
Every SAT
MON-FRI
JAN 02
MON-SAT
JAN 01
Every Day
Source
PR 01
Date
Start
Add a list
End
Mode
Date
Start
End
Mode
JAN 01
10 : 54
12 : 54
SP
Recordable Time HDD 108:14 SP
eExit
Scheduled List
Current Time 10:54
No. To Source
No. 01 No Title
Every SUN
Mode
Recordable Time HDD 108:14 SP
Recorded List
HDD
JAN 31
eExit
Scheduled List
Current Time 10:54
No.
\
Recorded List
Disc Manager
. Press the OK button to select Add a list.
. Set timer recording option.
~ Fill the input items using the ▲▼◀▶ buttons and number
buttons.
_ + : Moves to the previous/next item.
▲▼, 0~9 : Sets a value.
~ To : Select the media to record HDD or DVD.
~ Source : The video input source (AV1, AV2), or the broadcasting
channel you want to make a timer recording from.
~ Date : Timer Recording allows setting the recording time within
one month period. Set the recording day. (month/day)
Timer Record
Scheduled List
Title s Save
Recordable Time HDD 108:14 SP
Recorded List
<Move
sSelect
rReturn
eExit
~ Start/End Time : Start and end time of the timer recording.
~ Mode (Recording Mode) :
- FR (Flexible Recording) : Select when you want to set video quality automatically. In FR mode, the
most suitable record mode is adjusted automatically, according to remaining time on the disc and
length of the timer recording. This function is selected only one mode in XP, SP, LP and EP modes.
- XP (high quality) : Select when video quality is important.
- SP (standard quality) : Select to record in standard quality.
- LP (low quality) : Select when a long recording time is required.
- EP (extended) : Select when a longer recording time is required.
~ TITLE : To label the title name, press the RED(A) button.
Title renaming screen appears.
Follow steps 4 and 5 of “Renaming (Labelling) a Title” on pages 77~78.
English _73
recording
N Using the TIMER button
recording
. After selecting the set up value for each mode, press the OK button to select Save.
~ ’ will appear on the front panel. It means that a timer recording is registered.
If the timer settings overlap;
The programmes are recorded in order of priority. After recording of the first programme is complete, the
second programme starts being recorded.
To exit without saving the current setting
Press the EXIT ( ) button.
To return to the previous menu
Press the RETURN button if you don’t want to set a timer recording.
. Turn the power off to finish the Timer Recording setting.
Timer Recording will not work when the power is on.
M
` The timer recording time may differ from the set time depending on disc status and overall timer recording status
(for example, recording times overlapping, or when the previous recording ends within 2 minutes before the start
time of the next recording.)
` You can make up to 12 Timer Recordings.
` If HDD disk has no available recording space, ’ blinks. It means that HDD disk has no space to record.
Editing the Scheduled List
Follow these directions to edit the Scheduled List.
To setup, follow steps 1 to 2 in “Making a Timer Recording” on page 73.
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select the number of the Scheduled List
you want to edit, then press the OK button.
~ Edit the items you want to modify. See the “Making a Timer
Recording” section for more information on Timer Recording
Input items. (See pages 73~74)
. Press the OK button to confirm the edited setting.
. Press the EXIT ( ) button after finishing the operation. The
Scheduled List screen will disappear.
HDD
Scheduled List
Current Time 10:54
No. To Source
--
--- ----
01 HDD PR 01
02 HDD PR 03
03 HDD PR 07
Date
Start
End
-- --
--:--
--:--
--
JAN 01
17:30
18:30
JAN 01
14:00
16:30
JAN 01
13:00
13:20
Mode
SP
SP
SP
Recordable Time HDD 108:14 SP
Add
Delete
Recorded List
>Move
sSelect
rReturn
eExit
Adding a Scheduled List
Follow these directions to add an entry from the Scheduled List
To setup, follow steps 1 to 2 in “Making a Timer Recording” on page 73.
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select the number of the Scheduled List, then press the RED(A) button.
~ Set the items you want to add. See the “Making a Timer Recording” section for more information on
Timer Recording Input items.(See pages 73~74)
. Press the OK button to confirm the added setting.
. Press the EXIT (
74_ recording
) button after finishing the operation. The Scheduled List screen will disappear.
Deleting a Scheduled List
SXCVKL
Follow these directions to delete an entry from the Scheduled List.
To setup, follow steps 1 to 2 in “Making a Timer Recording” on page 73.
. Press the ◀▶ buttons to select Yes, then press the OK button.
~ The selected entry will be deleted from the list.
. Press the EXIT (
) button after finishing the operation. The Scheduled List screen will disappear.
Go To Recorded List
SXCVKL
You can view a list of the programmes that have been recorded.
N Using the TIMER button
1. With the unit in Stop mode, press the TIMER button.
HDD
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select Recorded List,
then press the OK or ▶ button.
. Press the EXIT ( ) button after finishing the operation.
The Recorded List screen will disappear.
Recorded List
No.
To Source
Date
Start
End
Mode
Status
01
HDD PR 01
JAN 01
14:30
15:30
SP
OK
02
HDD PR 01
JAN 01
16:00
16:30
SP
OK
03
HDD PR 01
JAN 01
17:30
18:30
SP
OK
Delete
>Move
Delete All
Scheduled List
sSelect
rReturn
eExit
Information about Recorded List
Informs whether the selected Recorded List performed a Timer Recording successfully.
3-1. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select the number of the Recorded List,
then press the OK button.
HDD
No.
Recorded List
To Source
Date
Start
End
Mode
Status
01 HDD PR 01
JAN 01
17:30
18:30
SP
On
02 HDD PR 01
JAN 01
21:00
22:00
SP
On
OK
JAN 01
SP
On
Timer
rec was23:15
finished23:45
successfully
OK
03 HDD PR 01
OK
OK
Delete
Delete All
Scheduled List
sSelect
rReturn
eExit
Delete Recorded List
Deletes a Recorded List individually.
3-1. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select the number of the Recorded List
you want to delete, and then press the RED(A) button.
. Press the ◀▶ buttons to select Yes, then press the OK button.
HDD
No.
Recorded List
To Source
Date
Start
End
Mode
Status
01 No.
HDD01
PR 01
JAN 01
17:30
18:30
SP
On
02 HDD PR 01
JAN 01
21:00
22:00
SP
On
OK
03 HDD PR 01
JAN 01
23:45
SP
Do you 23:15
want to delete?
On
OK
Yes
Delete
mMove
Delete All
sSelect
OK
No
Scheduled List
rReturn
eExit
English _75
recording
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select the number of the Scheduled List you want to delete, and then press the
GREEN(B) button.
~ You will be prompted with the delete confirm message such as “Do you want to delete?”.
recording
Clear Recorded List
Clears all Recorded List at once.
3-1. Press the GREEN(B) button.
HDD
. Press the ◀▶ buttons to select Yes, then press the OK button.
No.
Recorded List
To
Source
Date
Start
End
Mode
Status
01 HDD PR 01
JAN 01
17:30
18:30
SP
On
02 HDD PR 01
JAN 01
21:00
22:00
SP
On
OK
03 HDD PR 01 Do you
JAN 01
SP list?On
want to23:15
delete a23:45
recorded
OK
Yes
Delete
mMove
No
Delete All
sSelect
OK
Scheduled List
rReturn
eExit
Go to Scheduled List
Switches directly from the Recorded List to the Scheduled List.
3-1. Press the YELLOW(C) button.
HDD
No.
76_ recording
Scheduled List
Current Time 10:54
To Source
Date
Start
Add a list
Recordable Time HDD 105:44 SP
sSelect
End
Mode
Recorded List
rReturn
eExit
editing
Basic Editing (Title List)
Playing the Title
SXCVKL
Follow these instructions to play back a scene from the Title List.
N Using the TITLE LIST button
1. With the unit in Stop mode/Playback mode, press the TITLE LIST
button.
HDD
JAN/01/2008 17:30 PR1
Title
Length
001 JAN/01/2008 17:30 PR 01:00:00
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select an entry you want to play from Title
List, then press the OK or PLAY ( ) button.
The selected entry (title) will be played back.
. To stop title play, press the STOP ( ) button.
The screen returns to the Title List screen.
Title List
1/3
No.
002 JAN/02/2008 21:00 PR 01:00:00
003 JAN/03/2008 23:15 PR 00:30:00
3 MPEG2
4 JAN/01/2008 17:30
1 SP
V-Mode Compatibility
Edit
Sort
Go to
Contents
a Check
eExit
Renaming (Labelling) a Title
SXCVKL
Follow these instructions to rename a title list entry, i.e., to edit the title of a recorded programme.
N Using the TITLE LIST button
1. With the unit in Stop mode/Playback mode, press the TITLE LIST
button.
HDD
JAN/01/2008 17:30 PR1
Title List
1/3
No.
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select an entry you want to rename from
the Title List, then press the RED(A) button.
Length
001 JAN/01/2008 17:30 PR 01:00:00
002 JAN/02/2008 21:00 PR 01:00:00
003 JAN/03/2008 23:15 PR 00:30:00
3 MPEG2
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select Rename, then press the OK or ▶
button.
The Rename screen is displayed.
. Select the desired characters using the ▲▼◀▶ buttons, press the
OK button.
~ Back Space (RED(A) button) : Deletes and moves the cursor
backwards by one position.
~ Space (GREEN(B) button) : Enters a blank and moves the
cursor one forward (to the right).
~ Clear (YELLOW(C) button) : Deletes all the character inputs.
~ Save (BLUE(D) button) : Registers the character inputs.
Title
4 JAN/01/2008 17:30
1 SP
V-Mode Compatibility
Edit
Sort
HDD
JAN/01/2008 17:30 PR1
Delete
Copy
Rename
Protection
Partial
3Delete
MPEG2
Split4 JAN/01/2008 17:30
New1
Playlist
SP
Select
All Compatibility
V-Mode
Edit
Go to
Contents
a Check
eExit
Title List
1/3
No.
Title
Length
001 JAN/01/2008 17:30 PR 01:00:00
002 JAN/02/2008 21:00 PR 01:00:00
003 JAN/03/2008 23:15 PR 00:30:00
Sort
Go to
Contents
a Check
eExit
English _77
editing
This section introduces basic functions of editing and explains both edit functions
for the recording on a disc and edit functions for the entire disc.
Recording or editing might not be completed if an error, such as a sudden power
failure occurs.
Please be aware that material that has been damaged is unable to be reverted
back to its original state.
editing
. Press the BLUE(D) button to select Save.
The changed title name is displayed on the title item of the selected
entry.
HDD
Rename
Sports(A1)
Back Space
mMove
Space
Clear
sSelect
rReturn
Save
eExit
Locking (Protecting) a Title
SXCVKL
Follow these instructions to lock an entry to protect it from accidental editing.
N Using the TITLE LIST button
1. With the unit in Stop mode/Playback mode, press the TITLE LIST button.
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select an entry you want to protect from
the Title List, then press the MARKER button until a checkmark
appears. Repeat this step to select an additional title you want to
protect.
~ If you don’t want to protect a certain one of the checked entries,
simply select that entry and press MARKER to deselect it until
the checkmark disappears.
. Press the RED(A) button to select Edit.
Edit menu is displayed.
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select Protection, then press the OK or
▶ button.
. Press the ◀▶ buttons to select On, then press the OK button.
The key icon on the information window for the selected entry
changes to the locked status. (1;0)
. If you want to cancel the Protection, select Off in step 5 and press
the OK button. The key icon changes to the unlocked status.
(0 ;1)
M
` If you select “Select All” in the Edit menu, all title will be checked.
78_ editing
HDD
JAN/02/2008 21:00 PR1
Title List
2/3
No.
Title
Length
001 JAN/01/2008 17:30 PR 01:00:00
Delete
Copy
3 MPEG2
Protection
New4
Playlist
JAN/02/2008 21:00
1All
Select
SP
V-Mode
Unselect
AllCompatibility
Edit
002 JAN/02/2008 21:00 PR 01:00:00
003 JAN/03/2008 23:15 PR 00:30:00
Sort
HDD
JAN/02/2008 21:00 PR1
Protection
Go to
Contents
a Check
eExit
Title List
2/3
No.
Title
Length
001 JAN/01/2008 17:30 PR 01:00:00
2 items002
are JAN/02/2008
selected 21:00 PR 01:00:00
Set title Protection
mode: 23:15 PR 00:30:00
003 JAN/03/2008
3 MPEG2
4 JAN/02/2008 21:00
On
Off
1 SP
V-Mode Compatibility
Edit
<Move
Sort
sSelect
Go to
Contents
rReturn
eExit
Deleting a Title
SXCVKL
Follow these instructions to delete an entry from the Title List.
N Using the TITLE LIST button
1. With the unit in Stop mode/Playback mode, press the TITLE LIST
button.
. Press the RED(A) button to select Edit.
Edit menu is displayed.
Title List
2/3
No.
Title
Length
001 JAN/01/2008 17:30 PR 01:00:00
Delete
Copy
3 MPEG2
Protection
JAN/02/2008 21:00
New4Playlist
1 All
SP
Select
V-ModeAllCompatibility
Unselect
Edit
002 JAN/02/2008 21:00 PR 01:00:00
003 JAN/03/2008 23:15 PR 00:30:00
Sort
Go to
Contents
a Check
eExit
HDD
JAN/02/2008 21:00 PR1
Title List
2/3
No.
Title
Length
001 JAN/01/2008 17:30 PR 01:00:00
2 items are selected
002 JAN/02/2008 21:00 PR 01:00:00
Do you want
to delete?
003 may
JAN/03/2008
23:15 PR 00:30:00
(Related playlists
be deleted.)
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select Delete, then press the OK or ▶
3 MPEG2
No
4 JAN/02/2008 21:00 Yes
button.
1 SP
~ The message may be different depending on the type of disc.
V-Mode Compatibility
Edit
Sort
Go to
You will be prompted with the confirmation message.
<Move
sSelect
rReturn
HDD, DVD-RAM(VR mode), DVD-RW(VR mode): If a Playlist is
present, the message “Do you want to delete? (Related playlists
may be deleted.)” is displayed.
DVD-RW(V mode)/+RW/±R: If a Playlist is not present, the message “Do you want to delete?” is
displayed.
Contents
eExit
. Press the ◀▶ buttons to select Yes, then press the OK button.
M
` You cannot delete a protected entry. If you want to delete a protected entry, select “Off” in the Title Protection menu.
(See page 78)
` When the Disc Protection has been set to Protected, you cannot delete titles. (See page 92)
` Once an entry is deleted from the Title List it cannot be recovered.
` Once DVD-RW/±R is finalised, it cannot be deleted.
` With DVD±R, titles are only deleted from the menu, however, the Title remains physically on the disc.
` If you select “Select All” in the Edit menu, all title will be checked.
English _79
editing
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select an entry you want to delete in the
Title List, then press the MARKER button until a checkmark
appears. Repeat this step to select an additional title you want to
delete.
~ If you don’t want to delete a certain one of the checked entries,
simply select that entry and press MARKER to deselect it until
the checkmark disappears.
HDD
JAN/02/2008 21:00 PR1
editing
Splitting a Section of a Title (Split)
SK
Follow these instructions to split a section of a Title List entry into two titles.
N Using the TITLE LIST button
1. With the unit in Stop mode/Playback mode, press the TITLE LIST
button.
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select an entry you want to Split from the
Title List, then press the RED(A) button.
The Edit menu is displayed.
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select Split, then press the OK or ▶
button.
HDD
JAN/01/2008 17:30 PR1
Delete
Copy
Rename
Protection
Partial
3Delete
MPEG2
Split4 JAN/01/2008 17:30
New1
Playlist
SP
Select
All Compatibility
V-Mode
Edit
Title
Length
001 JAN/01/2008 17:30 PR 01:00:00
002 JAN/02/2008 21:00 PR 01:00:00
003 JAN/03/2008 23:15 PR 00:30:00
Sort
. Using the playback-related buttons (PLAY ( ), SEARCH (
),
move to a point for splitting and press the OK button.
If it is not the point where you want to split, press the RETURN
button to cancel the selection. Using the playback-related buttons,
move to a point to split and press the OK button.
Title List
1/3
No.
Go to
Contents
a Check
eExit
HDD
JAN/01/2008 17:30 PR1
Split
Title List No. 001
. Press the OK button to select Split.
Split 1
Split 2
00:00:00
00:00:00
▶
. Press the ◀▶ buttons to select Yes, then press the OK button.
The split title is divided into two, and the following titles will be
shifted down by one.
HDD
JAN/01/2008 17:30 PR1
Split
00:00:01
Select
Split
Return
( ) SCAN
+ Play
# Pause
<Move
sSelect
rReturn
HDD
JAN/01/2008 17:30 PR1
Split
Title List No. 001
Title List No. 001
Split 1
Split 2
00:00:00
00:00:20
#
Select
+ Play
# Pause
<Move
sSelect
Yes
Split 2
00:00:00
00:30:55
( ) SCAN
eExit
No
#
Return
rReturn
Split 1
This title cannot be recovered
after splitting.
Do you want to split?
00:00:20
Split
eExit
Select
00:30:55
Split
Return
+ Play
# Pause
<Move
sSelect
( ) SCAN
rReturn
eExit
Deleting a Section of a Title (Partial Delete)
SXCK
(VR mode)
Follow these instructions to delete a section of a Title List entry.
N Using the TITLE LIST button
1. With the unit in Stop mode/Playback mode, press the TITLE LIST
button.
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select an entry you want to edit from the
Title List, then press the RED(A) button.
The Edit menu is displayed.
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select Partial Delete, then press the OK
or ▶ button.
80_ editing
HDD
JAN/01/2008 17:30 PR1
Delete
Copy
Rename
Protection
Partial
3Delete
MPEG2
Split4 JAN/01/2008 17:30
New1
Playlist
SP
Select
All Compatibility
V-Mode
Edit
Title List
1/3
No.
Title
Length
001 JAN/01/2008 17:30 PR 01:00:00
002 JAN/02/2008 21:00 PR 01:00:00
003 JAN/03/2008 23:15 PR 00:30:00
Sort
Go to
Contents
a Check
eExit
. Press the OK button at the starting point.
The image and starting point time is displayed in the section
deletion starting point window.
~ Select the start and end points of the section you want to delete
using the playback related buttons.
~ Playback related buttons : (PLAY ( ), PAUSE ( ),
SEARCH (
)).
. Press the OK button at the end point.
The image and end point time is displayed in the Section deletion
ending point window.
HDD
JAN/01/2008 17:30 PR1
Start
End
00:19:10
00:41:20
00:41:20
End
Return
Delete
( ) SCAN
+ Play
# Pause
<Move
sSelect
rReturn
eExit
HDD
JAN/01/2008 17:30 PR1
Partial Delete
Start
End
00:19:10
00:41:20
Do you want to delete?
(Deleted part will not be restored.)
Yes
No
#
Start
00:41:20
End
Delete
Return
( ) SCAN
+ Play
# Pause
<Move
sSelect
rReturn
eExit
` The length of the section to be deleted must be at least 5 seconds long.
` End point cannot be marked earlier than start point
` The section cannot be deleted when it includes a still picture.
` Press the EXIT (
) button after the operation has finished.
The Title List screen will disappear.
Using the Sort function (Title List)
SXCVKL
When you need to change the Sort order of Title List.
1. While the list menu is displayed, press the GREEN(B) button to
select Sort.
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select the desired item, then press the
OK or ▶ button.
~ Date : In order of when the titles were recorded
~ Name : In alphabetical order
~ Length : In order of recorded title length.
~ Channel Info : In order of Channel information.
M
HDD
JAN/01/2008 17:30 PR1
Title List
1/3
No.
Title
Length
001 JAN/01/2008 17:30 PR 01:00:00
002 JAN/02/2008 21:00 PR 01:00:00
003 JAN/03/2008 23:15 PR 00:30:00
3 MPEG2
Date
4 JAN/01/2008
Name
17:30
1 SP
Length
V-Mode Compatibility
Channel Info
Edit
Sort
Go to
Contents
a Check
eExit
` You can sort by Date, Name, Length, Channel info. Sorted list will be resorted in copied order upon reentering Title
List.
English _81
editing
Title List No. 001
. Press the ◀▶ buttons to select Yes, then press the OK button.
The selected section has been deleted.
M
Start
▶
. Press the ◀▶ buttons to select Delete, then Press the OK button.
. Press the ◀▶ buttons to select Return, then press the OK button
to finish the operation.
Partial Delete
Title List No. 001
editing
Navigation Menu
Time Navigation
SXC
(VR mode)
Using this function, you can search scene minute-by-minute from the recorded title list.
N Using the TITLE LIST button
1. With the unit in Stop mode/Playback mode, press the TITLE LIST
button.
HDD
JAN/01/2008 17:30 PR1
Title List
1/3
No.
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select an entry you want to play from Title
List, then press the YELLOW(C) button.
M
Length
001 JAN/01/2008 17:30 PR 01:00:00
002 JAN/02/2008 21:00 PR 01:00:00
003 JAN/03/2008 23:15 PR 00:30:00
3 MPEG2
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select Time Navigation, then press the
OK or ▶ button.
. Press the ◀▶ buttons to skip one minute at a time and search the
desired scene, then press the OK or PLAY ( ) button.
Title
Playlist
Time Navigation
Scene Navigation
4 JAN/01/2008 17:30
1 SP
V-Mode Compatibility
Edit
Sort
Go to
Contents
a Check
eExit
HDD
3JAN/01/2008 17:30 PR1
` Cursor does not move if the selected recorded title is shorter than 1
Time Navigation
1/3
minute.
` The Navigation function may not work on a disc that has not been
recorded by this device.
00:00
17:30
` An edited title may not display the exact search time.
<Move
18:30
sSelect
rReturn
eExit
Scene Navigation
SXC
(VR mode)
If there is a title composed of markers (See page 53), you can search the desired scene using the Scene
Navigation.
N Using the TITLE LIST button
1. With the unit in Stop mode/Playback mode, press the TITLE LIST
button.
HDD
JAN/01/2008 17:30 PR1
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select an entry you want to play from Title
List, then press the YELLOW(C) button.
M
` Scene Navigation will not operate if a selected title does not have
Length
002 JAN/02/2008 21:00 PR 01:00:00
003 JAN/03/2008 23:15 PR 00:30:00
3 MPEG2
Playlist
Time Navigation
Scene Navigation
4 JAN/01/2008 17:30
1 SP
V-Mode Compatibility
Edit
Sort
Go to
Contents
a Check
eExit
HDD
JAN/01/2008 17:30 PR1
Scene Navigation
Scene No. 1/3
Markers.
01 00:00:05
82_ editing
Title
001 JAN/01/2008 17:30 PR 01:00:00
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select Scene Navigation, then press the
OK or ▶ button.
. Press the ▲▼◀▶ buttons to select desired scene, then press the
OK or PLAY ( ) button.
Title List
1/3
No.
02 00:00:35
03 00:01:05
sPLAY
eExit
Select Contents
SXCVKL
1. Press the BLUE(D) button to select Contents.
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select the contents you want to move,
then Press the OK or ▶ button.
HDD
JAN/01/2008 17:30 PR1
Title List
1/3
No.
Title
Length
001 JAN/01/2008 17:30 PR 01:00:00
002 JAN/02/2008 21:00 PR 01:00:00
003 JAN/03/2008 23:15 PR 00:30:00
M
Title
DivX
Music
Photo
3 MPEG2
` This function is possible only when the disc contains the selected
4 JAN/01/2008 17:30
contents.
1 SP
V-Mode Compatibility
Sort
Go to
Contents
a Check
eExit
Advanced Editing (Playlist)
Creating a Playlist
SXC
(VR mode)
Follow these instructions to create a new playlist entry from a recorded title.
N Using the TITLE LIST button
1. With the unit in Stop mode/Playback mode, press the TITLE LIST
button.
. Press the RED(A) button.
The Edit menu is displayed.
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select New Playlist, then press the OK
or ▶ button.
The Make Playlist screen is displayed.
. Press the OK button at the start point.
~ The image and time at the start point is displayed on the Start
window.
~ The yellow-coloured selection bar moves to the End item.
~ Select the starting point of the section from which you want to
create a new scene using the playback related buttons
(PLAY ( ), SEARCH (
), SKIP (
)).
. Press the OK button at the end point.
~ The image and end point time is displayed in the End window.
~ The yellow-coloured selection bar moves to the Make item.
. Press the ◀▶ buttons to select Make, then press the OK button.
~ To make a scene for the playlist.
A new Make scene screen is displayed. Repeat steps 4~6 to
make a new scene for the playlist.
A new scene will be added to the current playlist.
You can check and see all the scenes on the Edit playlist screen.
(See page 85)
~ To make a new playlist.
Repeat steps 1~6 if you want to make a new playlist.
HDD
JAN/01/2008 17:30 PR1
Delete
Copy
Rename
Protection
Partial
3Delete
MPEG2
Split4 JAN/01/2008 17:30
New1
Playlist
SP
Select
All Compatibility
V-Mode
Edit
Title List
1/3
No.
Title
001 JAN/01/2008 17:30 PR 01:00:00
002 JAN/02/2008 21:00 PR 01:00:00
003 JAN/03/2008 23:15 PR 00:30:00
Sort
Length
Go to
Contents
a Check
eExit
HDD
New Playlist
Make Playlist
Scene No. 001
Title List : 1/3
Start
End
00:08:38
00:00:00
▶
00:08:38
Start
End
+ Play
# Pause
<Move
sSelect
Make
Return
( ) SCAN
[ ] SKIP
rReturn
eExit
HDD
New Playlist
Make Playlist
Scene No. 001
Title List : 1/3
Start
End
00:08:38
00:11:03
#
Start
00:11:03
End
+ Play
# Pause
<Move
sSelect
Make
Return
( ) SCAN
[ ] SKIP
rReturn
eExit
. Press the ◀▶ buttons to select Return, then press the OK button to finish the operation.
M
` You can create up to 99 playlist entries.
` Depending on the kind of disc, the displayed screen may have a slight difference.
English _83
editing
Edit
editing
Playing Entries in the Playlist
SXC
(VR mode)
Follow these instructions to play the playlist entries.
N Using the PLAY LIST button
1. With the unit in Stop mode/Playback mode, press the PLAY LIST
button.
HDD
JAN/02/2008 13:47
Playlist
1/3
No.
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select the playlist you want to play, then
press the OK or PLAY ( ) button.
Title
Length
001 JAN/02/2008 13:47
00:06:09
002 JAN/02/2008 13:51
00:03:33
003 JAN/02/2008 14:08
00:01:54
� PLAYLIST
. Press the STOP ( ) button to stop playing.
The screen returns to the Playlist screen.
4 JAN/02/2008 13:47
� 6 Scenes
Edit
Sort
Title List
a Check
eExit
Renaming a Playlist Entry
SXC
(VR mode)
Follow these instructions to rename a playlist entry, i.e. to edit the title of a playlist entry.
N Using the PLAY LIST button
1. With the unit in Stop mode/Playback mode, press the PLAY LIST
button.
HDD
JAN/02/2008 13:47
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select the title you want to Rename from
the Playlist, then press the RED(A) button.
The Edit menu is displayed.
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select Rename, then press the OK or ▶
button.
The Rename screen is displayed.
. Select the desired characters using the ▲▼◀▶ buttons, then
press the OK button.
~ Back Space (RED(A) button) : Deletes and moves the cursor
backwards by one position.
~ Space (GREEN(B) button) : Enters a blank and moves the
cursor one forward (to the right).
~ Clear (YELLOW(C) button) : Deletes all the character inputs.
~ Save (BLUE(D) button) : Registers the character inputs.
. Press the BLUE(D) button to select Save.
The changed title is displayed in the title field of the selected playlist
entry.
Title
Length
001 JAN/02/2008 13:47
00:06:09
002 JAN/02/2008 13:51
00:03:33
003 JAN/02/2008 14:08
00:01:54
� PLAYLIST
4 JAN/02/2008 13:47
� 6 Scenes
Edit
Sort
Title List
a Check
HDD
JAN/02/2008 13:47
Delete
Copy
� PLAYLIST
Rename
Edit 4
Playlist
JAN/02/2008 13:47
New�
Playlist
6 Scenes
Select All
Edit
eExit
Playlist
1/3
No.
Sort
Title
Length
001 JAN/02/2008 13:47
00:06:09
002 JAN/02/2008 13:51
00:03:33
003 JAN/02/2008 14:08
00:01:54
Title List
a Check
HDD
eExit
Rename
Dolphin
Back Space
mMove
84_ editing
Playlist
1/3
No.
Space
sSelect
Clear
rReturn
Save
eExit
Editing a Scene for the Playlist
SXC
(VR mode)
Follow these instructions to edit scenes for a playlist.
N Using the PLAY LIST button
1. With the unit in Stop mode/Playback mode, press the PLAY LIST
button.
HDD
JAN/02/2008 13:47
Delete
Copy
� PLAYLIST
Rename
Edit 4
Playlist
JAN/02/2008 13:47
New�
Playlist
6 Scenes
Select All
Edit
Title
001 JAN/02/2008 13:47
00:06:09
002 JAN/02/2008 13:51
00:03:33
003 JAN/02/2008 14:08
00:01:54
Sort
Length
Title List
a Check
HDD
JAN/02/2008 13:47
eExit
Edit Playlist
Scene No. 1/6
01 00:02:24
02
05 0:00:09
06
Modify
0:00:34
03
00:00:31
00:01:06
07
00:00:00
Move
04 0:01:22
Add
Delete
sPlay
eExit
Playing a Selected Scene
. Press the ▲▼◀▶ buttons to select the scene you want to play, then press the OK or PLAY (
The selected scene is played.
~ To stop scene play, press the STOP ( ) button.
) button.
Modifying a Scene (Replacing a Scene)
To setup, follow steps 1 to 3.
4-1. Press the ▲▼◀▶ buttons to select the scene you want to
Modify, then press the RED(A) button.
The Modify Scene screen is displayed.
. Press the OK button at the start point of the scene.
~ The image and starting point time is displayed on the Start
window.
~ Select the starting or ending point of the section you want to
modify using the playback related buttons (PLAY ( ),
SEARCH (
), SKIP (
)).
. Press the OK button at the end point of the scene.
~ The image and ending point time is displayed in the End window.
. Press the ◀▶ buttons to select Change, then press the OK
button.
~ The scene you want to modify is changed with the selected
section.
HDD
JAN/02/2008 13:47
Modify Scene
Scene No. 001
Title List : 1/3
Start
End
00:04:54
00:00:00
▶
00:05:27
Start
End
+ Play
# Pause
<Move
sSelect
Change
Return
( ) SCAN
[ ] SKIP
rReturn
eExit
HDD
JAN/02/2008 13:47
Modify Scene
Scene No. 001
Title List : 1/3
Start
End
00:04:54
00:06:25
#
Start
00:06:25
End
+ Play
# Pause
<Move
sSelect
Change
Return
( ) SCAN
[ ] SKIP
rReturn
eExit
English _85
editing
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select the title you want to edit from the
Playlist, then press the RED(A) button.
The Edit menu is displayed.
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select Edit Playlist, then press the OK or
▶ button.
The Edit Playlist screen is displayed.
Playlist
1/3
No.
editing
Moving a Scene (Changing the Position of a Scene)
To setup, follow steps 1 to 3 on page 85.
4-1. Press the ▲▼◀▶ buttons to select the scene you want to move
(change the position), then press the GREEN(B) button.
~ A yellow selection window is displayed on the scene to be
moved.
HDD
JAN/02/2008 13:47
. Press the ▲▼◀▶ buttons to select the position to which you
want to move the selected scene, then select the OK button.
M
` You cannot move the selected scene to the position of the next scene,
Edit Playlist
Scene No. 1/6
01 00:02:24
02
0:00:34
03
00:00:31
05 0:00:09
06
00:01:06
07
00:00:00
04 0:01:22
sSave
eExit
because the selected scene should be inserted before that position,
which requires no action.
` Depending on the kind of disc, the displayed screen may have a slight difference.
Adding a Scene
To setup, follow steps 1 to 3 on page 85.
4-1. Press the ▲▼◀▶ buttons to select the scene that will have a new
scene inserted before it, then press the YELLOW(C) button.
The Add Scene screen is displayed.
. Press the OK button at the starting point of the scene.
~ The image and starting point time is displayed on the Start
window.
~ Select the starting or ending point of the section you want to
modify using the playback related buttons (PLAY ( ),
SEARCH (
), SKIP (
)).
. Press the OK button at the end point of the scene.
~ The image and end point time are displayed in the End window.
~ To cancel, press the ◀▶ buttons to select Return, then press
the OK button.
. Press the ◀▶ buttons to select Add, then press the OK button.
~ The section you want to add is inserted prior to the scene
selected in step 4-1 of Adding a Scene.
HDD
JAN/02/2008 13:47
Add Scene
Scene No. 001
Title List : 1/3
Start
End
00:01:51
00:00:00
▶
00:01:51
Start
End
Add
+ Play
# Pause
<Move
sSelect
Return
( ) SCAN
[ ] SKIP
rReturn
eExit
HDD
JAN/02/2008 13:47
Add Scene
Scene No. 001
Title List : 1/3
Start
End
00:01:51
00:07:28
#
00:07:28
Start
End
Add
+ Play
# Pause
<Move
sSelect
Return
( ) SCAN
[ ] SKIP
rReturn
eExit
Deleting a Scene
To setup, follow steps 1 to 3 on page 85.
4-1. Press the ▲▼◀▶ buttons to select the scene you want to delete,
then press the BLUE(D) button.
~ The message “Do you want to delete the scene?” is displayed.
. Press the ◀▶ buttons to select Yes, then press the OK to delete
the selected scene.
HDD
JAN/02/2008 13:47
01 00:02:24
02 you want
0:00:34to delete
03 the
00:00:31
Do
scene?04 0:01:22
Yes
05 0:00:09
Modify
<Move
86_ editing
Edit Playlist
Scene No. 1/6
06
00:01:06
Move
sSelect
No
07
00:00:00
Add
rReturn
Delete
eExit
Deleting a Playlist Entry from the Playlist
N Using the PLAY LIST button
1. With the unit in Stop mode/Playback mode, press the PLAY LIST
button.
. Press the RED(A) button to select Edit.
Edit menu is displayed.
M
Title
Length
001 JAN/02/2008 13:47
00:06:09
002 JAN/02/2008 13:51
00:03:33
003 JAN/02/2008 14:08
00:01:54
� PLAYLIST
4 JAN/02/2008 13:47
� 6 Scenes
Edit
Sort
Title List
a Check
HDD
JAN/02/2008 13:51
Delete
Copy� PLAYLIST
JAN/02/2008 13:51
New4Playlist
� All
6 Scenes
Select
Unselect All
Edit
Sort
Title
00:06:09
002 JAN/02/2008 13:51
00:03:33
003 JAN/02/2008 14:08
00:01:54
Title List
a Check
Title
Yes
� 6 Scenes
Edit
Sort
Length
001 JAN/02/2008 13:47
00:06:09
002 JAN/02/2008 13:51
00:03:33
2 items003
areJAN/02/2008
selected 14:08
Do you want to delete?
4 JAN/02/2008 13:51
<Move
eExit
Playlist
2/3
No.
� PLAYLIST
Length
001 JAN/02/2008 13:47
HDD
JAN/02/2008 13:51
` If you select “Select All” in the Edit menu, all title will be checked.
eExit
Playlist
2/3
No.
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select Delete, then press the OK or ▶
button.
~ You will be prompted with the delete confirmation message “Do
you want to delete?”.
. Press the ◀▶ buttons to select Yes, then press the OK button.
You will be automatically returned to the Playlist screen after the
delete operation has finished.
Playlist
1/3
No.
00:01:54
No
Title List
sSelect
rReturn
eExit
Using the Sort (Playlist)
When you need to change the Sort order of Playlist, you can change it simply.
1. While the list menu is displayed, press the GREEN(B) button to
select Sort.
HDD
JAN/02/2008 13:47
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select the desired item, then press the
OK or ▶ button.
~ Date : In order of when the playlists were created
~ Name : In alphabetical order
M
Title
Length
001 JAN/02/2008 13:47
00:06:09
002 JAN/02/2008 13:51
00:03:33
003 JAN/02/2008 14:08
00:01:54
� PLAYLIST
4 JAN/02/2008 13:47
� 6 Scenes
Edit
` You can sort by Date, Name. Sorted list will be resorted in copied order
Playlist
1/3
No.
Date
Name
Sort
Title List
a Check
eExit
upon reentering Playlist.
English _87
editing
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select an entry you want to delete in the
Playlist, then press the MARKER button until a checkmark
appears. Repeat this step to select an additional title you want to
delete.
~ If you don’t want to delete a certain one of the checked entries,
simply select that entry and press the MARKER button to
deselect it until a checkmark disappears.
HDD
JAN/02/2008 13:47
editing
COPYING FROM HDD TO DVD OR VICE-VERSA
About the Copy Screen
1
HDD
Selected Items:
Copy
Available : 4099MB
Source : HDD
2
001 JAN/01/2008 1
4
; DVD
002 JAN/01/2008 1
3 MPEG2
003 JAN/01/2008 1
0 SP
� 47MB
Start Copy
Sort
5
3
To : DVD
Selection
a Check
6
eExit
7
1
Total size and number of selected titles for copying
2
Title to be copied
3
This shows available disc space
4
The location where the copied files are stored
5
Copy start button
6
Sort button (Date, Name, Length, Channel Info)
Selection button
7
- Select All : All entries in the current folder will be checked.
- Unselect All : All checked entries will be unchecked.
Contents Copy Specifications
Contents
Recorded Video Title
Copy Protected Title
Copy Once Title
HDD  DVD
Supported
Not supported
Move
(Deletes the Title in the HDD after copying)
DVD  HDD
Supported
Not supported
Not supported
The Copy is possible only with CPRM-Compatible disc.
Once “Copy Once programme” has been recorded on the DVD disc, this title cannot be copied to HDD
anymore.
But “Copy Once programme” has been recorded on the HDD, this title can be copied to DVD-RW(VR mode)
or DVD-RAM.
N Using the TITLE LIST button
1. Press the OPEN/CLOSE button and place a recordable disc on the
disc tray.
HDD
JAN/01/2008 17:30 PR1
. Press the OPEN/CLOSE button to close the disc tray. Wait until
LOAD disappears from the front panel display. Check that the disc
has enough available space for the recording.
. Select a desired mode by pressing the HDD or DVD button on the
remote control.
You can also select a desired mode by pressing the HDD/DVD
button on the front panel.
. With the unit in Stop mode/Playback mode, press the TITLE LIST
button.
. Press the COPY button. Copy screen is displayed.
~ During Playback, you can also copy the title by pressing the
COPY button.
Title List
1/3
No.
Title
001 JAN/01/2008 17:30 PR 01:00:00
002 JAN/02/2008 21:00 PR 01:00:00
003 JAN/03/2008 23:15 PR 00:30:00
3 MPEG2
4 JAN/01/2008 17:30
1 SP
V-Mode Compatibility
Edit
Sort
HDD
Selected Items:
Go to
Contents
a Check
eExit
Copy
Available : 4099MB
Source : HDD
To : DVD
001 JAN/01/2008 1
; DVD
002 JAN/01/2008 1
3 MPEG2
003 JAN/01/2008 1
0 SP
� 47MB
Start Copy
Sort
Selection
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select the title you want to copy, then
a Check
press the MARKER button until a checkmark appears.
Repeat this step to select an additional title you want to copy.
~ If you don’t want to copy a certain one of the checked entries, simply select that entry and press
MARKER button to deselect it until the checkmark disappears.
88_ editing
Length
eExit
. Press the RED(A) button to select Start Copy.
~ The title to be copied is not displayed on the screen, and copying
begins while the currently broadcasting programme is displayed
on the screen.
~ Press the INFO button to view the copy processing bar.
If you press INFO button again, copy processing bar will
disappear.
~ To cancel the copying in progress, press the RED(A) button.

21%
Cancel
b Bar Type
c Channel
. After a successful copy, “The title is successfully copied” message
is displayed.
editing
DVD-Video Copy
1. Press the OPEN/CLOSE button and place a DVD-Video disc on
the disc tray.
DVD ; HDD
! Copying
. Press the OPEN/CLOSE button to close the disc tray.
. During the playback, press the COPY button.
Copy will be started.
M
` The Copy function will be disabled in the following cases :
- If you try to copy in the section of a menu.
- NTSC disc or copy-protected disc
- Titles that are different in the broadcasting system.
- The audio title that is copied to the HDD will be recorded in the 2ch AC3 format.
- For the audio output in DTS mode, the audio source will not be copied.
Copying MP3, JPEG or DivX
Contents Copy Specifications
Contents
MP3
JPEG(photo)
DivX
CD-DA
~
~
~
~
~
HDD  DVD or USB
Supported
Supported
Supported
Not supported
DVD  HDD or USB
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
USB  HDD or DVD
Supported
Supported
Supported
Not supported
Disc(CD-R/ CD-DA/ CD-RW/ DVD-RAM/ DVD±R(Finalise)/ DVD+RW/ DVD-RW(Finalise)) ; HDD or USB
HDD ; DVD-R, DVD-RW(V) or USB
USB ; HDD or DVD-R, DVD-RW(V)
PTP USB is not available when you copy to USB.
If the disc is finalised through Disc Manager, it can be compatible with PC as a disc with a UDF file system.
File Copy
1. Insert a JPEG disc, MP3 disc or DivX disc into the disc tray.
. Press the OPEN/CLOSE button to close the disc tray. Wait until
LOAD disappears from the front panel display. Check that the disc
has enough available space for the recording.
CD
Selected Items: 5.85MB (1)
Source : DVD
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select Music, Photo or DivX, then press
the OK or ▶ button.
E HDD
Y ROOT
001 Song 10.mp3
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select Library, then press the OK or ▶
button.
� MP3
� 5.85MB
Copy
Available :
To :
E USB
002 Song 1.mp3
003 Song 2.mp3
004 Song 3.mp3
005 Song 4.mp3
Start Copy
Sort
Select All
a Check
Unselect All
eExit
. Press the COPY button. Copy screen is displayed.
English _89
editing
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select the MP3, Photo or DivX file you
want to copy, then press the MARKER button until a checkmark
appears.
~ If you don’t want to copy a certain one of the checked entries,
simply select that entry and press the MARKER button to
deselect it until the checkmark disappears.
. Press the ▶▲▼ buttons to select the target media,then press the
OK button.
~ You can create a new folder by pressing the GREEN(B) button.
. Press the RED(A) button to select Start Copy.
The message “Number of file : x” is displayed.
CD
Selected Items: 9.68MB (2)
Copy
Available : 236724MB
Source : DVD
To : HDD
 ROOT
Y ROOT
001 Song 10.mp3
� MP3
� 3.84MB
002 Song 1.mp3
003 Song 2.mp3
004 Song 3.mp3
005 Song 4.mp3
Start Copy
New Folder
eExit
CD
Selected Items: 9.68MB (2)
Copy
Available : 236724MB
Source : DVD
To : HDD
Y ROOT
 ROOT
001 Song
10.mp3of file : 2
Number
. Press the ◀▶ buttons to select Start, then press the OK button.
File copy begins.
~ To cancel the copying in progress, press the EXIT ( ) button.
� MP3
� 3.84MB
002 Song 1.mp3
003 Song 2.mp3
Start
004 Song 3.mp3
EXIT
005 Song 4.mp3
Start Copy
New Folder
Rename
CD
Selected Items: 9.68MB (2)
Source
: DVD
Copying...
Y :ROOT
Free space
236623 MB
001 Song
Number of file
: 1 /10.mp3
2
Song1.mp3
1.mp3
File Name :002
Song
� MP3
� 3.84MB
eExit
Copy
Available : 236724MB
To : HDD
 ROOT
003 Song 2.mp3
33%
004 Song 3.mp3
005 Song 4.mp3
Start Copy
New Folder
Rename
eExit
Folder Copy
1. Insert a Disc (JPEG, MP3 or DivX) into the tray.
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select Library, then press the OK or ▶
button.
CD
Selected Items: 76.8MB (2)
Source : DVD
. Press the COPY button. Copy screen is displayed.
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select the folder you want to copy, then
press MARKER button until a checkmark appears.
~ If you don’t want to copy a certain one of the checked folders,
simply select that entry and press MARKER button to deselect it
until the checkmark disappears.
. Press the ▶▲▼ buttons to select the target media,then press the
OK button.
~ You can create a new folder by pressing the GREEN(B) button.
. Press the RED(A) button to select Start Copy.
The message “Number of file : x” is displayed.
. Press the ◀▶ buttons to select Start, then press the OK button.
Folder copy begins.
Subfolders and files in the selected folder are copied.
~ To cancel the copying in progress, press the EXIT ( ) button.
E MP3 (1)
� MP3
� 40.2MB
E USB
E MP3 (2)
E MP3 (3)
Start Copy
Sort
Select All
a Check
CD
Selected Items: 76.8MB (2)
Source : DVD
Unselect All
eExit
Copy
Available : 236715MB
To : HDD
Y ROOT
 ROOT
E MP3 (1)
� MP3
� 36.6MB
E MP3 (2)
E MP3 (3)
Start Copy
New Folder
CD
Selected Items: 76.8MB (2)
Source : DVD
eExit
Copy
Available : 236715MB
To :
Y ROOT
 ROOT
Number of file : 24
E MP3 (1)
� MP3
� 36.6MB
Start Copy
90_ editing
E HDD
Y ROOT
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select Music, Photo or DivX then press
the OK or ▶ button.
MP3, JPEG or DivX folder is displayed.
Copy
Available : 236715MB
To :
E MP3 (2)
E MP3 (3)
Start
EXIT
New Folder
eExit
M
` Pressing the EXIT (
`
`
`
`
CD
Selected Items: 76.8MB (2)
Source
: DVD
Copying...
Copy
Available : 236715MB
To :
Y :ROOT
Free space
236615 MB
Number of E
file MP3
: 1 /(1)24
File Name :E
01.MP3
###(2)## 1.mp3
� MP3
� 36.6MB
Start Copy
 ROOT
E MP3 (3)
33%
New Folder
eExit
editing
`
) button during folder copying will cancel the
folder copying after the current file is copied.
You can copy up to 500 files or 500 sub folders to one folder.
[ MP3, JPEG, DivX ]
If you want to copy a file, you should create a new folder before starting
a copy.
You cannot copy to top-level(ROOT) folder directly without creating a
new folder.
If the top-level (ROOT) folder has had already 500 folders, you should
delete one or more items before you can create a new folder.
File size on a disc and the copied file in the HDD may be slightly different
due to the file system.
If you check some entries in the current folder and move to open a
different folder, those entries are automatically unchecked and excluded
from the selection list.
Changing the name of Music/Photo/DivX file
S
You can rename a Music, Photo or DivX file copied to HDD.
1. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select the entry you want to rename, then
press the RED(A) button.
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select Rename, then press the OK or
▶ button.
Rename Screen is displayed.
. Select the desired characters using the ▲▼◀▶ buttons, then
press the OK button.
~ Back Space (RED(A) button): Deletes and moves the cursor
backwards by one position.
~ Space (GREEN(B) button): Enters a blank and moves the cursor
one forward (to the right).
~ Clear (YELLOW(C) button): Deletes all the character inputs.
~ Save (BLUE(D) button): Registers the character inputs.
. Press the BLUE(D) button to select Save.
The changed file name is displayed on the selected entry.
HDD
Q Song 1.mp3
Music List
No.
Title
Size
Y ROOT
Copy
New Playlist
@ ▶ # )0 0:00:00
Go To(Playlist
9AllSong 1.mp3
Select
E ROOT
Delete
Rename
Edit
001 Song 1.mp3
002 Song 2.mp3
3.8 MB
003 Song 3.mp3
5.1 MB
004 Song 4.mp3
9.2 MB
005 Song 5.mp3
5.2 MB
006 Song 6.mp3
10.3 MB
Sort
Play Mode
[/] Previous/Next Page
3.8 MB
a Check
HDD
Contents
eExit
Rename
Dream
Back Space
mMove
Space
sSelect
Clear
rReturn
HDD
Q Dream.mp3
Save
eExit
Music List
1/9
No.
Title
Size
Y ROOT
@▶#
00:00:00
9 Dream.mp3
E ROOT
Edit
Sort
[/] Previous/Next Page
Q Dream.mp3
3.8 MB
002 Song 2.mp3
3.8 MB
003 Song 3.mp3
5.1 MB
004 Song 4.mp3
9.2 MB
005 Song 5.mp3
5.2 MB
006 Song 6.mp3
10.3 MB
Play Mode
a Check
Contents
eExit
English _91
editing
Disc Manager
Editing the Disc Name
XCVKL
Follow these instructions to give a name to a disc.
1. With the unit in Stop mode, press the MENU button.
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select Disc Manager, then press the OK
or ▶ button.
. Press the ◀▶ buttons to select Rename, then press the OK
button.
The Rename screen is displayed.
. Select the desired characters using the ▲▼◀▶ buttons, then
press the OK button.
. Press the BLUE(D) button to select Save.
A disc name is given to the disc.
M
DVD-RAM(VR)
Disc Manager
Disc Name
DVD-VR
Used Space
00:17
( 0.52 GB)
Available Space
01:54 SP
( 3.85 GB)
Disc Protection Info
Not Protected
Current Rec. Mode
VR-Mode
Rename
<Move
Protection
Delete All
sSelect
rReturn
DVD-RAM(VR)
Format
eExit
Rename
DISC–1
` You may need to clear Disc Protection beginning editing.
` Depending on the kind of disc, the displayed screen may be different.
Back Space
mMove
Space
Clear
sSelect
rReturn
Save
eExit
Disc Protection
XCV
Disc Protection allows you to protect your discs from being formatted or deleted due to unintended
operations.
1. With the unit in Stop mode, press the MENU button.
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select Disc Manager, then press the OK
or ▶ button.
. Press the ◀▶ buttons to select Protection, then press the OK
button.
. Press the ◀▶ buttons to select On, then press the OK button.
DVD-RAM(VR)
Disc Manager
Disc Name
DVD-VR
Used Space
00:17
( 0.52 GB)
Available Space
01:54 SP
( 3.85 GB)
Disc Protection Info
Not Protected
Current Rec. Mode
VR-Mode
Rename
<Move
Protection
Delete All
sSelect
rReturn
DVD-RAM(VR)
DVD-VR
Used Space
00:17
( 0.52 GB)
Available Space
01:54 SP
( 3.85 GB)
Disc Protection:
Not Protected
Current Rec. Mode
VR-Mode
On
Rename
<Move
92_ editing
eExit
Disc Manager
Disc Name
Disc Protection Info
Format
Protection
sSelect
Off
Delete All
rReturn
Format
eExit
Delete All Title Lists
XCVKL
1. With the unit in Stop mode, press the MENU button.
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select Disc Manager, then press the OK
or ▶ button.
Disc Manager
Disc Name
DVD-VR
Used Space
00:17
( 0.52 GB)
Available Space
01:54 SP
( 3.85 GB)
Disc Protection Info
Not Protected
Current Rec. Mode
VR-Mode
Rename
<Move
Protection
Delete All
sSelect
Format
rReturn
DVD-RAM(VR)
eExit
Disc Manager
Disc Name
DVD-VR
Used Space
00:17
( 0.52 GB)
Available Space
01:54 SP
( 3.85 GB)
delete
all title lists?
Disc Protection InfoDo you want to Not
Protected
Current Rec. Mode
VR-Mode
Yes
Rename
<Move
No
Protection
Delete All
sSelect
Format
rReturn
eExit
. Press the ◀▶ buttons to select Yes, then press the OK button.
All title lists are deleted.
Delete All Title Lists/DivX Lists /Music Lists/Photo Lists
S
1. With the unit in Stop mode, press the MENU button.
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select Disc Manager, then press the OK
or ▶ button.
. Press the ◀▶ buttons to select Delete, then press the OK button.
~ When Protected Entry exists: The Delete All Title List function will
not operate. If there is a title containing a still picture, however,
that function will not operate. If you want to delete a protected
entry, disable Protect for it on the Lock item.
. Press the ◀▶ buttons to select the Title, DivX, Music or Photo,
then press the OK button.
. Press the ◀▶ buttons to select Yes, then press the OK button.
All title lists, DivX lists, music lists or photo lists are deleted.
HDD
Disc Manager
Used Space
000:39
( 1.68 GB)
Available Space
065:19 XP
( 231.01 GB)
Delete
<Move
sSelect
Format
rReturn
HDD
eExit
Disc Manager
Used Space
000:39
( 1.68 GB)
Available Space
065:19 XP
( 231.01 GB)
Select contents to delete all
Title
DivX
Music
Photo
Delete
<Move
sSelect
rReturn
Format
eExit
<Title>
HDD
Disc Manager
Used Space
000:39
( 1.68 GB)
Available Space
065:19 XP
( 231.01 GB)
All playlists will also be deleted.
Do you want to continue?
Yes
No
Delete
<Move
sSelect
rReturn
Format
eExit
English _93
editing
. Press the ▲▼◀▶ buttons to select Delete All, then press the OK
button.
~ You will be prompted with the confirmation message “Do you
want to delete all title lists?”.
~ When Protected Entry exists: The Delete All Title List function will
not operate. If there is a title containing a still picture, however,
that function will not operate.
If you want to delete a protected entry, disable Protect for it on
the Lock item.
~ When protected a DVD-RAM/-RW is used, data cannot be
deleted from a disc.
~ If you select Yes, you will be prompted with the confirmation
message “All playlists will also be deleted. Do you want to
continue?”.
DVD-RAM(VR)
editing
Formatting a Disc
SXCK
Use these instructions to format a disc.
The disc protect should also be cleared.
1. With the unit in Stop mode, press the MENU button.
HDD
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select Disc Manager, then press the OK
or ▶ button.
Disc Manager
Used Space
000:39
( 1.68 GB)
Available Space
065:19 XP
( 231.01 GB)
. Press the ◀▶ buttons to select Format, then press the OK button.
HDD/ DVD-RAM/+RW
~ You will be prompted with the confirmation message
Delete
Format
“Current media:  Do you want to format?”.
<Move
sSelect
rReturn
eExit
~ If you select Yes, you will be prompted with the confirmation
message “All data will be deleted. Do you want to continue?”.
DVD-RW
~ You will be prompted with the confirmation message “Choose the recording format for DVD-RW.”
~ If you select the desired format type, you will be prompted with the confirmation message “All data will
be deleted. Do you want to continue?”.
. Press the ◀▶ buttons to select Yes, then press the OK button. The disc is formatted.
DVD-VR and DVD-V are defined according to their recording format.
DISC
DVD-VR
DVD-V
DVD-RAM/-RW
DVD-RW/DVD-R
~ With DVD+RW discs, there is no difference between DVD-Video format (Video mode) and DVD-Video
Recording format (VR mode).
Finalising a Disc
CVL
After you record titles onto a DVD-RW/±R disc with your HDD & DVD RECORDER, it needs to be finalised
before it can be played back on external devices.
1. With the unit in Stop mode, press the MENU button.
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select Disc Manager, then press the OK
or ▶ button.
. Press the ▲▼◀▶ buttons to select Finalise, then press the OK
button.
You will be prompted with the message “Do you want to finalise
disc?”.
DVD-RW(VR)
Disc Manager
Disc Name
DVD-VR
Used Space
00:17
( 0.52 GB)
Available Space
01:54 SP
( 3.85 GB)
Disc Protection Info
Not Protected
Current Rec. Mode
VR-Mode
Rename
Protection
mMove
Delete All
sSelect
Finalise
rReturn
. Press the ◀▶ buttons to select Yes, then press the OK button.
You will be prompted again with the message “Disc will be finalised. Do you want to continue?”.
. Press the ◀▶ buttons to select Yes, then press the OK button.
The disc is finalised.
94_ editing
Format
eExit
M
` Once a disc is finalised, you cannot delete entries from the record list.
` After being finalised, the DVD±R/-RW(video mode) operates in the same manner as a DVD-Video.
` Depending on the disc type, the displayed screen may be different.
` Finalising time may be different depending on the amount of data recorded on the disc.
` Data on the disc will be damaged if the recorder is powered off during finalisation process.
` You can finalise the disc automatically using EZ Record. (See page 44)
editing
Unfinalising a Disc (V/VR mode)
C
1. With the unit in Stop mode, press the MENU button.
. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select Disc Manager, then press the OK
or ▶ button.
. Press the ◀▶ buttons to select Unfinalise, then press the OK
button.
You will be prompted with the message “Do you want to unfinalise
disc?”.
. Press the ◀▶ buttons to select Yes, then press the OK button.
You will be prompted again with the message “Disc will be
unfinalised. Do you want to continue?”.
DVD-RW(VR:F)
Disc Manager
Disc Name
DVD-VR
Current Rec. Mode
VR-Mode
Unfinalise
<Move
sSelect
rReturn
Format
eExit
. Press the ◀▶ buttons to select Yes, then press the OK button.
The disc is unfinalised.
M
` A DVD-RW can be finalised or unfinalised in Video mode.
Finalise
Unfinalise
Mark
DVD-Video(RW)
DVD-RW(V)
Operation
Same as DVD-Video
Additional recording, protection and
deletion are possible.
` A DVD-RW can be finalised or unfinalised in VR mode.
Mark
Operation
Finalise
Unfinalise
DVD-RW(VR:F)
DVD-RW(VR)
Additional recording, deletion, editing, and Additional recording, deletion, editing, and
protection are impossible.
protection are possible.
English _95
reference
Troubleshooting
If your product malfunctions, go through the checkpoints below before contacting a Samsung authorised service
centre.
PROBLEM
EXPLANATION/SOLUTION
The input is displayed for a while when
the power is turned on.
The HDD & DVD RECORDER requires some time to initialize and the input will be
displayed for approx. 10 seconds after it is turned on.
Cannot record TV programmes.
• Check whether the power cord is securely plugged into the power outlet.
• Did you set the HDD & DVD RECORDER channel settings correctly?
• Check the free space on your HDD/DVD-RAM/±RW/±R discs.
I pressed the REC button but there is no
response.
Check available disc type. (See page 64)
If a programme is copy protected, it cannot be recorded.
Cannot play the disc.
• Check whether the disc is inserted correctly with the label facing up.
• Check the regional code of the DVD disc.
• This HDD & DVD RECORDER cannot play some types of discs.
(See pages 8, 45)
icon appears on the screen.
You cannot use this operation or function due to one of the following reasons:
(1) Your DVD disc restricts it.
(2) Your DVD disc does not support this feature (for example: angles)
(3) The feature is not available at the moment.
(4) You’ve requested a title, chapter, or scan time that is out of range.
Play mode settings are different from the
settings configured in the Settings menu.
The disc does not support all selected functions. In this case, some settings
configured in the settings menu may not work properly.
Cannot change the aspect ratio.
The aspect ratio is fixed for DVD discs. (See page 39)
The angle operation does not work while
playing a DVD disc.
The angle operation is available only when the disc contains images
captured from different angles.
The selected audio and/or subtitle
language is not played.
Audio and subtitle languages are disc-specific. Only the sound and subtitle
languages contained on the DVD disc are available and displayed in the disc
menu.
Cannot copy title or file to the other mode.
• DVD discs encoded with copy protection can not be copied to HDD.
• Refer to “Contents Copy Specifications” on page 6 to check if copying is
supported.
Refer to “V-Mode Compatibility” on page 44 to check if copying is support.
The disc revolves, but no image or bad
quality images is displayed
• Be sure that the Video Setting is properly set. (See pages 39~41)
• Check whether there is damage to or any foreign material on your disc.
• Some low quality discs may not play properly.
• If scenes change from dark to bright suddenly, the screen may shake vertically
temporarily, but this is not a fault.
No sound.
• Are you watching a programme in slow or skip mode?
If you are playing a programme at a speed other than normal speed, sound
will not be heard. (Except for forward search (X 2) in disc.)
• Check the connections and settings. (See pages 25~26, 38~39)
• Check whether the disc is damaged. Clean the disc, if necessary.
• Check whether the disc is inserted correctly with the label facing up.
96_ reference
EXPLANATION/SOLUTION
No audio output.
Check whether you have selected the correct digital output options in the Audio
Output Options menu. (See pages 38~39)
Timer lamp flickers
• Check there is enough space in the disc or HDD for recording.
• Check whether the current disc is recordable or not.
Make sure to check before the start time of recording.
Timer recording does not work properly.
• Re-check the recording time and the end time settings again.
• Recording will be cancelled if the power is interrupted due to a power failure
or another similar reason while recording.
Cannot copy into USB or vice-versa
• Check the USB connection.Disconnect and try to connect again.
• Refer to “Compatible USB devices at host port”on page 8.
No HDMI output
• Check the Video output is HDMI enabled.
• Check the connection between the TV and the HDMI jack of the HDD & DVD
RECORDER.
• See if your TV supports HDMI.
Abnormal HDMI output screen.
If snow noise appears on the screen, it means that TV does not support HDCP
(High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection).
HDMI output Jitter.
• Check your TV system setup correctly.
• Please refer to the user’s manual of your TV.
The remote control doesn’t work.
• Point the remote control at the remote control sensor on your HDD & DVD
RECORDER. Allow for proper distance. Remove obstacles between your HDD
& DVD RECORDER and the remote control.
• Check whether the batteries are drained.
• Check whether TV control button is selected or not.
I forgot my password for parental
supervision
Press and hold the PLAY/PAUSE (p) buttons on the front panel for more than
10 seconds with no disc in the unit.
All settings including the password will revert to the factory settings. Do not use
this unless absolutely necessary.
Is it possible to change a subtitle and an
audio signal on a recorded disc?
A recorded disc is played with only the subtitle and the audio signal which were
selected during recording
Other problems
• Read the table of contents and then find and read the section describing your
problem, follow the instructions given.
• Plug your HDD & DVD RECORDER off and on.
• If the problem still persists, contact a nearby Samsung service centre.
English _97
reference
PROBLEM
appendix
Specifications
110-240V AC, 50/60Hz
Input
Power consumption
30 Watts / 2.2 Watts (Power off )
Weight
3.8 Kg
Dimensions
430 mm(W) x 300 mm(D) x 55 mm(H)
Operating temp.
+5 °C to +35 °C
Other conditions
Keep level when operating. Less than 75% operating humidity
Video
Composite Video : 1.0 V p-p at 75Ω load, sync negative
Audio
Max.Audio Input Level : 2 Vrms
DV Input
IEEE 1394(4p) compatible jack
Receivable Channels
PAL, SECAM-B/G, D/K, I
Audio
Analogue output jacks x 1
Optical/Coaxial digital audio output
Composite Video : Video output jack x 1
Output
Video
Component output x 1 (Y : 1,0Vp-p, Pb : 0,70Vp-p, Pr : 0,70Vp-p at 75Ω
load)
HDMI/DVI (576p, 720p,1080i, 1080p)
Recording
HDD Capacity
USB
Picture Compression format
MPEG-II
Audio Compression format
Dolby Digital 2ch/256Kbps, MPEG-II
Recording Quality
XP (about 8,5 Mbps), SP (about 4,5 Mbps), LP (about 2,5 Mbps),
EP (about 1,6 Mbps or about 1,2 Mbps)
Audio Frequency Response
20 Hz~20 kHz
DVD-HR773
160 GB
DVD-HR775
250 GB
DVD-HR777
320 GB
USB 2.0 H/S
Host x 1
Audio Output
For DVD discs, audio signals recorded at 96 kHz sampling frequency are converted into and output at 48 kHz.
Disc Type
DVD
AUDIO CD (CD-DA)
Analogue Audio Output
48 / 96 kHz
44,1 kHz
Digital Audio Output
48 kHz
44,1 kHz
98_ appendix
Contact SAMSUNG WORLD WIDE
If you have any questions or comments relating to Samsung products, please contact the SAMSUNG customer care center.
Region
North America
Latin America
Country
CANADA
MEXICO
U.S.A
ARGENTINE
BRAZIL
CHILE
NICARAGUA
HONDURAS
COSTA RICA
ECUADOR
EL SALVADOR
GUATEMALA
JAMAICA
PANAMA
PUERTO RICO
REP. DOMINICA
TRINIDAD & TOBAGO
VENEZUELA
COLOMBIA
BELGIUM
CZECH REPUBLIC
DENMARK
FINLAND
FRANCE
Europe
CIS
Asia Pacific
Middle East &
Africa
Customer Care Center 
1-800-SAMSUNG(726-7864)
01-800-SAMSUNG(726-7864)
1-800-SAMSUNG(726-7864)
0800-333-3733
0800-124-421 , 4004-0000
800-SAMSUNG(726-7864)
00-1800-5077267
800-7919267
0-800-507-7267
1-800-10-7267
800-6225
1-800-299-0013
1-800-234-7267
800-7267
1-800-682-3180
1-800-751-2676
1-800-SAMSUNG(726-7864)
0-800-100-5303
01-8000112112
0032 (0)2 201 24 18
844 000 844
Distributor pro Českou republiku:
Samsung Zrt., česka organizační složka
Vyskočilova 4, 14000 Praha 4
70 70 19 70
030-6227 515
3260 SAMSUNG ( 0,15/Min),
08 25 08 65 65 ( 0,15/Min)
Web Site
www.samsung.com/ca
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com/ar
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com/cl
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com.co
www.samsung.com/be
www.samsung.com/cz
www.samsung.com/dk
www.samsung.com/fi
www.samsung.com
GERMANY
HUNGARY
ITALIA
LUXEMBURG
NETHERLANDS
NORWAY
POLAND
PORTUGAL
SLOVAKIA
SPAIN
SWEDEN
U.K
EIRE
AUSTRIA
SWITZERLAND
RUSSIA
KAZAHSTAN
UZBEKISTAN
KYRGYZSTAN
TADJIKISTAN
UKRAINE
LITHUANIA
LATVIA
ESTONIA
AUSTRALIA
NEW ZEALAND
CHINA
HONG KONG
INDIA
INDONESIA
JAPAN
MALAYSIA
PHILIPPINES
SINGAPORE
THAILAND
TAIWAN
VIETNAM
TURKEY
01805 - SAMSUNG(726-7864) (
06-80-SAMSUNG(726-7864)
800-SAMSUNG(726-7864)
0035 (0)2 261 03 710
SOUTH AFRICA
0860-SAMSUNG(726-7864 )
www.samsung.com
U.A.E
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864), 8000-4726
www.samsung.com
0,14/Min)
0900-SAMSUNG(726-7864) ( 0,10/Min)
815-56 480
0 801 801 881 , 022-607-93-33
80820-SAMSUNG(726-7864)
0800-SAMSUNG(726-7864)
902 10 11 30
0771-400 200
0845 SAMSUNG (7267864)
0818 717 100
0800-SAMSUNG(726-7864)
0800-SAMSUNG(726-7864)
8-800-555-55-55
8-10-800-500-55-500
8-10-800-500-55-500
00-800-500-55-500
8-10-800-500-55-500
8-800-502-0000
8-800-77777
800-7267
800-7267
1300 362 603
0800SAMSUNG(726-7864)
800-810-5858 , 010-6475 1880
3698-4698
3030 8282 , 1800 110011
0800-112-8888
0120-327-527
1800-88-9999
1800-10-SAMSUNG(726-7864)
1800-SAMSUNG(726-7864)
1800-29-3232 , 02-689-3232
0800-329-999
1 800 588 889
444 77 11
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com/be
www.samsung.com/nl
www.samsung.com/no
www.samsung.com/pl
www.samsung.com/pt
www.samsung.com/sk
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com/se
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com/ie
www.samsung.com/at
www.samsung.com/ch
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.kz
www.samsung.uz
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.lt
www.samsung.com/lv
www.samsung.ee
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com/nz
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com/hk
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com/jp
www.samsung.com/my
www.samsung.com/ph
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com/tw
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
AK68-01559D
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising